1696ms22a TH Eng Ed03

Technical Handbook
Alcatel
1696MSPAN
32 + 32 Channels DWDM System
& Compact shelf
1696MSPAN REL.2.2A
8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03
8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
1696MSPAN REL.2.2A TECHNICAL HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
20
23
24
24
24
24
24
2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1 First aid for electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
25
27
27
28
29
30
32
32
33
34
3 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
35
36
36
37
38
38
03
061018
ECR 38860
02
060309
ECR 31576
01
051214
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
S.LOVISA
S.BECCIA A.MICHAUD
S.LOVISA
S.BECCIA A.MICHAUD
S.LOVISA
S.BECCIA A.MICHAUD
C. GIANNI
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
C. GIANNI
C. GIANNI
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
Technical Handbook
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
1 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
49
5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Handbook Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N) . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Use of the CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 CDROM identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4 CDROM updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
55
55
55
56
56
56
57
57
58
58
58
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Equipment basic configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2 Booster + Preamplifier Line terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or backtoback terminal (hub) . . . . . . . . .
1.1.4 OADM or backtoback terminal (hub) repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.5 In line repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Network architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1 Pointtopoint links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2 Ring networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3 Ring interconnection (with or without protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4 CPE configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.5 Interworking with other Alcatel NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.6 Host systems (ADM..) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Protection scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 OSNCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 Optical Transmission Section Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
64
64
67
68
70
71
71
72
72
72
73
74
75
76
77
77
78
2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Rack design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 1696MS Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Equipment connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 Optical connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 User interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 Tributaries front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
80
81
81
83
85
102
103
104
106
108
125
126
128
128
128
129
130
140
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
2 / 554

4 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5.4 Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
150
160
3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

3.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
3.1.1 Transponder subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) subsystem . . . . . . . . . 174
3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.1.7 Controller subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.1.8 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
3.1.9 Protection subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3.1.10 Performance Monitoring subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
3.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.2.1 Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
4 UNITS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card Enhanced (OCC10_E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.6 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card for CWDM (OCC10_XFP_CWDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.7 Wavelength adapter 2 (WLA2M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8 Wavelength adapter 3 (WLA3CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.9 Wavelength adapter 2 with OSNCP (WLA2M_OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.10 Wavelength adapter 3 with OSNCP (WLA3CDOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.12 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.13 XFP optical modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.14 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Multiplexers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1 DWDM mux/demux : OMDX units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2 CWDM mux/demux: CMDX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.3 DWDM OADM units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.4 SPV_F_1310_1550 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.5 SPV_F_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 Way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 Optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 ESC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
269
269
269
282
296
301
312
315
316
327
330
338
341
346
348
350
352
352
356
357
361
362
364
364
368
371
371
372
372
373
377
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
3 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1 Main system characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2 Electrical Safety compliance with standardized Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3 Optical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 DWDM Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3 CWDM Multiplexer units (CMDX) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.4 DWDM Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.5 Mux/Demux 13101550 + supervision unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.6 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.7 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.8 SPVM + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.9 OSMC optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.10 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.11 OMSP optical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Alarm characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Equipment domain alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Optical transmission domain alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ETSI compliancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ANSI compliancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.5 Acoustical noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.6 Environmental constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
399
399
405
405
405
406
414
414
444
448
449
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
462
476
485
485
486
487
488
489
489
489
489
490
490
491
6 HARDWARE SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
499
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
4 / 554

4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (ILINK_M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (ILINK_S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
4.5 General user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.5.1 LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4.6 Switching Protection (OPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.6.1 Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
4.6.2 Optical Multiplex Section Protection: OMSP unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
4.10 FANS unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

6.1 Part Number and Change Status identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2 General safety rules and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Microswitches ON position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 OMDX, OADM and SPV_F hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5 ESC hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1 ESC Presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6 SPVM2 and SPVM_H hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 LANC (LAN access card) hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 MCC3 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 OCC10 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 OCC10_E hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500
502
503
504
507
507
508
511
513
514
515
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
517
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Maintenance introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 General safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4 Instruments And Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5 Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
519
519
519
519
520
520
521
521
523
523
524
525
527
527
527
527
527
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
529
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

8.1 WEEE general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
8.2 How to disassembly equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
8.2.1 Tools necessary for disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
8.2.2 Subrack disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
8.2.3 Unit disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
8.2.4 Hazardous materials and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
8.3 Eco declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
5 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIGURES
Figure 1. Subrack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. Item identification labels item on catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. CE label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. WEEE label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3 transponders . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with a WLA transponder (2 ch) . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two 4xANY_P transponders . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration . .
Figure 20. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration .
Figure 21. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. The 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. OADM or backtoback terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3
transponders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. OADM or backtoback configuration block diagram with WLA as regenerator for
2 chs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side)
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side)
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28. Pointtopoint link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 29. Ring configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 30. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by OSC . . .
Figure 31. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32. CPE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 33. Bicycle wheel configuration: NE on a ring adressing 10 supervised CPE links . . . . . .
Figure 34. CPE link based on CWDM technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35. Connection to host equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with backtoback terminals or OADM . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 37. Optical SNCP way of working . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 38. OTSP protection scheme in a pointtopoint network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 39. Rack organization, 32 channel bidirectional terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 40. Shelf dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 41. Typical fully equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 42. Example of Master shelf front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43. Shelf front view with cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44. 1696MS_C Rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 45. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
46
47
47
48
48
64
64
65
65
66
67
67
68
68
69
69
70
70
71
72
72
73
73
74
74
75
76
77
77
78
80
82
84
102
102
103
103
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
6 / 554

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 46. 1696 MS_C Mechanical structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 47. 1696 MS_C Main shelf board arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 48. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 49. Fan_C board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 50. Simple MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 51. Double MU optical connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 52. MCC1 and MCC2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 53. MCC3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 54. OCC10 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 55. OCC10_E front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 56. CWLA2M and CWLA3CD front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 57. CWLA2M_OP and CWLA3CDOP front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 58. 4xANY front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 59. MVAC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 60. SFP optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 61. XFP optical module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 62. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 63. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 64. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 65. OADM4100_M_chxxyy_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 66. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 67. OADM1100_M_xx_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 68. SPV_F_1310_1550 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 69. SPV_F_C front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 70. CMDX2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 71. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 72. ESC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 73. SPVM2 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 74. SPVM_H front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 75. OSMC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 76. ILink_M front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 77. ILink_S front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 78. LAN boards front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 79. Housekeeping front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 80. RAI front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 81. UIC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 82. OPC front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 83. OMSP front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 84. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 85. PMU front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 86. FANs front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 87. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 88. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 89. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 90. Line terminal transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 91. Backtoback terminal or OADM transponder function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 92. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 93. 4 and 8 channels DWDM optical MUXes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 94. 8 channels CWDM optical MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 95. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 96. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 97. 8 channels CWDM optical DMUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 98. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 99. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
104
105
107
124
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
166
167
168
169
169
174
175
175
176
176
176
177
178
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
7 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
178
179
179
180
180
181
181
182
185
188
189
190
192
193
194
195
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
206
209
209
210
210
211
211
212
212
213
213
214
214
215
215
216
216
217
217
218
219
220
221
221
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
8 / 554

Figure 100. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 101. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 102. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 103. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels backtoback terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 104. 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration and with a remote channel . . . .
Figure 105. OFA subsystem in line terminal or OADM configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 106. OFA subsystem in repeater configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 107. OSC management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and InLineRepeater
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 108. Automatic Power Equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 109. Controller subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 110. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 111. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 112. 1696MSPAN equipment power supply scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 113. Channel level protection in a ring network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 114. OSNCP principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 115. Optical SNCP with MCC units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 116. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC4xANY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 117. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 118. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection) . . . .
Figure 119. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection . . .
Figure 120. OSNCP with WLA units (WLA2M_OP/WLA3CDOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 121. Example of a 1696 MS network with path protection using WLA3CDOP cards . . . . . .
Figure 122. OTS protection with OMSP unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 123. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 124. Example of starting configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 125. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram with CMDX2 or OADM4
board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 126. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 127. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration with WLA boards . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 128. 4 DWDM channels terminal configuration with 4XANY drawers protection . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 129. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 130. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal configuration with expansion and
supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 131. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with WLA boards . . . . . . . . .
Figure 132. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with 4xANY_P . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 133. Example of 8 channels line terminal w/o expansion block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 134. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 135. 8 CWDM channels terminal with two 10Gbps chs and six 2.67Gbps chs block
diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 136. 8 channels terminal: two OCC10_XFP_CWDMs and three WLAs connected to
CMDX2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 137. 16 DWDM channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability block diagram . .
Figure 138. 16 DWDM channels terminal (with MCC/OCC10) with expansion and SPV
upgradability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 139. Example of mixed 15channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 140. 16 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (15channel) terminal with WLA boards . . . . .
Figure 141. Example of mixed 22channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 142. 24 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (22channel) terminal with WLA boards . . . . .
Figure 143. 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC block diagram (example) . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 144. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 145. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 1 stage OAC configuration with WLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 146. 4 channels OADM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 147. 4 channels backtoback terminal / OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 148. 8channel OADM w/ protection block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure 149. 8 OADM protected channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 150. 8channel OADM w/o protection block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 151. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 152. 8channel OADM w/o protection block diagram/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 153. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 154. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ protection block diagram . . . . . . .
Figure 155. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/o protection block diagram . . . . . .
Figure 156. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 157. 8 channels OADM with protection, 4xANY drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 158. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 159. 12 protected channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration .
Figure 160. 16 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion configuration . . . . . . . .
Figure 161. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 162. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection . . .
Figure 163. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection . . . .
Figure 164. 16 channels OADM or mix C/DWDM (15channel) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 165. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection . . .
Figure 166. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection . . . .
Figure 167. 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ or w/o protection . . . . . . . .
Figure 168. 32 protected channels backtoback w/ supervision and protection and one OAC
per side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 169. Repeater with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 170. 8 channels terminal configuration with MVAC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 171. 4 channels terminal configuration with 4xANY_P (first channels of an 8channel band)
Figure 172. 16 channels terminal with MVAC boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 173. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM inside OFA interstage . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 174. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM between 2 double stages OFAs . . . . . .
Figure 175. 4 x ANY node configuration without drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 176. 4 x ANY node configuration with drawers protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 177. 4channel terminal w/o SPV configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 178. 8channel terminal with SPV and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 179. 8 D/CWDM channels terminal with WLAs (w/ or w/o protection) with SPV and OAC .
Figure 180. 12channel terminal without SPV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 181. 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLAs with SPV and
OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 182. OADM 4 channels protected backtoback with supervision and OAC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 183. Remote 4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 184. Two remote 4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 185. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 186. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 187. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 188. Backtoback 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and bypass the
others. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 189. Remote unprotected MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 190. OADM 1 channel protected backtoback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 191. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 192. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 193. 2 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 194. 4 channels Line Terminal CWDM or DWDM with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 195. Remote CPE, 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection . . . . . . . . .
Figure 196. SPV Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
222
222
223
223
224
224
225
226
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
..
239
240
241
242
243
243
245
245
246
247
248
249
250
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
257
258
258
259
260
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
9 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
10 / 554

Figure 197. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite signal . . . . . . . . 261
Figure 198. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite and colored signal
and protected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
and unprotected in the ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Figure 200. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated. . . . . . . . 264
Figure 201. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC
insertion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Figure 202. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Figure 203. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figure 204. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Figure 205. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Figure 206. MCC in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Figure 207. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Figure 208. Drop / Insert with OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Figure 209. PassThrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Figure 210. Local LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Figure 211. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 212. User LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Figure 213. User LoopBack & passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Figure 214. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Figure 215. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Figure 216. MCC2 in default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Figure 217. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Figure 219. Passthrough (regeneration configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Figure 220. Local LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Figure 222. User LoopBack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Figure 223. User LoopBack & passthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Figure 225. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Figure 226. OCC10 unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Figure 227. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 228. Dropinsert (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Figure 230. Passthrough (NNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 231. Regeneration (two passthrough linked by 10G backpanel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Figure 232. Remote LoopBack passthrough (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) 308
Figure 233. Dropinsert remote loopback (UNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . 309
Figure 234. Remote loopback (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Figure 235. Local LoopBack (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 236. User LoopBack (UNI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Figure 237. OCC10_E unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Figure 238. WLA2M unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Figure 239. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 240. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Figure 241. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Figure 242. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback . . . . . . 320
Figure 243. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 244. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Figure 245. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . 322
Figure 246. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback . 322
Figure 247. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 248. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . .
Figure 249. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 250. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 251. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . .
Figure 252. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback .
Figure 253. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 254. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 255. WLA3CD unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 256. WLA2M_OP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 257. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop (OSNCP configutration) . . . . . . .
Figure 258. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 259. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 260. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback . . . . . .
Figure 261. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 262. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 263. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 264. WLA3CDOP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 265. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 266. SFP modules general block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 267. XFP modules general block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 268. MVAC unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 269. Example of MVAC location in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 270. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 271. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 272. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram . . . . . . .
Figure 273. CMDX2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 274. OADM8: blockdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 275. OADM4: blockdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 276. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 277. OADM1100: block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 278. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 279. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 280. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 281. Amplifier boards blockdiagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 282. Optical amplifiers configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 283. Span variation compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 284. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant) . . . . .
Figure 285. SPVM2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 286. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 287. SPVM board in an OADM or BackToBack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 288. OMSC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 289. OSMC connection (measured points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 290. ILink_M block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 291. ILink_S block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 292. Electrical access, slot description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 293. Block diagram of control LAN board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 294. LAN board settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 295. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 296. 2 Mbit/s backpanel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 297. OPC block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 298. OMSP Application with and without OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
323
324
324
325
325
326
326
327
330
333
334
334
335
335
336
336
338
343
347
349
350
351
352
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
367
368
368
370
374
375
376
377
377
379
380
381
382
383
386
387
389
391
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
11 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TABLES
Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control . .
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. Handbook configuration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
20
20
21
22
24
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
12 / 554

Figure 299. OMSP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Figure 300. PSC2 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Figure 301. PMU cabling scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Figure 302. PMU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Figure 303. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version . . . . . . . . 396
Figure 304. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version . . . . . . . 396
Figure 305. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Figure 306. Block diagram of the new FAN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 307. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Figure 308. ALS mechanism on WDM line in pointtopoint configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Figure 309. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in passthrough or in add/drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Figure 310. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring . . . . . . . 411
Figure 311. ALS procedure in a pointtopoint amplified transmission without OADM repeater . . 412
Figure 312. ALS mechanism with cascaded preamplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 313. ALS mechanism with single preamplifier and booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Figure 314. Restart algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Figure 315. OAC block diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Figure 316. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . 494
Figure 317. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . 497
Figure 318. Microswitch front view and meaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Figure 319. ESC hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Figure 320. LAN_Q and LAN_I hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Figure 321. MCC3 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Figure 322. OCC10 hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Figure 323. OCC10_E hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Figure 324. FAN_C: nodast filter extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Figure 325. position of the alarms in a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Figure 326. position of the alarms in an OADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Figure 327. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Figure 328. Subrack front and rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Figure 329. Handle removing and disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Figure 330. Rear cover removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Figure 331. Back Panel removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Figure 332. Upper and lower guides plane removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Figure 333. Side wall removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Figure 334. Optical fiber duct, guides and contact spring removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Figure 335. Side coverplate removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Figure 336. Levers removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Figure 337. Optical connectors support removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Figure 338. Side coverplate and contact spring removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Figure 339. Internal connectors removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Figure 340. Dissipator removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Figure 341. Modules removal from dissipator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Figure 342. Daughter boad removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Figure 343. Gold connector removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Figure 344. Internal cables removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Figure 345. Connector metal support removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Table 6. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 7. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12. Example of Client signals supported bit rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 13. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in CBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 14. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 15. MCC protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 16. OCC10 protection: switching criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 17. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 18. WLA2M_OP and WLA3CDOP protection: switch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 19. OTS protection: switch criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 20. Default thresholds for QoS alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 21. Configuration criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 22. MCC1 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 23. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 28. MCC2 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 34. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 35. OCC10 Shut down mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 36. OCC10 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 37. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 38. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 39. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback configuration
Table 40. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 41. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in A/D and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 42. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Table 43. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Table 44. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback . . . .
Table 45. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 46. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 47. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback . . . .
Table 48. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration . . . . . . . .
Table 49. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 50. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop . . .
Table 51. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Local
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 52. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
33
38
86
98
109
121
170
171
173
194
196
198
199
201
203
206
271
273
274
275
276
276
285
287
288
289
290
290
295
303
304
311
319
319
320
320
321
321
322
322
323
323
324
324
325
325
326
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
13 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
14 / 554

Table 53. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration . . 326
Table 54. Alarms and action usage for OSNCP with auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Table 55. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop (OSNCP configuration) . . . . . 333
Table 56. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback configuration 334
Table 57. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Table 58. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in A/D and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration
335
Table 59. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration 335
Table 60. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 61. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote
loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Table 62. Allowed drawers association . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Table 63. Summary of the way of working. Drop insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Table 64. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers . . . . . 365
Table 65. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Table 66. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF . . . . . . 371
Table 67. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Table 68. PDU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Table 69. TRU Front Panel LED Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Table 70. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Table 71. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Table 72. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in CBand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Table 73. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Table 74. Generic alarms common to all boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Table 75. ESCEC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Table 76. ESCSC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 77. PSC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 78. HK board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Table 79. RAI board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 80. LAN board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 81. ILINKM board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 82. ILINKS board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Table 83. UIC board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 84. FAN board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 85. FAN_C board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Table 86. OPC board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Table 87. OMSP board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Table 88. OAC board specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Table 89. SPVM specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table 90. SPV_F_C specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Table 91. SPV_F_1310_1550 board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Table 92. MCC specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Table 93. SFP specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Table 94. WLA2 specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 95. WLA3CD specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Table 96. OCC10, OCC10_LAN and OCC10_E specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Table 97. 4xANY main board specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Table 98. 4xANY drawer specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Table 99. OMDX/OADM specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Table 100. CMDX2 specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Table 101. OSMC specific alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Table 102. MVAC specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 103. SPVM board transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 104. OMSP boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 105. OAC boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 106. OMDX boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 107. MCC boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 108. SFP specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 109. WLA2 boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 110. WLA3CD boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 111. OCC10 boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 112. OADM boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 113. 4xANY boards transmission alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 114. SDH_DRAWER, HF_DRAWER and LF_DRAWER drawers transmission alarms . . . . .
Table 115. OPC transmission alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 116. Main climatic conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 119. Example of ANV Part Number + ICS evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 120. OMDX, OADM and SPV_F presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 121. SPVM2 and SPVM_H presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 122. Presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 123. MCC3 presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 124. OCC10 presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 125. OCC10_E presetting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 126. List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
475
476
477
477
477
478
479
480
480
481
482
483
484
484
493
495
498
500
506
510
512
513
514
515
550
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
15 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
16 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HANDBOOK GUIDE
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
17 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
18 / 554

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.1 General information
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
1.2 Handbook applicability

This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV P/N
1696MSPAN
3AL 86601 AAAA
PRODUCT
RELEASE
VERSION (N.B.)
ANV P/N
1696MSPAN
2.2
3AL 87001 AAAA
See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS in para.5.4.1

on page 56.
N.B.
ED
PRODUCT
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
19 / 554
The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated on the manuals front page consists of the following handbooks:
Table 1. Handbooks related to the products hardware
REF
HANDBOOK
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
Technical Handbook
[1]
ANV Part No.
THIS
HDBK
8DG 17415 AAAA
Provides information regarding Equipment description, Maintenance, Hardware

setting documentation.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
Installation Handbook
[2]
8DG 17415 CAAA
Provides stepped procedural instructions for unpacking, inspecting, Alcatel Part

Number assembling, and mounting and wiring bays, subframes, I/O panels,
ancillary items, and cabling.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
TurnOn & Commissioning Handbook
[3]
8DG 17415 DAAA
Provides procedures to support visual inspection, module installation, Alcatel Part

Number and provisioning; and local network element verification tests and generic
network tests.
Table 2. Handbooks related to the specific product SW management and local product control
REF
HANDBOOK
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A
Operators Handbook
[4]
ANV Part No.
THIS
HDBK
or note
8DG 17415 BAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Provides information regarding maintenance using the craft terminal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
20 / 554

1.3 Product-release handbooks
Table 3. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform

REF
HANDBOOK
1320CT 3.X
Basic Operators Handbook
THIS
HDBK
3AL 79551 AAAA
[5]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.6.5
Operators Handbook
3AL 88876 AAAA
[6]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELB Rel.2.X Operators Handbook
[7]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV Part No.
ED
3AL 88877 AAAA
Provide detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
21 / 554
Table 4. Documentation on CDROM
REF
[8]
CDROM TITLE
ANV Part No.
FACTORY Part No.
1696MSPAN Rel.2.2A CDROMDOC EN
8DG 17416 AAAA
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[1] to [4]

Envisaged after the release of all handbooks.
1320CT 3.X CDROMDOC EN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[9]
ED
3AL 79552 AAAA
417.100.032
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[5] to [7]

Envisaged after the release of all handbooks
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
22 / 554

See para.5.5 on page 57

1.4 Handbook Structure

This handbook has been edited according to the Alcatel standardized drawingup guides complying with
such suggestion.
This handbook is divided into the following main topics as described in the table of contents:
HANDBOOK GUIDE:
It contains general information on safety norms, EMC and type

of labels that might be affixed to the equipment. Furthermore,
it describes the handbook structure and the customer
documentation. The abbreviation list is supplied too.
DESCRIPTION:
It contains all the equipments general and detailed system

features including its application in the telecommunication
network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and
specifications (i.e., system, mechanical,electrical and/or
optical).
MAINTENANCE:
It contains all the details for periodic checks, fault location and
repair procedures and restore to normal operation through the
withdrawal of faulty units and their replacement with spares (*)
DISMANTLING & RECYLING
It contains information for subrack/units dismantling and

recycling and list of hazardous materials.
APPENDICES:
Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) to describe

possible alternative unit.
HARDWARE SETTING
DOCUMENTATION:
It encloses the documents related to unit hardware setting

operations, if envisaged.
ANNEXES:
Section envisaged (but not necessarily included) containing

additional documentation or general information on other topics
not inherent to the chapters making up the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(*)
ED
If the equipment is software integrated and manmachine interfaced (through a PCD, PC, Work
Station or other external processing/displaying system) the maintenance carried out with such
system is described in the Operators Handbook (see para.1.3 on page 20 )
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
23 / 554
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following table indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legenda
n
m
= new part
= modified part
p
=proposal part
PR =proposal edition
Table 5. Handbook configuration check

EDITION
01
02
03
DESCRIPTION
1. GENERAL
2. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
3. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
4. UNITS DESCRIPTION
5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
6. HARDWARE SETTINGS
MAINTENANCE
7. MAINTENANCE
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING
8. DISMANTLING & RECYCLING
04
05
06
m
m
n
n
n
n
APPENDICES
Nothing envisaged
ANNEXES
Nothing envisaged
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on December 2005 is the first validated and officially released issue of this Handbook.
Ed.02 created on March 2006 is the second validated and officially released issue of this Handbook.
It has been created for contents upgrading and for adding the alarms list (in chapter 5) and the hardware
settings chapter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Ed.03 created on October 2006 is the third validated and officially released issue of this Handbook.
It has been created for contents upgrading (Chapters 3 and 4) and for adding the DWDM SFPs technical
specifications.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
24 / 554

1.5 Handbook configuration check
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS

2.1 First aid for electric shock
Do not touch the patient with bare hands until the circuit has been opened.
Open the circuit by switching off the line switches. If that is not possible, protect yourself with dry
material and free the patient from the conductor.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
It is important to start mouth to mouth resuscitation at once and seek medical help immediately.
TREATMENT OF BURNS
This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
the artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).
WARNING:
ED
Do not attempt to remove his clothing from the burnt parts;
Apply dry gauze on the burns;
Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
25 / 554
Lay the patient supine with his arms parallel with the body, if the patient is laying
on an inclined plane, make sure that his stomach is slightly lower than his chest.
Open the patients mouth and check that there are no extraneous bodies in his
mouth (dentures, chewinggum etc.),
Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put

a hand under the patients head and one under
his neck (see fig.) Lift the patients head and let
it recline backwards as far as possible
Shift the hand from the patients neck to is chin:

place your thumb between his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the
other fingers closed together (see fig.). While
performing these operations take a good supply
of oxygen by taking deep breaths with your
mouth open.
With your thumb between the patients chin and

mouth keep his lips together and blow into his
nasal cavities (see fig.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

Mouth to mouth resuscitation method
While performing these operations observe if the

patients chest rises (see fig.) If not it is possible
that his nose is blocked: in that case open the
patients mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around
his mouth and blow into his oral cavity. Observe
if the patients chest heaves. This second
method can be used instead of the first even
when the patients nose is kept closed by
pressing the nostrils together using the hand you
were holding his head with. The patients head
must be kept sloping backwards as much as
possible.
Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of twelve/fifteen
expirations per minute. Go on like this until the patient has regained
consciousness, or until a doctor has ascertained his death.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
26 / 554

2.2 Safety Rules

2.2.1 General Rules
Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the relevant Handbooks and chapters.
Observe safety rules
When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be
aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions ect.
It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
Unless fitted into the equipment, an external protection device on power supply will be provided
in the building installation. The breaking capacity of the device will be adequate to the maximum
short circuit current which can flow.
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
27 / 554
2.2.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
dangerous electrical voltages
harmful optical signals
risk of explosion
moving mechanical parts
heatradiating Mechanical Parts
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
28 / 554

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.

The symbols presented in para.2.2.3 through 2.2.7 are all the possible symbols that could be
present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this
handbook refers to.
2.2.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages

2.2.3.1 Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
2.2.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where A.C. or
D.C. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a)
Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b)
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
2.2.3.3 Electrical safety: equipment specific data
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para. 5.2.1 on page 405.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
29 / 554
2.2.4 Harmful Optical Signals
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 82511993
International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 or 1M product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
LASER class
Power emitted
Wavelength
Ref. Norm
Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlocks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
exemple of power and lenght values
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
30 / 554

2.2.4.1 Labelling

2.2.4.2 Optical safety: general rules

On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a)
Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b)
Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c)
Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d)
All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e)
Never look directly into a not terminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f)
Never point a not terminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g)
Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h)
Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
2.2.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
31 / 554
2.2.5 Risks of Explosions
This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
2.2.6 Moving Mechanical Parts

2.2.6.1 Labelling and safety instructions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
32 / 554

2.2.7 Heatradiating Mechanical Parts


The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 60950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts carrying the above depicted
warning label, are those whose temperature
T exceeds the limits established by the following formula
(temperatures in C ):
(TTamb) (DTmax + 25 Tmra)

where:
T
Tamb
DTmax
Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.
Tmra
The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment

specification or 25C, whichever is greater.
Ambient temperature during the test.

Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Table 6. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2
Maximum overtemperature (C )
Operatoraccessible parts
Metal
Glass,
porcelain
Plastic,
rubber
Handle knob, ect., held or touched

for short periods
35
45
60
Handles, knobs, ect., regularly held
30
40
50
Outer surface of the equipment that

can be touched
45
55
70
Inner surface of the equipment that

can be touched
45
55
70
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
a)
ED
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
33 / 554
2.2.8 Specific safety rules in this handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
para. 5.2 on page 405
para. 7.1.1 on page 519
para. 7.2.1.1 on page 521
para. 7.2.2.1 on page 523
ED

Specific safety rules are specified in the following paragraphs:
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
34 / 554

3 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS

3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility
The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
relevant Handbooks and chapters.
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.1.1 General Norms Installation
ED
All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar
documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and degreased it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and degrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
35 / 554
Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.1.3 General Norms Maintenance
ED
Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and degrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
36 / 554

3.1.2 General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation

3.2 Electrostatic Dischargers (ESD)

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
ELASTICIZED BAND
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
COILED CORD
ED
an elastic band worn around the wrist
a coiled cord connected to the elastic band and to the stud on the subrack.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
37 / 554
3.3 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
statement....
3.4 Labels affixed to the Equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment.
Figure 1. to Figure 7. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Figure 8. to Figure 13. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the labels.
The table below relates the reference numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Table 7. Label references
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ref. No.
Name of Label
label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

Refer to Figure 8. on page 46
label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)

item identification label item on catalog

label identifying the equipment

label identifying compliancy with CE and WEEE Directives.

Refer to Figure 12. and Figure 13. on page 48
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
38 / 554

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABCD

NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Table 7. on page 38
Figure 1. Subrack label
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
39 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
40 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB.1
ED
ABC

NB.1 = The label is present on the support side
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
41 / 554
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
Figure 4. Labels on units with standard cover plate
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
42 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
Figure 5. Modules label
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
43 / 554


NB.1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 6. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
44 / 554

NB.1
ABC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
Figure 7. Back panels internal label
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
45 / 554

FACTORY P/N + CS
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Figure 8. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ALCATEL FACTORY PART

NUMBER + SPACE + CS
ACRONYM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
Figure 9. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
46 / 554

FREQUENCY
(Optional)
ACRONYM
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER
Figure 10. Item identification labels item on catalog
EQUIPMENT NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 11. Label identifying the equipment (example)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
47 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 12. CE label
Figure 13. WEEE label
Warning: CE and WEEE symbols can be in the same label or in different position of the
equipment.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A/D
Add and Drop functionality
ADM
Add and Drop Multiplex
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ALC
Automatic Laser Control
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
APD
Avalanche Photo Detector (photodiode technology)
APS
Automatic Protection switching
APSD
Automatic Power ShutDown
AS
Alarm Surveillance
ASAP
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT
ATtended Alarm
ATTD
ATtended (Alarm storing)
AU
Administrative Unit
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface for LAN connection
BER
Bit Error Rate
B&W
Black and White
BOL
Beginning of Life
CDR
Clock and Data Recovery
Ch
Channel
CID
Card IDentifier
CLEI
Common Language Equipment Identification
CPE
Costumer Premises Equipment
CSF
Communication Subsystem Failure
CT
Craft Terminal
CWDM
Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplex
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DCN
Data Communication network
DCU
Dispersion Compensating Unit
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
49 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Distributed Feedback Bragg
DDM
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring
DEMUX
Demultiplexing
DTMF
Dual Tone Modulation FrequencyDTV (Decision Threshold voltage)
DTV
Decision Threshold voltage
DV
Digital Video
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex
EC
Equipment Controller
ECC
Embedded Channel Communication
ECID
Enhanced Card IDentifier
ECC
Embedded Channel Communication
ECMA
Standardizing information and communication system

(Formerly European Computer Manufacturers Association)
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
EML
Equipment Management Layer
EOL
End Of Life
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
ESC
Equipment and Shelf Controller
ESD
Electrostatic Discharges
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EXP
Expansion
FC
Fiber Channel
FDI
Forward Defect Indication
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FIT
Failure In Time
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
GbE
Gigabit Ethernet
ED

DFB
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
50 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HDLC
High Level Data Link Control
HK
HouseKeeping
HW
HardWare
HWF
HardWare Failure
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
I/F
Interface
ILM
Integrated Laser Modulator
ILOS
Input Loss Of Signal
IND
INDeterminate
I/O
Input/Output
IOPV
Input Optical Power Voltage
IP
Internet Protocol
ISO
International Standard Organization
ISPB
Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB
Intra Shelf Serial Bus
IT
Interstage
ITU_T
International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPD
Link Access Protocol D
LB
Long Band
LH
Long Haul
LOC
Loss Of Clock
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LSD
Laser ShutDown
LT
Line Terminal
MAC
Medium Access Control
MCC
Multi Channel Card
MMF
Multi Mode Fiber
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
51 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Multiplex Section
MVAC
Multi Variable Attenuation Card
NE
Network Element
NDC
Negative Dispersion Chromatic
NES
Network Element Synthesis
NML
Network Management Layer
NMS
Network Management System
NNI
Network Node Interface
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
NTP
Network Time Protocol
NURG
Not URGent
OAC
Optical Amplifier Card
OADM
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer
OAM
Operator Alarm Maintenance
OBPS
On Board Power Supply
OCH
Optical Channel
OCHA
Optical Channel Adaptation
ODU
Optical channel Data Unit
OFA
Optical Fiber Amplifier
OGPI
Optical Generic Physical Interface
OMDX
Optical Multiplexer and DemultipleXer
OMS
Optical Multiplex Section
OMSA
Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation
OOPV
Output Optical Power Voltage
OPC
Optical Protection Card
OS
Operation System
OSC
Optical Supervisory Channel
OSMC
Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card
OSNCP
Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection
OSNR
Optical Signal Noise Ratio
ED

MS
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
52 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

OSPI
Optical Generic Physical Interface
OTN
Optical Transport Network
OTS
Optical Transmission Section
OTSP
Optical Transmission Section Protection
OTU
Optical channel Transport Unit
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDL
Polarization Dependent Loss
PDU
Power Distribution Unit
PI
Physical Interface
PIN
Positive Intrinseque Negative (photodiode technology)
PM
Performance Monitoring
PMU
Power Management Unit
PMD
Polarization Mode Dispersion
PSC
Power Supply Card
Q3
Interface with Q3 Protocol
QECC
Interface with Q protocol for Embedded Control Channel
QoS
Quality of Service
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAI
Remote Alarm Interface card
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
RECT
REmote Craft Terminal
RI
Remote Inventory
RUM
Replaceable Unit Missing
RUP
Replaceable Unit Problem
RUTM
Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch
RX
Receiver
SB
Short Band
SC
Shelf Controller
SD
ShutDown
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
53 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
System Handler
SFP
Small Formfactor Pluggable
SMF
Single Mode Fiber
SMSR
Side Mode Suppression Ratio
SNCP
SubNetwork Connection Protection
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface
SPVM
SuPerVision Module
SSF
Server Signal Failure
SWDL
SoftWare DownLoad
SWP
SoftWare Product
TCA
Threshold Crossed Alarm
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TRU
Top Rack Unit
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TP
Termination Point
TRU
Top Rack Unit
TTP
Trail Termination Point
TX
Transmitter
UEP
Unequipped Equipment Present
UIC
User Interface Card
UNI
User Network Interface
URG
URGent
USM
User Service Manager
VHM
Virtual Hardware Machine
VOA
Variable Optical Attenuator
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
XFP
10Gbps Formfactor Pluggable
ED

SH
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
54 / 554

5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION

5.1 Products, product-releases, versions and Customer Documentation
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of
performance and services for which it is meant.
A product evolves through successive product-releases which are the real products marketed for
their delivery at a certain product-release availability date.
So, a productrelease defines a set of hardware components and a software package which, as a whole,
identify the possible network applications and the equipment performance which the specific
product-release has been designed, engineered and marketed for.
In some cases a product-release has further development steps, named versions, that are born to
improve or add some performance (mainly software) with respect to the previous version, or for bug fixing
purposes.
A product-release has its own standard Customer Documentation, composed by one or more
handbooks.
A new version of a product-release may or may not produce a change in the status of the Customer
Documentation set, as described in para.5.4 on page 56.
5.2 Handbook supply to Customers

Handbooks are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer to.
The number of handbooks per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
5.3 Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plant-independent.
Plant-dependent documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far
as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned (plant-dependent documentation is not
described here).
Standard hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility
and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the equipment
according to Alcatel Laboratory design choices.
In particular: the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the
explanation of the man-machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is
described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Consequently, no supply to the Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
The handbooks concerning hardware (usually the Technical Handbook) and software (usually the
Operators Handbook) are kept separate in that any product changes do not necessarily concern their
contents.
For example, only the Technical Handbook might be revised because of hardware configuration
changes (e.g., replacing a unit with one having different P/N but the same function).
On the other hand, the Operators Handbook is updated because of a new software version but which
does not concern the Technical Handbook as long as it does not imply hardware modifications.
However, both types of handbooks can be updated to improve contents, correct mistakes, etc..
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
55 / 554
5.4 Handbook Updating
Each handbook is identified by:
the name of the product-release (and version when the handbook is applicable to the versions
starting from it, but not to the previous ones),
the handbook name,
the handbook P/N,
the handbook edition (usually first edition=01),
the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of print but to the date
on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for the production.
5.4.1 Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
The edition and date of issue might change on future handbook versions for the following reasons:
only the date changes (pointed out in the Table of Contents) when modifications are made to the
editorial system not changing the technical contents of the handbook.
the edition, hence the date, is changed because modifications made concern technical contents. In
this case:
the chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in Table 5. on page 24;
in affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text and
drawings.
Changes concerning the technical contents of the handbook cause the edition number increase (e.g. from
Ed.01 to Ed.02). Slight changes (e.g. for corrections) maintain the same edition but with the addition of
a version character (e.g. from Ed.02 to Ed.02A). Version character can be used for draft or proposal
editions.
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks (or part of the handbook) relevant to software applications (typically the Operators
Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers
implies manmachine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases
version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if
the screen contents are unchanged.
5.4.1.1 Supplying updated handbooks to Customers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Supplying updated handbooks to Customers who have already received previous issues is submitted to
commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery it is meant the supply of a complete copy of the handbook new issue
(supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
5.4.2 Changes due to a new product-release
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01.
In this case the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
56 / 554

The handbooks associated to the productrelease are listed in para.1.3 on page 6 .
5.5 Customer documentation supply on CDROM

In the following CDROM means Customer Documentation on CDROM

5.5.1 Contents, creation and production of a CDROM
In most cases, a CDROM contains in readonly eletronic format the documentation of one
productrelease(version) and for a certain language.
In some other cases, the same CDROM can contain the documentation of different
productrelease(version)s for a certain language.
As a general rule:
CDROMs for Network Management products do not contain:
the Installation Guides
the documentation of system optional features that Customers could not buy from Alcatel
together with the main applicative SW.
CDROMs for Network Elements products do not contain:

the documentation of system optional features (e.g. System Installation Handbooks related to
racks that Customers could not buy from Alcatel together with the main equipment).
A CDROM is obtained collecting various handbooks and documents in .pdf format. Bookmarks and
hyperlinks make the navigation easier. No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the
documentation present in the CDROMs is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper.
The files processed in this way are added to files/images for managing purpose and a master CDROM
is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virusfree product.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
After a complete functional check, the CDROM image is electronically transferred to the archive of the
Production Department, so that the CDROM can be produced and delivered to Customers.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
57 / 554
5.5.2 Use of the CDROM
The CDROM starts automatically with autorun and hyperlinks from the opened Index document permit
to visualize the .pdf handbooks
Other hyperlinks permit to get, from the Technical handbooks, the specific .pdf setting documents.
In order to open the .pdf documents Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 (minimum) must have been
installed on the platform.
The CDROM doesnt contain the Adobe Acrobat Reader program. The Customer is in charge of getting
and installing it.
ReadMe info is present on the CDROM to this purpose.
Then the Customer is allowed to read the handbooks on the PC/WS screen, using the navigation and
zooming tools included in the tool, and to print selected parts of the documentation through a local printer.
5.5.3 CDROM identification
Each CDROM is identified:
1)
by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CDROM upper
surface:
the name of the productrelease(s) (and version if applicable),
a writing indicating the language(s),
the CDROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
the CDROM edition (usually first edition=01)
2)
and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CDROM itself has been created.
5.5.4 CDROM updating
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The list of source handbook/document P/Nseditions indicated in section 5.5.3 point 2 ) , in association
with the CDROM own P/Nedition, is also loaded in the AlcatelInformationSystem as a structured list.
Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released, a check is made in the
AlcatelInformationSystem to identify the list of CDROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CDROM.
Updating of CDROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
58 / 554

The CDROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DESCRIPTIONS
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
59 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
60 / 554

1 FUNCTIONAL DESIGN
The 1696MSPAN product is a DWDM equipment intended for the so called enterprise and metropolitan
market. It is compliant with both ETSI and ANSI standards.
It provides a higher transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to 32 channels in the
Cband at the following bit rates:
up to 2.5 Gbps (STM16 / OC48)
10 Gbps (STM64/OC192).
The 1696MSPAN is mainly composed of transponder cards connected to optical Mux/Demux cards to
manage the main WDM signal (combined signal) and launch it in the fibre.
Both DWDM and CWDM technologies are addressed, allowing to build
a DWDM system (up to 32 channels) or
a CWDM system (up to 8 channels) or
a CWDM + DWDM system (up to 16 DWDM channels + up to 6 CWDM channels).

Client side, all the signals between 100Mbps to 2.7Gbps and 10Gbps native signals are supported.
A Compact WDM architecture, 1696MS_C is proposed. It is a compact 13 slots shelf enabling pointto
point and ring applications monitored by the Optical Supervisory Channel through SPVM board.
Up to two 1696MS_C expansion shelves can be connected to the main one allowing 12 channels terminals
or 4 channels OADM configurations.
Furthermore amplifiers can be placed inside the compact shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer the following main functions:
Multiple configurations and multiple network architectures

The 1696MSPAN can be configured as
line terminal
backtoback terminal
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)
in line repeater (optical amplifier)

These basic configurations cover both pointtopoint and ring network applications and with or without amplifiers.
Different optical adddrop (OADM) nodes can be provided: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32 channels OADM
(channels in Add/Drop in both direction).
Possibility to manage a remote NE named Customer Premises (CPE): it is a 1696MS or 1696MS_C

located far from a Ring that can be linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to another
NE (pointtopoint link).
Multirate client signals

The 1696MS is equipped with multirate transponders, which support the following Client signals
from 100 Mbps to 2.7 Gbps, by means of the MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 and 4xANY_P boards (the
max. client bit rate accepted by the 4xANY_P is 1.25Gbps)
10Gbps by means of the OCC10 board using, over UNI. Supported bit rates are
9.953Gbps (STM64/10Gbe WAN)
10.3125 Gbps (10Gbe LAN)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
61 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Client signals TDM concentration

Up to 4 client signals may be concentrated by Time Division Multiplexing, on a unique STM16 transponder access, in order to optimize the use of each wavelength.
This feature is performed by the 4xANY_P board
Up to 32 optical channels in a single NE

Each client signal is assigned to one of the 32 optical channels provided by the transponders. Each
channel is associated to a fixed wavelength chosen in the third window or Cband (1.550 nm).
Up to 16 bidirectional transponders (i.e. 8 ch. OADM with 1+1 optical ch. protection) in one shelf.
Fully equipped system with up 32+32 bidirectional wavelengths in one rack (4 shelves per rack).
Flexible and scalable architecture

The 1696MSPAN design allows to begin modestly with a partially equipped configuration (e.g.: 4 or
8 channels) that can be progressively upgraded as the traffic demand grows (e.g.: 16, 24, 32 channels). In particular, from the initial configuration, the transmission capacity can be increased without
interrupting the existing traffic.
Protection
A protection at channel level is provided in ring application (SubNetwork Connection Protection,
SNCP) and pointtopoint links (1+1). From rel. 2.2 the 4xANY drawers protection is also provided.
Supervision
An extra channel at 1510 nm, the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC), can be optionally added to
the aggregate signal before being launched in the fiber.
Multirate client signals

The system is equipped with multirate transponders (4xANY_P, MCC3, WLA2M and WLA3CD),
which support B&W Client signals from 125Mbps to 2.67Gbps. OCC10 supports 10Gbps signals
host SFP (up to 2.67Gbps) and XFP (10Gbps) pluggable optical modules are supported
According to the type, SFP modules are provided on MCC3 client interface, 4xANY_P aggregate interface, WLA2 and WLA3 client and WDM interfaces.
XFP modules are provided on OCC10 client interface.
Various types of SFP and XFP are provided. For details, refer to Figure 60. , Figure 61. , para 4.1.12,
para. 4.1.13 and to the equipping boards description (see chapter 4)
SFP and XFP modules allow to fit the client optical interface with the bitrate characteristics and/or
to use CWDM/DWDM wavelengths.
Automatic power equalization

It consists of an automatic adjustment of the power per channel in order to maintain the optical power
at each node output as flat as possible. This functionality needs OSMC (measuring the power per
channel) and MVAC (adjusting the power value) boards.
10Gbps backpanel
The 10Gbps backpanel, introduced in rel. 2.2, allows to link two adjacent OCC10s at 10.7 Gbps.
Performance Monitoring
Monitoring the performances of the client signals and the WDM transmission is available for SDH and
SONET frames. Up to 32 PM per NE are managed.
Management Interfaces
As the product is intended to both ETSI and ANSI market, Q3 and TL1 interfaces are supported. In
ETSI market the NE is managed by the Alcatel 1353NM and 1354RM by means of the Q3 interface.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
62 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

User Interfaces
The product offers user interfaces for various overhead for data channels and orders wires using (64
kbit/s, 2Mbit/s, RS232, audio).
Firmware download
The 1696 MSPAN supports nontraffic affecting firmware download.
Boards supporting nontraffic affecting firmware download: OAC2, OAC2_L, OCC10, OCC10_E,
OCC10_XFP_CWDM, WLA3, OSMC and 4xANY_P (when declared as 4xANY_P).
The NE software automatically performs nontraffic affecting firmware download of the MCC3, 4 x
ANY_P (when declared as 4xANY_P) and OCC10 cards. It is the only firmware download performed
by the NE software in current rel.
N.B.
ED
Never unplug a board while this is on Firmware download state. Should this occur, the
board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
63 / 554
1.1 Equipment basic configurations
Line Terminal
Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or backtoback terminal (hub)
OADM or backtoback terminal (hub) repeater
In line repeater
Customer Premises Equipment (CPE).
1.1.1 Line terminal

In line terminal configuration, the 1696MSPAN connects
up to 32 clients signals (1696MS_C = up to 12 channels) to an optical fibre DWDM line
up to 8 clients signals (1696MS_C too) to an optical fibre CWDM line
mixed configuarations (CWDM + DWDM) are allowed too, thus providing up to 16 DWDM channels
plus 6 CWDM channels.
In this configuration, the equipment takes place at both ends of pointtopoint links.
B&W Client signals
Up to to 32
client signals
Mux and Demux can be
OADM or OMDX in
DWDM applications
CMDX2 in CWDM
applications
TPD
(up to 32)
Up to 32
WDM
signals
1>32
SPV
One fibre pair
Up to 8 CWDM signals or
Up to 32 DWDM signals or
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
Mux
Demux
SPV
Figure 14. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration
B&W CLIENT SIGNALS
DWDM
TPD
B&W Client signals

Up to to 32
client signals
1>7 (CWDM signals)
(up to 7)
SPV
CWDM
DWDM
Mux
DWDM
TPD 1>16 Mux(es) Aggregate Dmux
Dmux(es)
(up to 16)
One fibre pair
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 15. The 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration (mixed configuration)

In the following some examples of Line Terminal configuration are provided.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
64 / 554

The 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C design, allows the following basic configurations of the equipment:
1.1.1.1 Line Terminal basic configuration with two MCC3 transponders

1

MCC3
RX
B&W
TX
WDM
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
M
u
x
SPV
MCC3
RX
B&W
TX
WDM
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
One fibre pair
D
em
u
x
SPV
Figure 16. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3 transponders
1.1.1.2 Line Terminal basic configuration with a WLA transponder
1
RX
B&W
TX
WDM
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
M
u
x
SPV
WLA
RX
B&W
TX
WDM
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
One fibre pair
D
em
u
x
SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 17. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with a WLA transponder (2 ch)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
65 / 554
1.1.1.3 Line Terminal basic configuration with two 4xANY_P transponders

4xANY_P
RX
B&W
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
RX
B&W
TX
B&W
4xANY_P
RX
B&W
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
TX
WDM
M
u
x
SPV
TX
WDM

RX
B&W
TX
B&W
One fibre pair
D
em
u
x
SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 18. Line Terminal configuration block diagram with two 4xANY_P transponders
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
66 / 554
1.1.2 Booster + Preamplifier Line terminal

1 x OAC board by terminal
This configuration is made up of a line terminal + one OAC.

B&W Client signals
Up to 8 or up to 32
client signals
TPD
(up to 32)
OADM or OMDX in
DWDM applications
CMDX2 in CWDM
applications
Up to 8
or 32
WDM
signals
1>32
OFA SPV
Mux
Demux
2
1
One fibre pair
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
SPV
Figure 19. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (1 x OAC) configuration
2 x OAC board by terminal
This configuration is made up of a line terminal + two OACs.
B&W Client signals
Up up to 32 client signals
OADM or OMDX in
DWDM applic.
CMDX2 in CWDM
applications
TPD
(up to 32)
OFA
Mux
1>32
Demux
OFA SPV
Atten/
DCU
VOA 1
2
Atten/
DCU
One fibre pair
2
1
VOA
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 20. The 1696MSPAN in Booster + Preamplifier Line Terminal (2 x OACs) configuration
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
67 / 554
1.1.3 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM) or backtoback terminal (hub)
In OADM configuration, the 1696MSPAN may add and drop a part of the traffic of an optical DWDM line,
in both directions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as linear add and drop multiplexer
in:
pointtopoint links
ring networks.
Client signals
OADM or OMDX in
DWDM applic.
CMDX2 in CWDM
applications
One fibre pair
Up to 16 DWDM plus
n
6 CWDM signals
(up to 32)
x added & dropped

channels
TPD
SPV
TPD
Mux
Dmux
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
Mux
Dmux
nx
pass through channels
SPV
One fibre pair
SPV
n
(up to 32)
SPV
Figure 21. The 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration

The OADM configuration, especially in ring network, allows the SubNetwork Connection Protection
(SNCP) of the added and dropped channels.
Backtoback terminal (hub)
When ALL the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated, the 1696MSPAN
is a backtoback terminal or a hub node. There is no optical pass through channel. SNCP may be
performed on all the DWDM line channels.
Client signals
OADM or OMDX in
DWDM applic.
CMDX2 in CWDM
applications
One fibre pair
Up to 16 DWDM plus
n
6 CWDM signals
(32 max)
x added & dropped

channels
TPD
SPV
Mux
Dmux
SPV
TPD
SPV
Mux
Dmux
SPV
One fibre pair
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
n
(32 max)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 22. The 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration

In the following some examples of OADM / backtoback terminal configuration are provided.
The OADM / backtoback terminal configuration is also possible with 4xANY_P equipped with coloured
SFPs.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
68 / 554

Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer (OADM)

1.1.3.1 OADM or backtoback terminal configuration with two MCC3 transponders
SPV
M
u
x
One fibre pair
SPV
MCC3
TX
B&W
RX
B&W
MCC3
RX
WDM
TX
WDM
TX
WDM
RX
WDM
RX
B&W
D
em
u
x
M
u
x
SPV
One fibre pair
TX
B&W
D
em
u
x
SPV
Figure 23. OADM or backtoback terminal configuration block diagram with two MCC3 transponders
1.1.3.2 OADM or backtoback terminal configuration with WLA as regenerator for two chs
SPV
M
u
x
One fibre pair
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPV
D
em
u
x
TX
B&W
RX
B&W
WLA
RX
WDM
TX
WDM
TX
WDM
RX
WDM
RX
B&W
M
u
x
SPV
One fibre pair
TX
B&W
D
em
u
x
SPV
Figure 24. OADM or backtoback configuration block diagram with WLA as regenerator for 2 chs
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
69 / 554
1.1.4 OADM or backtoback terminal (hub) repeater
This configuration is made up of a OADM or backtoback (hub) terminal + one OAC. In the example of
Figure 25. an OADM repeater configuration is shown.
Client signals
Mux and Dmux can

be OADM or OMDX
or CMDX2 boards
x added & dropped

channels
TPD
SPV OFA
One fibre pair
WDM
signals
VOA
n
(up to 32)
TPD
Mux
Dmux
Mux
Dmux
nx
SPV
One fibre pair
OFA SPV
VOA
SPV
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
n
(up to 32)
Figure 25. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (1 OAC west side + 1 OAC east side) configuration
OADM or backtoback terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
2 x OAC board in West side + 2 x OAC board in East side
This configuration is made up of a OADM or backtoback (hub) terminal + two OACs. In the example of
an OADM repeater configuration is shown.
Mux and Dmux can be OADM or OMDX or CMDX boards
SPV
One fibre pair
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
OFA
OFA
Atten/
DCU
VOA
Atten/
DCU
n
(up to 32)
2
1
TO/FROM MUX/DMUX
VOA
SPV
Client signals
x added & dropped
channels
TPD
TO/FROM
OFA
Mux
Dmux
OFA
Mux
Dmux
nx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
One fibre pair
TPD
VOA
OFA SPV
Atten/
DCU
1
2
Atten/
DCU
2
1
Up to 16 DWDM plus
VOA
n 6 CWDM signals
(up to 32)
SPV
Figure 26. The 1696MSPAN in OADM repeater (2 OACs west side + 2 OACs east side) configuration
OADM or backtoback terminals can be equipped with amplifiers on West side or East side or both sides.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
70 / 554

1 x OAC board in West side + 1 x OAC board in East side

1.1.5 In line repeater

In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is a bidirectional DWDM amplifier, without transponders nor
MUX/DEMUX functions. In this configuration the equipment takes place as line repeater in:
pointtopoint links
ring networks.
One fibre pair

SPV
One fibre pair

signals
n
(up to 32)
OFA
Attenuator or DCU
VOA
WDM
OFA
Attenuator or DCU
SPV
SPV
Up to 16 DWDM plus
6 CWDM signals
2
VOA
1
SPV
n
(up to 32)
Figure 27. The 1696MSPAN in repeater configuration
1.1.6 Customer Premises Equipment (CPE)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A Customer Premises equipment (CPE) is a 1696MS_C or 1696MS located far from a ring which can be
linked to a NE of the ring (1696MS or 1696MS_C) or to another NE in a point to point link.
In that configuration it is possible to manage a remote NE with no obligation to multiplex the optical signal
(see Figure 32. page 74).
Up to 10 supervised CPE links can be installed on one NE in current release.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
71 / 554
1.2.1 Pointtopoint links

A pointtopoint link, based on 1696MSPAN, is obtained with:
a 1696MSPAN in line terminal configuration at each end of the link,
eventually, one or more 1696MSPAN in OADM configuration.
Client Add & Drop traffic

Client
end
traffic
Line
Terminal
OADM
Repeater
Line
Terminal
Client
end
traffic
Figure 28. Pointtopoint link
1.2.2 Ring networks

A two fibers ring network is obtained with 1696MSPAN equipment in backtoback terminal and OADM
configurations.
Client end traffic
BtoB
Client
Add & drop
traffic
OADM
repeater
OADM
Client
Add & drop
traffic
In Line
Repeater
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 29. Ring configuration
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
72 / 554

1.2 Network architectures
1.2.3 Ring interconnection (with or without protection)

NE
NE
NE
NE
NE
Black & White links

with supervision
NE
NE
NE
Figure 30. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and supervision carried by OSC
Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the
interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other with optical insertion of the OSC
in one Black & White link through a SPV_F_C board. The NEs host of the interconnection do not need to
be colocated.
NE
NE
NE
Supervision through
interconnected LAN_Q boards
NE
NE
LAN_Q
LAN_Q NE
NE
NE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 31. Interconnected rings with data on customer ports and LAN_Q management transmission
Such a ring interconnection is done through interconnection of customer ports of the adjacent NEs of the
interconnected rings. Supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the electrical connection of the LAN_Q boards (only the DCC). This type of interconnection can only be performed in ETSI market. The NEs host of the interconnection need to be colocated.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
73 / 554
1.2.4 CPE configurations
NE
NE
CPE

NE
NE
NE
CPE
NO OSC
OSC
CPE
CPE
Figure 32. CPE configuration

CPE consists in remote 4xANY or MCC transponders. Management is performed through OSC. Three
different channel configurations can be transmitted to/from a CPE:
one Black & White channel (1310 nm)
one colored channel (1550 nm)
one 1310 nm and one 1550 nm channels
up to 8 CWDM channels.
CPE
CPE
CPE
CPE
CPE
NE
CPE
CPE
CPE
CPE
CPE
A NE located on a ring can support several CPE links, but only two of them can be supervised.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 33. Bicycle wheel configuration: NE on a ring adressing 10 supervised CPE links
One NE situated on a ring can support several CPE links (up to 10 supervised CPE links, see Figure 33. )
More 1550 nm channels in CPE links (Multiplex) are foreseen in future rel.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
74 / 554
1.2.5 Interworking with other Alcatel NEs

1.2.5.1 4xANY concentrator

As the 4xANY concentrator realizes a real STM16 frame, the concentrated signal can pass trough an
ADM network.
1.2.5.2 1696MS CWDM as CPE
Taking advantage of the CWDM features of release 2.2A (MCC3, WLA2, WLA3, 4xANY_P, CMDX2
boards), it is possible to implement the transmission on CWDM wavelengths.
On Figure 34. is shown a CPE link based on CWDM technology.
MCC3 in the core ring enables to generate CWDM wavelengths on the client side.
In the CPE, 4xANY_P or WLA2/3 boards give the signal back to the customer in a B&W wavelength.
SPV is inserted/extracted in the 1510nm channel CMDX2 Input/Output.
1696MS
DWDM
Mux/Demux
1696MS
4XANY_P
MCC3
MCC3
MCC3
CWDM
Mux/
Demux
MCC3
4XANY_P
WLA2
WLA3
1510nm
Mux/Demux
DWDM
CWDM
CWDM
Mux/
Demux
SPV
1510nm
SPV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 34. CPE link based on CWDM technology
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
75 / 554
Host systems can be all data equipments whose optical output signals have the following bitrates
between 100 and 2.5 Gbps
10 Gbps.
They can be :
SDH/SONET (STM1/OC3, STM4/OC12, STM16/OC48, STM64/OC192) equipments
IP routers
Fast Ethernet, GbE, 10GbE WAN, 10 GbE LAN, FC, FICON, ESCON... equipments
10Gbps SDH
Tx
SONET
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
10GBE WAN
Rx
10Gbps B&W
Rx
Tx
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
10Gbps B&W
Tx
10Gbps LAN
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
10Gbps B&W
2.5Gbps
Tx
SDH/SONET
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
STM1/4/16, OC3/12/48
FC/ESCON/FE
Tx
GBE/FICON
Rx
CLIENT SYSTEM
STM1/4/16, OC3/12/48
FC/ESCON/FE
Tx
GBE/FICON
Rx
CLIENT SYSTEM
STM1/4, OC3/12,
FC/ESCON/FE Tx
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
STM1/4, OC3/12,
FC/ESCON/FE Tx
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UP TO FOUR
STM1/4, OC3/12,
FC/ESCON/FE Tx
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
Tx
2.5Gbps B&W
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
OCC10
Tx
Tx
Rx
from 100Mbps to 2.5Gbps
OCC10
Tx
Tx
Rx
OCC10
Rx
Rx
Tx
MCC3
MCC3
WLA2
WLA3
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
RxN (32MAX)
32 TxN (32MAX)
10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
10Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
Rx4
UP TO FOUR
STM1/4, OC3/12,
FC/ESCON/FE Tx
GBE/FICON
CLIENT SYSTEM Rx
Tx
Tx6
Rx5
Tx5
Rx4
Tx4
Tx
Rx
Rx3
AGGREGATE
MULTIPLEXED
SIGNAL
(UP TO 32 )
Tx3
Rx2
Tx2
MUX/
DEMUX
SCHEME
Tx4
4 x ANY
Tx
Rx
Rx1
Rx6
Tx1
2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
Rx1
Tx1
Rx4
Tx4
4 x ANY
Rx1
Tx1
Tx
Rx
Rx
Tx
2.5Gbps B&W
MCC3
Tx
Rx
1696MS
2.5Gbps
COLOURED
SIGNAL
Rx1
Tx1
Figure 35. Connection to host equipments
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
76 / 554

1.2.6 Host systems (ADM..)

1.3 Protection scenario

1.3.1 OSNCP
In a ring, the SNCP at OCh level can be provided either in backtoback terminals or in OADM equipment,
as shown in Figure 36. on page 77.
At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on both arms of the ring and the available signal is selected
at the receive side (when failure of the other signal).
Split and select performed in optical
domain (by switchingoff the user Tx)
Mux
Dmux
Mux
Dmux
backtoback terminal
OADM or backtoback
dropped channels
added channels
Split and select performed in optical

domain (by switchingoff the user Tx)
Figure 36. Optical SNCP protection scheme: with backtoback terminals or OADM
The split and select function is optically performed.
The protection is optically performed, too; the function is ensured by 2 optical splitters.
The selection is done by switchingoff the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactivating
the protecting one (see Figure 37. ).
optical
electrical
user Rx
optical
electrical
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
user Tx
WDM Rx
user Tx
optical
WDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
optical splitter
user Rx
WDM Tx
optical coupler
Figure 37. Optical SNCP way of working

The protection schemes supported are: MCC3; MCC3 + 4xANY_P (only MCC3 is protected); 4xANY_P
(each client/drawer can be protected); MCC3 + OAC; OCC10; OCC10 + OAC; WLA2M_OP (the two channels are 1+1 protected, not the board); WLA3CDOP (the same as WLA2M_OP).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
77 / 554
1.3.2 Optical Transmission Section Protection
In a pointtopoint link, with a splitter an a switch locaated after the amplifiers, it is possible to protect the
line. The amplifiers are not mandatory.
M
u
x
OMSP
OMSP
M
u
x
SubNetwork
D
em
u
x
D
em
u
x
Figure 38. OTSP protection scheme in a pointtopoint network configuration

After bing multiplexed, the signal is amplified (or not) and broadcasted onto 2 lines. At reception, before
being demultiplexed, the MAIN line (port #2) is selected by the OMSP board.
Switching occurs on ILOS detection on OMSP board on MAIN path (port #2) and no ILOS on OMSP board
on SPARE path (port #3).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OSC, if present, is inserted in the amplifier boards. If amplifiers are not present, OSC is inserted in
Mux/DeMux boards. Thus the OSC passes through the OMSP board, it is then OTSPprotected.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
78 / 554

OTSP protection scheme is carried out using the OMSP board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
The 1696MSPAN has been designed to offer a record size integration to meet the challenging requirements of the metropolitan environment. A fully loaded 1696MSPAN system with 32 protected channels
can be housed in one standard ETSI or ANSI racks.
The 1696MSPAN employs a common shelf type for the different network elements. Up to four shelves can
be fit into a single rack.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
79 / 554
The 1696MSPAN mechanical design allows to put up to four shelves in a single rack. It is compatible with
the following mechanical standards
a 2000 mm high ETSI rack,
a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.

The depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitations in ANSI rack).
OPTINEX RACK
NEBS 2000 RACK
(ETSI)
Top rack unit

Air deflector
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
600 mm
1950
2000
Fiber storage
Air deflector
600 mm
Figure 39. Rack organization, 32 channel bidirectional terminal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
80 / 554

2.1 Rack design

2.2 1696MS shelf physical configuration

The 1696MS shelf is made up by an empty shelf and the boards and units installed in it.
One 1696MS system is composed by one mandatory main/master shelf and up to three slave/expansion
shelves. The board composition determines the shelf type: master or slave.
2.2.1 1696MS Empty shelf
2.2.1.1 1696MS shelf organization
The shelf is organized into three parts (one main and two extension), hosting 49 boards or unit slots:
the main part, which is the upper part and comprises the slots from 1 to 24; here are located the 285
mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal.
This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 16 transponders, up to 11 TDM concentrators
(4xANY_P), optical amplifiers, one mux/demux for LT or two mux/demux or OADM boards (east/
west) for hub/OADM application, optical supervisory channel...
the first extension part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 25 to 48; here are located the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed
two redundant 48V power supply boards
one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection (in master shelf only)
one LAN access board for intershelf communication (LAN_I)
one housekeeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK) (in master shelf only)
one remote alarms board (RAI) (in master shelf only)
two user interface boards (UIC) (in master shelf only)
one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel (optical SNCP)
the second extension part, which is the bottom part and comprises slot 49, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed.
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf.
The Equipment shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 40. on page 82 and in Figure 41. on
page 84.
The units codes and partition are listed in Table 8. on page 86.
Main part (slot 1 to 24)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
First extension part (slot 25 to 48)

Second extension part (slot 49)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
81 / 554
2.2.1.2 1696MS Shelf dimensions

2
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
15
443
285

40
88
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
49
FANS
96 TE (24 x 4 TE wide slots)
21 (533.4 mm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 40. Shelf dimensions
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
82 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.2.2 1696MS Shelf configuration rules

The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.
If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards
can be exchanged without functionality loss.
2.2.2.1 1696MS configuration constraints
Optical SubNetwork Channel Protection requires:
transponder boards (MCC/OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots. [4,5] or [6,7] or [8,9] or
[10,11] or [14,15] or [16,17] or[18,19] or [20,21]
each Optical Protecting Channel boards (OPC) must be placed
when protecting transponders, in one of the two slots, located under the corresponding transponder (MCC/OCC10) pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 28 or 29 corresponds to the slots 45). The
transponder above the OPC is the main one and the other is the protecting transponder (e.g.:
OPC in slot 28 implies main transponder in slot 4 and protecting one in slot 5)
when protecting 4xANY_P client signals, in the four slots located below the corresponding
4xANY_P pair; the 4xANY_P on the right side contains the MAIN/protected drawers. Starting
from the left the first OPC protects drawer 2, the second one drawer 1, the third one drawer 3,
the fourth one drawer 4; in case of 4xANY_P in slots 6,7,8,9, the OPC in slot 30 protects drawer
2, that in slot 31 protects drawer 1, that in slot 32 protects drawer 3, that OPC in slot 33 protects
drawer 4
if TDM concentrators (4xANY_P) are used with few channels, all the boards are preferably put in a
single shelf
if TDM concentrators are used with more than 8 channels, 4xANY_P) boards are preferably put in
one dedicated shelf
using MVAC (for power adjustment of external colored wavelengths, of channel or band optical
passthrough and for transponder postemphasis, channel/band loop power adjustment) the boards
allocation depends on the needed configuration (for the boards location refer to installation handbook).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
83 / 554
Figure 41. shows a typical configuration of a fully equipped shelf and Table 8. resumes the possibilities
that satisfy the configuration constraints.
1
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Equipment Shelf controler

OSMC
Mux/Demux or OADM
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Optical amplifier
Optical amplifier
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Transponder
Mux/Demux or OADM
SPVM
(X)
(*) Master
shelf only
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
H R
O
O
O
O
L
K A
P
P
P
P
A
(*) I
C
C
C
C
N
49
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
O
O
O
O
U U
P
P
P
P
I I
C
C
C
C
C C
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 41. Typical fully equipped shelf

In the first extension part, except for the PSC and the LAN boards, the placement of the boards has no
hardware limitation. However, here is the most frequently used configuration:
the slots 28 to 35 and 38 to 45 are dedicated to the Optical Protection Channel board (OPC),
the slot 36 hosts the HouseKeeping board (HK),
the slot 37 hosts the Remote Alarm Interface board (RAI),
the slots 46 and 47 hosts the User Interface Card (UIC).

Mandatory boards are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Slot 1 is dedicated to ESC board (Master and expansion (SC) shelves).

Slots 25 and 48 are dedicated to the Power Supply Cards (Master and Expansion shelves).
Slot 26 of the master shelf is dedicated to the LAN_Q card.
Slot 27 of the slave shelf is dedicated to the LAN_I card.
Slot 49 hosts the FANs card (Master and Expansions).
N.B.
Particular setting of the LAN board (slot 26) on the Master shelf:
On this board, the rotary switch SW3 corresponding to the Equipment Type must be set in 5
value (hexadecimal), otherwise the Shelf Controller will not start.
When the straps on the board are forced (by pass state) to be LAN #26 or LAN #27 board, take
care to insert the LAN board in the correct slot.
N.B.
the slot 2 can be used for OSMC; it is an optional card.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
84 / 554

2.2.2.2 1696MS Typical shelf configuration

2.2.3 1696MS Part list

In Table 8. on page 86 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units making
up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 86).
Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside a single
shelf, are indicated too.
Such table reports the following information :
Item Name
The Acronym identifying the units
ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX)
Maximum quantity per each shelf
Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 40. on page 82 and Figure 41. on
page 84 for slot numbering.
Number of explanatory notes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 9. on page 98 reports the explanatory notes.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
85 / 554
2.2.3.1 1696MS shelf and boards designation and reference
NAME
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
1696MSPAN shelf
3AL 86607 AA
[1]
Shelf 1696MSPAN 10G
3AL 95270 AA
[2]
1696MSPAN FB shelf
3AL 86607 AC
Shelf FB 1696MSPAN 10G
3AL 95270 AB
21 D.C.U. assembled support
3AN 44747 AA
[2]
TRIBUTARIES
Multirate CH 192.000192.100
MCC1 192.0192.1
3AL 86603 AA
MCC1 192.2192.3
3AL 86603 AB
MCC1 192.5192.6
3AL 86603 AC
MCC1 192.7192.8
3AL 86603 AD
MCC1 193.0193.1
3AL 86603 AE
MCC1 193.2193.3
3AL 86603 AF
MCC1 193.5193.6
3AL 86603 AG
MCC1 193.7193.8
3AL 86603 AH
MCC1 194.2194.3
3AL 86603 AL
MCC1 194.4194.5
3AL 86603 AM
MCC1 194.7194.8
3AL 86603 AN
MCC1 194.9195.0
3AL 86603 AP
MCC1 195.2195.3
3AL 86603 AQ
MCC1 195.4195.5
3AL 86603 AR
MCC1 195.7195.8
3AL 86603 AS
MCC1 195.9196.0
3AL 86603 AT
MCC2 192.0192.1
3AL 86603 BA
MCC2 192.2192.3
3AL 86603 BB
MCC2 192.5192.6
3AL 86603 BC
MCC2 192.7192.8
3AL 86603 BD
MCC2 193.0193.1
3AL 86603 BE
MCC2 193.2193.3
3AL 86603 BF
MCC2 193.5193.6
3AL 86603 BG
MCC2 193.7193.8
3AL 86603 BH
MCC2 194.2194.3
3AL 86603 BL
MCC2 194.4194.5
3AL 86603 BM
MCC2 194.7194.8
3AL 86603 BN
MCC2 194.9195.0
3AL 86603 BP
MCC2 195.2195.3
3AL 86603 BQ
MCC2 195.4195.5
3AL 86603 BR
MCC2 195.7195.8
3AL 86603 BS
MCC2 195.9196.0
3AL 86603 BT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Enhanched
Multirate
19x.x0019x.x00
ED
CH
16
4>11
4
>11
[3]
14>21
16
4 >11
4>11
[4]
14>21
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
86 / 554

Table 8. 1696MS boards and units list
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
Enhanched
E
h
h d
Multirate
M lti t
CH
19x x00 19x x00 with SFP optical
19x.x0019x.x00
modules
ED
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
MCC3 192.0192.1
3AL 95150 AA
MCC3 192.2192.3
3AL 95150 AB
MCC3 192.5192.6
3AL 95150 AC
MCC3 192.7192.8
3AL 95150 AD
MCC3 193.0193.1
3AL 95150 AE
MCC3 193.2193.3
3AL 95150 AF
MCC3 193.5193.6
3AL 95150 AG
MCC3 193.7193.8
3AL 95150 AH
MCC3 194.2194.3
3AL 95150 AJ
MCC3 194.4194.5
3AL 95150AK
MCC3 194.7194.8
3AL 95150 AL
MCC3 194.9195.0
3AL 95150 AM
MCC3 195.2195.3
3AL 95150 AN
MCC3 195.4195.5
3AL 95150 AP
MCC3 195.7195.8
3AL 95150 AQ
MCC3 195.9196.0
3AL 95150 AR
Max
Q.ty
16
SLOT
Note
4>11
4
>11
[5]
14>21
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
87 / 554
ANV
Part Number
OCC10 CH 192.000
OCC10 192.000
3AL 86834 AA
OCC10 CH 192.100
OCC10 192.100
3AL 86834 AB
OCC10 CH 192.200
OCC10 192.200
3AL 86834 AC
OCC10 CH 192.300
OCC10 192.300
3AL 86834 AD
OCC10 CH 192.500
OCC10 192.500
3AL 86834 AE
OCC10 CH 192.600
OCC10 192.600
3AL 86834 AF
OCC10 CH 192.700
OCC10 192.700
3AL 86834 AG
OCC10 CH 192.800
OCC10 192.800
3AL 86834 AH
OCC10 CH 193.000
OCC10 193.000
3AL 86834 AL
OCC10 CH 193.100
OCC10 193.100
3AL 86834 AM
OCC10 CH 193.200
OCC10 193.200
3AL 86834 AN
OCC10 CH 193.300
OCC10 193.300
3AL 86834 AP
OCC10 CH 193.500
OCC10 193.500
3AL 86834 AQ
OCC10 CH 193.600
OCC10 193.600
3AL 86834 AR
OCC10 CH 193.700
OCC10 193.700
3AL 86834 AS
OCC10 CH 193.800
OCC10 193.800
3AL 86834 AT
OCC10 CH 194.200
OCC10 142.200
3AL 86834 BA
OCC10 CH 194.300
OCC10 194.300
3AL 86834 BB
OCC10 CH 194.400
OCC10 194.400
3AL 86834 BC
OCC10 CH 194.500
OCC10 194.500
3AL 86834 BD
OCC10 CH 194.700
OCC10 194.700
3AL 86834 BE
OCC10 CH 194.800
OCC10 194.800
3AL 86834 BF
OCC10 CH 194.900
OCC10 194.900
3AL 86834 BG
OCC10 CH 195.000
OCC10 195.000
3AL 86834 BH
OCC10 CH 195.200
OCC10 195.200
3AL 86834 BL
OCC10 CH 195.300
OCC10 195.300
3AL 86834 BM
OCC10 CH 195.400
OCC10 195.400
3AL 86834 BN
OCC10 CH 195.500
OCC10 195.500
3AL 86834 BP
OCC10 CH 195.700
OCC10 195.700
3AL 86834 BQ
OCC10 CH 195.800
OCC10 195.800
3AL 86834 BR
OCC10 CH 195.900
OCC10 195.900
3AL 86834 BS
OCC10 CH 196.000
OCC10 196.000
3AL 86834 BT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
ACRONYM
NAME
16
4 >11
4>11
[6]
14>21
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
88 / 554

NAME
ANV
Part Number
OCC10 XFP APD CH 192.000
3AL 95238 AA
3AL 95238 AC
3AL 95238 AE
3AL 95238 AG
3AL 95238 AN
3AL 95238 AQ
3AL 95238 AS
3AL 95238 BA
3AL 95238 BE
3AL 95238 BG
3AL 95238 BL
3AL 95238 BN
3AL 95238 BS
3AL 95238 CA
3AL 95238 CC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ACRONYM
OCC10 _E
E
3AL 95238 CE
3AL 95238 CP
3AL 95238 CR
3AL 95238 CT
3AL 95238 DB
3AL 95238 DF
3AL 95238 DH
3AL 95238 DM
3AL 95238 DP
3AL 95238 DT
3AL 95238 EB
3AL 95238 ED
3AL 95238 EF
3AL 95238 EM
3AL 95238 EP
3AL 95238 ER
3AL 95238 ET
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.300 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.000 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.100 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.200 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH195.900 (1530)
OCC10_XFP_CWDM 1530NM
ED
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
16
4 >11
4>11
[7]
14>21
16
4>11
[8]
14>21
16
4 >11
4>11
[9]
14>21
3AL 95313 AA
3AL 95313 AB
OCC10 _NA
3AL 95313 AC
3AL 95313 AD
3AL 95314 AA
8DG 81002 AA
8DG 81002 AB
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
89 / 554
NAME
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
DUAL ENH WLA MODULE2X3R
WLA2M
3AL 97657 AA
WLA2M_OP
3AL 97657 AB
WLA3CD
3AL 97795 BA
4>11 [11]
14>21
14
>21
[12]
WLA3CDOP
3AL 97795 BB
[13]
4xANY Host I16.1 i/f
4xANY
3AL 86639 AA
4xANY Host S16.1 i/f
4xANY_S
3AL 86872 AA
4xANY Host fully pluggable
4xANY_P
3AL 95063 AA
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARDSFPOPC
SLOT
Note
[10]
16
11
2;4;6;8;
10;12;
14;16;
18;20;
22
[14]
[16]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[16]
TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM
4 X ANY SDH/SONET cartridge
SDHSONET_1310
Drawer
3AL 86673 AA
3AL 95284 AA
LF_1310_2 Drawer
3AL 86674 AA
[19]
HF_1310 Drawer
3AL 86672 AA
[20]
4 X ANY LS optical cartridge
LF_850 Drawer
3AL 86869 AA
4 X ANY 850nm HS cartridge
HF_850 Drawer
3AL 86870 AA
4 X ANY LS plugin 1310 (OLI)
3AL 81617 AA
4 X ANY Electrical DV cartridge
3AL 95267 AA
[21]
[16]
[22]
[16]
[23]
[16]
[24]
3AL 86892 AA
18
4>21
[25]

4 X ANY 1310nm LS cartridge
4 X ANY HS cartridge
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Multiple attenuator card
ED
MVAC
[18]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
90 / 554

DUAL ENH WLA MODULE

2X3R W/ OPC
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARDSFP
Max
Q.ty
ANV
Part Number
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
S1.1
1AB 19467 0001
S1.1DDM
1AB 19467 0004
L1.1
1AB 19467 0002
OPTO TRX SFP L1.2
L1.2
1AB 19467 0003
OPTO TRX SFP S4.1
S4.1
1AB 19636 0001
S4.1DDM
1AB 19636 0004
OPTO TRX SFP L4.1
L4.1
1AB 19636 0003
OPTO TRX SFP L4.2
L4.2
1AB 19636 0002
OPTO TRX SFP I16.1
I16.1
1AB 19637 0002
I16.1DDM
1AB 19637 0005
S16.1
1AB 19637 0001
S16.1DDM
1AB 19637 0006
OPTO TRX SFP L16.1
L16.1
1AB 19637 0004
OPTO TRX SFP L16.2
L.16.2
1AB 19637 0003
S16ADDM
1AB 19637 0007
100B LX
1AB 21471 0001

NAME
ACRONYM
Note
B&W SFP MODULES

OPTO TRX SFP S1.1
OPTO TRX SFP S1.1 W/DDM
OPTO TRX SFP L1.1
OPTO TRX SFP S4.1 DDM
OPTO TRX SFP I16.1 DDM

OPTO TRX SFP S16.1
OPTO TRX SFP S16.1 ANYRATE

DDM
OPTO TRX SFP 100 BASE LX
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX DDM
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX DDM
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFPZX
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC MM DDM
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC SM DDM
1GbELX
1AB 18728 0001
1GbELXDDM
1AB 18728 0031
1GbESX
1AB 18728 0002
1GbESXDDM
1AB 18728 0033
1GbEZX
1AB 18728 0028
FC/2FCmm
1AB 18728 0037
FC/2FCsm
1AB 18728 0038
XI641
1AB 21454 0001
10GBaseS
1AB 21454 0002
XS642B
1AB 21728 0001
[26]
B&W XFP MODULES

XFP I64.1/10GBE BASE L
XFP 10GBE BASE S
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XFP S64.2B/10GBE BASE E
ED
[[27]]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
91 / 554
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CWDM SFP MODULES

CWDM 1470NM PIN SFP
CWP147
1AB 19634 0001
CWDM 1490NM PIN SFP
CWP149
1AB 19634 0002
CWDM 1510NM PIN SFP
CWP151
1AB 19634 0003
CWDM 1530NM PIN SFP
CWP153
1AB 19634 0004
CWDM 1550NM PIN SFP
CWP155
1AB 19634 0005
CWDM 1570NM PIN SFP
CWP157
1AB 19634 0006
CWDM 1590NM PIN SFP
CWP159
1AB 19634 0007
CWDM 1610NM PIN SFP
CWP161
1AB 19634 0008
CWDM 1470NM APD SFP
CWA147
1AB19635 0001
CWDM 1490NM APD SFP
CWA149
1AB 19635 0002
CWDM 1510NM APD SFP
CWA151
1AB 19635 0003
CWDM 1530NM APD SFP
CWA153
1AB 19635 0004
CWDM 1550NM APD SFP
CWA155
1AB 19635 0005
CWDM 1570NM APD SFP
CWA157
1AB 19635 0006
CWDM 1590NM APD SFP
CWA159
1AB 19635 0007
CWDM 1610NM APD SFP
CWA161
1AB 19635 0008
ED
[28]
[29]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
92 / 554

NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
DWDM SFP MODULES

OPTO TRX SFP DWDM CH600
DWA600
1AB 32141 0003
DWA590
1AB 32141 0004
DWA580
1AB 32141 0005
DWA570
1AB 32141 0006
DWA550
1AB 32141 0008
DWA540
1AB 32141 0009
DWA530
1AB 32141 0010
DWA520
1AB 32141 0011
DWA500
1AB 32141 0013
DWA490
1AB 32141 0014
DWA480
1AB 32141 0015
DWA470
1AB 32141 0016
DWA450
1AB 32141 0018
DWA440
1AB 32141 0019
DWA430
1AB 32141 0020
DWA420
1AB 32141 0021
DWA380
1AB 32141 0025
DWA370
1AB 32141 0026
DWA360
1AB 32141 0027
DWA350
1AB 32141 0028
DWA330
1AB 32141 0030
DWA320
1AB 32141 0031
DWA310
1AB 32141 0032
DWA300
1AB 32141 0033
DWA280
1AB 32141 0035
DWA270
1AB 32141 0036
DWA270
1AB 32141 0036
DWA250
1AB 32141 0038
DWA230
1AB 32141 0040
DWA220
1AB 32141 0041
DWA210
1AB 32141 0042
DWA200
1AB 32141 0043
ED
[30]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
93 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH,

1 FC 1300nm stop gap) BASIC
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000SX, 1 FC

850nm stop gap) BASIC
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
SFP STM16 CWDM 1470NM

PIN BASIC (35 Km typ)
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

APD BASIC (75 Km typ)
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
ED
Note
NAME
[31]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
94 / 554

NAME
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
MULTIPLEXERS
1x8 Mux/Demux 300 380 + EXP
+ SPV
1x8Mux/Demux 300380+EXP
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
3AL 86615 AA
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
3AL 86615 AJ
1x8 Mux/Demux 200280
OMDX8100_M_L2
3AL 86615 AB
OMDX8100_M_S1
3AL 86615 AC
OMDX8100_M_S2
3AL 86615 AD
OADM 8 CH 300380 + SPV
OADM8100_M_L1_S
3AL 86637 AA
OADM8100_M_L2_S
3AL 86637 AB
OADM8100_M_S1_S
3AL 86637 AC
OADM8100_M_S2_S
3AL 86637 AD
OADM4100_M_ch2023_S
3AL 86637 BC
OADM4100_M_ch2528_S
3AL 86637 BD
OADM4100_M_ch3033_S
3AL 86637 BA
OADM4100_M_ch3538_S
3AL 86637 BB
OADM4100_M_ch4245_S
3AL 86637 BG
OADM4100_M_ch4750_S
3AL 86637 BH
OADM4100_M_ch5255_S
3AL 86637 BE
OADM4100_M_ch5760_S
3AL 86637 BF
OADM2100_M_3031_S
3AL 86778 AB
OADM2100_M_3233_S
3AL 86778 AC
OADM2100_M_3536_S
3AL 86778 AD
OADM2100_M_3738_S
3AL 86778 AE
OADM2100_M_4748_S
3AL 86778 AF
[32]
8
2;3;4;5; [33]
6;12;13
;22
[[34]]
2 3 4 5 [35]
2;3;4;5;
6;12;13
[36]
;22
2;3;4;5;
2
345
[37]
6;12;13
[[36]]
;22
2;3;4;5;
[[38]]
6;12;13
; ;
;22
2;3;4;5;
2
345
6;12;13 [39]
;22
OADM 1 CH 300 + SPV
OADM1100_M_30_S
3AL 86777 AJ
OADM 1 CH 310 + SPV
OADM1100_M_31_S
3AL 86777 AK
OADM 1 CH 320 + SPV
OADM1100_M_32_S
3AL 86777 AL
OADM 1 CH 330 + SPV
OADM1100_M_33_S
3AL 86777 AM
OADM 1 CH 350 + SPV
OADM1100_M_35_S
3AL 86777 AN
OADM 1 CH 360 + SPV
OADM1100_M_36_S
3AL 86777 AP
OADM 1 CH 370 + SPV
OADM1100_M_37_S
3AL 86777 AQ
OADM 1 CH 380 + SPV
OADM1100_M_38_S
3AL 86777 AR
OADM 1 CH 470 + SPV
OADM1100_M_47_S
3AL 86777 BE
OADM 1 CH 480 + SPV
OADM1100_M_48_S
3AL 86777 BF
MuxDemux 13101550+SPV
SPV_F_1310_1550
3AL 86779 AA
1510 SPV COUPLER SMALL
SPV_F_C
3AL 86779 BA
16
CMDX2
3AL 97654 AB
2F 8CH MDX2 W/ 1310 FILTER

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
ED
2;3;12;
[40]
13;22
2835
[41]
3845
2;3;4;5;
6;12;13 [42]
;22
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
95 / 554
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
4; 5;
12; 13;
20; 21;
22; 23
[43]
1 24
1;
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
OFA +17 dBm (22/9)
OAC1
3AL 86703 AA
OFA +17 dBm (28/9)
OAC1_L
3AL 86703 AB
OFA +17 dBm (22/9)
OAC2
3AL 86703 AC
OFA +17 dBm (28/9)
OAC2_L
3AL 86703 AD
CONTROLLER
ESC (Equip. and Shelf Controller)
ESC/2
FLASH CARD 80 MB
SPVM + OW
3AL 86661 AA
ESC
3AL 86661 AB
MEMDEV
1AB 15205 0001
[44]
[45]
[46]
2;16;18 [47]
20; 22;
[48]
23
26
[49]
SPVM2
3AL 86606 AB
SPVM_H
3AL 86606 AC
LAN_Q or LAN_I
3AL 86653 AA
Housekeeping card
HK
3AL 86668 AA
36
[50]
Alarm Card
RAI
3AL 87009 AA
37
[51]
UAC (User Access Card)
UIC
3AL 86654AA
46;47
[52]
OSM_C (Monitoring Card)
OSMC
3AL 86893AA
2;12;
13;23
[53]
SPVM_H
LAC (LAN Access card)
SWITCHING PROTECTION
Passive optical protect. module
OPC
3AL 86708 AA
[54]
Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC
OPC
3AL 86708 AB
[55]
SMOPC CONNECTORS
OPC
3AL 86708 AC
MMOPC CONNECTORS
OPC
3AL 86708 AD
MM_OPC_850
OPC
3AL 95113 AA
[58]
OMSP
3AL 97541 AA
[59]
OMS PROTECTION
16
28 >35 [56]
28>35
38>45 [57]
POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply Card
PSC
3AL 86652 AA
25;48
[60]
Power Supply Card
PSC3
3AL 86652 AB
25;48
[61]
FANS
Fan Card
FANC
3AL 86625 AA
49
CO ENH FAN MODULE
FANC
3AL 86625 AB
49
CO NODUST FILTER
3AL 86633 AA
49
CO METALLIC GRID FILTER
3AL 95106 AA
49
[62]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE

DCM5
DCM5
1AB 15169 0013
DCM10
DCM10
1AB 15169 0007
DCM15
DCM15
1AB 15169 0014
DCM20
DCM20
1AB 15169 0008
DCM30
DCM30
1AB 15169 0009
DCM40
DCM40
1AB 15169 0010
DCM60
DCM60
1AB 15169 0011
DCM80
DCM80
1AB 15169 0012
ED
[63]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
96 / 554

NAME

NAME
Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC
Alarm chain cable
HK user cable
ANSI & NEBS installation kit
1696MS Optinex installation kit
KIT Optical kit 8channel
Jumper kit 4 lambda OADM
Optical kit 4xANY intrashelf
Opt. kit 4xANY intrashelf Prot
Air deflector ETSI
UAC user cable
Opto jumper SMF MU/PCSC/
PC L = 3MT
SFP module extractor kit
KIT OPC connection SM
KIT OPC connection MM
Jumper SM MU/PCLC/PC cable
KITCommon optical amplif.
KITCommon optical not amplif
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WLA PROTECTED KIT

Dummy plate 4TE for PBA
Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY
Opto atten MU/PC 1dB plug type
JUMPER SM MU/MU CABLE
2 MM 810 MM
2 MM 500 MM
2 MM 650 MM
ED
ANV
Max
Part Number
Q.ty
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
1AB 16271 0006

2
3AL 86750 AA
1
3AL 86751 AA
1
3AL 86725 AA
1
3AL 86772 AA
1
3AL 95184 AA
2
3AL 86827 AA
2
3AL 86863 AA
4
3AL 86864 AA
4
3AN 51293 AA
3
3AL 86753 AA
1
ACRONYM
SLOT
Note
[64]
[65]
[66]
[67]
[68]
[69]
[70]
[71]
[72]
[73]
1AB 1675400010
16
[74]
3AL 81728 AAAA

3AL 95185 AAAA
3AL 95186 AAAA
1AB 18577 0004
3AL 95136 AAAA
3AL 95137 AAAA
1
8
8
16
1
1
[75]
[76]
[77]
[78]
[79]
[80]
8DG 17477 AA
3AN 50555 AA
3AN 50556 AA
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
1AB 20480 0001
1AB 20480 0002
1AB 20480 0003
1AB 20480 0004
1AB 20480 0005
1AB 20480 0006
1AB 20480 0007
1AB 20480 0008
1AB 20480 0009
1AB 20480 0010
1AB 20480 0011
1AB 20480 0012
1AB 20480 0013
1AB 20480 0014
1AB 20480 0015
1AB 20480 0016
1
22
22
1AB 18240 0042
1AB 18240 0050
[81]
1AB 18240 0013
[82]
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
97 / 554
1AB 18240 0012
[83]
1AD 03860 0002
[84]
[85]
SOFTWARE
Table 9. 1696MS explanatory notes
Note
[1]
[2]
It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel. Up to four subracks can be housed in an ETSI and
NEBS compliant rack
Backpanel able to transmit 10G data, able to link two adjacent OCC10s
[3]
It is a universal bidirectional multiclock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates
(from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protection, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required
[4]
3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power
[5]
It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP modules (S1.1,
L1.1, L1.2, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2, S16.1, I16.1, L16.1, L16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC...)
10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder,
compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals
any STM64/OC192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and nonSDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)

G.709 10Gbps transponder, designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. The client interface
is a B&W XFP module (some types available), accepting the following client signals
9.953Gbps (STM64/OC192 to serve as UNI and nonSDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
10.709 Gbps (NNI), future rel.
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Explanation
ED
OCC10 board with improved optical performances (with respect to ref. [6]) of non amplified transmissions in order to reach 80 Km
CWDM version for 10Gbps line. It can be connected to the 1530nm or 1550nm port of CMDX2
Multirate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical channels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
Multirate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125>2.7Gbps range) carrying one protected optical channel.
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
Multirate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical channels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM, CWDM SFPs
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM or CWDM SFPs
TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100Mbps1.25 Gbps) into a B&W
(@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM16/OC48) compliant.
It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps
interface is I16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 23; 45;..)
Remote application. It differs from the above 4xANY board (see point [14]) only for the optical
2.5Gbps interface: it is S16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S16.1; 2 Km for
I16.1)
To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the end of Alcatel
code must be:
4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge

HF850_Drawer
3AL 86870 AAAG
4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge

LF850_Drawer
3AL 86869 AAAG
4xANY Host w/ S16.1 i/f

4xANY_S
3AL 86872 AAAC
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
98 / 554


2 MM 650 MM
REMOVAL
TOOL
MU/PC
PLUG_IN ATTEN.

Note
Explanation
[17]
TDM concentrator with an STM16 (ISL type) B&W or CWDM or DWDM aggregate optical interface,
provided by an SFP module. In the releases prior to R2.2A, it is necessary to use the 4xAny_P functional variant 3AL95063AB when the signal delivered by the 4xAny_P goes through a SDH network
[18]
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM1/OC3 and STM4/OC12.
If it is set as STM1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM4,
up to three drawers can be housed. STM1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM4 drawers
can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV.
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Gigabit Ethernet, FICON and FC
Up to two high frequency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board
1nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four
low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
2nd window plugin electrical cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video signal at 270
Mbps. Up to four drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
Allow to manually adjust the optical power budget. Each MVAC board includes two VOAs
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
STM1/4/16, GBE, FE, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... B&W SFP optical modules; they can be fitted in
MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 (client side) and 4xANY_P (aggregate side, STM16 only) boards (refer to
Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
[27]
10GbE B&W XFP optical modules; they can be fitted in OCC10, client side (refer to Figure 61. on
page 139 for XFP placing)
PIN or Bronze CWDM SFPs (STM16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
APD or Silver CWDM SFPs (STM16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
DWDM SFPs (STM16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side (refer
to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
BASIC SFPs are shorterreach variants of standard GBE and CWDM SFP optical plugin modules;
they can be fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots
4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without
amplifiers
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when
amplifiers are used
[34]
8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only
Allows to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (3038)/L2 (2028)/S1 (5260)/S2 (4250)
band. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only.
Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only.
[35]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[36]
[37]
[38]
ED
Allows to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym. Slots 4,5,6 are available
in master shelf only.
Allows to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym. Slots 4,5,6 are available
in master shelf only.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
99 / 554
Explanation
[39]
Allows to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band
channels. From 47 to 57 are short band channels. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only.
Allows to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm)
channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE
Allows to mux/demux a SPV/OSC (1510nm) channel and a 1310nm or 1550nm channel. This board
allows to supervise a CPE
8channel Mux/Demux for the 8 CWDM channels. It is also able to insert/extract the 1310nm OSC.
Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only
Doublestage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the 32 channels in C band. Slots 22 and 23 are
available in expansion shelves only. OAC1_L and OAC2_L provide long spans transmission. OAC2
and OAC2_L reduce power dissipation
[40]
[41]
[42]
[43]
[44]
It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities. It has to be fitted in expansion
shelves, too, to only perform the shelf controller function. Instead, in slot 24 it is only used to have
a backup of the slot 1 flash memory, in TL1 management case (North America)
[45]
New version of ESC recommended for greenfield deployments in R.22A and future
[46]
The flash card contains the equipment data base.

It must be equipped only on ESC board plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf
1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user
interfaces and the EOW (audio channel). Hosted in master shelf only.
The SPVM2 in slot 23 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX or OAC: it is dedicated to MS supervision. The other SPVMs are dedicated to up to 10 CPE links supervision (SPVM has 2 x SPV ports)
Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel
[47]
[48]
[49]
Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment:
plugged in slot #26 of the master shelf, it is used as LAN_Q to connect the NMS
plugged in slot #27, it is used as LAN_I to inter connect the expansion shelves.
The LAN board code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installation in slot 27 of the
extension shelf. Any variant of 3AL 86653AA may be used for LAN_Q in slot 26 of the master shelf
[50]
Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses
[51]
Fitted in master and expansion shelves, it is used for monitoring the rack alarms
[52]
Hosted in master shelf only, manages G.703 user channels. For any SPVM, two cards are required
[53]
[56]
The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card measures the power of each channel. Coupled with MVAC
provides automatic power equalization
SM optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config.) or OSNCP
(ring config) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCC boards and plugged below the main one.
MM optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. [54]), it manages the
HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm
SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. [54]
[57]
MM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref.[55]
[58]
MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver
[59]
Protects the OTS (path) between two NE by selecting (switching) the incoming multiplexed signal
[60]
PSCs work in 1+1 protection meaning that only one PSC is active at once
[61]
PSC3 is a Power Supply Card (evolution of PSC card for central office shelf)
[62]
It is equipped with three fans; an antidust filter has to be put just below the fans
[63]
Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in

the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be
placed either in the interstage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One
DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the (up to 32) 1696 channels
[54]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[55]
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
100 / 554

Note

Note
[64]
To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only
[65]
[66]
Allows the chain connection of the rack alarms, between the SUBD 9p and RJ45 connectors of two
RAI cards in two different shelves
Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF
[67]
Used for equipment installation in ANSI & NEBS rack
[68]
Used for equipment installation in OPTINEX rack
[69]
The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 transponders to the 8channel MUX/DEMUX (OMDX/OADM)
following the installation rules. 2 kits are needed to connect a shelf equipped with 16 transponders
The kit contains the fibers to connect 8 wavelenght adapters and SPVM to the 4channel MUX following the installation rules. Optimized solution can be ordered using single MUMU jumpers
Required to connect 4xANY HOST to MCC in the same shelf, following installation rules
[70]
[71]
[72]
[74]
Required to connect 4xANY HOST to the optical splitter (MCC protection) in the same shelf, following
the installation rules
Used to perform the (2Mbps and 64Kbps) AUX/service channels connection from the 50pin connector of the UIC card to the DDF
MUSC/PC jumper for plugin attenuator manager in ODF
[75]
Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3)
[76]
It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8).
It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 8 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with sixteen OCC10/MCC (8 + 8).
It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1
protection. 16 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 32 (16 + 16) 4xANY drawers in eigth 4xANY
Allows the common connection in amplified systems, like the Mux/Demux connection with OAC, connection between two stages of the same OAC, connection between two different OACs and extra or
passthrough channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the MuxDemux pair). For details
refer to the installation handbook
Allows the common connection in nonamplified systems, like the OSC channel (IN/OUT connector
of SPVM) and extra or passthrough channel connections (Extra IN/OUT connector of the MuxDemux pair). For details refer to the installation handbook
[73]
[77]
[78]
[79]
[80]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Explanation
[81]
Used to connect the OSMC to the the OMDX/OADM for monitoring
[82]
Used to connect the OSMC to the OAC monitoring points (stage1 IN/OUT, stage 2 IN/OUT)
[83]
Used to connect the OMDX/OADM to the OAC
[84]
Used to remove the opto attenuator plugin
[85]
Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operators Handbook
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
101 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.2.4 1696MS shelf front view
Figure 42. Example of Master shelf front view
Figure 43. Shelf front view with cover
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
102 / 554

2.3 1696MS_C (compact shelf) physical configuration

The 1696MS_C shelf is a Compact WDM architecture.
It is a compact 6 slots shelf with possible expansion to 3 compact shelves (1 master shelf plus 2 expansion
shelves).
It is dedicated to receive the units developped for the 1696MSPAN shelf.
As the 1696MS, the compact shelf has two redundant power feeds for 48V.
This architecture enables point to point and ring applications
up to 12 channels in LT configuration
up to 4 channels in OADM configuration

(colored or black and white) monitored by the SPVM board.
1696MS_C rack version powered from 48V DC voltage source from the rack connected to the Power
Supply Card.
Figure 44. 1696MS_C Rack version

1696MS_C table version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In a table version using, the operator should wear a wriststrap bracelet connected to the mechanical ground (available on the rear of the shelf) for each handling a board, optical connectors
or a part of the shelf.
Figure 45. 1696MS_C Table version with and without cover
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
103 / 554
It is very easy to use due its small size (6 unit slots versus 24 in the 1696MSPAN shelf)
Independent stand alone 1696MS_C shelf can be used
Units of the 1696MS_C are set horizontally
Up to 12 1696MS_C shelves can be set in a 2000 mm high ETSI rack, or a 2150 mm high ANSI
rack, or a 1950 mm high NEBS 2000 rack.
2.3.1 1696MS_C Empty shelf

2.3.1.1 1696MS_C Shelf organization
The 1696MS_C shelf is organized into three parts (one main part and two extensions parts), hosting 13
boards or unit slots:
the main part, which is the middle part and comprises the slots from 1 to 6; here are located the 285
mm high boards performing the elaboration of the signal.
This part hosts the equipment and shelf controller, up to 4 transponders, up to 2 TDM concentrators
(4xANY), one mux/demux for LT or two mux/dmux or OADM boards (east/west) for hub/OADM application, optical supervisory channel board (optimized application with SPVM_Half, that is a depopulated SPVM supporting one transceiver at 1510 nm instead of two, is possible for point to point and
spur configuration)...
the first extension part, which is the right part and comprises the slots from 7 to 12; here are located
the 88 mm high boards, herebelow listed
two redundant 48V power supply boards
one LAN access board for the CT or the EML (LAN_Q) connection
one housekeeping board with 8 x input access + 8 x output access (HK)
one remote alarms board (RAI)
one optical protection channel board (OPC) per protected channel
the second extension part, which is the left part and comprises slot 13, where are located the fans.
All the optical and electrical connectors are located on the front of the units to be easily accessed.
This chapter illustrates the physical structure, layout and composition, coding and partition of the shelf.
The shelf front view is illustrated herebelow, in Figure 47. on page 105 and in Figure 48. on page 107.
The units codes and partition are listed in Table 10. on page 109.
First extension part (slot 7 to 12)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Second extension part (slot 13)

Main part (slot 1 to 6)
Figure 46. 1696 MS_C Mechanical structure
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
104 / 554

Main features provided by the 1696MS_C shelf

2.3.1.2 1696MS_C Shelf dimensions

Shelf size:
the size of the 1696MS_C shelf is 446.2mm (19 width) x 274mm (depth with cover) x 132.4 mm
(heigth)
the depth is compliant with the 300 mm deep ETSI rack (no limitation in ANSI rack).
2.3.1.3 Rack partionning
In current release one master shelf and up to two expansion shelves are managed.
Slot 6
12
Slot 5
11
10
Slot 4
F A N _C
Slot 3
9
8
Slot 2
13
Slot 1
PSC
Ilink_S
PSC
SLAVE
Fiber drawer
MASTER
132.4
Slot 6
Ilink_M
Slot 5
Slot 3
13
PSC
11
10
Slot 4
F A N _C
12
Slot 2
9
8
Slot 1
ESC
300
LAN_Q
PSC
88
19(446.2 mm)
dark boards are mandatory
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 47. 1696 MS_C Main shelf board arrangement
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
105 / 554
The board composition and placement of a shelf respects some constraints at the hardware, software and
functional levels.
If general rules are followed, a certain number of standard configurations can be obtained in which boards
can be exchanged without functionality loss.
The main configurations available are:
OADM 1/2/4 channels (protected backtoback) configuration with/without OPC
up to 12 channels Line Terminal
Remote 4xANY + protected MCC
Remote 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
SPVM Manager
2 channels Line Terminal (MCC + 4xANY)...
Local spur (up to two x 4xANY to save cost of one supervision unit).
Amplified configurations are allowed, by means of OAC2 and OAC2_L.

The 4xANY drawers 1+1 protection is also allowed, by means of OPCs.
2.3.2.1 1696MS_C configuration constraints
Optical SubNetwork Channel Protection requires:
Transponder boards (MCC, OCC10) must be placed in consecutive slots (slots [2,3] or [4,5],
4xANY(_S/_P) unit must be placed in a 2slots space beginning with an even address ([2,3] or [4,5]);
if two 4xANY are used, they must be installed in in slots ([2,3] and [4,5]);
if 4xANY is associated with a MCC all the board are put in a single compact shelf.
Each Optical Protecting Channel board (OPC) must be placed in one of the two slots, located on the
right side of the corresponding MCC/OCC10 pair (e.g.: the OPC in slot 9 or 10 corresponds to the
slots 23). The MCC/OCC10 on the left of the OPC is the main one and the other is the MCC/OCC10
in protection (e.g.: OPC in slot 9 implies main MCC/OCC10 in slot 3 and protecting MCC/OCC10 in
slot 2).
When protecting 4xANY client signals, the OPCs have to be fitted in the four slots located on the right
of the 4xANY couple; the OPC in slot 8 protects drawer #2, the OPC in slot 9 protects drawer #1, the
OPC in slot 10 protects drawer #3, the OPC in slot 11 protects drawer #4;
When expansion shelves are used
in slot 6 of the master shelf have to be plugged the ILink_M board
in slot 1 of each expansion shelf have to be plugged the ILink_S board

There is no specific NE configuration. The behavior is always the same. The OADM is equivalent to the backto back terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
106 / 554

2.3.2 1696MS_C Shelf configuration rules

2.3.2.2 1696MS_C typical shelf configuration

Figure 48. shows a typical configuration of an equipped 1696MS_C Master shelf and Table 10. resumes
the possibilities that satisfy the configuration constraints.
Figure 48. Typical 1696MS_C equipped shelf

For Hardware and/or Software organization, boards are located on dedicated slots.
The position of the boards on the 1696MS_C shelf are:
ESC board (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of master shelf

Ilink_M card (mandatory, only when expansion shelves are used): dedicated slot 6 of master shelf
Ilink_S card (mandatory): dedicated slot 1 of each expansion shelf
PSC/PSC2 cards : dedicated small slots (mandatory equipped) 7 and 12
SPVM cards slot #4, #5, or #6
SPVM in slot #4 must be provisioned to supervise the multiplexed signal
SPVM boards set in slot #5 and #6 are dedicated to an application with no multiplexed signal
LAN_Q card (mandatory): dedicated small slot 8
HK card can be installed in small slot 11
RAI card can be installed in small slots 9 or 10
OAC2 and OAC2_L cards can be installed in slot 2, 3
FAN_C card (mandatory): dedicated slot 13.
Mandatory boards are:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ESC board in slot 1 of master shelf

LAN_Q card in slot 8 of master shelf
Ilink_M card in slot 6 of the master shelf (only when expansion shelves are used)
Ilink_S card in slot 1 of each expansion shelf
PSC/PSC2 cards in slots 7 and 12
FAN_C card in slot 13.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
107 / 554
In Table 10. on page 109 of the following paragraph are listed, named and coded the items and units making up the Equipment Shelf (see paragraph 2.2.3.1 on page 86).
Furthermore, for any item the position and the maximum quantity that can be allocated inside the equipment, are indicated too.
Such table reports the following information :
Item Name
The Acronym identifying the units
ANV part numbers (3ALXXXXX XXXX)
Maximum quantity per each shelf
Position of the unit inside the equipment. Refer to Figure 47. on page 105 for slot numbering.
Number of explanatory notes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 11. on page 121 reports the explanatory notes.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
108 / 554

2.3.3 1696MS_C Part list

2.3.3.1 1696MS_C shelf and boards designation and reference
Table 10. 1696MS_C boards and units list
NAME
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
2 >6
2>6
2 >6
2>6
Note
MECHANICAL STRUCTURE
1696MS_C shelf
3AL 86799 AA
TRIBUTARIES
Multirate Channel Card
Enhanced Multirate Channel Card
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
ED
MCC1 192.0192.1
3AL 86603 AA
MCC1 192.2192.3
3AL 86603 AB
MCC1 192.5192.6
3AL 86603 AC
MCC1 192.7192.8
3AL 86603 AD
MCC1 193.0193.1
3AL 86603 AE
MCC1 193.2193.3
3AL 86603 AF
MCC1 193.5193.6
3AL 86603 AG
MCC1 193.7193.8
3AL 86603 AH
MCC1 194.2194.3
3AL 86603 AL
MCC1 194.4194.5
3AL 86603 AM
MCC1 194.7194.8
3AL 86603 AN
MCC1 194.9195.0
3AL 86603 AP
MCC1 195.2195.3
3AL 86603 AQ
MCC1 195.4195.5
3AL 86603 AR
MCC1 195.7195.8
3AL 86603 AS
MCC1 195.9196.0
3AL 86603 AT
MCC2 192.0192.1
3AL 86603 BA
MCC2 192.2192.3
3AL 86603 BB
MCC2 192.5192.6
3AL 86603 BC
MCC2 192.7192.8
3AL 86603 BD
MCC2 193.0193.1
3AL 86603 BE
MCC2 193.2193.3
3AL 86603 BF
MCC2 193.5193.6
3AL 86603 BG
MCC2 193.7193.8
3AL 86603 BH
MCC2 194.2194.3
3AL 86603 BL
MCC2 194.4194.5
3AL 86603 BM
MCC2 194.7194.8
3AL 86603 BN
MCC2 194.9195.0
3AL 86603 BP
MCC2 195.2195.3
3AL 86603 BQ
MCC2 195.4195.5
3AL 86603 BR
MCC2 195.7195.8
3AL 86603 BS
MCC2 195.9196.0
3AL 86603 BT
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
109 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Enhanched
E
h
h d
Multirate
M lti t
CH
19x x00 19x x00 with SFP optical
19x.x0019x.x00
modules
ED
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
MCC3 192.0192.1
3AL 95150 AA
MCC3 192.2192.3
3AL 95150 AB
MCC3 192.5192.6
3AL 95150 AC
MCC3 192.7192.8
3AL 95150 AD
MCC3 193.0193.1
3AL 95150 AE
MCC3 193.2193.3
3AL 95150 AF
MCC3 193.5193.6
3AL 95150 AG
MCC3 193.7193.8
3AL 95150 AH
MCC3 194.2194.3
3AL 95150 AJ
MCC3 194.4194.5
3AL 95150AK
MCC3 194.7194.8
3AL 95150 AL
MCC3 194.9195.0
3AL 95150 AM
MCC3 195.2195.3
3AL 95150 AN
MCC3 195.4195.5
3AL 95150 AP
MCC3 195.7195.8
3AL 95150 AQ
MCC3 195.9196.0
3AL 95150 AR
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
2 >6
2>6
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
110 / 554

NAME
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
OCC10 CH 192.000
OCC10 192.000
3AL 86834 AA
OCC10 CH 192.100
OCC10 192.100
3AL 86834 AB
OCC10 CH 192.200
OCC10 192.200
3AL 86834 AC
OCC10 CH 192.300
OCC10 192.300
3AL 86834 AD
OCC10 CH 192.500
OCC10 192.500
3AL 86834 AE
OCC10 CH 192.600
OCC10 192.600
3AL 86834 AF
OCC10 CH 192.700
OCC10 192.700
3AL 86834 AG
OCC10 CH 192.800
OCC10 192.800
3AL 86834 AH
OCC10 CH 193.000
OCC10 193.000
3AL 86834 AL
OCC10 CH 193.100
OCC10 193.100
3AL 86834 AM
OCC10 CH 193.200
OCC10 193.200
3AL 86834 AN
OCC10 CH 193.300
OCC10 193.300
3AL 86834 AP
OCC10 CH 193.500
OCC10 193.500
3AL 86834 AQ
OCC10 CH 193.600
OCC10 193.600
3AL 86834 AR
OCC10 CH 193.700
OCC10 193.700
3AL 86834 AS
OCC10 CH 193.800
OCC10 193.800
3AL 86834 AT
OCC10 CH 194.200
OCC10 142.200
3AL 86834 BA
OCC10 CH 194.300
OCC10 194.300
3AL 86834 BB
OCC10 CH 194.400
OCC10 194.400
3AL 86834 BC
OCC10 CH 194.500
OCC10 194.500
3AL 86834 BD
OCC10 CH 194.700
OCC10 194.700
3AL 86834 BE
OCC10 CH 194.800
OCC10 194.800
3AL 86834 BF
OCC10 CH 194.900
OCC10 194.900
3AL 86834 BG
OCC10 CH 195.000
OCC10 195.000
3AL 86834 BH
OCC10 CH 195.200
OCC10 195.200
3AL 86834 BL
OCC10 CH 195.300
OCC10 195.300
3AL 86834 BM
OCC10 CH 195.400
OCC10 195.400
3AL 86834 BN
OCC10 CH 195.500
OCC10 195.500
3AL 86834 BP
OCC10 CH 195.700
OCC10 195.700
3AL 86834 BQ
OCC10 CH 195.800
OCC10 195.800
3AL 86834 BR
OCC10 CH 195.900
OCC10 195.900
3AL 86834 BS
OCC10 CH 196.000
OCC10 196.000
3AL 86834 BT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
ED
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
2 >6
2>6
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
111 / 554
ANV
Part Number
3AL 95238 AA
3AL 95238 AC
3AL 95238 AE
3AL 95238 AG
3AL 95238 AN
3AL 95238 AQ
3AL 95238 AS
3AL 95238 BA
3AL 95238 BE
3AL 95238 BG
3AL 95238 BL
3AL 95238 BN
3AL 95238 BS
3AL 95238 CA
3AL 95238 CC

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ACRONYM
OCC10 _E
E
3AL 95238 CE
3AL 95238 CP
3AL 95238 CR
3AL 95238 CT
3AL 95238 DB
3AL 95238 DF
3AL 95238 DH
3AL 95238 DM
3AL 95238 DP
3AL 95238 DT
3AL 95238 EB
3AL 95238 ED
3AL 95238 EF
3AL 95238 EM
3AL 95238 EP
3AL 95238 ER
3AL 95238 ET
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.300 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.000 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.100 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH193.200 (1550)
OCC10_NO
AMPLIFIED
CH195.900 (1530)
ED
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
2 >6
2>6
2>6
2 >6
2>6

NAME
3AL 95313 AA
3AL 95313 AB
OCC10_NA
3AL 95313 AC
3AL 95313 AD
3AL 95314 AA
8DG 81002 AA
8DG 81002 AB
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
112 / 554

NAME
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
DUAL ENH WLA MODULE2X3R
WLA2M
3AL 97657 AA
WLA2M_OP
3AL 97657 AB
WLA3CD
3AL 97795 BA
11
WLA2CDOP
3AL 97795 BB
12
4xANY Host w/ I16.1 i/f
4xANY
3AL 86639 AA
4xANY_S
3AL 86872 AA
4xANY Host fully pluggable
4xANY_P
3AL 95063 AA
DUAL ENH WLA MODULE

2X3R W/ OPC
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARDSFP
DUAL C/DWLA3 CARDSFPOPC
SLOT
Note
9
2>6
2
>6
10
13,
14
15,
14
16,
14
2;4
2;4
3AL 86673 AA
3AL 95284 AA
LF_1310_2 Drawer
3AL 86674 AA
18
HF_1310 Drawer
3AL 86672 AA
19
LF_850 Drawer
3AL 86869 AA
20,
14
HF_850 Drawer
3AL 86870 AA
21,
14
3AL 81617 AA
22,
14
3AL 95267 AA
23
TRIBUTARY SUBSYSTEM (4xANY DRAWERS)

SDHSONET_1310
Drawer

4 X ANY Low speed cartridge
4 X ANY High speed optical cartridge
4 X ANY Low speed optical cartridge
4 X ANY High speed optical cartridge
4 X ANY Low speed plugin 1310
(OLI)
4 X ANY Electrical DV cartridge
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Max
Q.ty
ED
17
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
113 / 554
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
B&W SFP MODULES

OPTO TRX SFP S1.1
S1.1
1AB 19467 0001
S1.1DDM
1AB 19467 0004
L1.1
1AB 19467 0002
OPTO TRX SFP L1.2
L1.2
1AB 19467 0003
OPTO TRX SFP S4.1
S4.1
1AB 19636 0001
S4.1DDM
1AB 19636 0004
OPTO TRX SFP L4.1
L4.1
1AB 19636 0003
OPTO TRX SFP L4.2
L4.2
1AB 19636 0002
OPTO TRX SFP I16.1
I16.1
1AB 19637 0002
I16.1DDM
1AB 19637 0005
S16.1
1AB 19637 0001
S16.1DDM
1AB 19637 0006
OPTO TRX SFP L16.1
L16.1
1AB 19637 0004
OPTO TRX SFP L16.2
L.16.2
1AB 19637 0003
S16ADDM
1AB 19637 0007
100B LX
1AB 21471 0001
OPTO TRX SFP S1.1 W/DDM

OPTO TRX SFP L1.1
OPTO TRX SFP I16.1 DDM

OPTO TRX SFP S16.1
OPTO TRX SFP S16.1 ANYRATE

DDM
OPTO TRX SFP 100 BASE LX
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP LX DDM
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFP SX DDM
OPTO TRX 1.25GBE SFPZX
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC MM DDM
OPTO TRX SFP FC/2FC SM DDM
64
1GbELX
1AB 18728 0001
1GbELXDDM
1AB 18728 0031
1GbESX
1AB 18728 0002
1GbESXDDM
1AB 18728 0033
1GbEZX
1AB 18728 0028
FC/2FCmm
1AB 18728 0037
FC/2FCsm
1AB 18728 0038
XI641
1AB 21454 0001
X10GBaseS
1AB 21454 0002
XS642B
1AB 21728 0001
24
B&W XFP MODULES

XFP I64.1/10GBE BASE L
XFP 10GBE BASE S
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XFP S64.2B/10GBE BASE E
ED
16
25
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
114 / 554

NAME
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
CWDM SFP MODULES

CWDM 1470NM PIN SFP
CWP147
1AB 19634 0001
CWDM 1490NM PIN SFP
CWP149
1AB 19634 0002
CWDM 1510NM PIN SFP
CWP151
1AB 19634 0003
CWDM 1530NM PIN SFP
CWP153
1AB 19634 0004
CWDM 1550NM PIN SFP
CWP155
1AB 19634 0005
CWDM 1570NM PIN SFP
CWP157
1AB 19634 0006
CWDM 1590NM PIN SFP
CWP159
1AB 19634 0007
CWDM 1610NM PIN SFP
CWP161
1AB 19634 0008
CWDM 1470NM APD SFP
CWA147
1AB19635 0001
CWDM 1490NM APD SFP
CWA149
1AB 19635 0002
CWDM 1510NM APD SFP
CWA151
1AB 19635 0003
CWDM 1530NM APD SFP
CWA153
1AB 19635 0004
CWDM 1550NM APD SFP
CWA155
1AB 19635 0005
CWDM 1570NM APD SFP
CWA157
1AB 19635 0006
CWDM 1590NM APD SFP
CWA159
1AB 19635 0007
CWDM 1610NM APD SFP
CWA161
1AB 19635 0008
ED
26
27
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
115 / 554
NAME
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DWA600
1AB 32141 0003
DWA590
1AB 32141 0004
DWA580
1AB 32141 0005
DWA570
1AB 32141 0006
DWA550
1AB 32141 0008
DWA540
1AB 32141 0009
DWA530
1AB 32141 0010
DWA520
1AB 32141 0011
DWA500
1AB 32141 0013
DWA490
1AB 32141 0014
DWA480
1AB 32141 0015
DWA470
1AB 32141 0016
DWA450
1AB 32141 0018
DWA440
1AB 32141 0019
DWA430
1AB 32141 0020
DWA420
1AB 32141 0021
DWA380
1AB 32141 0025
DWA370
1AB 32141 0026
DWA360
1AB 32141 0027
DWA350
1AB 32141 0028
DWA330
1AB 32141 0030
DWA320
1AB 32141 0031
DWA310
1AB 32141 0032
DWA300
1AB 32141 0033
DWA280
1AB 32141 0035
DWA270
1AB 32141 0036
DWA260
1AB 32141 0037
DWA250
1AB 32141 0038
DWA230
1AB 32141 0040
DWA220
1AB 32141 0041
DWA210
1AB 32141 0042
DWA200
1AB 32141 0043
ED

DWDM SFP MODULES
28
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
116 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NAME
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000LX/LH,

1 FC 1300nm stop gap) BASIC
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
1.25GBE SFP (Gbe1000SX, 1 FC

850nm stop gap) BASIC
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
ED
Note
29
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
117 / 554
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
MULTIPLEXERS
1x8 Mux/Demux 300380 + EXP +
SPV
1x8Mux/Demux 300380+EXP
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
3AL 86615 AA
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
3AL 86615 AJ
OMDX8100_M_L2
3AL 86615 AB
OMDX8100_M_S1
3AL 86615 AC
OMDX8100_M_S2
3AL 86615 AD
OADM8100_M_L1_S
3AL 86637 AA
OADM8100_M_L2_S
3AL 86637 AB
OADM8100_M_S1_S
3AL 86637 AC
OADM8100_M_S2_S
3AL 86637 AD
OADM4100_M_ch2023_S
3AL 86637 BC
OADM4100_M_ch2528_S
3AL 86637 BD
OADM4100_M_ch3033_S
3AL 86637 BA
OADM4100_M_ch3538_S
3AL 86637 BB
OADM4100_M_ch4245_S
3AL 86637 BG
OADM4100_M_ch4750_S
3AL 86637 BH
OADM4100_M_ch5255_S
3AL 86637 BE
OADM4100_M_ch5760_S
3AL 86637 BF
OADM2100_M_3031_S
3AL 86778 AB
OADM2100_M_3233_S
3AL 86778 AC
OADM2100_M_3536_S
3AL 86778 AD
OADM2100_M_3738_S
3AL 86778 AE
OADM2100_M_4748_S
3AL 86778 AF
OADM1100_M_25_S
3AL 86777 AE
OADM1100_M_30_S
3AL 86777 AJ
OADM1100_M_31_S
3AL 86777 AK
OADM1100_M_32_S
3AL 86777 AL
OADM1100_M_33_S
3AL 86777 AM
OADM1100_M_35_S
3AL 86777 AN
OADM1100_M_36_S
3AL 86777 AP
OADM1100_M_37_S
3AL 86777 AQ
OADM1100_M_38_S
3AL 86777 AR
OADM1100_M_47_S
3AL 86777 BE
OADM1100_M_48_S
3AL 86777 BF
OADM1100_M_57_S
3AL 86777 BN
SPV_F_1310_1550
2 channels OADM with SPV card
1 channel OADM with SPV cards
Supervision
Filter
(SPV_F_1310_1550)
Supervision Filter card
card
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2F 8CH MDX2 W/ 1310 FILTER
30
3
31
456
4;5:6
32
4;5;6
33,
34,
34
35
4;5;6
36,
34
4;5;6
; ;
37
4;5;6
38
3AL 86779 AA
5;6
39
SPV_F_C
3AL 86779 BA
8>11
40
CMDX2
3AL 97654 AB
4;5;6
41
23
2,3
42
OPTICAL AMPLIFIER
OFA +17 dBm (22/9)
OAC2
3AL 86703 AC
OFA +17 dBm (28/9)
OAC2_L
3AL 86703 AD
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
118 / 554

NAME

NAME
ANV
Part Number
ACRONYM
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
1AB 15205 0001
45
Note
CONTROLLER
Equipment and Shelf Controller
ESC/2
FLASH CARD 80 MB
SPVM + OW
3AL 86661 AA
ESC
3AL 86661 AB
MEMDEV
43
44
SPVM2
3AL 86606 AB
4;5;6
46
SPVM_H
3AL 86606 AC
4;5;6
47
LAN_Q
3AL 86653 AA
48
Housekeeping card
HK
3AL 86668 AA
11
49
Rack Alarm Interface board
RAI
3AL 87009 AA
9;10
50
ILINK MASTER
ILINK_M
3AL 86805 AA
ILINK_SLAVE
ILINK_S
3AL 86808 AA
SPVM_H
LAN Access card
51
SWITCHING PROTECTION
Optical Protection Card
OPC
3AL 86708 AA
52
Dual MM Optical Splitter OPC
OPC
3AL 86708 AB
53
SMOPC CONNECTORS
OPC
3AL 86708 AC
MMOPC CONNECTORS
OPC
3AL 86708 AD
MM_OPC_850
OMS PROTECTION
8 >11
8>11
54
55
OPC
3AL 95113 AA
56
OMSP
3AL 97541 AA
57
POWER SUPPLY
PSC_C
PSC2
3AL 86888 AA
7;12
58
Power Management Unit
PMU
3AL 86825 AA
59
3AL 95239 AA
60
FAN_C
3AL 86802 AA
13
61
3AN 51151 AA
13
Batteries for PMU

Power supply BOX
3AL 95210 AA
FANS
COMPACT FAN
COMPACT DUST FILTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OPTICAL COMPENSATION DEVICE

DCM5
DCM5
1AB 15169 0013
DCM10
DCM10
1AB 15169 0007
DCM15
DCM15
1AB 15169 0014
DCM20
DCM20
1AB 15169 0008
DCM30
DCM30
1AB 15169 0009
DCM40
DCM40
1AB 15169 0010
DCM60
DCM60
1AB 15169 0011
DCM80
DCM80
1AB 15169 0012
ED
62
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
119 / 554
ACRONYM
ANV
Part Number
Max
Q.ty
SLOT
Note
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
Circuit breaker 15A 72VDC
1AB 16271 0006
63
HK user cable
3AL 95073 AA
64
1696MS_C ANSI install. kit
3AL 95101 AAAA
65
Kit for C_shelf install on ETSI rack
3AN 51124 AAAA
66
ILink cable
3AL 95179 AA
67
Cable from BOX to PSC/PSC2
3AL 95264 AA
68
SFP module extractor kit
3AL 81728 AAAA
69
1AB 18240 0049
70
1AB 18240 0004
1AB 18240 0007
3AL 95185 AAAA
72
KIT OPC connection MM
3AL 95186 AAAA
73
Jumper SM MU/PCLC/PC cable
1AB 18240 0004
74
WLA PROTECTED KIT
8DG 17477 AA
Dummy plate 4TE for PBA
3AN 50555 AA
Dummy plate 4TE for UTILITY
3AN 50556 AA
JUMPER SMF MU/MU CABLE

2MM 1700MM
JUMPER SMF MU/PCMU/PC
360MM
JUMPER SMF MU/PCMU/PC
450MM
KIT OPC connection SM
71
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
1AB 20480 0001
1AB 20480 0002
1AB 20480 0003
1AB 20480 0004
1AB 20480 0005
1AB 20480 0006
1AB 20480 0007
1AB 20480 0008
1AB 20480 0009
1AB 20480 0010
1AB 20480 0011
1AB 20480 0012
1AB 20480 0013
1AB 20480 0014
1AB 20480 0015
1AB 20480 0016
JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 810
1AB 18240 0042
JumperSM MU/MU cable 2mm 500
1AB 18240 0050
REMOVAL
TOOL
PLUG_IN ATTEN.
1AD 03860 0002
MU/PC
75
76
SOFTWARE
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
120 / 554

NAME
Table 11. 1696MS_C explanatory notes

Note
1
It is the equipment shelf, including the back panel.
It is a universal bidirectional multiclock 3R transponder supporting all the most common bit rates
(from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps) and tunable over two coloured wavelenghts in C band. In case of protection, 2 adjacent MCCs and 1 x OPC are required
3R transponder supporting all the MCC functions (see [3]) plus VOA to adjust the output optical power
It performs all the MCC2 functions but the optical client interface is replaced by SFP modules (S1.1,
L1.1, L1.2, S4.1, L4.1, L4.2, S16.1, I16.1, L16.1, L16.2, CWDM, GbEthernet, FC, 2 FC...)
10Gbps Optical Channel Card designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. This transponder,
compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec, can be provisioned to accept the following client signals
any STM64/OC192 (9.953Gbps) to serve as UNI and nonSDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)

G.709 10Gbps transponder, designed for 3R transport of 10 Gbps native signals. The client interface
is a B&W XFP module (some types available), accepting the following client signals
9.953Gbps (STM64/OC192 to serve as UNI and nonSDH/SONET signals (10GbeWAN)
10.709 Gbps (NNI), future rel.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Explanation
18
ED
OCC10 board with improved optical performances (with respect to ref. 5) of non amplified transmissions in order to reach 80 Km
CWDM version for 10Gbps line. It can be connected to the 1530nm or 1550nm port of CMDX2
Multirate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical channels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W and/or CWDM SFPs
Multirate unit (discrete rates in the 0.125>2.7Gbps range) carrying two independent optical channels. It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM, CWDM SFPs
It is a double transponder in one slot. The four optical interfaces are B&W, DWDM or CWDM SFPs
TDM concentrator multiplexing any mix of up to four client signals (100Mbps1.25 Gbps) into a B&W
(@ 1310nm) 2.5 Gbps optical channel, SDH/SONET framing standard (STM16/OC48) compliant.
It is used with a MCC transponder which provides the coloured optic for WDM transmission. 2.5Gbps
interface is I16.1. It occupies two slots: the first slot is always an even position (i:e: 23; 45;..)
To take into account more stringent EMI requirement with the compact shelf using, the 4xANY and
4xANY_S, the end of Alcatel code must be:
4xANY High speed 850 nm cartridge

HF850_Drawer
3AL 86870 AAAG
4xANY Low speed 850 nm cartridge

LF850_Drawer
3AL 86869 AAAG

4xANY_S
3AL 86872 AAAC
It differs from the above 4xANY boards (see point [14]) only for the optical 2.5Gbps interface: it is
S16.1 type, allowing to cover a longer span (15 Km for S16.1; 2 Km for I16.1)
TDM concentrator with an STM16 (ISL type) B&W or CWDM or DWDM aggregate optical interface,
provided by an SFP module. In the releases prior to R2.2A, it is necessary to use the 4xAny_P functional variant 3AL95063AB when the signal delivered by the 4xAny_P goes through a SDH network
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting STM1/OC3 and STM4/OC12.
If it is set as STM1, up to four drawers can be housed in one 4xANY board; if it is set as STM4,
up to three drawers can be housed. STM1 drawers can be plugged on any slot. STM4 drawers
can be plugged only on ports #3 and #4; for 3 x STM4 configuration only, port #1 is available, too
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV.
Up to four low frequency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
121 / 554
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, DV
Up to four low frqeuency (FE, FDDI, ESCON, DV) drawers can be housed on any port of a 4xANY
Up to two high frqeuency drawers can be housed only on ports #3 and #4 of a 4xANY board
2nd window plugin cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video transport. Up to four
low frequency drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
2nd window plugin electrical cartridge for 4xANY concentrator, supporting Digital Video signal at 270
Mbps. Up to four drawers can be housed on any port of one 4xANY
STM1/4/16, GBE, FE, Fiber Channel (2FC, 1FC).... B&W SFP optical modules; they can be fitted in
MCC3, WLA2, WLA3 (client side) and 4xANY_P (aggregate side, STM16 only) boards (refer to
Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
10GbE B&W XFP optical modules; they can be fitted in OCC10, client side (refer to Figure 61. on
page 139 for XFP placing)
PIN or Bronze CWDM SFPs (STM16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
APD or Silver CWDM SFPs (STM16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P, WLA2 and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side and MCC3 user side (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
DWDM SFPs (STM16). They can be plugged in 4xANY_P and WLA3, aggregate/WDM side (refer
to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
BASIC SFPs are shorterreach variants of standard GBE and CWDM SFP optical plugin modules;
they can be fitted in 4xANY_P and/or MCC3 boards (refer to Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP placing)
8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter) and Supervision, for hub nodes. Slots
4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 channels hub extension is required without
amplifiers
31
8 x L1 ch Mux/Demux with expansion (LB/SB combiner/splitter), for hub nodes. Slots 4,5,6 are available in master shelf only. Starting MUX if 32 supervised channels hub extension is required when
amplifiers are used
32
8 x L2/S1/S2 ch Mux/Demux for hub nodes, used to upgrade the L1 Mux/Demux
33
Allow to add/drop 8 supervised channels in L1 (3038)/L2 (2028)/S1 (5260)/S2 (4250) band
34
Can be used also as MUX/DEMUX
35
SW managed in future releases
36
Allow to add/drop the 4 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
37
Allow to add/drop the 2 supervised channels shown in its own acronym
38
Allow to add/drop the supervised channel shown in its own acronym. From 25 to 38 are long band
channels: from 47 to 57 are short band channels
Allow to mux/demux a 1310nm channel, a 1550nm multiplexed signal and the SPV/OSC (1510nm)
channel. This board allows to supervise a CPE
Insert/extract the SPV channel to/from a 1310nm or 1550nm channel, allowing to supervise a CPE;
slot 8 is available in expansion shelf only
8channel Mux/Demux for the 8 CWDM channels. It is also able to insert/extract the 1310nm OSC.
39
40
41
42
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Explanation
43
Doublestage optical amplifiers able to amplify all the channels. OAC2 provides short span transmission. OAC2_L provides long spans transmission
It includes both the equipment and shelf controller functionalities
44
New version of ESC recommended for greenfield deployments in R.22A and future
45
The flash card contains the equipment data base
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
122 / 554

Note
Note

46
47
48
1510nm Optical Supervisory Channel card managing up to 2 x 1510nm OSC, 2 external 2Mps user
interfaces and the EOW (audio channel).
The SPVM2 board in slot 4 is exclusively linked to an OADM/OMDX. Another SPVM2 can be installed
whether in slot #5 or #6 but not in both slots #5 and #6
Depopulated SPVM with one 1510 nm laser, managing 1 x OSC channel
49
Provide the Q3 management interface allowing to the NMS to supervise the equipment. It is directly
connected to the manager
Hosted in master shelf only, provides 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses
50
Fitted in master and expansion shelves, it is used for monitoring the rack alarms
51
54
Allow the communication between the master shelf and the up to two expansion shelves, by means
of a direct connection from ILINK_M (slot 6 of master shelf) and ILINK_S (slot 1 of each exp. shelf)
Single Mode optical splitter with SMF MU/PC jumpers, performing passive OCh (linear config) or
OSNCP (ring) protection. It is linked to 2 adjacent MCC/OCCs and plugged below the main one
Multi Mode optical splitter. In addition to the features provided by the SM splitter (ref. 52), it manages
the HWF led on its front plate and the LOS alarm
SM optical splitter with connectors, having the same features of the SM splitter with jumpers (ref. 52)
55
MM optical splitter with connectors having the same features of the MM splitter with jumpers (ref. 53)
56
MM optical splitter with connectors, used for protection of 4xANY drawers with 850nm transceiver
57
Protects the OTS (path) between two NE by selecting (switching) the incoming multiplexed signal
58
PSC2 is an evolution of the PSC card for the compact shelf but supply less power. It works in 1+1
protection meaning that only one board is active at once; it can be plugged both in master and slave
shelves
59
External module transforming the alternative 110/230V voltage into a 48V continuous wave, thus allowing a 1696MS_C to be plugged directly to a power supply (avoiding the usage of a telecom rack
for feeding)
60
For power distribution; it is used only in table version
61
63
FAN module for compact shelf. It is equipped with two fans; an antidust filter has to be put on the
left side of the fans
Dispersion Compensating Modules providing chromatic dispersion compensation. The number in
the acronym refers to the SMF distance for which the module provides compensation. DCMs can be
placed either in the interstage of an optical amplifier or in the booster and preamplifier of a link. One
DCM simultaneously compensates for the chromatic dispersion of all the 1696 channels
To be used for external subrack power protection with optinex subrack only
64
Used to perform the HK connections from the 25p connector of the HK card to the DDF
65
Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ANSI rack; it includes power supply cable, alarm PDU cable...
66
Used for the 1696MS_C installation in ETSI rack; it includes power supply cable, RAITRU cable...
67
Used to connect Ilink_M (in master shelf) with ILink_S (one per each slave shelf)
68
Power supply cable used only in table version. It has to be connected between the BOX and the power supply card (input power connector)
Used to extract the SFP modules (plugged in 4xANY_P and MCC3)
52
53
62
69
70
71
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Explanation
72
ED
Used to connect each other boards located in different shelves; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant
MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC
Used to connect each other boards located in the same shelf; i.e. the OCC10/MCC with the relevant
MUX/DEMUX and/or the MUX/DEMUX with the OAC
It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a SM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2).
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
123 / 554
73
Explanation
75
It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect a MM OPC with a couple of transponders, providing 1+1
protection. 2 codes are needed in a fully equipped transponder shelf with four OCC10/MCC (2 + 2).
It includes the 4 jumpers allowing to connect an OPC with a couple of 4xANY drawers, providing 1+1
protection. 4 codes are needed in a fully equipped shelf with 8 (4 + 4) 4xANY drawers in two 4xANY
Used to remove the opto attenuator plugin
76
Details concerning the software part number are given in the Operators Handbook
74
2.3.3.2 FAN_C board

A particular board adapted for the compact shelf is available. It also enables to manage the Power Monitoring Unit to feed the shelf with the alternative mains supply.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 49. Fan_C board
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
124 / 554

Note
2.4 Equipment connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The external connections of the 1696MSPAN may fall into to following categories:
optical
management
maintenance
power supply
user interfaces
All the equipment connection are detailed in the Installation Handbook.

Next paragraph 2.5 on page 129 presents the front view of all the cards, where the connection points can
be identified.
In the following some general indication and reference to the relevant front view are given.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
125 / 554
2.4.1 Optical connections

2.4.1.1 Optical connections made with simple MU connectors
MCC1 and MCC2 boards, see Figure 52. on page 130
MCC3 board WDM side, see Figure 53. on page 131
OPC boards, see Figure 82. on page 160
SPVM boards, see Figure 73. on page 151 and Figure 74. on page 152
MVAC board, see Figure 59. on page 137.
OMSP board, see Figure 83. on page 161.

See Figure 50. The optical connections are made with simple MU connectors on:
Figure 50. Simple MU optical connector

2.4.1.2 Optical connections made with double MU connectors
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
See Figure 51. The optical connections are made with double MU connectors on:
OMDX and OADM boards, see para. 2.5.2 from page 140 to page 145Figure 70.
CMDX2 board, see Figure 70. to page 148
OAC boards, see Figure 71. on page 149
OCC10 and OCC10_NA boards, see Figure 54. on page 132
OCC10_E board WDM side, see Figure 55. on page 133
SPV_F boards, see Figure 68. on page 146 and Figure 69. on page 147
OSMC board, see Figure 75. on page 153.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
126 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 51. Double MU optical connector

2.4.1.3 Optical connections made with LC connectors
The optical connections are made with LC connectors on:
4xANY_P board client side, see Figure 58. on page 136
all the SFP modules (B&W, CWDM, DWDM, refer to Figure 60. on page 138), plugged on
4xANY_P aggregate side, see Figure 58. on page 136
MCC3 client side, see Figure 53. on page 131
WLA2 boards (CWLA2M and CWLA2M_OP) both on client and WDM sides, see Figure 56. on
page 134 and Figure 57. on page 135; only LC/PC connectors must be used, LC/APC connectors
must not be plugged in WLA2 boards
WLA3 boards (CWLA3CD and CWLA3CDOP) both on client and WDM sides, see Figure 56.
on page 134 and Figure 57. on page 135
all the XFP modules (B&W, refer to Figure 61. on page 139), plugged on
OCC10_E client side, see Figure 55. on page 133.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
127 / 554
2.4.2 Management and maintenance connections
The housekeeping alarm signal are available on the front panel connector of the HK board. It is a 25 pin
SUBD Female connector.
Note: 25 pin SUBD connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screws holes called pin 26 and pin 27.
See Figure 79. on page 157.
2.4.2.2 Rack Alarm Interfaces
The rack alarm interface signals are available on the two front panel connectors of the RAI board. These
two interfaces are:
A 9 pins SUBD female connector, which provides the interface between the master shelf and the
TRU (or PDU),
A 6 pins RJ11 connector, which provides the interface between two shelves.
2.4.2.3 LAN accesses
The LAN board provides LAN accesses on both RJ45 and BNC connectors.
* LAN access code 3AL 86653 AAAD or later must be used for LAN_I installations in slot 27.
Any variant of 3AL 86653AA may be used for LAN_Q in master slot 26.
2.4.2.4 Q3 Interface
At the ESC front panel, a 9pin SUBD female connector provides an access to an Q3 interface. It allows
to connect a Craft Terminal.
2.4.2.5 1696MS_C Intershelf link
The 15pin SUBD female connector, located on the front panel of the Ilink_M and Ilink_S boards, allows to link the SPI bus and the card presence signal from slave to master 1696MS_C shelves.
2.4.2.6 DBG Interface Connector
8pin RJ45 connectors at the frontpanel of the ESC board, are used for the DBG interface (factory
tests).
2.4.3 Power supply connections
Power supply voltage is distributed to the shelves on a 3 pin SUBD connector, in front panel of each PSC.
It is also available on the M1 and M2 connectors of the Power Monitoring Unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2.4.4 User interfaces

The user interfaces are available on the front panel connector of the UIC(s).
52 pin SCSI2 Female connector of the UIC.
Note: 50 pin SUBD connector is connected to GNDM by the 2 screws holes called pin 51 and pin 52.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
128 / 554

2.4.2.1 Housekeeping
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.5 Units front view
The following paragraphs show the units front views and the relevant access points (Leds, switches etc.)
together with legenda and meaning.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
129 / 554
MCC1
MCC2
1696MS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;
1696MS_C
SLOTS
8;9;10;11
14;15;16;17;
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
Power failure LED

Out Of Service LED
Abnormal Rx LED
Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware failure
LED
18;19;20;21
Access points description

Name
Extraction
handle
APSD restart
pushbutton
Meaning
This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of

Green led hardware failure (HWF)
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured by
Yellow led the software
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the
configuration. The LED is ON when
Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm
2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Rx alarm
User Rx
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the

1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm
Yellow led
2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Tx alarm
3) Shutdown of the WDM Tx
User Tx
Green /
Yellow /
Red led
WDM Rx
Hardware failure. The LED is

green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
(OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE
WDM Tx
User Rx User Reception: client input signal (from client)

User Tx User Transmission: client output signal (to client)
WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WDM Tx WDM Transmission: WDM output signal to

OMDX/OADM
N.B.
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led

on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while
this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart and
may have to be returned for factory repair.
N.B.
Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplugging the

card.
Optical safety
label
Extraction handle
Figure 52. MCC1 and MCC2 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
130 / 554

ACRONYM
3AL86603XX
2.5.1 Tributaries front view
MCC3
1696MS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
14;15;16;17;
1696MS_C
SLOTS
3AL95150AX

ACRONYM
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
Power failure LED

Out Of Service LED
Abnormal Rx LED
Abnormal Tx LED
Hardware failure
LED
18;19;20;21

Name
Extraction
handle
APSD restart
pushbutton
Meaning
This led is ON when the board is plugged in absence of

Green led hardware failure (HWF)
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side, depending on the
Yellow led 1) Add/Drop configuration: WDM Rx alarm or User Tx alarm
2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Rx alarm
User Tx (SFP)**
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side, depending on the

1) Add/Drop configuration: User Rx alarm or WDM Tx alarm
Yellow led
2) Passthrough configuration: WDM Tx alarm
3) Shutdown of the WDM Tx
green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Green / yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
Yellow / red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
Red led
(OR on the power supply alarms) or C_TYPE
User Rx (SFP)**
WDM Rx
User Tx User Transmission: client output signal (to client)*

User Rx User Reception: client input signal (from client)*
WDM Tx
WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from OMDX/OADM

OMDX/OADM
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
* Never unplug a board while this is on firmware download state.

Should this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be
returned for factory repair.
Optical safety
label
** User TX and User RX access points have to be equipped with

Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules, shown in
Figure 60. on page 138
Extraction handle
Figure 53. MCC3 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
131 / 554
Power failure Led

Out Of Service Led
Abnormal Rx Led
Abnormal Tx Led
Hardware failure
Led

Name
Extraction
handle
Meaning
Managed by hardware. This led is ON when the board is

Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF)
APSD restart
pushbutton

User Rx
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. Managed by SW.

The LED is ON when
(LOS/LOF_OTN/LOM_OTN)_WDM_RX
Yellow led
DEG_OUT_User_TX
The LED is ON only if the alarm is shown
User Tx
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by SW.

The LED is ON when SD or
(LOS_User_RX
Yellow led
(LOS/DEG_OUT/TOR)_WDM_TX
Green /
Yellow /
Red led
Hardware failure. Managed by SW. The LED is

green when the board is plugged, configur and without failure
(OR on the power supply alarms)
10Gbps Rx

WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from
OMDX/OADM
OMDX/OADM
10Gbps Tx
10 Gbps front panel link to substitute back panel links, when only
2.5Gb back panel is present
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
N.B.
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure

led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
** When the board is configured in loopback, the RXA and TXA
LEDs are always turned OFF.
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging/unplugging an OCC10 / OCC10_NA card
Figure 54. OCC10 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
132 / 554

OCC10
OCC10_NA
1696MS
1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
14;15;16;17; 2; 3; 4; 5; 6
18;19;20;21
3AL86834XX
ACRONYM
1696MS
1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;
OCC10_E
8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
OCC10_XFP_CWDM 14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21

ACRONYM
Extraction
handle

Name
Meaning
Managed by hardware. This led is ON when the board is

Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF)
Power failure Led

Out Of Service Led
Abnormal Rx Led
Abnormal Tx Led
Hardware failure
Led
APSD restart
pushbutton

Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. Managed by SW.
The LED is ON when
(LOS/LOF_OTN/LOM_OTN)_WDM_RX
Yellow led
DEG_OUT_User_TX
XFP absent
User Tx (XFP)**
User Rx (XFP)**
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. Managed by SW.
The LED is ON when SD or
LOS_User_RX
Yellow led
(LOS/DEG_OUT/TOR)_WDM_TX
XFP absent
WDM Rx
Hardware failure. Managed by SW. The LED is
WDM Tx
green when the board is plugged, configur and without failure
Green /
Yellow /
10Gbps Rx
Red led
WDM Rx WDM Reception: WDM input signal from
OMDX/OADM
OMDX/OADM
10Gbps Tx
10 Gbps front panel link to substitute back panel links, when only
2.5Gb back panel is present
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
N.B.
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure

led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
** User TX and User RX access points have to be equipped with
XFP optical modules, shown in Figure 61. on page 139
*** When the board is configured in loopback, the RXA and TXA
LEDs are always turned OFF.
Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging/unplugging an OCC10_E / OCC10_E_C card
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
Figure 55. OCC10_E front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
133 / 554
WLA2M
WLA3CD
1696MS
1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21
Extraction
handle
Power failure Led

Out Of Service Led
CH1 Abnormal Led
CH2 Abnormal Led
Hardware failure
(SPI) Led

Name
Green led
Yellow led
Yellow led
Yellow led
Green /
Red led
Meaning
Managed by hardware. The led is ON when the board is
plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF).
It is OFF when one of the local power supply is in failure
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured
by the software
Led ON means problem on channel 1, such as TX_FAULT
or CDR_UNLOCK
or CDR_UNLOCK
The led is GREEN when the board is properly equipped,
provisioned and Inservice.
It is RED before software configuring is finished and becomes GREEN when the card configuring is finished
CH2 WDM Transmission CH2 WDM output signal, to
OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
WDM Tx CH2**
WDM Rx CH2**
CH2 WDM Reception CH2 WDM input signal from

OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
CH1 WDM Transmission CH1 WDM output signal, to
OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
WDM Tx CH1**
WDM Rx CH1**
CH1 WDM Reception CH1 WDM input signal from

OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
User Tx CH2**
User Rx CH2 **
CH2 User Transmission CH2 B&W output signal, to client

CH2 User Reception CH2 B&W input signal, from client
User Tx CH1**
User Rx CH1 **
CH1 User Transmission CH1 B&W output signal, to client

Optical safety
label
CH1 User Reception CH1 B&W input signal, from client
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
* WLA3CD only. Never unplug a board while this is on firmware download state. Should this occur, the board will not
restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
** All the WDM and User access points have to be equipped
with SFP optical modules, shown in Figure 60. on page 138
N.B.
Extraction
handle
Figure 56. CWLA2M and CWLA3CD front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
134 / 554

ACRONYM

ACRONYM
WLA2M_OP
WLA3CD_OP
1696MS
1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;
8;9;10;11
2; 3; 4; 5; 6
14;15;16;17;
18;19;20;21
Extraction
handle
Power failure Led

Out Of Service Led
CH1 Abnormal Led
CH2 Abnormal Led
Hardware failure
(SPI) Led

Name
Meaning
Managed by hardware. The led is ON when the board is
Green led plugged in absence of hardware failure (HWF).
It is OFF when one of the local power supply is in failure
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not configured
Yellow led by the software
Yellow led or CDR_UNLOCK
COUP OUT
SPLIT IN

Yellow led or CDR_UNLOCK
The led is GREEN when the board is properly equipped,
provisioned and Inservice.
Green / It is RED before software configuring is finished and beRed led comes GREEN when the card configuring is finished
SPLIT OUT CH2

COUP IN CH2
SPLIT OUT CH1
COUP IN CH1
Coupler output B&W output signal to client
WDM Tx CH2*
WDM Rx CH2*
Splitter input B&W input signal from client

CH2 and CH1 splitter output signal, to User (B&W)
RxCH2 and User RxCH1
WDM Tx CH1*
WDM Rx CH1*
CH2 and CH1 coupler input signal, from User (B&W)

TxCH2 and User TxCH1
CH1 and CH2 WDM Transmission WDM output signals, to OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
User Tx CH2*
User Rx CH2 *
CH1 and CH2 WDM Reception WDM input signals

from OMDX, OADM or CMDX2
User Tx CH1*
User Rx CH1 *
CH2 and CH1 User Transmission B&W output signals, to

client
Optical safety
label
CH2 and CH1 User Reception B&W input signals, from

client
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
* WLA3CDOP only. Never unplug a board while this is on

firmware download state. Should this occur, the board will
not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair.
* All the WDM and User access points have to be equipped with
SFP optical modules, shown in Figure 60. on page 138
N.B.
Extraction
handle
Figure 57. CWLA2M_OP and CWLA3CDOP front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
135 / 554
Extraction
1696MS 1696MS_C
handle
SLOTS
SLOTS
4 X ANY 23; 45; 67;
89; 1011;
23;
Power presence LED
4 X ANY_S 1213; 1415;
Out Of Service LED
45
Abnormal reception LED
1617; 1819;
4 X ANY_P
Abnormal transmission LED
2021; 2223
Drawer 3
Power
presence
LED
Hardware failure LED

Tx Client
Rx signal
3
Drawer 1
Power presence LED

Name
Meaning
PWR
Managed by hardware. It is ON when the board is
Green led plugged and no power failure detected
OOS
This led is ON when the board is plugged but not conYellow led figured by the software
TXA
Yellow
led
Rx abnormal: problem on the receive side. ON means

SD drawers
ILOS on STM16 side.
Managed by software
Tx Client
Rx signal
4
Tx abnormal: problem on the transmit side. ON means Drawer 2

ILOS on drawer side.
Power
presence
Managed by software.
LED
Green when the board is plugged, configured and
without failure
Yellow when the board is plugged and in firmware
Client Tx
download state*
signal Rx
Red when one of the On Board power supply
2
(OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
N.B.
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug
a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board
** On 4xANY_P only, the aggregate(WDM interface is a B&W
(STM16) or CWDM or DWDM SFP optical module (refer to
Figure 60. on page 138)
N.B.
Make sure fibers are disconnected when plugging / unplugging the drawers or the 4xANY host card.
Tx STM16
aggregate
Rxsignal **
HAZARD LEVEL 1
LASER PRODUCT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Green /
Yellow /
Red led
Drawer 4
Power
presence
LED
3ALXXXXX X
RXA
Yellow
led
Client Tx
signal Rx
1
Extraction
handle
Figure 58. 4xANY front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
136 / 554

ACRONYM
MVAC
1696MS
SLOTS
4;5;6;7;8;9
1696MS_C
SLOTS
10;11;12;13
14;15;16;17;
Extraction
handle
3AL86892AA

ACRONYM
Not used
18;19;20;21

Name
VOA1 input
Meaning
PWR
Power and hardware failure led. It is
Green/Red Green when the board is plugged, configured and without
led
failure
Red when the card is plugged and in hardware failure
In1
In2
Input signals (cable connection 1 and 2) to be adjusted by

the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board
Out1
Out2
Output signals (cable connection 1 and 2) adjusted/optimized

by the 2 VOAs of the MVAC board
VOA1 output
VOA2 input
VOA2 output
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction
handle
Figure 59. MVAC front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
137 / 554
EQUIPPED ON PORT
B&W STM16 SFP: S16.1DDM; I16.1DDM

S16ADDM
4xANY_P (Aggregate side)

MCC3 (Client side)

ACRONYM
WLA2M(_OP) (WDM side)

WLA3CD(_OP) (WDM side)
B&W STM16 SFP: L16.1; L16.2

B&W STM1 SFP: S1.1DDM
L1.1; L1.2
MCC3 (client side)
B&W STM4 SFP: S4.1DDM

L4.1; L4.2
B&W FE SFP: 100B LX
B&W GbE SFP: 1GbELXDDM

1GbESXDDM; 1GbEZX
B&W FC SFP : FC/2FCmm; FC/2FCsm
CWDM SFP:
CWA147 > CWA161
CWP147 > CWP161

MCC3 (Client side)
DWDM SFP:
DWA600 > DWA200

SFP optical module
OUTPUT SIGNAL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INPUT SIGNAL
Optical cables
Figure 60. SFP optical module
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
138 / 554

ACRONYM
EQUIPPED ON PORT
B&W STM64 / 10GbE SFP:

XS642; XI641
B&W 10GbE SFP:

X10GBASES
OCC10_E (client side)

OCC10_XFP_CWDM (client side)
XFP optical module
Output signal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Input signal
Figure 61. XFP optical module
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
139 / 554
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line
Line Tx out
Line Rx in

Name
Meaning
Monitor
Tx out

Green when the board is plugged, config and without failure
Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in
failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement device)
Monitor
Rx out
Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement device)
Green /
Red led
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line)

Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line)
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx
out
Extra Tx
in
Extra Rx
out
SPV Tx in
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transponder (Ch. 30 38)
Accesschannels
WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder

(Ch. 30 38)
Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board)
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)

Extra
channels
SPV Rx out Supervision reception output signal (to SPVM board)

SB Tx in
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Short Band transmission channels input (from other Mux/Demux)
Ch#38
Monitoring
37
4,5,6
36
12; 13; 22
35
12; 13; 22
HardWare
Failure LED
33
2; 3;
32
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
31
(shown in figure)
30
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Extraction
handle
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
Supervision
SPV Tx in
S
SPV Rx out
N.B.
Expansion
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
The OMDX8100_M_L1_X board is not provided with

the Supervision (SPV Tx in / out) access points
EX
SB Rx out Short Band reception channels output (to other Mux/Demux)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical safety
label
Figure 62. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
140 / 554

1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master
Expansion
SLOTS
ACRONYM
3AL86615XX
2.5.2 Multiplexers front view
OMDX8100_M_S2
2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
2; 3;
12; 13; 22
12; 13; 22
HardWare
Failure LED
4, 5, 6
OMDX8100_M_S1
Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line or other Mux/Demux)

WDM Tx in
Accesschannels
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transponder

(Ch. 2028 for L2 band, 4250 for S2 band, 5260 for S1 band)
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder (Ch.

2028 for L2 band, 4250 for S2 band, 5260 for S1 band)
Extra channels input (from other Mux/Demux board)
Extra channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
Extra
Ch#28
27
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
21
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to line or other Mux/Demux)
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
26

Green /
Red led
WDM Rx
out
Extra Tx
in
Extra Rx
out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
25
Meaning
23
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out

Name
Line Tx out
Line Rx in
22
Line
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
20

Extraction
handle
OMDX8100_M_L2
(shown in figure)
3AL86615XX
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master
Expansion SLOTS
ACRONYM
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction
handle
This front panel is similar to that of OMDX8100_M_S2 and S1 boards, except for the set of channels,
i.e. Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. The set of channels is printed on the front
panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 63. OMDX8100_M_L2/S2/S1 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
141 / 554
HardWare
Failure LED
(shown in figure)
4, 5, 6
OADM8100_M_S2_S
Monitoring
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line
Line Tx out
Line Rx in
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Meaning
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out

Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from line)
WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transWDM Tx in ponder: ch. 30 38 (L1 band), ch. 2028 (L2), ch. 4250
(S2), ch. 5260 (S1)
WDM Rx WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder:
Extra
ch. 30 38 (L1 band), ch. 2028 (L2), ch. 4250 (S2), ch.
out
channels
5260 (S1)
Extra Tx Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Demux
Supervision
in
board)
Extra Rx Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Demux
out
board)
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
35
Channels
accesses
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
33
Monitor
Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
31
Monitor
Tx out

Green /
Red led
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
30
Name
Ch#38
12; 13; 22
37
OADM8100_M_S1_S
12; 13; 22
36
2; 3;
OADM8100_M_L2_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
Extraction
handle
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
SPV Tx in
S
SPV Rx out
Unused
Unused
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction
handle
This front panel is similar to that of OADM8100_M_L2/S2/S1_S boards, except for the set of channel, i.e. Ch.
20 to 28 for L2 band, Ch. 42 to 50 for S2 band and Ch. 52 to 60 for S1 band. Four different boards are so available.
The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 64. OADM8100_M_L1_S (L2/S1/S2) front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
142 / 554

OADM8100_M_L1_S
3AL86637AX
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master
Expansion SLOTS
32
ACRONYM
OADM4100_M_ch2023_S
HardWare
Failure LED
OADM4100_M_ch2528_S
OADM4100_M_ch3033_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
2; 3;
OADM4100_M_ch3538_S 12; 13; 22
12; 13; 22
(shown in figure)
4, 5, 6
OADM4100_M_ch4245_S
OADM4100_M_ch4750_S
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line
Line Tx out
Line Rx in
WDM Tx in
Meaning
WDM Rx out
Monitor
Tx out

Monitor
Rx out
Green /
Red led

Line Rx in
Line Reception input signal (from line)
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transponder: ch. 2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245;
4750; 5255; 5760
WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder:
WDM Rx
ch. 2023; 2528; 3033; 3538; 4245; 4750;
out
5255; 5760
Extra Tx
Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Dein
mux board)
Extra Rx
Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Deout
mux board)
SPV Tx in Supervision transmission input signal (from SPVM board)
Channels
accesses
Extra or
pass
through
channels
Supervision
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
31
Name
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Monitoring
32
OADM4100_M_ch5760_S
Ch#33
OADM4100_M_ch5255_S
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
30

Extraction
handle
3AL86637BA
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master
Expansion SLOTS
ACRONYM
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
SPV Tx in S
SPV Rx out
Unused
Unused
Optical safety label

Extraction handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM4100_M_chXXYY_S four channels boards, except for the set
of channels: eight sets of 4 channels are available for this board type; eight different boards are so available.
The set of channels is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 65. OADM4100_M_chxxyy_S front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
143 / 554
(shown in figure)
2; 3;
OADM2100_M_35_36_S
12; 13; 22
12; 13; 22
OADM2100_M_37_38_S
4, 5, 6
OADM2100_M_47_48_S
Monitoring
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line
Line Tx out
Line Rx in
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Ch #1
Channel
accesses

Name
Meaning
Monitor
Tx out

Monitor
Rx out
Green /
Red led

Line Rx in
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Ch #2
Supervision
Extra
channels
SPV Tx in S
SPV Rx out
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
Unused
Unused
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transponder: ch. 3031; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748
WDM Rx
out
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx
out
SPV Tx in
Ch#30
2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
HardWare
Failure LED
WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder: ch. 3031; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748
Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Demux board)
Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction
handle
This front panel is the same for all OADM2100_M_chxx_yy_S two channels boards, except for the set
of channels: five sets of 2 channels are available for this board type; five different boards are so available.
The set of channels is print on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 66. OADM2100_M_xx_yy_S front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
144 / 554

Extraction
handle
OADM2100_M_30_31_S
OADM2100_M_32_33_S
3AL86778XX
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master
Expansion SLOTS
31
ACRONYM
3AL86777XX
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master Expansion SLOTS
Extraction
handle
OADM1100_M_25_S
HardWare
Failure LED
OADM1100_M_30_S
OADM1100_M_31_S
OADM1100_M_32_S
OADM1100_M_33_S 2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
2; 3;
OADM1100_M_35_S
12; 13; 22 12; 13; 22
OADM1100_M_36_S
4, 5, 6
OADM1100_M_37_S
Monitoring
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line
Line Tx out
Line Rx in
Channel
access
OADM1100_M_38_S
Add
Drop
WDM Tx in
WDM Rx out
Ch# xx

ACRONYM
OADM1100_M_47_S
OADM1100_M_48_S
OADM1100_M_50_S
Name
Meaning
Monitor
Tx out

Monitor
Rx out
Green /
Red led
Supervision
Extra
channels
SPV Tx in
S
SPV Rx out
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out

Line Rx in
WDM Tx in WDM transmission input signal, from corresponding transponder: ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50
WDM Rx
out
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx
out
SPV Tx in
WDM reception output signal, to corresponding transponder: ch. ch. 25; 30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48; 50
Extra or passthrough channels input (from other Mux/Demux board)
Extra or passthrough channels output (to other Mux/Demux board)
Optical safety
label
Extraction
handle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This front panel is the same for all OADM1100_M_xx_S one channel boards, except for the channel:
12 different channels are available for this board type and then twelve different boards are available.The
number of the channel is printed on the front panel and included in the acronym to identify the board type.
Figure 67. OADM1100_M_xx_S front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
145 / 554
Extraction
handle
5; 6
HardWare
Failure LED
Monitoring
Common
Line

Name
Meaning
Green /
Red led

Monitor
Tx out
Output power measurement signal (to optical measurement

device)
Monitor
Rx out
Input power measurement signal (to optical measurement

device)
1310
1550
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line)

Line Rx in
Line Reception input signal (from the line)
Mux in
Input 1310 nm signal
Dmux out
Output reception 1310 nm signal
Mux in
Input 1550 nm signal
Dmux out
Output reception 1550 nm signal
SPV Tx in
Supervision
Monitor Tx out
Monitor Rx out
Line Tx out
Line Rx in
Mux In
Dmux out
Mux In
Dmux out
SPV Tx in
SPV Rx out
Optical safety
label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Extraction
handle
Figure 68. SPV_F_1310_1550 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
146 / 554

2; 3; 12
13; 22
3AL86779AA
SPV_F_1310_1550
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
1310
ACRONYM

ACRONYM
1696MS
SLOTS
SPV_F_C
28 35
38 45
1696MS_C SLOTS
Master
Expansion
9; 10; 11
8; 9;
10; 11
HardWare
Failure LED
Extra
channels
Supervision
Client access
Extra Tx in
Extra Rx out
SPV Tx in
SPV Rx out
Tx input
Rx output
3AL86779BAXX

Name
Meaning
Green /
Red led

Extra In
Input extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Extra Out
Output extra signal (1310 or 1550 nm)
Line Tx out Line Transmission output signal (to the line)

Line Rx in Line Reception input signal (from the line)
SPV Tx in
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 69. SPV_F_C front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
147 / 554
CMDX2
1696MS SLOTS
1696MS_C
Master
Expansion
SLOTS
2; 3; 4; 5; 6;
2; 3;
12; 13; 22
12; 13; 22
4,5,6
Extraction
handle

ACRONYM
Hardware failure Led

Name
Meaning
The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and
without failure
The LED is RED in case of SW reset or HW failure
1310nm supervision input signal, from SPVM board (OSC ADD)
Supervision
1310nm supervision output signal, to SPVM board (OSC DROP)
Line
Line Reception input signal (DEMUX IN, from line)
SPV IN (ADD)
SPV OUT
(DROP)
LINE RX IN
LINE TX OUT
CH1 INPUT
CH1 OUTPUT
Line Transmission output signal (MUX OUT, to line)

Above connector: CH1 input. 1470nm WDM input signal, from
corresponding transponder
CH2 INPUT
CH2 OUTPUT
Below connector: CH1 output. 1470nm WDM output signal, to

corresponding transponder
CH3 INPUT
CH3 OUTPUT
Above connector: CH2 input to CH8 input. 1490nm to 1610 nm

WDM input signal, from corresponding transponder
TO
WDM
accesschannels
Below connector: CH1 output to CH8 output. 1490nm to

1610nm WDM output signal, to corresponding transponder
CH4 INPUT
CH4 OUTPUT
CH5 INPUT
CH5 OUTPUT
CH6 INPUT
CH6 OUTPUT
CH7 INPUT
CH7 OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CH8 INPUT
CH8 OUTPUT
Figure 70. CMDX2 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
148 / 554

2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view
1696MS SLOTS 1696MS_C

ACRONYM Master Expans SLOTS
OAC1
L_OAC1
OAC2
4; 5;
12; 13; 12; 13;
20; 21;
20; 21 22; 23*
4; 5;
2,3**
L_OAC2
Extraction
handle
Power ON LED
Out Of Service LED
Abnormal input signal alarm LED
APSD status LED
Reset pushbutton

Name
Meaning
PW
Power led managed by HW. It is ON when
Green led the board is plugged and without HWF
Stage 1
monitoring
Mon. Rx (IN)
Mon. Tx (OUT)
Stage 2
monitoring
Mon. Rx (IN)
Mon. Tx (OUT)
OOS
Managed by SW. It is ON when the board is
Yellow led plugged but not configured by the SW
APSD
Yellow
led ***
HWF
Green /
Yellow /
Red led
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Managed by SW. The LED is

OFF when APSD enable
ON when APSD disable forced ON or OFF
Hardware failure led, managed by SW. It is
Green when the board is plugged, configu
red and without failure
yellow when the board is in firmware down
load state****
Red when
a) one of the On Board power supply is in
b) C_TYPE alarm is raised
Removable
cover
Stage 1
Input
Output
Stage 2
Input
Output
VOA
Input
Output
Supervision
Input
Output
Extra pump
Input
Unused
* Slots 22 and 23 are available in compact shelf only

** Only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be equipped in compact shelf
*** The LED is always ON because the APSD enable mode is
not supported
**** When the board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never
unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur,
the board will not restart and may have to be returned for
factory repair. Only OAC2 and OAC2_L support FW download
Optical
safety
label
Unused
Unused
Extraction handle
3AL86703AX
Abnormal input signal alarm. Caused by

ABN
1) 1st stage input optical signal level has deYellow led creased below the input signal loss threshold
2) Output safety shutdown ot the 2nd stage.
Managed by SW
Figure 71. OAC1, OAC2, OAC1_L and OAC2_L front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
149 / 554
ACRONYM 1696MS 1696MS_C

SLOTS
SLOTS
1 (master
ESC
1
ESC_2
shelf only)
Extraction
handle
Urgent Alarm LED

Not Urgent alarm LED
Attended alarm LED
Abnormal Condition LED
Indicative alarm LED
URG
NRG
ATD
ABN
IND
Shelf Controller LED
SC

Name
STATUS
Meaning
URG
Red led
Urgent Alarm (major or critical)
NRG
Red led
Not Urgent Alarm (minor)
ATD
Attended Alarm: acknowledged URG or NURG
Yellow led alarm (alarm storing)
Abnormal condition
ABN
Yellow led
IND
Indicative Alarm (warning)
Yellow led
EC
Green /
Red /
Yellow led
EC
Equipment Controller LED
ACO
Alarm Cut Off push button
LAT
Lamp Test push button*
RST
RESET push button
Craft
Green led means communication OK between EC/SC

Red led means no communication between EC/SC
but SC is started
Yellow led means start time
F Interface for CT connection

SUBD 9 pins connector
Green led means SC started

SC
Green/Red Red led means SC default
/Yellow led Yellow led means start time
DBG Interface
RJ45 connector
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DBG Interface
RJ45 connector
Extraction
NB:*LAT button lights up all leds of the NE except for the ESC ones.
handle
When pressing RST button, EC & SC LEDs status doesnt change
When SC is restarted, the EC led is red and the SC led is green.
When the communication between EC & SC is reestablished, both EC & SC LEDs are green
Figure 72. ESC front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
150 / 554

3AL 86661AAXX
2.5.4 Controller front view

ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS* SLOTS*
2; 16; 18;
20; 22; 23
SPVM2
Extraction handle
4; 5; 6
Power ON LED
Line Busy LED
Conference Call LED
Vacant Line LED
* Master shelf only
HardWare Failure LED
J1: Speech channel

handset connector

Name
PWR
Green led
Board reset push button
Meaning
Line pick up push button
PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and

without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
LB
Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech
Yellow led channel is busy
Rx1 input
CC
Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference
Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel
OSC 1
Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel

VL
Yellow led is vacant
Green /
Yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
Yellow /
Red led
RX1 input
OSC1 reception input signal, from OAC, OMDX or OADM
TX1 input
OSC1 transmssion output signal, to OAC, OMDX or OADM
RX2 input
TX2 input
J1
Speech channel handset connection
Tx1 output
Rx2 input
OSC 2
Tx2 output
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
* When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour.
Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should
this occur, the board will not restart and may have to be
returned for factory repair.
3AL86606AB
Speech channel number

coding wheels
Extraction handle
Figure 73. SPVM2 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
151 / 554
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS* SLOTS*
SPVM_H 2; 16; 18;

20; 22; 23
Extraction handle
4; 5; 6
Power ON LED
Line Busy LED
Conference Call LED
Vacant Line LED
* Master shelf only
J1: Speech channel

handset connector

Name
Board reset push button
Meaning
PWR
Green led
Line pick up push button
PoWeRing led: it is ON when the board is powered and

without HardWare Failure (HWF). Managed by HW
LB
Line Busy led: it is ON when the speech
Yellow led channel is busy
Rx1 input
CC
Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference
Yellow led call is occuring on the speech channel
OSC 1
Vacant Line led: it is ON when the Speech channel

VL
Yellow led is vacant
Green /
Yellow when the board is in firmware download state*
Yellow /
Red led
RX1 input
TX1 input
Speech channel handset connection
* When the board is on firmware download state, the hardware

failure led on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur,
the board will not restart and may have to be returned for
factory repair.
Speech channel number

coding wheel
3AL86606AC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Tx1 output
Extraction handle
Figure 74. SPVM_H front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
152 / 554

ACRONYM


SLOTS
SLOTS
OSMC
2; 12;
13; 23
Not used
Out Of Service LED
Power ON LED
Inputs power
monitoring

Name
Meaning
The led is GREEN when the board is plugged, configured
and without Hardware failure (HWF).
It is RED when the board is plugged and in HWF.
Green/
Red led
This led is ON when a firmware download is being perYellow led formed
....
Inputs power
monitoring
When the board is on firmware download state, the OOS Led

on the front board lights on yellow colour. Never unplug a
board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the
board will not restart and may have to be returned for factory repair
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Input power monitoring points giving the possibility to check

the power in 8 different locations per each channel
Figure 75. OSMC front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
153 / 554
ILink_M Not used 6 (master

shelf only)
EXP. shelves 1, 2,
3, CONNECTION
STATUS LEDs
Power Failure LED
HW Failure LED
SUBD15P, to be
connected to expansion shelf 1

Name
Meaning
The led is ON when the connection with slave shelf 1 is

Orange led established
SUBD15P, to be

Orange led established
Orange led established (only 2 slave shelves allowed in current rel.)
Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly
Orange led powered
Hardware failure led. It is
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and
Green/Red
without failure
led
RED when software reset is being performed
SUBD15P, to be
(not used in current rel.)
Connection point with 1696MS_C expansion shelf 1

3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(not used in current release)
Figure 76. ILink_M front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
154 / 554


SLOTS
SLOTS


SLOTS
SLOTS
ILink_S Not used
1 (slave
shelf only)
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
Power Failure LED
HW Failure LED

Name
Meaning
Power failure led; it is ON when the board is properly

Orange led powered
SUBD15P, to be
connected to the
1696MS_C master shelf
Hardware failure led. It is

GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and
Green/Red
without failure
led
RED when software reset is being performed
3AL86893AA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Connection point with 1696MS_C master shelf
Figure 77. ILink_S front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
155 / 554
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
LAC (LAN_Q)
26
LAC (LAN_I)
27

ACRONYM
HardWare
Failure LED
RJ45
connector
NMS / INTRASHELF
connections
BNC
connectors

Name
Green /
Red led
Meaning
Green when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
Red when one of the On Board power supply (OBPS) is in failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
in master shelf, slot 26, or in compact shelf, slot 8 (LAN_Q), these connecRJ45 and tors provide the physical access (Q3 interf.) to connect an external superviBNC con- sion equipment (1353..). Slot 26 is linked to the ESC board via backpanel link
a second board can be plugged in master shelf, slot 27 (LAN_I), to allow
nectors
the intrashelf communication via a cascade (BNC) or HUB (RJ45) link with
the same connector of the LAN_I board, slot 27, of each expansion shelf.
If a cable is fitted in RJ45 conn., BNC is unavailable and viceversa
Figure 78. LAN boards front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
156 / 554
ACRONYM
HK
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS* SLOTS*
36
11
* Master shelf only
HardWare
Failure LED
25 pins SUBD female connector for housekeeping alarms (8 inputs and 8 outputs)

Name
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Green /
Red led
Meaning
Figure 79. Housekeeping front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
157 / 554
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
RAI
37
9; 10

ACRONYM
HardWare
Failure LED
9 pins SUBD female

connector (to PDU/TRU)
RACK ALARMS
RJ11, 6 pins connector (to
the 9 pins SUBD female
connector of the shelf below)

Name
Green /
Red led
Meaning
9 pins SUBD fe- Used to connect the RAI card of the master shelf with the
male connector PDU/TRU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RJ11 6 pins
connector
Used for intrashelf communication. It has to be connected to

the 9pin connector of the slave shelf below. Only for 1696MS
Figure 80. RAI front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
158 / 554
ACRONYM
UIC
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS* SLOTS*
46; 47
* Master shelf only
HardWare
Failure LED
52 pins SCSI2
female connector

Name
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Green /
Red led
Meaning
Red when the board is in hardware failure
Figure 81. UIC front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
159 / 554
ACRONYM
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS

SLOTS
Master
Expansion
28 35
38 45
OPC
SM & MM OPC
with connectors
3AL86708AC
3AL86708AD
3AL95113AA
channel 2 Tx Input
channel 1 Rx Output
channel 2 Rx Output
Rx input
8; 9; 10; 11
SM & MM OPC
with jumpers
3AL86708AA
3AL86708AB
HardWare Failure LED*
channel 1 Tx Input
Tx output
9, 10, 11
To (Rx OUT) /
From (Tx IN)
transponders
or 4xANY
drawers
channel1
channel2
Tx input (Tx1IN)
Rx output (Rx1OUT)
Tx input (Tx2IN)
Rx output (Rx2OUT)
To (Tx Out) /
From (Rx IN)
Client
To (Tx Out) /
From (Rx IN)
Client
Tx output
Rx input

Name
Green /
Red led
Hardware failure. The LED is *

Red when the board is in hardware failure
* The hardware failure led is not managed/provided on the SM optical splitter with jumpers
(P/N3AL 86708 AA)
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Meaning
Figure 82. OPC front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
160 / 554

2.5.5 Switching protection, power supply and fans front view
ACRONYM
OMSP
1696MS 1696MS_C SLOTS

SLOTS
Master
Expansion
28 35
38 45
9, 10, 11
8; 9; 10; 11
HardWare Failure LED*

Line 1 IN CWDM line input signal 1 (from line)
Line 2 IN CWDM line input signal 2 (from line)
Line 1 OUT CWDM line output signal 1 (to line)
Line 2 OUT CWDM line output signal 1 (to line)
TX OUT selected optical signal output (to DEMUX)

RX IN protected optical signal input (from MUX)

Name
Green /
Red led
Meaning
The LED is GREEN when the board is plugged,
configured and without failure
The LED is RED in case of SW reset or HW failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 83. OMSP front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
161 / 554
1696MS
SLOTS
PSC
25, 48
PSC2
PSC3
1696MS_C
SLOTS
ACRONYM
7, 12 (master/exp shelves)
25, 48
1 (male)
3pin SUBD
connector
+ VBATT
2 (female) GND
3 (male)
VBATT

Name
Green /
Red led
Meaning
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when the board is in failure or the power supply cable is not
connected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 84. PSC/PSC2/PSC3 front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
162 / 554

ACRONYM
PMU
1696MS_C
SLOTS
Placed below the 1696MS_C
Not used
master shelf
1696MS
SLOTS
CONTROL UNIT
RECTIFIER 1
in1
RECTIFIER 2
1)
in2
3)
3)
Two different solutions are provided
3)
7)
2)
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
5)
4)
7)
in1 F
6)
1) 2)
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
in2 N
5)
4) 3) 6)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Name
Meaning
1) GREEN/
RED LED
MAJOR alarm. The LED is
GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
both rectifiers aremissing or both rectifiers input voltage < 85V rms
both rectifiers output voltage <38V or >60V
both fans from PMU case 1 failed (OR fan from PMU case 2 failed)
both rectifiers temperature >55 C or output current < 12A
2) GREEN/
RED LED
MINOR alarm. The LED is
GREEN when the board is plugged and without failure
RED when the alarm is present (raised only if PMU_Presence). It is the OR of
one rectifier is missing or one rectifier input voltage < 85V rms
one rectifier output voltage <38V or >60V
one FAN from PMU case 1 failed or one rectifier temperature >55 C
battery present but battery breaker open
3) GREEN/
RED LED
4) GREEN/
RED LED
5)
6)
7)
8)
BATTERY CONNECTED. The LED is RED if battery connection is failed.

The LED is GREEN if battery is connected.
TEST BATTERY. The LED is RED if test battery is failed.
The LED is GREEN if test battery is OK. The LED is LIT OFF if no battery connected
BATTERY CONNECTOR. It has to be conncted to the (optional) backup battery
OUTPUT POWER CONNECTORS. SUBD 3p to be connected to the two PSC(2) cards
PMU ALARMS CONNECTORS. SUBD 15p to be connected to the FAN_C
AC INPUT POWER CONNECTORS. To be connected to the primary AC power supply
(100V/5060Hz, 115V/60Hz, 230V/50Hz)
Figure 85. PMU front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
163 / 554
1696MS 1696MS_C
SLOTS
SLOTS
FANC
49
FAN_C
13
FANs status LEDs

ACRONYM
New FAN
HardWare
Failure LED
FANC (for 1696MS)
HardWare
Failure LED
15 pins SUBD
female connector
(for
batteries
alarms raising)
EXT
PMU
FAN
FILTER
FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)

Name
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Green /
Red led
Green /
Red led
Meaning
The LED is OFF when the board is plugged but not configured
It is GREEN when the board is plugged but not configured
It is RED to indicate hardware failure, power supply failure or failure in communication with the board
New FANs only. GREEN LED indicates FAN (1,2,3) speed is OK.
RED LED indicates FAN (1,2,3) speed is too low.
ORANGE LED indicates FAN (1,2,3) speed too fast.
Figure 86. FANs front panel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
164 / 554

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3.1 General description
This section describes the main functions carried out by the
1696MSPAN
1696MS_C (CPE, housed in a compact shelf, with reduced functionalities)
Alcatel products.
The functions carried out by the NE, can be splitted in some subsystems herebelow listed, and described
from para. 3.1.1 to para. 3.1.10:
Transponder subsystem see para.3.1.1
TDM client signal concentrator subsystem optional, see para. 3.1.2
Optical MUX/DMUX (Wavelength Division Multiplexing) subsystem, see para. 3.1.3
Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) subsystem optional used in 1696MS only, see para.
3.1.4
Supervision management (Optical Supervisory Channel, OSC) subsystem optional,

see para. 3.1.5
Automatic Power Equalization subsystem (APE) optional, see para. 3.1.6
Controller subsystem, see para. 3.1.7
Power supply subsystem, see para. 3.1.8
Protection (OSNCP) subsystem, see para. 3.1.9
Performance Monitoring subsystem, see para. 3.1.10.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before starting with the presentation of the above listed functions / subsystems, for a better system comprehension, the 1696MS main configurations (Line Terminal, OADM, backtoback terminal, Repeater)
and the functions implemented in each of them are described in the following.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
165 / 554
TDM
concentrator
Client
signals
Transponder
Up to 32
Up to
32
(up to 16 WLA)
Electrical link
Optional
function
OFA
OSC
extraction
Up to
32
DMUX
Supervision
SPI bus
Optical link
MUX
OFA
LANQ3
NE management
application
WDM
line
OSC
TDM bus
3.6 V
Equipment and
shelf control
OSC
insertion
Preamp.
To boards
LEGEND:
Booster
Up to
32
To
boards
User
Interfaces
5.5 V
48 V
Power
supply
2
2 Mbit/s
48 V
User service accesses
Station batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions).
This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see
also para. 1.1.2 on page 67).
Figure 87. Functional synopsis in Line Terminal configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the line terminal configuration all the above functions are needed.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
166 / 554

Line Terminal configuration
OADM / backtoback terminal (Hub) configuration

Client signals
TDM
concentrator
Up to 32
OSNCP
OSC
extraction
Transponder
(West)
OSC
insertion
Transponder
(East)
Preamp.
OFA
WDM
line
(West)
Back panel
electrical links
Booster
DMUX
OFA
MUX
Pass through traffic
OSC
extraction
Preamp.
Booster
OFA
OSC
insertion
OFA
DMUX
MUX
WDM
line
(East)
Pass through traffic

OSC
To boards
Supervision
TDM bus
SPI bus
OSC
To boards
48 V
5.5 V
3.6 V
LEGEND:
Optical link
Equipment and
shelf control
LANQ3
NE management
application
User
Interfaces
Electrical link
Power
supply
Optional
function
2 Mbit/s
Station
batteries
If needed DCU modules can be used (placed before BOFA booster input, in both directions).
This type of configuration can be provided with one (as shown in current figure) or two OFAs (see
also para. 1.1.4 on page 70).
Figure 88. Functional synopsis in OADM configuration
The hub configuration is similar to the OADM one, but without passthrough channels (all the channels
are added/dropped).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In OADM configuration all the optical transmission functions (transponder, MUX and DMUX) are duplicated to transmit the client signals in two directions. This configuration allows optical channel protection
functions (OSNCP).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
167 / 554
OFA 1
OFA 2
OSC
extraction
OSC
insertion
VOA
WDM
line
Stage 1
DCU
Stage 2
OSC
extraction
OSC
insertion
DCU
Stage 2
OSC
To boards
Supervision
Equipment and
shelf control
LANQ3
NE management
application
User
Interfaces
VOA
Stage 1
OSC
To boards
48 V
TDM bus
SPI bus
WDM
line
5.5 V
LEGEND:
3.6 V
Optical link
Electrical link
Power
supply
Optional
function
2 Mbit/s
Station
batteries
Figure 89. Functional synopsis in Repeater configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In In line repeater configuration, the MUX/DEMUX and Transponder functions are not implemented. The
equipment acts as an in line amplifier, which allows nevertheless the Optical Supervision Channel (OSC)
and the supervision functions.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
168 / 554

In line repeater configuration

3.1.1 Transponder subsystem

The transponder subsystem is built with
Multirate Channel Cards: MCC
Optical Channel Cards: OCC10
Multirate WaveLength Adapters: WLA2 and WLA3

one per client signal. The role of this function is:
At the transmit side (from client to WDM line):

to adapt the client incoming optical signals to a dedicated wavelength and deliver those optical signals to the multiplexer (MUX) function.
At the receive side (from WDM line to client):

to restitute the client optical signals from the signal delivered by the demultiplexer (DEMUX) function.
From rel. 22A also 4xANY_P can be considered as a transponder if equipped with a coloured SFP. This
board is not taken into account in current paragraph because it is described in para. 3.1.2
The payload type configuration of the client signal is under control of the operator.
Up to 32 Client signals
User Tx
Up to 32
transponders
User Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
To MUX function
Up to 32 DWDM channels or
Up to 8 CWDM channels
From DMUX function
Transponder function
Figure 90. Line terminal transponder function

In backtoback and OADM configuration, the transponder function is doubled and it is able to transmit
and receive the clients signals in two directions. It provides optionally Optical SubNetwork Connection
Protection (OSNCP), see section 3.1.9, page 193.
Up to 32 Client signals
OSNCP
Up to 32
transponders
Up to 32
transponders
MCC
User
Tx
MCC
User
Tx
User Rx
User Rx
: Options
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
West
From DMUX
function
To MUX
function
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Backpanel
electrical
links
WDM Rx
8x8 Matrix
East
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Transponder function
To MUX
function
From DMUX
function
Figure 91. Backtoback terminal or OADM transponder function
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
169 / 554
3.1.1.1 Client signals
The MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3 boards accept all bit rates from 100 Mbit/s to 2.66 Gbit/s in 3R (Retime,
Reamplify, Reshape) mode. However beyond 2.5 Gbit/s the performances may be degraded.
The typical client signals accepted by the MCCs board are listed in the following table.
Some of them are proposed with a 3R regeneration mode for MCC1 and they are indicated with (*) on the
table. All the other signals are in 2R mode in MCC1.
Table 12. Example of Client signals supported bit rates
MCC1, MCC2, MCC3
Bit rates (Mbit/s)
Signal
100.000
FDDI
125.000
FE / FDDI
132.815
FC (12-M6LEI)
155.520
STM1 / OC3 (*)
200.000
ESCON
265.620
FC (25-M6LLI)
270.000
DTV / HDTV
466.560
OC9
531.250
FC (50-M5SLI)
622.080
STM4 / OC12 (*)
933.120
OC18
1244.160
FC (100-SMLLI) (*)
FICON / InterSystem Coupling Channel (ISC) (*)
OC24
1250.000
GBE (*)
1866.240
OC36
2125.000
2FC (*)
2488.320
STM16 / OC48 (*)
2500.000
INFINIBAND
1062.500
One CWDM SFP can be plugged on MCC3, client side.

3.1.1.1.2 WLA2 and WLA3 client signals
The WLA2 and WLA3 boards can accept the following bit rates (from 125 Mbps to 2.666 Gbps) in 3R (Re
time, Reamplify, Reshape) mode: 125 Mbps, 155.52 Mbps, 200 Mbps, 270 Mbps, 622.08 Mbps, 1.0625
Gbps, 1.24416 Gbps, 1.25 Gbps, 2.125 Gbps, 2.48832 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 2.666 Gbps.
3.1.1.1.3 4XANY_P client signals
Refer to para. 3.1.2.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.1.1.1.4 OCC10 client signals

The OCC10 board accepts the following client signals in 3R (Retime, Reamplify, Reshape) mode:
9953.28 Gbps (STM64 / OC192 / 10GBE WAN), in UNI mode
10.3125 Gbps (10GBE LAN)
10.709 Gbps, in NNI mode (future rel.).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
170 / 554

3.1.1.1.1 MCC client signals

3.1.1.2 DWDM optical channels

The 1696MSPAN transmits the 32 possible DWDM channels in the Cband. Table 13. on page 171 gives
the nominal central frequencies allocation plan, based on the 100 GHz channel spacing anchored to a
193.100 THz reference (ITUT standard grid).
The Cband is split into 4 subbands, which support 8 channels each: the long bands L1 and L2, and the
short bands S1 and S2.
Then, each subband is composed of 2 sets of 4 consecutive channels. Each set is separated from the
adjacent sets by one unused channel, except between L1 and S2, where the separation is 3 unused channels.
Table 13. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in CBand
Band
Central frequency (GHz)

(Craft terminal name)
Channel
Number
Central wavelength (nm)

wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL) @2.5Gbps
wavelength deviation : 0,1 nm (EOL) @10Gbps
192,000
20
1561,42
192,100
21
1560,61
192,200
22
1559,79
192,300
23
1558,98
192,500
25
1557,36
192,600
26
1556,55
192,700
27
1555,75
192,800
28
1554,94
193,000
30
1553,33
193,100
31
1552,52
193,200
32
1551,72
193,300
33
1550,92
193,500
35
1549,32
193,600
36
1548,51
193,700
37
1547,72
193,800
38
1546,92
L2
BLUE
BAND
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
L1
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
171 / 554
Central frequency (GHz)

(Craft terminal name)
Channel
Number

wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL) @2.5Gbps
wavelength deviation : 0,1 nm (EOL) @10Gbps
194,200
42
1543,73
194,300
43
1542,94
194,400
44
1542,14
194,500
45
1541,35
194,700
47
1539,77
194,800
48
1538,98
194,900
49
1538,19
195,000
50
1537,40
195,200
52
1535,82
195,300
53
1535,04
195,400
54
1534,25
195,500
55
1533,47
195.700
57
1531,90
195.800
58
1531,12
195.900
59
1530,33
196.000
60
1529,55
S2
RED
BAND
S1
The Central frequency value (in GHz) is the channel name, visualized on the Craft Terminal.
The Multirate Channel Card (MCC1, MCC2 and MCC3) is tunable over two channels. 16 different MCCs
(transponders) are required to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
The WaveLength Adapter (WLA3) provides two independent optical channels or one optically protected
channel, according to the board type.
WLA3 provides two DWDM interfaces. 16 different WLA3s are required to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
The TDM concentrator (4xANY_P) and the 10 Gbps Optical Channel Cards (OCC10) support one DWDM
channel. 32 different transponders are required to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 10 Gbps Optical Channel Cards (OCC10), support one channel each. Then 32 different OCC10s
(transponders) are necessary to cover the 32 DWDM channels.
Mixed configuration (MCC, OCC10, WLA and 4xAny_P in the same equipment) are allowed.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
172 / 554

Band

3.1.1.3 CWDM optical channels

The 1696MSPAN transmits the eigth possible CWDM channels according to ITUT G.694.2. Table 14.
on page gives the nominal central frequencies allocation plan, based on the 20 nm wavelength spacing
anchored to a 193.100 THz reference (ITUT standard grid).
Table 14. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand
Channel Number
Wavelength deviation (nm)
1471
1470
6.5
1491
1490
6.5
1511
1510
6.5
1531
1530
6.5
1551
1550
6.5
1571
1570
6.5
1591
1590
6.5
1611
1610
6.5
The WaveLength Adapter (WLA2 and WLA3) provides two independent optical channels or one optically
protected channel each, according to the board type.
WLA2 and WLA3 provide two CWDM interfaces each one.
Four different WLA2 or WLA3 are able to cover the eigth CWDM channels.
The TDM concentrator (4xANY_P) supports one CWDM channel. Eigth different 4xANY_P are required
to cover the eigth CWDM channels.
One CWDM SFP can be plugged on MCC3, client side. Eigth different MCC3s (transponders) are required
to cover the eigth CWDM channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Mixed configuration (different transponders in the same equipment) are allowed.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
173 / 554
The transponder subsystem supports clients signals from 100 Mbps to 2.5 Gbps. Each client signal
connected to a transponder access uses a WDM channel, a wavelength ().
One CWDM or DWDM SFP can be plugged on 4xANY_P, aggregate side: in this case the board is a transponder and can be directly connected to the mux/demux, avoiding the use of a transponder.
The aim of the 4ANY TDM concentration is to save transponders and to optimize the use of each WDM
channel. Client signals from 100Mbps to 1.25Gbps can be concentrated in one STM16 or CWDM/DWDM
interface. For example, 4 x STM1 client signals can be concentrated on a unique STM16 signal and applied to a unique transponder access or a mux/demux access, if a CWDM or DWDM SFP is used.
Up to 4
client signals
4 Transponders
Transponder
Up to 4
client signals
Transponder
Transponder
4xANY
TDM
Concentrator
1 Transponder
Transponder
1xSTM16 (B&W)
1 WDM
optical
channel
Up to 4
WDM
optical
channels
Transponder
Up to 4
client signals
4xANY
TDM
Concentrator
1 WDM
optical
1xCWDM or DWDM channel
Figure 92. Principle of the 4xANY TDM concentration

The available client signal accesses and their maximum number are:
Low bit rate:
4 x Fast Ethernet
4 x FDDI
4 x ESCON
4 x Digital Video
SDH:
4 x STM1
3 x STM4
High bit rate:
2 x Gigabit Ethernet
2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following mixes are also possible:
3 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4
2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).
2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).

Low bit rates and high bit rates are available at 1310nm and 850nm. SDH bit rates are only available at
1310nm.
On the aggregate side, the 4xANY_P board is equipped with a SFP optical module providing the following
interfaces, according to the SFP used: I16.1, S16.1, Silver (APD) or Bronze (PIN) CWDM , DWDM (APD).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
174 / 554

3.1.2 TDM client signal concentrator (4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P) subsystem

3.1.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexing subsystem

The optical multiplexer function
receives from the transponder subsystem the colored optical channels
multiplexes them into a WDM signal
launches the WDM signal on the line.

The optical demultiplexer function
receives the WDM line signal
demultiplexes this signal
sends the recovered optical channels to the transponder subsystem.

The DWDM multiplexer/demultiplexer subsystem have a scalable architecture. By combining three sorts
of basic MUXes and three sorts of basic DMUXes, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 and 32 channels, the multiplexing and
demultiplexing capacities can be obtained.
The CWDM multiplexer/demultiplexer subsystem is based on a 8channel mux/demux.
3.1.3.1 Optical multiplexing
The multiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical MUXes:
5:1 and 9:1 DWDM MUXes:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 4 or 8 channels issued from the transponder function with
an extra input aggregate signal. The extra input may be connected to the output of another MUX
(MUX cascading), connected to the extra output of a corresponding DMUX (traffic pass through) or
simply not connected.
Aggregate signal
(n channels)
Extra input
4 channels 4
from TPD
Aggregate signal
(n channels)
8 channels 8
from TPD
Channel inputs
5:1
Aggregate signal output
Aggregate signal
(n+4 channels)
9:1
Aggregate signal
(n+8 channels)
Extra input
Channel inputs
Figure 93. 4 and 8 channels DWDM optical MUXes
8:1 CWDM MUX:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 8 channels issued from the transponder function.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8 channels 8
from TPD
Channel inputs
8:1
Aggregate signal
(8 channels)
Figure 94. 8 channels CWDM optical MUX
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
175 / 554
2:1 expansion MUX:

This sort of optical MUX is able to multiplex 2 aggregate signals, one in the long band and the other
in the short band. It is necessary to reach the multiplexing capacity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs
to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards.
Aggregate signal
(n1 channels)
LB input
Aggregate signal
(n2 channels)
SB input
2:1
EXP
Aggregate signal
(n1+n2 channels)
Figure 95. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX

3.1.3.2 Optical demultiplexing
The demultiplexer function may be obtained with the following optical DMUXes:
1:5 and 1:9 DWDM DMUXes:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (n channels) into 4 or 8
channels and an output aggregate signal (n4 or n8 channels). The extra output may be connected
to the input of another DMUX (DMUX cascading), connected to the extra input of a MUX of the multiplexer function (traffic pass through) or simply not connected.
Aggregate signal
(n4 channels)
Extra output
4 channels
to TPD
4 Channel outputs
Aggregate signal
(n8 channels)
8 channels
to TPD
1:5
Aggregate signal input
Aggregate signal
(n channels)
1:9
Aggregate signal
(n channels)
Extra output
Channel outputs
Figure 96. 4 and 8 channels optical DMUX
1:8 CWDM DMUX:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex an input aggregate signal (8 channels) into 8 channels/wavelengths sent to the transponder function.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8 channels
to TPD
Channel outputs
1:8
Aggregate signal
(n channels)
Figure 97. 8 channels CWDM optical DMUX
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
176 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2:1 expansion DMUX:

This sort of optical DMUX is able to demultiplex the DWDM line signal into two aggregate signals,
one in the long band and the other in the short band. It is necessary to reach the demultiplexing capacity of 24 and 32 channels and belongs to the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X
boards.
Aggregate signal
(n1 channels)
LB output
Aggregate signal
(n2 channels)
SB output
1:2
EXP
Aggregate signal
n1 LB channels
n2 SB channels
Figure 98. LB and SB aggregate signals expansion MUX
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
177 / 554
3.1.3.3 Example of MUX and DMUX functions
In a 4 or 8channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in one step. The extra
input of the MUX and the extra output of the DMUX are not connected.
NC
From transponder
transmit functions
8 channels
to WDM line
9:1
NC
To transponder
receive functions
MUX function
DMUX function
8 channels
from WDM line
1:9
Figure 99. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels Line Terminal

In a 12 or 16channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in two steps. The
example of Figure 100. shows how to cascade 2 MUXes and 2 DMUXes to obtain a 12channels Line
Terminal.
The extra input of the first MUX is not connected. The 4channels aggregate signal output of the first MUX
is connected to the extra input of the second MUX.
The extra output of the first DMUX is connected to the 4 channels aggregate signal input of the second
DMUX. The extra output of the second DMUX is not connected.
From
transponder
transmit
functions
To
transponder
receive
functions
5:1
4 channels
aggregate
4
8
12 channels
to WDM line
9:1
1:5
MUX function
4 channels
aggregate
DMUX function
1:9
12 channels
from WDM line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 100. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
178 / 554

Line Terminal configurations

In a 24 or 32channels Line Terminal, multiplexing and demultiplexing are performed in three steps. The
example of Figure 101. shows how the 2:1 expansion MUX multiplexes the 16channels in long band and
16channels in short band.
From
transponder
transmit
functions
9:1
16 channels (LB)
aggregate
EXP
32 channels
to WDM line
2:1
9:1
9:1
To
transponder
receive
functions
MUX function
8 channels
aggregate
9:1
8 channels
aggregate
DMUX function
8 channels
aggregate
1:9
1:9
16 channels (SB)
aggregate
16 channels (LB)
aggregate
OMDX_L1_X(S)
1:9
1:9
8 channels
aggregate
32 channels
from WDM line
1:2
EXP
16 channels (SB)
aggregate
Figure 101. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels Line Terminal

OADM configurations
The example of Figure 102. is an 8channels OADM. 8 channels are dropped and added on both east
and west lines. In this configuration, the extra output of each DMUX is connected to the extra input of the
MUX of the opposite transmission direction. This allows to place the other 24 channels in pass through.
To/from
transponder
8 channels
added
8 channels
dropped
DMUX
32 channels
from WDM line
West line
32 channels
to WDM line
8 channels
dropped
8 channels
added
8
24 channels aggregate
pass through
1:9
MUX
To/from
transponder
MUX
32 channels
to WDM line
9:1
East line
DMUX
32 channels
from WDM line
1:9
9:1
24 channels aggregate
pass through
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 102. MUX and DMUX functions of an 8 channels OADM

The same configuration is available with 1, 2, 4 and 8channels (nchannels). In this case, the number
of aggregate channels available in pass through is 32 n.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
179 / 554
From/to
transponder function
32 channels
32 channels
MUX function
32 channels
to WDM line
2:1
9:1
32 channels
from WDM line
9:1
EXP
9:1
West line
MUX function
1:9
9:1
9:1
9:1
DMUX function
1:9
1:9
1:2
EXP
1:9
9:1
2:1
EXP
9:1
32 channels
to WDM line
East line
DMUX function
8
1:9
1:9
1:9
1:2
EXP
1:9
32 channels
from WDM line
Figure 103. MUX and DMUX functions of a 32 channels backtoback terminal

Remote channel to/from CPE.
Client signals
WDM
line
signal
One fibre pair
TPD
OFA
Mux
Dmux
Optional
functions
TPD
OFA
Passthrough
n (up to 32)
One fibre pair
Mux
Dmux
n (up to 32)
WDM
line
signal
Remote channel
TPD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Client signal
To/from CPE
Figure 104. 1696MSPAN in backtoback terminal configuration and with a remote channel
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
180 / 554

The example of Figure 103. is a 32channels backtoback terminal. In this configuration, there no is
pass through traffic, the 1696MSPAN is like a hubnode.

3.1.4 Optical Fiber Amplification subsystem

The Optical Fiber Amplification (OFA) subsystem can deliver:
single or double stages amplification
VOA at the first stage entry
Up to 17 dBm output power.

As shown in Figure 87. and Figure 88. the 1696MSPAN may be equipped with one or two OFAs (one OFA
in west side and one in east side or two OFAs in west side and two in east side) in line terminal and OADM/
backtoback configuration. In the following example is shown a double stage amplification.
In a single stage amplification, the line terminal or OADM is placed inside the OFA interstage (see
Figure 25. on page 70 as an example)
WEST SIDE
Stage 2 Booster
Stage 1 Preamp.
Pump 1
Pump 2
OSC
extraction
VOA
WDM
line
ATTEN/
DCU
OFA 1
OSC
insertion
OFA 2
ATTEN/
DCU
OFA 2
LEGEND:
Optional
function
MUX
function
(OMDX/OADM)
OFA 1
Pump 2
VOA
Pump 1
Stage 1 Preamp.
Stage 2 Booster
Supervision function
Figure 105. OFA subsystem in line terminal or OADM configuration
In repeater configuration, the 1696MSPAN is mainly a bidirectional optical amplifier.
WEST SIDE
Stage 2 Booster
Stage 1 Preamp.
Pump 1
Pump 2
OSC
extraction
VOA
WDM
line
ATTEN/
DCU
OFA 1
OFA 2
WDM
line
OSC
extraction
ATTEN/
DCU
Pump 2
EAST SIDE
OSC
insertion
OSC
insertion
OFA 2
OFA 1
VOA
Pump 1
Stage 2 Booster
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LEGEND:
Optional
function
Stage 1 Preamp.
Supervision function
Figure 106. OFA subsystem in repeater configuration
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
181 / 554
An optional channel named OSC is allocated to the transport of the supervision data. The OSC allows the
remote monitoring of the NE in a network and gives some orderwires (data channel and voice channel)
to the users.
The OSC channel is managed by the SPV management unit. It is
inserted at the output of the terminal equipment (input of the WDM line),
regenerated in each OADM, backtoback terminal or repeater,
dropped at the input of the terminal equipment (output of the WDM line).
WDM
terminal
OADM
O
M
X
OADM
OSC
SPVM
unit
OADM repeater
1
OSC
SPVM
unit
OSC
O
D
X
OADM
SPVM
unit
OADM
OSC
OSC
SPVM
unit
SPVM Unit
OADM
OSC
1
O
D
X
OSC
OSC
SPVM
unit
WDM
terminal
OADM
OSC
OSC
In Line Repeater
OADM repeater
1
OSC
OADM
OSC
SPVM
O
M
X
SPVM
SPVM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CPE
Figure 107. OSC management in Line Terminal, OADM, OADM repeater and InLineRepeater Equipment
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
182 / 554

3.1.5 Optical supervisory channel (OSC) subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In case of repeaters the SPV is inserted at the output of the NE: either in the amplifier board or in the last
mux board (OMDX or OADM). The optical interfaces are located inside the SPV management unit.
More than one SPVM board can be used in one shelf. A link from/to a Customer Premises Equipment
(CPE) carrying only one or two (1550 and/or 1310) data channels can be inserted on any kind of 1696MS
node (terminal or OADM).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
183 / 554
Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is a function which allows the automatic balancing of the optical spectrum at node output. The objective is to have a flat spectrum in power per channel.
For all information related to automatic power equalization, refer to the commissioning handbook.
Two kinds of boards are mandatory to perform APE :
OSMC : OSMC board is a embedded optical spectrum analyser. It can measure 8 different spectra
at 8 different points of the NE. Only one OSMC per NE is needed. It must be optically connected to
monitoring ports of the NE
MVAC : all loop, passthrough bands and external colored channels must be connected to MVAC.
Before launching APE, the operator needs to perform some presettings.

Firstly, the operator must declare the cabling between :
MVAC & OADM or OMDX ports.
OSMC & monitored boards.
Then, the operator sets the OSMC configuration parameters :
Calibration factors : Because OSMC is connected to board monitoring outputs, calibration of the attenuation path beween real signal on the line and OSMC input is needed.
8 calibration factors are set (one per OSMC input).
Calibration can be performed manually or automatically.
Each OSMC input can be independently calibrated or not, in automatic or manual mode.
Optical LOS threshold : OSMC board detects two kinds of LOS of signals :
Total LOS on input #i : Total LOS is raised on input #i if :
Maximum channel power of input #i < Total LOS threshold of input #i
Relative LOS on channel x of input #i : relative LOS on channel x of input #i is raised if :

Maximum channel power of input #i channel power x > Relative LOS threshold
These thresholds are configurable by the operator
Finally, the operator must load APE parameters :
Installation or Upgrade
Direction to equalize
Interstage attenuation and maximum number of iterations in case of an OADM repeater.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the operator launches the equalization, the NE asks for some spectrum acquisitions to the OSMC.
Spectrum data are sent from OSMC to the NE. The NE calculates required MVAC & transponders attenuations so to have a flat spectrum at node output. The process can be iterative in case of an OADM repeater.
When the output tilt is optimized, resulting spectrum and tilt at node output are displayed.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
184 / 554

3.1.6 Automatic Power Equalization (APE) subsystem
D
E
M
U
X
MVAC
M
U
X
MVAC

MVAC
OSMC
Figure 108. Automatic Power Equalization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
APE is stopped if RUM, RUP, RUTM are raised, in case of communication problem or if maximum number
of iterations is reached.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
185 / 554
See Figure 109. on page 188 and Figure 110. The controller subsystem is based on a two levels model:
Shelf Controller (SC)
Equipment Controller (EC)

In current release the ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support
the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions.
The Equipment Shelf Controller (ESC) board provides both features or only one (as needed).
It performs both EC and SC when it is located in slot 1 of the Master shelf and only the SC functionality
when it is plugged in slot 1 of an expansion shelf.
The Flash memory of the ESC board must be plugged on its socket and in the correct
sense. In this case, it is plugged easily without constraint. On the wrong sense the Flash
memory cannot be plugged. Then invert the side to be plugged and try again. Furthermore that
flash card must not be installed in a ESC used in Expansion shelf.
The Control Platform is also provided by the ESC board for the 1696MS_C.
Shelf Controller function
SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and management and configuration provisioning.
In a shelf all the boards are connected to the ESC unit via the SPI bus. By means of the SPI bus, the processor of the ESC, can collect the control information of the boards (e.g.: alarms collection, remote inventory
and data EEPROM reading).
Equipment Controller function
The EC supports the Q3 agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine).
It provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required for
the communication between NE and Management system (OS, craft terminal, etc).
It performs as well all the SW functions related to the control and management activities of the virtual
(logical) machine: infomodel processing, event reporting and logging, equipment data base management, SW downloading and management, etc.
Control bus
The SPI bus allows:
connection between SC and boards for configuration data provisioning
remote inventory data acquisition
data collection ( alarms ) and commands handling (ex. loops)

The SC processor is master of this bus.
The ISLINK (10 Mb/s) is used to realize the communication between the EC in the master shelf and the
SC in the expansion shelves.
The ISSB bus (not used in current release) connects the Shelf Controllers processor to the ASICs and
FPGAs of the different boards in the same shelf. It is used for OChOH management and to carry primitives for OCC10 performance monitoring. It is terminated in the PSC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Intershelf Link (ILINK) (10 Mb/s) is used in 1696MS_C system only allowing to connect the SPI
bus and the Card presence signals from the slave shelves to the ESC board, only provided in master shelf.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
186 / 554

3.1.7 Controller subsystem

External interfaces toward Craft Terminal, OS...

F interface : available from the EC function for connection to a local Craft Terminal; the electrical interface
and connector are provided by the ESC card.
The standard implementation of the physical layer for the F interface consists of an RS232 UART port
accessible from the ESC card front panel.
QECC Interface: it is a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the Embedded Communication Channels available in the Optical Supervisory Channel (DCC). Through the QECC interface the
equipment can exchange management messages with a remote OS.
QAUX interface: it is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message exchange between the NE and a Remote OS station based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary protocol.
Q3/TL1 interface: it is dedicated to an OS station connection. LAN_Q supports Q3 connection to a WAN
or LAN respectively. The physical interfaces are provided by the LAN_Q card.
RE / HK interface: this interface consists of parallel I/O signals used for remote alarms and for housekeeping signals. The relevant electrical interfaces are placed on the HK card, and are controlled by the EC function through parallel I/O ports.
RA interface: it is dedicated to send commands toward the rack to light up the relevant lamps.
Flash backup and Smart Boot
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp service, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
187 / 554
Remote/
Housekeeping
Alarms
OPERATION
SYSTEM
RE/HK
RA
Q3/TL1
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
RAI
HK
LAN_Q
Local
Craft Terminal
SLAVE SHELF
FLASH
CARD
QECC
To all
SPI
boards
in the shelf
SC
ISLINK
EC
SPI
To all
boards in
the shelf
ESC BOARD
SC
ESC BOARD
SPVM
UIC
MASTER SHELF
QAUX
EXTERNAL INTF
REMOTE
OPERATION
SYSTEM
Figure 109. Controller subsystem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.1.7.1 Example of control interfaces scheme
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
188 / 554

Rack leds
MASTER SHELF
PDU/TRU
ISPB (not used in current release)

PSC
Power Supply A
PSC
Power Supply B
Local Craft
F INTERFACE
Terminal
EC
LAN
Q3/TL1
(OPERATION SYSTEM)
ISLINK
LAN
HK
HK/RE
Remote / HK Alarms
RAI
RA
Rack Leds
QECC
E1/E2
SC
2x2Mbps
QAUX intf (REMOTE OS)
F1
NU
SPIA
SPIB
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION SHELF
Power Supply A
PSC
PSC
Power Supply B
LAN
ISLINK
RAI
RA
SPIA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPIB
Figure 110. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
189 / 554
PDU/TRU
PSC/2
I
N
K
_
LAN
LAN
I
L
PSC/2
Power Supply A
Power Supply B
Local Craft
F INTERFACE
EC
S
QECC
Terminal
Q3/TL1
(OPERATION SYSTEM)
ISLINK
HK
HK/RE
Remote / HK Alarms
RAI
RA
Rack Leds
Audio
SC
V
M
SPIA
SPV channel (optical)
EXPANSION COMPACT SHELF

PSC2

W
I
L
Power Supply A
PSC2
Power Supply B
SPIA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 111. Example of control interfaces scheme in 1696MS_C
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
190 / 554

MASTER COMPACT SHELF

3.1.8 Power supply subsystem

The powering architecture is distributed: two Power Supply Cards are in charge of feeding all the other
cards hosted in the shelf by selecting the highest voltage supplied by the two station batteries.
Power Supply Cards are fit in
slot 25 and slot 48 in 1696MS
slot 7 and 12 in 1696MS_C.

The main purposes are:
Supply and distribute 48V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in the shelf of the
1696MS/1696MS_C equipment
Supply and distribute +3V service voltage dedicated to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards
Supply and distribute +5V auxiliary voltage
Make a bus termination
Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.

The PSC boards work in 1 + 1 protection; this means that (as concerning 48V) only one PSC may be
active at once. This circuit select the battery more charged and protect against reverse voltage applied.
Figure 112. on page 192 shows the equipment power supply scheme housed on the two PSC.
Input power stage
It provides adaptation to the customer central power bus by a main power block and supplies all the SPIDER FPGA by means of an onboard converter.
Main power block
It is used to select the input voltage of the system and to supply a surge protection.
It contains an EMI filter to permit the equipment to be reliable in presence of external EMI interferences
and to limit the internally generated EMI.
The voltages coming from the two station batteries, are applied to PSC A and to PSC B respectively by
means of the power connector located on the unit front panel ( ex. +BATT A BATT A to PSC A and +BATT
B BATT B to PSC B).
The +Batt can be connected to a mechanical ground through a strap setting.
Moreover each PSC receives from the back panel connector the BATT voltage coming from the other
station battery (i.e. BATT B to PSC A and BATT A to PSC B).
Each PSC can therefore select which of the two station batteries provides the highest supply.
The selected voltages are ORed and sent to the equipment cards.
Protection Circuit
The protection circuit is present in the PSC and in all the boards where a DC/DC converter is required i.e.
input stage and distributed power stages. It is an interface between +BATT BATT and the DC/DC converter.
It provides the following functions:
it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input short circuit. Fuses are fitted in order to prevent a
failed unit from shortening the input bus. In fact a input short circuit failure can cause severe fluctuations on the input power of the other DC/DC converters
it implements a startup and an inrush current limiting system in order to provide controlled charge
up for the input holdup capacitor and therefore it prevents a current surge at the module input when
the board is plugged in
it insulated the DC/DC converter in case of input voltage lower than 33 V.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
On board power supply

A DC/DC converter generates a +3.3 V voltage used to power the SPIDER FPGA.
Distributed power stage
All the boards receive the +3.6 V and the 5.5 V voltage to power the FPGA device located on each card.
Moreover, some boards receive the +BATT BATT voltages generated by the input stage of the PSC.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
191 / 554
Abnormal service range

The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at 48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the following voltage range : 0 V to 40,5 V and 57 V to 60 V.
When the equipment operates at 60 V, the voltage range becomes: 0 V to 50 V and 72 V to 75 V.
Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the S9 rack.
The maximum power consumption of the main rack is about 400 Watts.
DC/DC Power supply units output voltages
+ 3.6 V 3%
5.5 V 3%
+ 2.5 V 3%
Batt_A
GND
Batt_B
+Batt_A
PSC A
* protection
* prefilter
* fuse
GND
* OR Batt
* EMI/EMC
filter
+Batt
Batt
+Batt
Batt
3.6V
5.5V
+Batt_B
PSC B
* OR Batt
* protection
* prefilter
* fuse
* EMI/EMC
filter
* soft start
dual DC/DC
converter
* EMI/EMC
filter
* threshold
* soft start
dual DC/DC
* EMI/EMC
filter
* threshold
converter
3.6V
5.5V
PRIMARY POWER STAGE
DISTRIBUTED POWER STAGE

GENERIC BOARD
* soft start
* EMI/EMC
filter
* threshold
OBPS
3.6V
5.5V
2.5V
OR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OR
auxilliary
power supply
SPIDER
FPGA
Figure 112. 1696MSPAN equipment power supply scheme
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
192 / 554

Normal service range

The normal input voltage range of the power supply module is either:
40,5 V 48 V 57,0 V or
50,0 V 60 V 72,0 V.

3.1.9 Protection subsystem

The protection type used is Optical SNCP (network protection).
In a ring network the SubNetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) at optical channel level can be provided
either in backtoback terminals or in OADM configuration.
The transponders (MCC/OCC10/4xANY_P) are duplicated for each protected channel (also WLA2M_OP
and WLA3CDOP provide O_SNCP, but they are not duplicated because they carry one optically protected
channel). At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted on the two arms of the ring. At the receive side
one of the two available signals is selected. When a failure occurs on the working path, the system
switches on the signal of the protecting path.
Client end traffic
Receive side:
in case of a failure in one arm
of the ring the system select
the signal of the other one
Transmit side:
client signals are split
and launched on the
two arms of the ring
Backtoback
terminal
Client
Add & drop
traffic
OADM
OADM
Client
Add & drop
traffic
OADM
Client Add & drop traffic
Figure 113. Channel level protection in a ring network
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Optical SNCP (OSNCP) is ensured for each client signal by 2 optical splitters, located between the
client interface and the transponder cards:
At the transmit side, each client signal is split by a 50/50 optical splitter and sent to two transponder
cards. Then, one signal is broadcasted to one arm of the ring and the other signal is broadcasted to
the other arm.
At the receive side, each WDM signal comes from one arm of the ring to one transponder card. At
the User Tx interface, one transponder card is in working mode (laser ON) and the other is in protecting mode (laser OFF). When a fault is detected on the working path, the protection switching is performed by turning off the working User Tx laser and by reactivating the protecting one.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
193 / 554
Client signals
Working:
laser ON
User Tx
User Rx
Optical splitting
Protecting:
laser OFF
User Tx
User Rx
Transponder
West
Transponder
East
WDM Rx
WDM line
(West)
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
DMUX
MUX

Optical coupling
MUX
WDM line
(East)
DMUX
1696MSPAN
Figure 114. OSNCP principle

In the following are shown the Optical SNCP types provided by the equipment. They are
the MCC protection (alone and MCC + 4xANY), described on para. 3.1.9.1
the OCC10 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.2.
the 4xANY client signals protection, described on para. 3.1.9.3.
the WLA2 and WLA3 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.4.
the WLA2 and WLA3 protection, described on para. 3.1.9.5 on page 201.
3.1.9.1 MCC protection
Table 15. MCC protection: switching criteria
Alarm
Applicable to the following MCCs
HWF
All MCCs
C_ABS
All MCCs
C_TYPE
All MCCs
ILOS_WDM
All MCCs
LOC_user / LOC_User_Tx
Default status
always
y enabled
MCC2, MCC3
C_ABS_SFP
MCC3
C_TYPE_SFP
MCC3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When a MCC detects one of the above criteria, the transmitter is shutdown.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
194 / 554

3.1.9.1.1 MCC alone: MCC1, MCC2, MCC3
MCC West
MCC East
Rx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Figure 115. Optical SNCP with MCC units

The function is provided by two optical splitters. The selection is done by switchingoff the user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactivating the protecting one.
3.1.9.1.2 MCC + 4xANY
MCC
MCC
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
OPC
Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Rx
Tx
Rx
4xANY
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 116. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (MCC4xANY)
The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switchingoff the
MCC user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
195 / 554
OCC10 West

3.1.9.2 OCC10 protection
OCC10 East
Rx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Figure 117. Optical SNCP with OCC10 unit

The function is ensured by two optical splitters (one OPC card). The selection is done by switchingoff the
user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one.
Table 16. OCC10 protection: switching criteria
Alarm
Managed
HWF
C_ABS
C_TYPE
LOS_WDM_Rx (or LOC_OTN_WDM_Rx)
LOS_user_Tx
LOF_OTN_WDM_Rx
LOM_OTN_WDM_Rx
XFP_unplugged (OCC10_E)
Status
always enabled
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When an OCC10 detects one of the above criteria then the transmitter is shutdown.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
196 / 554
3.1.9.3 Protection of the 4xANY client

Protection can be performed optically on the 4xANY units.

MCC
MCC
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
4xANY
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
OPC
Rx
Tx
LF Link
OPC
OPC
Rx
Tx
4xANY
Rx Rx
Tx Tx
Rx
Tx
OPC
Figure 118. Optical SNCP of the MCC associated with the 4xANY (4xANY client protection)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The function is ensured by eight optical splitters (provided by four OPCs). The selection is done by switchingoff the 4xANY user Tx corresponding to the path in failure and reactiving the protecting one.
The clients are individually protected: if one is protected, it is not necessary to protect the other ones.
In 1696MS, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY on the right side always contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY on the left side, the SPARE/protecting drawers.
In 1696MS_C, when two 4xANY are used in client protection configuration, the 4xANY above (slots 4 and
5) always contains the MAIN/protected drawers, and the 4xANY below (slots 2 and 3), the SPARE/protecting drawers.
The slot allocation of the OPC according to the drawers in protection of the 4xANY clients is fixed as described in Figure 119.
N.B.
In some configurations, the OPC slot cannot be provided by an OPC board because this is already
allocated by other boards. This concerns LAN, HK and RAI boards. This can limit the number of
protected clients.
N.B.
In case the two 4xANY_P are provided with coloured SFPs (CWDM or DWDM), the transponders
are not required.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
197 / 554

DRAWER #3
DRAWER #4
DRAWER #2
OPC #3
OPC #4
DRAWER #1
DRAWER #3
DRAWER #4
OPC #1
DRAWER #1
DRAWER #2
OPC #2
Figure 119. Correspondance between OPC slots allocation and 4xANY drawers in protection
OPC location for drawers protection
drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43
drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42
drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44
drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45.

The 4xANY boards in slot 23 and 2223 cannot be protected.
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30
O O O
L
P P P
A
C C C
N
49
31 32
O O
P P
C C
33
O
P
C
34 35 36 37 38 39
O O H R O O
P P K A P P
I C C
C C
40
O
P
C
41 42 43
O O O
P P P
C C C
44
O
P
C
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
7 8
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
2 3 4 5 6
ESC
4 x ANY
45 46 47 48
O U U P
P I I S
C
C
FANS
Table 17. 4xANY client protection: switching criteria per each drawer
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm
Managed
HWF
Link_Failure_DRW_U
C_ABS
C_ABS_DRW_U
C_TYPE_DRW_U
SSF_U
Pk_AIS_U
ED
Status
always
y enabled
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
198 / 554

3.1.9.4 WLA2 and WLA3 protection

The optical protection is provided by the WLA2M_OP and WLA3CDOP boards.
As they are 2channel boards, one channel is protected by the other one.
The available protection scheme is OSNCP.
In Tx direction (from client to WDM) the signal is transmitted on the two paths by means of the optical splitter, while in Rx (from WDM to client) only one signal is sent to the client by the optical coupler, being active
only one transponder (the other one is OFF).
WDM Tx
WEST
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
SPARE
B&W Tx B&W Rx
MAIN
EAST
WDM Rx
B&W Rx B&W Tx
WLA2M_OP
WLA2CDOP
1:1
optical
coupler
1:1
optical
splitter
Figure 120. OSNCP with WLA units (WLA2M_OP/WLA3CDOP)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 18. WLA2M_OP and WLA3CDOP protection: switch criteria

Alarm
Managed by
ILOS_SFP_X (X=WDM ports, WDM CH1 or CH2)
WLA2M_OP, WLA3CDOP
SFP_ABS_X (X=1 to 4, all B&W and WDM ports)
WLA3CDOP
ED
Status
always enabled
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
199 / 554
Refer to Figure 121. In the above example, a protected path is created between NE1 and NE2, using
WLA3CDOP cards NE3 provides an optical channel passthrough.
The physical connections indicated in pink are the connections to be created for path discovery (Note that
a physical connection need to be created for an optical channel passthrough but it is done automatically
in case of optical band passthrough).
The physical connections are all of the OPStype except those related to SDH (port 5) (SDH/WDM interworking).
For the physical connections related to ports 2 and 4, it is needed to select the mux ports corresponding
to the same wavelength.
Compared to the protected path creation for an OCC10 or a MCC, an additional operation is needed when
creating a protected path with a WLA3CDOP: it is necessary to create the physical connections between
the DWDM SFPs and the corresponding mux/demux ports.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 121. Example of a 1696 MS network with path protection using WLA3CDOP cards
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
200 / 554

3.1.9.4.1 1354 RM: configuration of the WLA3CDOP

3.1.9.5 OTS protection

OTSP protects the fiber in pointtopoint links.
All the multiplexed signal is protected: if one or some channels fail, there is no switch in OMSP board.
If there is a fiber break on the MAIN path, all the multiplexed signal is lost, then the board switches.
There is no switch in case of HWF, because if HWF occurs on OMSP board, it will not be able to switch.
OMSP
M
u
x
OMSP
M
u
x
SubNetwork
D
em
u
x
D
em
u
x
Figure 122. OTS protection with OMSP unit
Table 19. OTS protection: switch criteria

Alarm
Managed
Status
ILOS on MAIN path and NO ILOS on SPARE path
always enabled
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3.1.9.5.1 1354 RM: ACCESS to OMSP commands when 1354 RM is present

[1]
Identify USM handling the 1696MSPAN, i.e. USMSH5Q3WDMVxx
[2]
Go to /usr/Systems/1353NM_**/eml/usmsh5q3wdmvxx/conf/ directory
[3]
Edit param.cfg file
[4]
Search SECURITY_ENABLED parameter and set it to False
[5]
Close all related open USMs in the machine
[6]
Open USM again on the target NE(s)

the USM now behaves as we were in NM only configuration for this USM type only.
We have now access to Protection commands in cross connection menu.
[7]
After the operations on OMSP set back the SECURITY_ENABLED parameter.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
201 / 554
The 1696MSPAN is able to monitor the performance of the optical signal transmission. It is an SDH type
Performance Monitoring, based on B1 counter and performed at the RX accesses (for SDH or SONET
frames at system inputs only).
This function is available for MCC, OCC10, WLA2M, WLA3CD and 4xANY boards (on the received
aggregate signal only, as regards 4xANY).
These boards monitor the B1 byte.
OCC10 and MCC3 support simultaneous PMs on client and line sides
WLA2M and WLA3CD support PMs on one transponder (of two) at the same time.
The performance monitoring is available:
at the User Rx access in order to monitor the client incoming signal,
at the WDM Rx access in order to monitor the WDM incoming signal and its transmission through
the WDM network.
It is possible to manage up to 32 PM per NE.
PM at WDM Rx side
PM on client signal
User
RX
ADM
WDM
TX
1696MSPAN
User
TX
WDM
RX
User
TX
1696MSPAN
WDM
WDM
TX
WDM
RX
ADM
User
RX
Figure 123. Two possible monitored sections by the MCC

What does the system monitor?
Performance monitoring are SDH type. The system monitors:
performance primitive
1 CV (Count of Violations). 8 errors by SDH or SONET frame can be detected
Defect Seconds (DS): second during which one of the LOS (Loss Of Signal), LOF (Loss Of
Frame (SDH) or LOC (Loss Of Clock) events occurred.
In SDH ADM devices, the number of EB (Erroneous Blocks) is accumulated, what is no more
true here (we perform the count of B1 violations: CV). But we make the approximation that CV
= EB for low BER.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
performance events
ES (Erroneous Second): second containing one or more erroneous bits
SES (Severely Erroneous Second): second containing at least 30% of erroneous blocks or at
least one defect (LOS, LOF or LOC)
BBE (Background Blocks Errors): number of B1 erroneous bits outside an SES.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
202 / 554

3.1.10 Performance Monitoring subsystem

How does the system store the performance data?

Two counters are provided to store the Performance Monitoring data:
15 minutes counter:
The current measurement and measurements of the 4 previous hours (15minute periods) are
stored in the NE data base. Measurements of several days are stored in SH base.
24 hours counter:
The current measurement and the one of the day before are stored in the NE data base. Measurements on several months are stored in SH base.
For both periods, 15 minutes and 24 hours, an adjustable threshold alarm (TCA) on each ES, SES and
BBE is provided to the operator. A TCA alarm (QoS alarm) is raised when one of these thresholds is
reached (all the counter values are available).
Individual PM threshold management. It is provided the ability
to set the threshold level on a per entity basis for 15 min or 24 hours on the user side or WDM side
of each transponder and on the STM16 signal of each 4xANY board
to define user default threshold level on per type of board basis for 15 min or 24 hours.
Table 20. Default thresholds for QoS alarms
QoS_24
Q
S 24
alarm
QoS_15
Q
S 15
alarm
SET/RESET thresholds
BBE
ES
SES
36000
150
15
Implicite
p
RESET after 24 hours
SET thresholds
RESET thresholds
BBE
ES
SES
BBE
ES
SES
24000
50
10
200
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1354 RM: how to handle measures on a WDM protected path

[1]
Using PM Domain in RM Browser create the wanted measures profile, i.e. Maintenance 15m or/and
QOS 24h.
Check that Counters Provided field is set to TRUE
[2]
Correlate the target path(s) to the previous measure.

There are several ways to do that, from measure or from the path.
i.e. from measure use /Actions/Correlate/Merge/Correlate Paths/Trails
then drag and drop the target path(s).
i.e. from path use /Performance Measurement/Add to, then select target path(s)
At this stage the RM automatically add default measured point to the measure defined in step
The default points are extremities/ctps of the path.

You can list them by selecting the measure and clicking on PmTps icon. You can also double
click on the measure.
IF your path is a WDM protected path, the extremities of the path are the OPC ports. OCP
board is not a board generating PM, the PM generation is performed by the transponders linked
to the OPC.
Therefore after step [2] the PmTps list should be still empty
[3]
To fill the PmTps list of the target measure for WDM protected paths, open the routing display of the
target path(s) already correlated to the measure(s).
In the routing display, select the wanted ctp(s) you want to monitor then
/Actions/Performance Monitoring/Correlate a Planned Measure.
If the path has been correlated to several measures, a window opens to choose the one(s) you want
to correlate.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
203 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[4]
ED

The Ctps to select are the ones corresponding to the transponders you want to monitor. If you have
a transponder in slot 12 in your path you should see the related two Ctps (B&W and WDM) in the
routing display of the path.
Activate the measure(s) with /Actions/Start/Consistency/Stop/Start
Now the target NE transponders should be counting PM.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
204 / 554

3.2 System Configuration

3.2.1 Configuration criteria
The basic configuration of the relies on the following criteria:
the traffic demand defines the number of channels (1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 or 32 channels)
the network architecture and the position of the equipment in the network defines the NE type (line
terminal, OADM, backtoback terminal, repeater or CPE).
the optical power budget determines the need of optical amplification in the line terminal and OADM
NEs or the need of repeater NEs.
Once the basic configuration is defined, secondary criteria will be determinant to define the optional features:
TDM concentrator (4ANY)

Up to 4 client signals may be multiplexed on a single STM16. The concentration of 4 client signals
on a unique transponder access, requires a 4ANY board but saves 3 transponders and the corresponding optical channels. In case of the 4xANY_P is equipped with a CWDM or DWDM SFP optical
module, the transponder is not required.
Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection (OSNCP)

In ring networks, both channels and each client signals can be individually protected:
the protection of a channel/wavelenght requires an OPC board and two transponders (MCC/
OCC10)
the protection of the client signal(s) requires up to four OPCs, two 4xANY and two MCC boards
(only in case of the 4xANY is not equipped with WDM SFP)
the protection of the client signal requires one optically protected WLA (WLA2M_OP,
WLA3CDOP).
Supervision function and User interface

The supervision feature requires an SPVM (SPVM2; SPVM_H) board. The 2 Mbit/s user interface
feature requires in addition an UIC board. These two features also require the OSC insertion MUX
and the OSC extraction DMUX implemented in all the OADM boards, the OMDX8100_M_L1_XS,
the CMDX2 (the last one is used for CWDM applications; 1510nm or 1310nm is the CWDM supervision wavelength) and the OAC boards. If the use of one of these features is foreseen, the early choice
of a board with the OSC MUX and DMUX will allow a further implementation, without interruption of
the traffic.
Expansion MUX/DEMUX
The 2:1 expansion MUX and DEMUX (OMDX8100_M_L1_X and OMDX8100_M_L1_XS boards)
are necessary to reach NE configurations with more than 16 optical channels. A NE can be upgraded
up to a 32 channel NE without traffic interruption if the expansion MUX and DMUX are already
installed.
Remote NE
The type of Remote NE is defined when few channels are needed for the user to reach from a ring
a distant NE or to create a point to point link with CPE using.
Boards are generally 1696MS shelf and 1696MS_C shelf compatible except boards explicitly
denominated as strictly for 1696MS or strictly for Compact shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
When a CPE is used in office version, the customer must provide an appropriate ground.
CPE metallic housing should be connected to the ground,
0 V_DC of the External power feeding must be also connected to this ground.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
205 / 554
Let consider the example of Figure 124.

4 added and dropped
client signals
8 client
signals
Line
Terminal
4 passthrough
channels
OADM
Line
Terminal
8 client
signals
Figure 124. Example of starting configuration

One 8 channel MUX/DMUX card is sufficient to build this configuration. The Table 21. gives three possibilities and their characteristics.
Table 21. Configuration criteria
MUX/DMUX board
OMDX8100_M_L2 or
OMDX8100_M_S2 or
OMDX8100_M_S1
minimum
Power
budget
Upgradability
Supervision
channel
maximum
12 or 16 channels without
traffic interruption.
No
24 or 32 channels with traffic
interruption.
OADM8100_M_##_S
intermediate
intermediate
12 or 16 channels without
Yes
24 or 32 channels with traffic
interruption.
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
maximum
minimum
Up to 32 channels without
Yes
In the OMDX and OADM board name, the characters of the fourth part if any, have the following
meaning:
S: board with supervision channel extract and insert functions.
X: board with expansion MUX.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Cost
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
206 / 554

Consequently the ground connection of the positive Battery 48 Vdc should be directly connected on the ground (PSC side) of the power cable.
3.2.2 1696MS (main shelf) configurations examples

3.2.2.1 Typical DWDM / CWDM configurations

3.2.2.1.1 DWDM configurations
Terminals
1 channel terminal
2 channels terminal
4 channels terminal with two 4ANY boards
8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface
16 channels terminal with expansion and supervision
32 channels terminal with two stages amplification in one shelf (w/ WLA)
Backtoback terminals / OADM
1 channel OADM
2 channels OADM
4 channels OADM
8 channels OADM
8 channels west and 4 channels east backtoback terminal / OADM (asymmetrical configuion)
16 (protected) channels backtoback terminal / OADM in one shelf (with WLA)
32 (protected and amplified) channels backtoback terminal / OADM in one NE
It is also possible to use 12 and 24 channels terminal and backtoback terminal/OADM.
Repeaters: With and Without supervision.
3.2.2.1.2 CWDM configurations
Terminals
1 to 8 channels terminal
Backtoback terminals / OADM
1 to 8 channels backtoback terminal
Repeaters: With and Without supervision.
3.2.2.1.3 Mixed (CWDM + DWDM) configurations
Terminals (with or without supervision)
(up to) 15 channels terminal: (up to) 8 DWDM channels plus (up to) 7 CWDM channels
(up to) 22 channels terminal: (up to) 16 DWDM channels plus (up to) 6 CWDM channels
Backtoback terminals (with or without supervision)
(up to) 15 channels btob terminal: (up to) 8 DWDM chs plus (up to) 7 CWDM chs for each side
(up to) 22 channels btob terminal: (up to) 16 DWDM chs plus (up to) 6 CWDM chs for each side
Some of these configurations are described hereafter.

If equipped with a WDM SFP module, also the 4xAY_P can be considered as a transponder,
but it will not shown in the following figures for semplicity reasons.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
207 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder (see the
examples shown in the following figures), apart when the WLA unit (WLA2M_OP and
WLA3CDOP) is used: in this case the OPC is not required.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
208 / 554

Examples of configurations with MVAC are also provided.
3.2.2.2 Line Terminals (one sided multiplexer / demultiplexer)

3.2.2.2.1 4 channels terminal

4 channels terminal can be designed with
the 4channel OADM board, OCC10, MCC, WLA3 and 4xANY_P transponders, in case of DWDM
application. In this case the passthrough link is not connected (Mux/Demux extrainput).
the 8channel CMDX2 board, WLA2, WLA3 and 4XANY_P transponders, in case of CWDM application.
WLAs are 2channel transponders: only two cards are required to provide the 4channel configuration.
The 4xANY(_S) board can be used only with MCCs and WLAs. The 4channels terminal configuration
can be applied also to OCC10, but with the 9.953Gbps (STM64/OC192/10GBE WAN) client signal.
In case of the 4xANY_P is provided with a WDM SFP module, the transponder is not required.
OADM4100_M_chxy_S or CMDX2
user
interfaces
1
M
U
X
4 x ANY
Client
Signals
4xMCC
8xOCC
2xWLA
4 x ANY
4 channels
OSC in
D
M
U
X
4 channels
4
2Mbps
order wire
UIC
OSC out
SPVM
Figure 125. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram with CMDX2 or OADM4 board
2
Equipment Shelf Controller

OSMC (0pt.)
OADM 4 channels or CMDX2
Transponder ch. 30
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
P
S
C
SPVM (2, _H opt.)
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch. 33
Transponder ch. 32
Transponder ch. 31
See note
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
A
I I
K A
I
N
C C
49
48
P
S
C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FANS
Figure 126. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration

* The ESC board is designed in order to support, in the same board, both Equipment and Shelf Controller
facilities. The ESC unit has two microprocessors, one dedicated for each task.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
209 / 554

OSMC (0pt.)
OADM 4 channels or CMDX2
WLA
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SPVM_H (opt.)
WLA

25
P
S
C
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
A
I I
K A
I
N
C C
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 127. 4 (CWDM or DWDM) channels terminal configuration with WLA boards
1
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
L
H R
A
K A
I
N
49
38
O
P
C
#
2
FANS
39
O
P
C
#
1
40
O
P
C
#
3
41
O
P
C
#
4
42
O
P
C
#
2
43
O
P
C
#
1
SPVM (2, _H) (opt.)
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
MCC ch. 33
MCC ch. 32
MCC ch. 31

OSMC (0pt.)
OADM 4100_M_chxy_S
MCC ch. 30
44
O
P
C
#
3
45
O
P
C
#
4
46
U
I
C
47
U
I
C
48
P
S
C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 128. 4 DWDM channels terminal configuration with 4XANY drawers protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
210 / 554

3.2.2.2.2 8 channels terminal with expansion, supervision and user interface

Whatever the implementation, all the boards can be placed in a single shelf.
This configuration can be designed with
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS mux/demux (only L1 band is supported), OCC10, MCC and WLA3 transponders, in case of DWDM application. The same board locations are available with any band (L1,
L2, S1, S2) without expansion
the 8 channels CMDX2 mux/demux, WLA2 and WLA3 transponders, in case of CWDM application.
The 4xANY_P with the appropriate (CWDM or DWDM) SFP can also be used as a transponder.
When OMDX boards are used to design 8 (DWDM) channels terminals, only one set of channels (L1) can
be provided with SPV. If an upgrading up to 32 channels is required, OMDX8 board can perform it.
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS or CMDX2
1 (30)
M
U
X
8 x MCC
8 client
signals
8 x OCC
4 x WLA
8 channels
OSC in
8 (38)
1 (30)
8 (38)
D
M
U
X
8 channels
OSC out
2Mbps
order wire
SPVM
UIC
Figure 129. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal block diagram
SPVM (2, _H) (opt.)
Transponder ch 38
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Transponder ch 37
7 8
Transponder ch 36
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 30

OSMC (0pt.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 31
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
A
I I
K A
I
N
C C
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 130. 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal configuration with expansion and supervision
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
211 / 554
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SPVM_H (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
7 8
WLA
WLA
WLA

25
P
S
C
WLA

OSMC (0pt.)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
A
I I
K A
I
N
C C
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 131. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with WLA boards
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
L
H R
A
K A
I
N
49
38
O
P
C
#
2
FANS
39
O
P
C
#
1
40
O
P
C
#
3
41
O
P
C
#
4
42
O
P
C
#
2
43
O
P
C
#
1
SPVM_H (opt.)
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
7 8
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY

OSMC (0pt.)
44
O
P
C
#
3
45
O
P
C
#
4
46
U
I
C
47
U
I
C
48
P
S
C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 132. Example of 8 (CWDM or DWDM) channels line terminal with 4xANY_P
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
212 / 554
3.2.2.2.3 8 channels terminal with supervision and user interface and without expansion

In DWDM application four sets of channels are supported: L1, L2, S1, S2.
By using OADM boards in terminals, SPV is available for each set of channels. However, if an upgrading
up to 32 channels is required, using OADM8 boards is not sufficient (need for expansion).
In CWDM application the 8 available channels are multiplexed by the CMDX2 board.
The 4xANY_P with the appropriate (CWDM or DWDM) SFP can also be used as a transponder.
OADM8100_M_xx_S or CMDX2
1
M
U
X
8 x MCC
8 client
signals
8 x OCC10
OSC in
4 x WLA
2Mbps
order wire
8 channels
UIC
D
M
U
X
8 channels
OSC out
SPVM
Figure 133. Example of 8 channels line terminal w/o expansion block diagram
SPVM (2, _H) (opt.)
Transponder ch 38
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Transponder ch 37
7 8
Transponder ch 36
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35
Transponder ch 30

OSMC (0pt.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 31
OADM8100_M_L1_XS or CMDX2
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
A
I I
K A
I
N
C C
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 134. Example of 8 channels line terminal with supervision (no expansion)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
213 / 554
This configuration allows to mux/demux to/from the CWDM line two 10 Gbps CWDM wavelengths and six
(up to 2.67Gbps) CWDM ones. The involved boards are
up to two OCC10_XFP_CWDM boards for the two 10 Gbps CWDM signals
WLA2s or WLA3s (with CWDM SFP) for the (up to 2.67 Gbps) CWDM signals
one CMDX2 for the demultiplexing/demultiplexing of the eigth wavelengths:
the up to 2.67Gbps CWDM channels can be connected to all the CMDX2 ports
the 10 Gbps CWDM channels can connected only to the 1530nm and the 1550nm ports.
8 client
signals
1470nm from WLA

1490nm from WLA
1510nm from WLA
1530nm from OCC10
1550nm from OCC10
1570nm from WLA
1590nm from WLA
2x
1610nm from WLA
OCC10_XFP_CWDM
plus
1470nm from WLA
3 x WLA
1490nm from WLA
1510nm from WLA
1530nm from OCC10
1550nm from OCC10
1570nm from WLA
1590nm from WLA
1610nm from WLA
CMDX2
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
8 D/CWDM
channels
OSC in
OSC out
8 D/CWDM
channels
Figure 135. 8 CWDM channels terminal with two 10Gbps chs and six 2.67Gbps chs block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
7 8
CMDX2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SPVM_H (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
WLA (with CWDM SFP)

WLA (with CWDM SFP)
WLA (with CWDM SFP)
OCC10_XFP_CWDM
OCC10_XFP_CWDM
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
A
I I
K A
I
N
C C
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 136. 8 channels terminal: two OCC10_XFP_CWDMs and three WLAs connected to CMDX2
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
214 / 554

3.2.2.2.4 8 CWDM channels terminal: OCC10_XFP_CWDMs and WLAs connected to CMDX2
3.2.2.2.5 16 DWDM channels terminal with expansion and supervision

In order to upgrade a 8 DWDM channel terminal to a 16 DWDM channel one, or to design 16 DWDM channel terminals with SPV, one 8 channel OADM and one 8 channel OMDX boards can be used.
The 4xANY_P with DWDM SFP can also be used as a transponder.
8xMCC
OMDX8100_M_L2
20
8 client 8xOCC10
signals 4xWLA
M
U
X
28
20
28
D
M
U
X
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
UNIT 2
OSC in
30
M
U
X
38
8xMCC
8 client 8xOCC10
signals 4xWLA
30
38
D
M
U
X
LB
SB
unused
16 channels
LB
SB
unused
16 channels
OSC out
UNIT 1
Figure 137. 16 DWDM channels terminal with expansion and SPV upgradability block diagram
7 8
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H
I I
A
K
N
C C
49
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 28
Transponder ch 38
Transponder ch 27
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 26
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 25
Transponder ch 35
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 23
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 22
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 21
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 20
Transponder ch 30
OMDX8100_M_L2
SPV managenement (opt)
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 138. 16 DWDM channels terminal (with MCC/OCC10) with expansion and SPV upgradability
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
215 / 554
3.2.2.2.6 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLA boards
The 16 DWDM channels terminal configuration can be designed with two 8channel DWDM mux/demux
(OMDX8100) and eigth WLA3 transponders equipped with DWDM SFP, as described in previous para.
3.2.2.2.5 (refer to the block diagram of Figure 137. for details) and in Figure 140.
The mixed 15channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires
one 8channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 or S1 bands to be respectively connected to

the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
one 8channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
eigth WLA3 or WLA2 transponders, taking into account that WLA2 can only provide CWDM channels
and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
Refer to block diagram of Figure 139. and Figure 140.
1470nm
CH1
7 client 4xWLA3
or
signals
4xWLA2
OSC in
7 CWDM channels
CH7
1610nm
M
U
X
1550nm
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
30
M
U
X
38
8 client
4xWLA3
signals
30
LB
SB
unused
D
M
U
X
38
LB
1470nm
M
U
X
D
M
1610nm U
X
8 DWDM chs in L1 band
D
M
SB U
unused X
UNIT 1
CMDX2
(7 DWDM
channels
plus
8 DWDM
channels)
15 channels
mixed
OSC out
1550nm
DWDM
15 channels
mixed
UNIT 2
Figure 139. Example of mixed 15channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H
I I
A
K
N
C C
49
WLA
MUX/DEMUX 8 channels
SPVM_H (opt.)
WLA
WLA
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
WLA
7 8
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 140. 16 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (15channel) terminal with WLA boards
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
216 / 554


3.2.2.2.7 24 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (22 chs) terminal

The 24 DWDM channels terminal configuration with single channel transponders (MCC, OCC10,
4xANY_P) requires two shelves. The block diagram is similar to that of Figure 143. without the S1 band and
the shelves configuration is similar to that of Figure 144. without S1 band transponders and mux/demux.
The 24 DWDM channels terminal configuration with twochannel transponders requires twelve WLA3s
and three OMDX8100 (L1, L2, S2 bands) equipped in only one shelf. The block diagram is similar to that
of Figure 143. without the S1 band (chs 52 to 60) and the shelf configuration is shown in Figure 142.
The mixed 22channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires
two 8channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 and S1 bands to be respectively connected

to the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
one 8channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
eleven WLA3 or WLA2 transponders, taking into account that WLA2 can only provide CWDM channels and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
CH1
3xWLA3
6 client
or
signals
3xWLA2
6 CWDM channels
M
U
X
38
D
M
U
X
30
38
52
8 client
4xWLA3
signals
OSC in
CH6
30
8 client
signals 4xWLA3
CMDX2
1470nm
M
U
X
60
D
M
U
X
52
60
1610nm
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
LB
M
SB
U
X
unused
8 DWDM chs in L1 band
LB D
SB M
U
unused X
DWDM
22 channels
mixed
1550nm
(6 CWDM
channels
plus
MUX
16 DWDM
DEMUX channels)
CWDM
22 channels
mixed
OMDX8100_M_S1
1530nm
8 DWDM chs in S1 band
OSC out
DWDM
Figure 141. Example of mixed 22channel CWDM/DWDM terminal block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
WLA
SPVM_H (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L
U U P
H
I I S
A
K
N
C C C
49
FANS
Figure 142. 24 channels terminal or mix C/DWDM (22channel) terminal with WLA boards
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
217 / 554
3.2.2.2.8 32 DWDM channels terminal + supervision with two stages amplification

2 shelves are needed for this configuration.

OMDX8100_M_L2
20
8 x MCC
8 client
signals 8 x OCC10
4 x WLA
M
U
X
28
20
28
D
M
U
X
UNIT 3
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
30
M
U
X
8 x MCC
8 client
signals 8 x OCC10
38
4 x WLA
30
38
D
M
U
X
52
8 x MCC
4 x WLA
OFA
D
M
U
X
OFA
OFA
32 channels
OFA
OSC out
M
U
X
42
UNIT 4
8 client
signals 8 x OCC10
SB
M
U
X
UNIT 1
50
4 x WLA
SB
OAC
OSC in
EXP
LB
42
8 x MCC
8 client
signals 8 x OCC10
LB
OAC
M
U
X
60
50
D
M
U
X
OMDX8100_M_S2
UNIT 2
52
60
D
M
U
X
OMDX8100_M_S1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 143. 32 channels terminal + SPV + two stages OAC block diagram (example)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
218 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
OMDX8100_M_L2
Transponder ch 28
Transponder ch 38
Transponder ch 27
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 26
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 25
Transponder ch 35
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 23
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 22
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 21
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 20
Transponder ch 30
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
26
L
A
N
7 8
7 8
Transponder ch 46
Transponder ch 56
Transponder ch 44
Transponder ch 54
Transponder ch 43
Transponder ch 53
Transponder ch 42
Transponder ch 52
OMDX8100_M_S1
25
P
S
C
OMDX8100_M_S2
Transponder ch 50
Transponder ch 60
Transponder ch 49
Transponder ch 59
Transponder ch 48
Transponder ch 58
Transponder ch 47
Transponder ch 57
Equipment Shelf Controller (SC)

1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
FANS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
L
H R
I I
A
K AI
C C
N
49
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48
P
S
C
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R
L
P
P
A
A
S
S
I
N
C
C
49
FANS
Figure 144. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 2 stages OAC configuration
03
219 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FANS
ED
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
SPVM_H (opt.)
1
2
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
I I
A
K A
N
C C
I
49
4
5
6
7 8
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48
P
S
C
3
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Figure 145. 32 channels terminal + SPV + 1 stage OAC configuration with WLA
03
220 / 554

3.2.2.3 OADM and BacktoBack Terminals

In the following configurations we can plug MVAC boards in slots 4 to 11 and/or 14 to 21. Each
MVAC is used to replace a transponder in the case of a channel loop or to adjust passthrough
port losses.
In OADM configuration the singlechannel transponders are in adjacent slots (West in even, East in odd)
then the board location is the same with or without protection. For configuration without protection, just
remove the OPC boards.
3.2.2.3.1 4 channels OADM
4 client signals 4 client signals
OADM4100_M_chyz_S
OADM4100_M_chyz_S
OSC out
OSC in
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OSC in
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
WLA
4x
WLA
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
2.66 Gb/s backpanel

electrical links (MCC only)
WEST
OSC out
EAST
Figure 146. 4 channels OADM block diagram

2
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
OADM4100_M_chxy_S (East)

OSMC (0pt.)
OADM4100_M_chxy_S (West)
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L
O
O
O
O
P
H R
A
P
P
P
P
S
K A
N
C
C
C
C
I
C
49
FANS
Figure 147. 4 channels backtoback terminal / OADM

Every combination of east and west sets of channels is possible.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
221 / 554
The 8 DWDM channels OADM configuration can be designed with
two 8channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100) or two 8channel DWDM OADM (OADM8100) or
two 8channel CWDM mux/demux (CMDX2)
16 transponders (MCC, OCC10, 4xANY_P): 8 channels are connected to the west side and the other
8 channels are connected to the east side (via OPCs in case of protected channels, directly for unprotected ones). For the 8 channels OADM with WLAs see Figure 154. to Figure 156.
8 OPCs, located below the main transponder.

Both DWDM and CWDM channels are available. From Figure 148. to Figure 153. are shown DWDM systems.
With optical protection of each channel (neither SPV nor EXP)
8 add & drop protected client signals
OMDX8100_M_x
OMDX8100_M_y
OPCs
Mx/DMx 8 ch.
(n8) channels
n channels
D
M
U
X
WEST
n channels
M
U
X
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
WLA
4x
WLA
M
U
X
n channels
EAST
D
M
U
X
n channels
(n8) channels
Figure 148. 8channel OADM w/ protection block diagram
2
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS West
Transponder ch 30W
Transponder ch 30E
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 31E
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 32E
Transponder ch 33W
Transponder ch 33E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35W
Transponder ch 35E
Transponder ch 36W
Transponder ch 36E
Transponder ch 37W
Transponder ch 37E
Transponder ch 38W
Transponder ch 38E
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS East
SPVM(2, _H) (opt.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
O
O
O
O
R O
O
L
P
O
O
H A P
P
P
P
P
P
A
S
P
P
K
C
C
C
C
C
I
C
N
C
C
C
49
FANS
In protected configuration, the OPCs have to be plugged under the MAIN transponder.
Figure 149. 8 OADM protected channels
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
222 / 554

3.2.2.3.2 8 channels OADM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30W
Transponder ch 30E
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 31E
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 32E
Transponder ch 33W
Transponder ch 33E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35W
Transponder ch 35E
Transponder ch 36W
Transponder ch 36E
Transponder ch 37W
Transponder ch 37E
Transponder ch 38W
Transponder ch 38E
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM(2, _H) (opt.)

With expansion and supervision upgrade capabilities
Only symmetrical configuration can be provided.

OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OSC out
LB
OSC in
25
P
S
C
ED
2
3
4
5
8 add&drop
client signals
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
6
7 8
8 add&drop
client signals
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
WLA
4x
WLA
WEST
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SB
SB
M
U
X
SB
SB
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
OSC in
LB
D
M
U
X
OSC out
EAST
Figure 150. 8channel OADM w/o protection block diagram
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
FANS
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L
P
H R
A
S
K A
N
I
C
49
Figure 151. 8 channels OADM with EXP and SPV capabilities
03
223 / 554
With supervision and without expansion upgrade capabilities

Four set of channels are supported : L1, L2, S1, S2.
8 add&drop
client signals
OADM8100_M_xx_S
8 add&drop
client signals

xx stands for the band used: L1, L2, S1, S2.

OADM8100_M_xx_S
OSC out
OSC in
D
M
U
X
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
WLA
4x
WLA
M
U
X
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
OSC out
OSC in
EAST
WEST
Figure 152. 8channel OADM w/o protection block diagram/2
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OADM8100_M_xx_S West
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 5E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E
OADM8100_M_xx_S East
SPVM(2, _H) (opt.)
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
R
L
H A
I I
A
K I
C C
N
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 153. 8 channels OADM with supervision upgrade capability
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
224 / 554

8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection

In case of the 8 DWDM channels OADM configuration is required, two OADM8100 or OMDX8100 mux/demux and 8 WLA3s with DWDM SFP have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is required, WLA3CDOP boards have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is not required WLA3CD boards have to be used.
In case of the 8 CWDM channels OADM configuration is required, two CMDX2 (8 CWDM channels mux/
demux), 8 WLA2 or 8 WLA3s with CWDM SFPs have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is required, WLA3CDOP or WLA2M_OP boards have to be used.
In case of the optical protection is not required WLA3CD or WLA2M boards have to be used.
* up to 32 channels for DWDM systems
* up to 8 channels for CWDM systems
OMDX8100 or
OADM8100 or
CMDX2
OSC in
M
U
X
ch1W
ch1E
ch8W
ch8E
n channels*
OSC out
D
M
U
X
n channels*
(n8) channels (only for DWDM)

D
M
U
X
OSC out
OMDX8100 or
OADM8100 or
CMDX2
ch1W
ch1E
ch8W
ch8E
WEST
M
U
X
OSC in
EAST
8xWLA2M_OP
8xWLA3CD_OP
8 client
signals
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 154. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ protection block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
225 / 554
* up to 32 channels for DWDM systems

* up to 8 channels for CWDM systems
OSC in
M
U
X
OMDX8100 or
OADM8100 or
CMDX2

ch1W
ch1E
ch8W
ch8E
n channels*
OSC out
D
M
U
X
n channels*

D
M
U
X
OSC out

OMDX8100 or
OADM8100 or
CMDX2
ch1W
ch1E
ch8W
ch8E
M
U
X
OSC in
WEST
EAST
8xWLA2M
8xWLA3CD
8xWLA2M
8xWLA3CD
8 client
signals
8 client
signals
Figure 155. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/o protection block diagram
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
I I
A
K A
N
C
C
I
49
WLA
SPVM2 (opt.)
WLA
WLA
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
WLA
7 8
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
48
P
S
C
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 156. 8 DWDM or CWDM channels OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
226 / 554
8 channels OADM with protection, 4xANY drawers protection

2
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24


OSMC (0pt.)
MCC ch 30 W
MCC ch 30 E
MCC ch 31 W
MCC ch 31 E
MCC ch 32 W
MCC ch 32 E
MCC ch 33 W
MCC ch 33 E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
MCC ch 35 W
MCC ch 35 E
MCC ch 36 W
MCC ch 36 E
MCC ch 37 W
MCC ch 37 E
MCC ch 38 W
MCC cgh 38 E
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
O
O
O
O
O
O
L
P
O
O
H
P
P
P
P
P
P
A
S
P
P
K
C
C
C
C
C
C
N
C
C
C
49
FANS
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
O O
P
L
P P
S
A
C C
C
N
# #
2 1
49
32
O
P
C
#
3
33
O
P
C
#
4
34
O
P
C
#
2
35 36 37
O
R
P
A
C
I
#
1
38
O
P
C
#
2
FANS
39
O
P
C
#
1
40
O
P
C
#
3
41
O
P
C
#
4
42
O
P
C
#
2
43
O
P
C
#
1
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
44
O
P
C
#
3
45
O
P
C
#
4
46
U
I
C
47
U
I
C
48
P
S
C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 157. 8 channels OADM with protection, 4xANY drawers protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
227 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
8 channels
8 channels
25
P
S
C
ED
2
3
4
5
6
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E
OADM4100_M_chyz_S East
SPV managenement
OSC out
Transponder ch 5W
8 client signals
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 7W

OSMC (0pt.)
Transponder ch 8W
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
WLA
2x
WLA
OADM8100_M_x_S
OSC in
4 client signals
OADM4100_M_chyz_S
WEST
EAST
1
1
8
4
1
1
8
4
OSC in
4 channels
4 channels
OSC out
FANS
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L
O
O
O
O
P
H
A
P
P
P
P
S
K
N
C
C
C
C
C
49
Figure 158. 8 West / 4 East channels OADM
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
228 / 554

3.2.2.3.3 8 channels west and 4 channels east
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

25
P
S
C
ED
2
26
L
A
N
4
5
27
L
A
N
49
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
O
O
O
O
H R
I I
P
P
P
P
K AI
C C
C
C
C
C
7 8
7 8
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 5E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E

OSMC (0pt.)
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

3.2.2.3.4 12 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion
The example of Figure 159. describes a configuration using the L1 band mux/demux (OMDX8100) with
supervision and expansion.
The same board location is available with any band (L1, L2, S1, S2) without expansion.
xx stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48
P
S
C
FANS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R O
L O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P
P
A P
A P
P
P
P
P
P
P
S
S
I
N
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
49
FANS
Figure 159. 12 protected channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration
03
229 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
OSMC (0pt.)
Transponder ch 30W
Transponder ch 30E
Transponder ch 31W
Transponder ch 31E
Transponder ch 32W
Transponder ch 32E
Transponder ch 33W
Transponder ch 33E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35W
Transponder ch 35E
Transponder ch 36W
Transponder ch 36E
Transponder ch 37W
Transponder ch 37E
Transponder ch 38W
Transponder ch 38E
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
1
2
3
4
25
P
S
C
26
L
A
N
27
L
A
N
49
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
H R
I I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
K AI P
C C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
3
4
OMDX8100_M_S2 West
Transponder ch 42W
Transponder ch 42E
Transponder ch 43W
Transponder ch 43E
Transponder ch 44W
Transponder ch 44E
Transponder ch 45W
Transponder ch 45E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 47W
Transponder ch 47E
Transponder ch 48W
Transponder ch 48E
Transponder ch 49W
Transponder ch 49E
Transponder ch 50W
Transponder ch 50E
OMDX8100_M_S2 East
The example of Figure 160. describes a configuration using the L1 band mux/demux (OMDX8100) with
supervision and expansion.
The same board location is available with any band (L1, L2, S1, S2) without expansion (see Figure 161. )
5
7 8
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48
P
S
C
FANS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R O
L O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P
P
A P
A P
P
P
P
P
P
P
S
S
I C
N C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
49
FANS
Figure 160. 16 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion configuration
03
230 / 554

3.2.2.3.5 16 protected channels OADM with supervision and expansion
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
ED
2
26
L
A
N
4
5
27
L
A
N
49
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
H R
I I
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
K AI P
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
3
4
5
7 8
7 8
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E
OMDX8100_M_yy_East

OSMC (0pt.)
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 5E
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 4W
Transponder ch 4E
Transponder ch 3W
Transponder ch 3E
Transponder ch 2W
Transponder ch 2E
Transponder ch 1W
Transponder ch 1E
OADM8100_M_xx_S East
1
OMDX8100_M_yy_West
Transponder ch 8W
Transponder ch 8E
Transponder ch 7W
Transponder ch 7E
Transponder ch 6W
Transponder ch 6E
Transponder ch 5W
Transponder ch 5E

3.2.2.3.6 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion
Three set of channels are supported : L2, S1, S2.
xx and yy stands for the band used: L2, S1, S2.

yy has to be different from xx.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48
P
S
C
FANS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R O
L O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P
P
A P
A P
P
P
P
P
P
P
S
S
I C
N C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
49
FANS
Figure 161. 16 channels OADM with supervision and without expansion configuration
03
231 / 554
3.2.2.3.7 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
The 16 DWDM channels OADM configuration can be designed with four 8channel DWDM mux/demux
(OMDX8100) and 16 WLA3 (protected or unprotected) transponders equipped with DWDM SFP.
In unprotected configuration, sixteen channels are transmitted on west side, by means of 8 unprotected
WLAs (WLA3CD), and the other sixteen channels are transmitted on east side, by means of the other 8
unprotected WLAs.
In protected configuration the sixteen channels are transmitted both on the west and east sides, via 8 protected WLAs (WLA3CDOP).
The mixed 15channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires:
two 8channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 or S1 bands to be respectively connected to

the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
16 WLAs in unprotected configuration, 15 WLAs in protected configuration, taking into account that
WLA2 can only provide CWDM channels and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
WLA3CDOP and WLA2M_OP have to be used only if the optical protection is required.
WLA3CD and WLA2M have to be used only if the optical protection is not required.
7 CWDM 7 CWDM
client signals client signals
1470nm
1470nm
CH1
OSC out
D
M
U
X 1610nm
15 chs
mixed
4x
W
L
A
7 CWDM chs
CH7
CH1
4x
W
L
A
OSC in
7 CWDM chs
CH7
1550nm
(7 DWDM
channels
plus CMDX2
8 DWDM
channels) 1470nm
15 chs
mixed
OSC in
1550nm
15 chs
mixed
1550nm
D LB
M
U SB
X
D
M
U
X
30
38
unused
M
U 1610nm
X
M
U
1610nm X
8 chs DWDM
(L1 band)
M
U
X
LB
SB
M
U
X
30
38
unused
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
30
4x
W
L
A
3
4x
W
L
A
3
38
DWDM
M
U
X
LB
SB
unused
30
38
(7 DWDM
channels
CMDX2 plus
8 DWDM
1470nm channels)
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
LB D
8 chs
(L1 band)
D
1610nmM
U
X
SB U
1550nm
15 chs
mixed
OSC out
unused
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
8 DWDM 8 DWDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 162. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
232 / 554


7 CWDM
client signals
7x
W
L
A
2
(3)
l
O
P
1470nm
CH1
OSC out
15 chs
mixed
7 CWDM chs
D
M
U
X 1610nm
CH7
1550nm
(7 DWDM
channels
plus CMDX2
8 DWDM
channels) 1470nm
15 chs
mixed
D
M
U
X
D LB
M
U SB
X
30
38
unused
M
U 1610nm
X
OSC in
8 chs DWDM
(L1 band)
LB
M
U
X
1550nm
SB
M
U
X
30
38
unused
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
8x
W
L
A
3
C
D
l
O
P
1470nm
CH1
OSC in
7 CWDM chs
CH7
M
U
1610nm X
15 chs
mixed
1550nm
30
38
M
U
X
LB
SB
unused
30
38
(7 DWDM
channels
CMDX2 plus
8 DWDM
1470nm channels)
DWDM
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
LB D
8 chs
(L1 band)
D
1610nmM
U
X
SB U
1550nm
15 chs
mixed
OSC out
unused
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
8 DWDM
client signals
Figure 163. Example of 15 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection
1
7 8
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
I I
A
K A
N
C C
I
49
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
SPVM2 (opt.)
48
P
S
C
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 164. 16 channels OADM or mix C/DWDM (15channel) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
233 / 554
The 22 DWDM channels OADM configuration can be designed with six 8channel DWDM mux/demux
(OMDX8100) and 24 WLA3 (protected or unprotected) transponders equipped with DWDM SFP.
In unprotected configuration, 24 channels are transmitted on west side, by means of 12 unprotected WLAs
(WLA3CDOP), and the other 24 channels are transmitted on east side, by means of the other 12 unprotected WLAs.
In protected configuration the 24 channels are transmitted both on the west and east sides, via 12 protected WLAs (WLA3CDOP).
The mixed 22channel (CWDM / DWDM) terminal configuration with WLAs requires:
four 8channel DWDM mux/demux (OMDX8100 in L1 and S1 bands to be respectively connected

to the 1550nm and 1530nm ports of CMDX2)
twentytwo WLA3s both in protected and unprotected configuration, taking into account that WLA2
can only provide CWDM channels and WLA3 can provide both DWDM and CWDM channels.
WLA3CDOP and WLA2M_OP have to be used only if the optical protection is required.
WLA3CD and WLA2M have to be used only if the optical protection is not required.
6 CWDM 6 CWDM
CMDX2
1470nm
CH1
3x
W
L
A
6 CWDM chs
1610nm
OSC out
CH6
22 chs
mixed
D
M
U
X
D LB
M
U SB
X
1550nm
CWDM
8 chs
(6CWDM
(L1 band)
channels MUX
plus
16 DWDM DEMUX 1550nm
channels)
22 chs
mixed
1530nm
OSC in
8 chs
(S1 band)
1530nm
6 CWDM chs
38
38
DWDM
M
U
X
SB
D
M
U
X
LB
SB
unused
DWDM
LB
M
U
X
30
38
52
30
8x
W
L
A
3
8x
W
L
A
3
38
D
M
U
X
22 chs
mixed
M
U
X
LB D
1550nm
8 chs
1550nm
SB U
unused
52
60
60
OSC in
1610nm
CH6
30
unused
M
U
X
CMDX2
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
30
unused
CWDM
(6 CWDM
MUX channels
plus
DEMUX16 DWDM
channels)
M
U
X
1530nm
22 chs
mixed
OSC out
M
U
X
52
52
60
60
OMDX8100_M_S1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3x
W
L
A
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
1470nm
CH1
D
M
U
X
1530nm
OMDX8100_M_S1
16 DWDM 16 DWDM
Figure 165. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/o protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
234 / 554

3.2.2.3.8 24 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (22 chs) OADM with WLAs w/ or w/o protection

6 CWDM
client signals
CMDX2
1470nm
CH1
6 CWDM chs
CH6
1610nm
OSC out
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
22 chs
mixed
D
M
U
X
D LB
M
U SB
X
1550nm
CWDM
8 chs
(6CWDM
(L1 band)
channels MUX
plus
16 DWDM DEMUX 1550nm
channels)
OSC in
1530nm
8 chs
(S1 band)
1530nm
CH6
LB
30
38
SB
D
M
U
X
DWDM
M
U
X
LB
SB
unused
M
U
X
30
38
52
60
OSC in
1610nm
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
unused
M
U
X
CMDX2
6 CWDM chs
38
DWDM
1470nm
CH1
30
unused
22 chs
mixed
6x
W
L
A
2
(3)
l
O
P
16 x
W
L
A
3
C
D
l
O
P
30
38
D
M
U
X
22 chs
mixed
M
U
X
LB D
1550nm
8 chs
SB U
unused
52
60
1550nm
CWDM
(6 CWDM
MUX channels
plus
DEMUX16 DWDM
channels)
M
U
X
1530nm
22 chs
mixed
OSC out
M
U
X
52
52
60
OMDX8100_M_S1
60
D
M
U
X
1530nm
OMDX8100_M_S1
16 DWDM
client signals
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 166. Example of 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
235 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FANS
ED
1
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
I I
A
K A
N
C C
I
49
7 8
554
OMDX8100_M_S1 E
WLA
WLA
8DG 17415 AA AA
48
P
S
C
7 8
WLA
WLA
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
L
U U
H R
I I
A
K A
N
C C
I
49
WLA
25
P
S
C
WLA

WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
SPVM2 (opt.)
2
3
WLA
OMDX8100_M_S1 W
WLA
FANS
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
48
P
S
C
Figure 167. 22 C/DWDM mixed channels OADM with WLA boards w/ or w/o protection
03
236 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

P L L O
R O
U U P
O
O
O
O
O
O
S A A P
P
P
P
A P
P
P
P
I I S
C N N C
C
C
C
I C
C
C
C
C C C
49
FANS
ED
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
Transponder ch 57 W
Transponder ch 57 E
Transponder ch 58 W
Transponder ch 58 E
Transponder ch 59 W
Transponder ch 59 E
Transponder ch 60 W
Transponder ch 60 E
OMDX8100_M_S1
OMDX8100_M_S1
Transponder ch 52 W
Transponder ch 52 E
Transponder ch 53 W
Transponder ch 53 E
Transponder ch 54 W
Transponder ch 54 E
Transponder ch 55 W
Transponder ch 55 E
Transponder ch 47 W
Transponder ch 47 E
Transponder ch 48 W
Transponder ch 48 E
Transponder ch 49 W
Transponder ch 49 E
Transponder ch 50 W
Transponder ch 50 E
OMDX8100_M_S2
OMDX8100_M_S2
Transponder ch 42 W
Transponder ch 42 E
Transponder ch 43 W
Transponder ch 43 E
Transponder ch 44 W
Transponder ch 44 E
Transponder ch 45 W
Transponder ch 45 E
ESC (SC)

OSMC (opt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30 W
Transponder ch 30 E
Transponder ch 32 W
Transponder ch 32 E
Transponder ch 33 W
Transponder ch 33 E
Transponder ch 31 W
Transponder ch 31 E
OAC / OAC_L
OAC / OAC_L
Transponder ch 35 W
Transponder ch 35 E
Transponder ch 36 W
Transponder ch 36 E
Transponder ch 37 W
Transponder ch 37 E
Transponder ch 38 W
Transponder ch 38 E
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
ESC (SC)
OMDX8100_M_L2
Transponder ch 20 W
Transponder ch 20 E
Transponder ch 21 W
Transponder ch 21 E
Transponder ch 22 W
Transponder ch 22 E
Transponder ch 23 W
Transponder ch 23 E
OAC / OAC_L
OAC / OAC_L
Transponder ch 25 W
Transponder ch 25 E
Transponder ch 26 W
Transponder ch 26 E
Transponder ch 27 W
Transponder ch 27 E
Transponder ch 28 W
Transponder ch 28 E
OMDX8100_M_L2
ESC (SC)

3.2.2.3.9 32 channels OADM/backtoback terminals
Herebelow is shown a 32 channels backtoback configuration with the optical protection of each channel,
supervision and amplification. In this configuration there are
one OAC on west side and one OAC on east side
single channel transponders (MCC and OCC10).

4 shelves are needed for this configuration.
The 32 channels backtoback configuration with or without the optical protection of each channel can
be housed in only two shelves by using WLA3 boards.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

O
O
O
O
O
O
O
P L L O
U U P
H R
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
S A A P
I I S
K AI C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C N N C
C C C
49
FANS
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48
O
O
O
O
P L L O
R O
U U P
O
O
P
P
P
P
S A A P
A P
I I S
P
P
C
C
C
C N N C
I C
C C C
C
C
C
49
FANS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 16 171819 20 2122 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 3132 33 3435 36 3738 39 40 414243 44 4546 47 48

P L L O
R O
U U P
O
O
O
O
O
O
S A A P
P
P
P
A P
I I S
P
P
P
C N N C
C
C
C
I C
C
C
C
C C C
49
FANS
Figure 168. 32 protected channels backtoback w/ supervision and protection and one OAC per side
03
237 / 554
OAC1
VOA
WDM
Line
Preamp
OSC
insertion
25
P
S
C
Attenuator
or DCU
Preamp
OSC
SPVM
OSC
7 8
VOA
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OAC
OAC
26 27 28 29 30 31
L
A
N
49
WDM
Line
OSC
extraction
Attenuator
or DCU
OSC
insertion
Booster
Booster
OAC2
OSC
extraction
H R
K AI
P
S
C
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 169. Repeater with supervision
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
238 / 554

3.2.2.4 Repeater with supervision
MVAC boards can be used for three main applications:
transponder emphasis:
preemphasis (at WDM Tx output)
postemphasis (at WDM Rx input)
channel loop power adjustement
band loop power adjustement:
extraloop
expansionloop
The default configuration depends on the configuration.
3.2.2.5.1 Terminal configuration without protection
In this case the MVACs are used for transponder emphasis only.
The MVACs are placed in the adjacent slot of the concerned transponder.
2 3 4 5 6
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
25
P
S
C
26
L
A
N
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30
MVAC ch 30 (emp)
Transponder ch 31
MVAC ch 31 (emp)
Transponder ch 32
MVAC ch 32 (emp)
Transponder ch 33
MVAC ch 33 (emp)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35
MVAC ch 35 (emp)
Transponder ch 36
MVAC ch 36 (emp)
Transponder ch 37
MVAC ch 37 (emp)
Transponder ch 38
MVAC ch 38 (emp)

3.2.2.5 Configurations with MVAC
24
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
L
H R
I I
A
K AI
C C
N
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 170. 8 channels terminal configuration with MVAC boards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
26
L
A
N
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
4xANY_P
4xANY_P
4xANY_P
4xANY_P
MVAC
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
MVAC
7 8
MVAC
MVAC
2 3 4 5 6

OSMC (0pt.)
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
L
H R
I I
A
K AI
C C
N
49
48
P
S
C
FANS
Figure 171. 4 channels terminal configuration with 4xANY_P (first channels of an 8channel band)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
239 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
25
P
S
C
ED
2
26
L
A
N
7 8
FANS
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
U U
L
H R
I I
A
K AI
C C
N
49
7 8
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
48
P
S
C
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30
MVAC ch 30 (emp)
Transponder ch 31
MVAC ch 31 (emp)
Transponder ch 32
MVAC ch 32 (emp)
Transponder ch 33
MVAC ch 33 (emp)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35
MVAC ch 35 (emp)
Transponder ch 36
MVAC ch 36 (emp)
Transponder ch 37
MVAC ch 37 (emp)
Transponder ch 38
MVAC ch 38 (emp)
OMDX8100_M_S2
Transponder ch 42
MVAC ch 42 (emp)
Transponder ch 43
MVAC ch 43 (emp)
Transponder ch 44
MVAC ch 44 (emp)
Transponder ch 45
MVAC ch 45 (emp)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 47
MVAC ch 47 (emp)
Transponder ch 48
MVAC ch 48 (emp)
Transponder ch 49
MVAC ch 49 (emp)
Transponder ch 50
MVAC ch 50 (emp)
In a 16 channels terminal we must add a second shelf to place the MVAC boards, as shown in Figure 172.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R
L
P
P
A
A
S
S
I
N
C
C
49
FANS
Figure 172. 16 channels terminal with MVAC boards
03
240 / 554

3.2.2.5.2 OADM configuration without protection

a ) MVAC for transponder emphasis
OADM configuration (with or without protection) use adjacent slots for transponders. In this case the MVAC
boards must be placed in an expansion shelf under the pair of transponders considered.
The even slot will be used by default for the preemphasis of the two transponders
The odd slot will be used by default for the postemphasis of the two transponders
Should the preemphasis not be required, half the MVAC boards are saved.
b ) MVAC for channel loop
For a loop connection we remove a pair of transponders and place an MVAC in the even slot.
c ) MVAC for extra or expansion loop
For an extra or expansion loop, the default slots for MVAC boards are:
MVAC for extra loop; slot 5, 13 (by default) or 21
MVAC for expansion loop: slot 4, 12 (by default) or 20

the slots 12 and 13 of a first expansion shelf are available only if the configuration does not need
double stage amplifiers at both sides of the OADM (= OADM inside OFA interstage).
N.B.
25
P
S
C
26
L
A
N
Transponder ch 38 W
Transponder ch 38 E
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35 W
Transponder ch 35 E
Transponder ch 36 W
Transponder ch 36 E
MVAC ch 37 (ch loop)

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 30 W
Transponder ch 30 E
Transponder ch 31 W
Transponder ch 31 E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
U U P
L
H R
I I S
A
K AI
C C C
N
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MVAC ch 38 (preemp)
MVAC ch 38 (postemp)
MVAC (exp loop)

MVAC (extra loop)
MVAC ch 35 (preemp)
MVAC ch 35 (post emp)
MVAC ch 36 (preemp)
MVAC ch 30 (preemp)
MVAC ch 31 (preemp)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R
L
P
P
A
A
S
S
I
N
C
C
49
* See notes
FANS
Figure 173. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM inside OFA interstage
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
241 / 554

Notes on Figure 173.
MVAC in slot 4 (and 6) of expansion shelf is used for the preemphasis of ch 30 (and ch 31)
MVAC in slot 5 (and 7) of expansion shelf is used for the postemphasis of ch 30 (and ch 31)
MVAC in slot 12 of expansion shelf is used for expansion loop optical power adjustment
MVAC in slot 13 of expansion shelf is used for extra loop optical power adjustment.
25
P
S
C
26
L
A
N
Transponder ch 38 W
Transponder ch 38 E
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM(2,_H) (opt.)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
Transponder ch 35 W
Transponder ch 35 E
Transponder ch 36 W
Transponder ch 36 E
Transponder ch 31 W
Transponder ch 31 E

OSMC (0pt.)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
U U P
L
H R
I I S
A
K AI
C C C
N
49
FANS
MVAC ch 38 (preemp)
OAC / OAC_L (opt.)

OAC / OAC_L (opt.)
MVAC ch 35 (preemp)
MVAC ch 35 (post emp)
MVAC ch 36 (preemp)
MVAC (exp loop)

MVAC (extraloop)
MVAC ch 31 (preemp)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R
L
P
P
A
A
S
S
I
N
C
C
49
* See notes
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 174. 8 channels OADM with MVAC boards: OADM between 2 double stages OFAs
Notes on Figure 174.
ch 30 is a channel loop connection. The transponders in slots 45 are replaced by an MVAC in slot
4
MVAC in slot 6 of expansion shelf is used for the preemphasis of ch 31
MVAC in slot 7 of expansion shelf is used for the postemphasis of ch 31
MVAC in slot 4 of expansion shelf is used for expansion loop optical power adjustment
MVAC in slot 5 of expansion shelf is used for extra loop optical power adjustment.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
242 / 554
3.2.2.6 4 x ANY node configuration
25
P
S
C
26
L
A
N
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
7 8
4 x ANY
2 3 4 5 6
ESC
4 x ANY
4 x ANY

Without drawers protection
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L
H R
U U P
A
K AI
I I S
N
C
49
FANS
Figure 175. 4 x ANY node configuration without drawers protection

With drawers protection
25
P
S
C
26 27 28 29 30
O O O
L
P P P
A
C C C
N
49
31 32
O O
P P
C C
33
O
P
C
34 35 36 37 38 39 40
O O H R O O O
P P K A P P P
I C C C
C C
41 42 43
O O O
P P P
C C C
44
O
P
C
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 x ANY
7 8
4 x ANY
4 x ANY
2 3 4 5 6
ESC
4 x ANY
45 46 47 48
O U U P
P I I S
C
C
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 176. 4 x ANY node configuration with drawers protection

OPC location for drawers protection
drawer 1: 31, 35, 39, 43
drawer 2: 30, 34, 38, 42
drawer 3: 28, 32, 40, 44
drawer 4: 29, 33, 41, 45.

4xANY boards can be partially protected (drawers 3 & 4 for the 1st couple, drawers 1 & 2 for the 2nd couple).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
243 / 554
3.2.3 1696 MS_C (Compact Shelf) configurations examples
Terminals
up to 12 unprotected channels Line terminal (with/without supervision)
up to 8 channels Line terminal with OAC (with/without supervision) in one shelf
Backtoback terminals or OADM with/without protection
up to 4 channels backtoback terminal or OADM
asymmetrical configurations are allowed (i.e. 2 channels west and 1 channel east)
CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations
In Line Repeater
Supervision manager.
These configurations are preferably exploited with a 1696MS_C but they can be implemented
in a 1696MS, too.
Remote 4xAny (unprotected)
Remote 4xAny + Protection MCC on 1310 nm or 1550 nm
Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
OADM 1 channel with or without protection
Remote 4xANY + MCC
One protected transponder (one signal on 2 channels)
Backtoback 4xANY
SPV manager (used to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring).
2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
1696MS or 1696MS_C configured to connect a CPE or a 1696MS_C in a small ring
1696MS or1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised blackandwhite signal
1696MS or 1696MS_C receiving/emitting a supervised colored signal
1696MS or 1696MS connected to a 1696MS_C located in a small ring
1696MS as a remotization
Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together
With supervision through optical link (DCC)
With supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
Some of these configurations are described hereafter.

All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
244 / 554

The 1696MS_C must be able to set many different configurations
3.2.3.1 Examples of Line Terminal configurations
The 4channel terminal block diagram is shown in Figure 125. on page 209.
F A N _C

3.2.3.1.1 4channel terminal without SPV
13
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
Transponder ch 4
Transponder ch 3
Transponder ch 2
Transponder ch 1
ESC
4
3
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
Figure 177. 4channel terminal w/o SPV configuration

3.2.3.1.2 8channel terminal with SPV and OAC
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
UNUSED
8x
MCC /
8 client OCC10
signals
or
L2
30
M
U
X
38
UNUSED
4x
WLA
L2
30
38
LB
SB
UNUSED
LB
D
M
U
X
SB
UNUSED
F A N _C
13
2
1
ILink_S
4
3
F A N _C
F A N _C
13
13
4
3
2
OSC in
M
U
X
OFA
D
M
U
X
OFA
OFA
8 channels
OFA
OSC out
12
11
10
9
8
6
5
OAC
PSC2
Transponder ch 8
Transponder ch 7
Transponder ch 6
Transponder ch 5
OAC
EXP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
12
PSC2
PSC2
12
Transponder ch 4
Transponder ch 3
Transponder ch 2
Transponder ch 1
11
10
9
8
ILink_S
PSC2
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
12
ILink_M
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPVM2, SPVM_H
OAC / OAC_L (optional)
ESC
1
6
5
4
3
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
Figure 178. 8channel terminal with SPV and OAC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
245 / 554
3.2.3.1.3 8 D/CWDM channels terminal with WLAs (w/ or w/o protection) with SPV and OAC
F A N _C
F A N _C
13
13
12
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
ILink_S
PSC2
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
12
ILink_M
SPVM_H
ESC
5
4
3
5
4
3
11
10
9
8
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 179. 8 D/CWDM channels terminal with WLAs (w/ or w/o protection) with SPV and OAC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
246 / 554

PSC2
3.2.3.1.4 12 unprotected channels terminal without SPV

OADM4100_M_chxy_S
1
4 client
signals
4x
MCC /
OCC10
or
M
U
X
4
1
2x
WLA
4
D
M
U
X
OADM8100_L1_X
30
8 client
signals
8x
MCC /
OCC10
or
F A N _C
4x
WLA
F A N _C
13
F A N _C
13
13
38
30
38
M
U
X
Transponder ch 4
Transponder ch 3
Transponder ch 2
Transponder ch 1
SB
LB
D
M
U
X
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
EXP
UNUSED
6
4
LB
SB
UNUSED
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
PSC2
12
11
10
9
8
ILink_S
PSC2
OADM8100_L1_X
PSC2
12
Transponder ch 38
Transponder ch 37
Transponder ch 36
Transponder ch 35
ILink_S
PSC2
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
12
ILink_M
Transponder ch 33
Transponder ch 32
Transponder ch 31
Transponder ch 30
ESC
4
3
5
4
3
11
10
9
8
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 180. 12channel terminal without SPV
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
247 / 554
3.2.3.1.5 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLAs with SPV and OAC
PSC2
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
ILink_S
PSC2
WLA
WLA
WLA
WLA
PSC2
12
ILink_S
PSC2
ILink_M
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
12
F A N _C
F A N _C
13
F A N _C
13
13
5
4
3
5
4
3
2
SPVM_H
ESC
4
3

For configuration description and block diagram refer to para. 3.2.2.2.6 on page 216.
12
11
10
9
8
11
10
9
8
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 181. 16 DWDM channels or mix C/DWDM (15 chs) terminal with WLAs with SPV and OAC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
248 / 554
3.2.3.2 OADM 4 channels protected backtoback with supervision and OAC

4 add & drop protected client signals
OPC OPC
OPC OPC
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
OAC
OSC out
Mx/DMx 4ch
D
M
U
X
OFA
n channels
M
U
X
OFA
Mx/DMx 4ch
n4 ch
4x
MCC /
OCC10
or
4x
MCC /
OCC10
or
2x
WLA
2x
WLA
OSC in
F A N _C
F A N _C
F A N _C
13
13
OSC in
OFA
n channels
D
M
U
X
OFA
OSC out
EAST
PSC2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M
U
X
n4 channels
WEST
13
OAC
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
Transponder ch 4 W
Transponder ch 4 E
Transponder ch 3 W
Transponder ch 3 E
5
4
3
12
11
OPC
10
9
8
ILink_S
OPC
PSC2
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
PSC2
12
OPC
10
Transponder ch 2 W
Transponder ch 2 E
Transponder ch 1 W
Transponder ch 1 E
ILink_S
ILink_M
OADM4100_M_chxy_S
SPVM2 / SPVM_H
OAC / OAC_L (opt)
OAC / OAC_L (opt)
ESC
4
3
5
4
3
11
9
OPC
PSC2
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
12
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
Figure 182. OADM 4 channels protected backtoback with supervision and OAC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
249 / 554
3.2.3.3 CPE (Customer Premises Equipment) configurations
In this case, OADM is not needed since the data signal is carried by a Black & white 1310 nm wavelength.
The OSC is extracted to/from the 1310 nm data signal on a special 1310/1510 filter SPV_F_C card. OSC
is managed by the SPVM board.
1550 nm
MCC
MCC
1310 nm
SPVM
SPVM
SPVF
1696MS
UI
1310 nm
1310 nm
SPVM
4xANY
SPVM
1310 nm
1696MS_C
4xANY
SPVF
OSC
1510 nm
to/from
1696MSPAN
SPV_F_C
1310
UI
CPE
F A N _C
SPVM
UI
PSC
4xANY
HK
RAI
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
PSC
Figure 183. Remote 4xANY

All configurations using a 4 x ANY board are also available with the 4 x ANY_S and 4 x ANY_P.
N.B.
3.2.3.3.2 Two remote 4xANY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
F A N _C
SPVM
PSC
4xANY
4xANY
HK
RAI
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
PSC
Figure 184. Two remote 4xANY
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
250 / 554

3.2.3.3.1 Remote 4xANY

3.2.3.3.3 Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY wihtout protection

The situation is the same with or without the 4xANY board : the signal transmitted from the CPE to the
1696MS in a core ring or in a pointtopoint configuration is colored and carries a 1510 nm OSC.
The Remote MCC is connected to the Metro ring via one MCC or directly from the WDM path. This configuration allows a greater Span Budget.
1550 nm
MCC
MCC
1310 nm
SPVM
SPVM
SPVF
1696MS
SPVF
1550 nm
SPVM
UI
MCC
1696MS_C
Colored signal
4xANY
OSC
1510 nm
MCC
1310 nm
4xANY
SPVM
UI
SPV_FC
1550
SPVM
F A N _C
UI
CPE
PSC
HK
RAI
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
4xANY
MCC
PSC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 185. Remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
251 / 554
In this configuration, the CPE supports 2 data channels, one from the 4xANY board (B&W), and one from
the MCC (colored). The SPV_F_1310_1550 enables to insert/extract them with an OSC. Thus the fiber
carries 3 wavelengths : 1510 (OSC), 15xx (transponders with coloured interface) and 1310 (4xANY with
B&W aggregate interface).
MCC+4xANY
SPVM
1310_1550
MCC
SPV_F
UI
CPE
1550 nm + 1310 nm + OSC
4xANY
SPV_F
1310+1550
OSC
SPVM
1310 nm
4xANY
1550 nm
MCC
UI
1696MS_C
UI
UI
F A N _C
SPVM
PSC
HK
RAI
SPV_F_1310_1550
MCC
4xANY
LAN_Q
PSC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 186. Unprotected remote MCC or MCC+4xANY
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
252 / 554

3.2.3.3.4 Remote 4xANY plus MCC
In this configuration OPC card is used to protect transponder cards. The same signal is launched into the
fiber on two different wavelengths. This configuration is used in a pointtopoint link.
One protected transponder on the same fiber (2 wavelengths) with OADM 2channel
To/from CPE
MCC/OCC10
SPVM
User
interface
OPC
Not from 1696 ring

MCC/OCC10

3.2.3.3.5 One protected transponder
CPE
OPC
User
interface
SPVM
1696MS_C
OADM1
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
OPC
User
F A N _C
PSC
MCC/OCC10 main
HK
RAI
OPC
LAN_Q
PSC
OADM1100_M_xx_S
SPVM
MCC /OCC10 spare
SPVM must be set in slot 4 of the master shelf when it is linked to OADM board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 187. One protected transponderon the same fiber (2 channel wavelengths)
In this case an OADM is needed to multiplex the main signal and the spare in one fiber if only one fiber
is used. When two fibers are available, the main and spare signals do not need to be launched in the same
fiber, and they also do not need to have different wavelengths.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
253 / 554
This configuration is designed to drop/(insert) some of the 4 services carried by the 4XANY functionality.
The others are bypassed to a second 4XANY board to be launched to their destination. In the following
figure, 2 services are dropped (inserted) and 2 are passedthrough.
Less than 4 services can be carried.
N.B.
4xANY
4xANY
UI
4xANY
SPVM
4xANY
SPV_F_C
SPVM
SPV_F_C
UI
CPE
F A N _C
SPVM
PSC
HK
SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
4xANY
4xANY
PSC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 188. Backtoback 4XANY intended to drop some of the carried services and bypass the others.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
254 / 554

3.2.3.3.6 Backtoback 4xANY
3.2.3.3.7 Remote unprotected MCC

1696MS
Transp
Transp
Transp
Transp
OADM
4 ch East
SPVF
OADM
4 ch West
SPVM
SPVM
1550 nm + OSC
SPVF
OSC
SPVM
Transponder
ch.2E
1696MS_C
F A N _C

1550 nm
SPVM
PSC
Transponder ch 1
HK
RAI
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q

2
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
P
S
C
OADM4100_M_chxy_S E
SPVM2 /SPVM_H

SPVM2 / SPVM_H
OADM4100_M_chxy_S W
Transponder ch 1 W
Transponder ch 1 E
Transponder ch 2 W
Transponder ch 2 E
Transponder ch 3 W
Transponder ch 3 E
Transponder ch 4 W
Transponder ch 4 E
PSC
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
R
S
L
P
H A
P U U S
A
K I
I I
V
N
C
49
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FANS
45:
SPV Filter
Figure 189. Remote unprotected MCC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
255 / 554
3.2.3.3.8 1 protected channel OADM

1696MS_C
SPVM
1550 nm
OADM1
OADM1
Transponder Transponder
1310 nm
OPC
F A N _C
User
OADM1100_M_chx_S
OADM1100_M_chx_S
SPVM
Transponder W
Transponder E
ESC
PSC
RAI
HK
OPC
LAN_Q
PSC
Figure 190. OADM 1 channel protected backtoback
3.2.3.3.9 Remote 4xANY+ Protected MCC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The remote 4xANY + protected MCC is the combination with the 2 MCC protected at each other with an
OPC on different NE, and use of the 4xANY on the User side.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
256 / 554
1696MS
MCC

1696MS
1550 nm
1550 nm
MCC
MCC
OADM
OADM
OADM
OADM
SPVF
SPVF
SPVM
SPVM
SPVM
SPVM
SPVF
SPVF
SPVM
1310 nm on WDM side

MCC
MCC
1310 nm
OPC
4xANY
1696MS_C
UI
Figure 191. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1310 nm
1696MS
1550 nm
1550 nm
OADM
MCC
OADM
OADM
OADM
SPVF
SPVF
SPVM
SPVM
SPVM
SPVM
1696MS
1550 nm + OSC
1550 nm + OSC
OSC
SPVF
SPVF
1550 on WDM side
SPVM
MCC
MCC
1310 nm
OPC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4xANY
1696MS_C
UI
Figure 192. Remote Spur 4xANY + protected MCC on 1550 nm
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
257 / 554
3.2.3.3.10 2channel Line Terminal
OSC

The line Terminal 2 Channels use OADM 2 in order to deliver 2 different channels.
OADM2
SPVM
Transponder
Transponder
1696MS_C
UI
UI
F A N _C
PSC
OADM2100_M_chxy_S
HK
SPVM2 / SPVM_H
Transponder ch 2
RAI
Transponder ch 1
LAN_Q
ESC
PSC
Figure 193. 2 channels Line Terminal
F A N _C
3.2.3.3.11 4channel Line Terminal CWDM or DWDM with supervision
PSC
SPVM_H
HK
WLA
WLA
RAI
LAN_Q
ESC
PSC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 194. 4 channels Line Terminal CWDM or DWDM with supervision
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
258 / 554
OPC
#1
OADM2100_M_chxy_S
#1
#2
4xANY
#3
Rx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Tx

3.2.3.3.12 Remote CPE, 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
ch1
MCC
ch1
ch2
SPVM
OSC in
M
U
X
#4
OPC
#2
2 channels
OPC
#3
OPC
#4
#1
Tx
#2
4xANY
#3
Rx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
ch1
MCC
ch2
ch2
#4
OSC out
F A N _C
F A N _C
13
13
5
4
3
2
4xANY
4xANY
ILink_S
ILink_M
OADM2100_M_chxy_S
SPVM2 / SPVM_H
MCC ch2
MCC ch1
ESC
5
4
3
D
M
U
X
PSC2
OPC #4
OPC #3
OPC #1
OPC #2
PSC2
12
PSC(2)
HK
RAI
12
11
10
9
8
7
11
10
9
LAN_Q
PSC(2)
8
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 195. Remote CPE, 2channel terminal: MCC + 4xANY with drawers protection
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
259 / 554
The SPV manager is used only when the customer want to connect a SH Manager to supervise the ring.
This configuration allows to add and drop, on both sides, the supervision signal.
1550 nm + OSC
SPVM
1550 nm + OSC
SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
OADM
1696MS_C
OADM
LAN_Q
SH
F A N _C
PSC
SPVM
SPV_F_C
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
ESC
PSC
In this configuration two OADM boards must be provisionned by the software even if
they are not needed for the Hardware function. Then the associated alarm (RUM) will
raise on the craft Equiment even if the working is normal.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 196. SPV Manager
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
260 / 554

3.2.3.3.13 SPV manager
In this paragraph, we describe the configuration of 1696MS in a core ring, host of a link to a distant CPE.
In current release two data signals plus OSC can be managed as such a one fiber link (1310 nm, 1550
nm or 1310+1550 nm).
3.2.4.1 1696MS receiving/emitting a supervised B&W signal
This situation is the same as a customer signal arriving on a B&W port of 1696MS, except that the incoming
signal carries the OSC which has to be extracted/inserted in the 1696MS.
OMDX or OADM
SPVM
Transponder
To 1696
WDM ring
OMDX or OADM
Transponder

3.2.4 1696MS configured to connect a CPE
SPVM
To 1696 WDM
ring
OPC
1310 nm
SPV_F
SPVM
1696MS
1310 nm
Black & White signal

To/From
CPE
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 x SPVM boards
needed).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 197. 1696MS connected to a CPE through a supervised blackandwhite signal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
261 / 554
In this configuration, the signal coming from the CPE is plugged on the User Interfaced of the 1696MS.
In this case the signal from the 1696MS to the CPE is carried by a 1310 nm wavelength, and the contrapropagative signal is carried by a 1550 nm wavelength.
The optical budget is then limited by the Black and White span optical budget.
3.2.4.2.1 Protected signal in the ring
The signal coming from the CPE is launched in both directions in the 1696MS ring (East and West).
In this case, the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards are needed).
OMDX or OADM
SPVM
Transponder
Transponder
To 1696
WDM ring
OMDX or OADM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM
ring
OPC
1550 nm
SPVM
1696MS
1310 nm
SPV_F_1550
To/From CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
and protected in the ring
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
262 / 554

3.2.4.2 1696MS receiving a supervised colored signal
3.2.4.2.2 Unprotected signal in the ring
In this configuration the 1696MS node has to support 3 Optical Supervisory Channels (2 SPVM boards
needed).
OMDX or OADM
To 1696
WDM ring
SPVM
1696MS
SPVM
SPVM
1550 nm
or 1310 nm
OMDX or OADM
Transponder

In this case the signal coming from the CPE is launched only on one side of the ring.
To 1696 WDM
ring
1310 nm
To/From
CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
and unprotected in the ring
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
263 / 554
In this configuration one channel is demultiplexed and the other one is sent directly to the CPE without
MCC using.
3.2.4.3.1 Without OSC
OMDX or OADM
OMDX or OADM
To 1696
WDM ring
SPVM
SPVM
1696MS
To 1696 WDM
ring
To/From CPE
Figure 200. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated.
3.2.4.3.2 With OSC
OMDX or OADM
To 1696
WDM ring
OMDX or OADM
SPVM
SPVM
To 1696 WDM
ring
SPVM
1696MS
SPV_F
SPV_F
To/From CPE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 201. Optical channel optically passed through the NE without being regenerated and with OSC
insertion.
When the optical budget is available, this configuration can be used to reach a CPE. In this case, the
1696MS node has to support 3 OSC channels and then 2 SPVM boards are needed.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
264 / 554

3.2.4.3 1696MS as a remotization
It is possible to make two 1696MS rings (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C) communicate. It is not
necessary that both communicating nodes are located on the same spot. User interfaces are interconnected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm black and white signal from one
ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
PSC
OADM1
F A N _C

3.2.5 Two 1696MS or 1696MS_C rings connected together
SPVM
Transponder (from SPVF_C)
Transponder ch. 1
RAI
OPC
SPV_F_C
LAN_Q
7 8
PSC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
P
S
C
28: SPV Filter
Half SPVM Board


OADM 4 ch. East
OADM 4 ch. West
Transponder ch 1 W
Transponder ch 1 E
Transponder ch 2 W
Transponder ch 2 E
Transponder ch 3 W
Transponder ch 3 E
Transponder ch 4 W
Transponder ch 4 E
(1550 nm)
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
S
R
L
H A
U U P
P
A
K I
I I S
V
N
C
49
FANS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 202. Interconnection of two rings with a 1696MS and a 1696MS_C
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
265 / 554
It is possible to make two 1696MS Rings communicate (made up of 1696MS and/or 1696MS_C). Both
the communicating nodes are not necessary to be located on the same spot. User interfaces are interconnected (data transmission), and the OSC is launched on one 1310 nm blackandwhite signal from one
ring to the other through two SPV_F_C boards (one on each ring).
Protection is provided for remote MCC Boards of both rings with OPC boards.
This protection type allows two failures at a time, one in each ring.
OMDX or OADM 1ch
SPVM
MCC/OCC10
MCC/OCC10
To 1696
WDM ring
OMDX or OADM 1ch
SPVM
OPC
To 1696 WDM
ring
SPVM
1696MS
SPVM
SPV_F_C
User interfaces
User interfaces
SPV_F_C
SPVM
OPC
OADM 1 channel +OSC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MCC/OCC10
SPVM
MCC/OCC10
To 1696
WDM ring
PassThrough
OADM 1 channel +OSC
SPVM
To 1696 WDM
ring
1696MS_C
Figure 203. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
266 / 554

Supervision through optical link (DCC)
The supervision is transmitted from one ring to the other through the LAN_Q boards. This avoid to have
one SPVM in the 1696MS shelf and one in the MS_C shelf.
OMDX or OADM 1ch
SPVM
MCC/OCC10
To 1696
WDM ring
OMDX or OADM 1ch
MCC/OCC10

Supervision through electrical link (LAN_Q)
SPVM
To 1696 WDM
ring
SPVM
User interfaces
LAN_Q
1696MS
User interfaces
LAN_Q
OADM 1 channel +OSC
OADM 1 channel +OSC
1696MS_C
MCC/OCC10
SPVM
MCC/OCC10
To 1696
WDM ring
SPVM
To 1696 WDM
ring
PassThrough
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 204. Two 1696MS rings connected together through user interfaces.
The transponders shown in the figure are not protecting each other, but only transmitting the signal they
receive. In this configuration both NEs located in the same spot are necessary because of the electrical
link length.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
267 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
268 / 554

4 UNITS DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the cards and units of the 1696 Metro Span for this release. It gives for each card
a functional diagram, description and interfaces definition.
4.1 Tributaries
4.1.1 Multirate Channel Card I (MCC1)
2.5 2.66 Gb/s backpanel electrical links
to/from
corresponding
to/from
to/from
transponder
future matrix
future matrix
copy 0
copy 1
Client
input
User Rx
(optional)
User Tx
(optional)
Client
output
WDM Tx
WDM
output
B1
non intrusive
monitoring
WDM
input
WDM Rx
8 x 8 MATRIX
Alarm & Control

unit
to/from
corresponding
transponder
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 205. Block diagram of the MCC1 boards
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
269 / 554
4.1.1.1 Description
The receivers (WDM and user) are 2R. Two multi bitrate clockselectable CDR (Clock and Data Recovery) units are used so that the MCC is globally 3R for some bit-rates between 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
(155Mbit/s - 622Mbit/s - 1.06Gbit/s - 1.25Gbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s).
The electrical matrix gives some flexibility and additives features:
drop / Insert with or without OpticalSNCP
electrical passthrough
internal (local) loopback
line (remote) loopback
line (remote) loopback dropinsert
user loopback
user loopback passthrough
possibility to broadcast either the user or the WDM signal to the B1 monitoring unit
The alarm and control unit ensures the following functions:
matrix management interface
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough,...)
alarms collection and interface to the craft terminal via the shelf controller
Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit) if OpticalSNCP

(OSNCP): user Tx ON/OFF control
safety procedure management (ALS_WDM).

In OCh protection scheme, each MCC transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the MCC
just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each MCC unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable so
that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
On the MCC, the set of channels are written on the card support.
Two EEPROM contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
board identification...) and the set of channels the card support. These information are sent to the ESC
board by means of the SPI bus.
4.1.1.2 Optical characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
See para. 5.3.1.1 on page 414.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
270 / 554

The MCC1 unit is a bidirectional multiclock interface. The blockdiagram is shown on Figure 205.
4.1.1.3 Optical safety

Alcatel recommends the customers to preset:
the APSD enable mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes
the APSD disable mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Optical safety, fault localization and protection criteria are based on the LOS alarm only.
How does it work?
ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM
Tx.
ILOS at WDM Rx input implies the shutdown of the WDM Tx and the start of the ALS mechanism (if
available). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shut down. To
restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
Shutdown time is defined to be less than (or equal to) 10 ms.
Boards behavior depending on APSD status

If the transponder is in APSD enable or disable state, in case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder
failure, jumper disconnection etc...) a mechanism is proposed that enables to propagate a kind of FDI (Forward Defect Indication) along the trail: a Loss Of Signal (LOS) will imply a shutdown which will indicate
to the next NE that the failure has occurred in a previous link. This function enables the network manager
to have a good understanding of the fault localization.
This mechanism of LOS propagation is independent from safety procedure. The next table sums up the
different transponder behavior according to safety + LOS propagation command.
Table 22. MCC1 Shut down mode
Node Type
OCC10 state
Behaviour
Alarm
LOS on User Rx
APSD enable
a)
b)
Line Terminal
Add & Drop in APSD disable
OADM
or
backtoback APSD disable
node
forced ON
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of WDM Tx
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of User Tx
WDM Tx always ON
LOS on WDM Rx
LOS on WDM Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Passthrough
g
in APSD disable LOS on WDM Rx
OADM or backto APSD disable
back node
forced ON
APSD disable
forced OFF
ED
SD of WDM Tx
SD of User Tx & WDM Tx of the same
board
LOS on User Rx
APSD disable
forced OFF
LOS on WDM Rx
APSD enable
Consecutive action
SD of User Tx
WDM Tx always OFF
SD of User Tx
SD of WDM Tx of the same board and
of the adjacent board
SD of WDM Tx of the adjacent board
WDM Tx always ON
WDM Tx always OFF
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
271 / 554
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent MCCs and the MCC matrix configurations. The
HF backpanel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11,
14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.
4.1.1.4.1 Default configuration
By default, both optical transmitters are OFF, the 8x8 matrix has no connection.
After software configuration, the way of working will be one of the following.
backpanel
connections
MCC East
MCC West
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 206. MCC in default configuration
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
272 / 554

4.1.1.4 MCC crossconnection configurations

4.1.1.4.2 Drop / Insert without optical channel protection

The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes.
The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can be in dropinsert, the other one can
be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode).
backpanel
connections
MCC East
MCC West
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 207. Drop / Insert without OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
Table 23. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS and LOC
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
user Tx
(LOC)*
consecutive action
user Rx
WDM Tx
ILOS
(LOC)*
SD of the WDM Tx
shutdown of the WDM Tx laser (same board)

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure (if
ALS enabled)
shutdown of the user Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(LOC)*
CDR
ED
concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one in when the bitrate is managed by the
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
273 / 554
The MCC can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes.
The two adjacent boards have the same matrix configuration and must be placed in the two adjacent slots
4&5, 6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19 or 20&21 because of Low Frequency links used to pass
information between them.
MCC West
MCC East
Rx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
Figure 208. Drop / Insert with OpticalSNCP (identical 8x8 matrix configuration)
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
user Tx
(LOC)*
consecutive action
user Rx
WDM Tx
ILOS
(LOC)*
shutdown of the WDM Tx

ALS enabled)
shutdown of the user Tx
protection action: activation of the protecting
user Tx laser
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(LOC)*
CDR
ED
concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one when the bitrate is managed by the
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
274 / 554

4.1.1.4.3 Drop / Insert with Optical channel protection

4.1.1.4.4 Electrical passthrough

The MCC can accept this configuration in backtoback terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or
to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the
protection.
backpanel
connections
MCC West
MCC East
optional
interfaces
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 209. PassThrough
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
consecutive action
user Tx
user Rx
WDM Tx
inhibited
inhibited
LOC*
no action
inhibited
inhibited
(LOC)*

ALS enable)
ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent
board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(LOC)*
CDR
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
275 / 554
The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that manages the protection.
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
user Tx
consecutive action
user Rx
WDM Tx
ILOS
(LOC)**
(LOC)**
SD of the WDM Tx

and begining of the ALS_WDM procedure (if
ALS enable)
protection action
LOC*
(LOC)**
CDR
for the bitrates managed by the CDR

4.1.1.4.4.2 Slave board

The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection.
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
consecutive action
user Tx
user Rx
WDM Tx
inhibited
inhibited
LOC*
inhibited
inhibited
no action

ALS enable)
transmission of the alarm to the master board
(for protection control)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOC*
(LOC)**
CDR
ED

03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
276 / 554

4.1.1.4.4.1 Master board

4.1.1.5 Loopback
4.1.1.5.1 Local loopback
This configuration is used for tests only.
backpanel
connections
MCC West
MCC East
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 210. Local LoopBack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The two adjacent board have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one
can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback mode).
As this configuration is used for tests, the alarm management is controlled by the operator (he should look
at all the alarms and activate or inhibit the ALS_WDM procedure).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
277 / 554
4.1.1.5.2 Remote loopback dropinsert


backpanel
connections
MCC loopin
MCC loopout
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 211. Remote LoopBack in ring application (backtoback or OADM)

The two adjacent boards are linked and have a different configuration so that the operator must set the
MCC to work in loopin or loopout mode.
4.1.1.5.3 User loopback
backpanel
connections
MCC West
MCC East
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tx
Rx
Figure 212. User LoopBack
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
278 / 554

4.1.1.5.4 User loopback & passthrough
backpanel
connections
MCC loopin
MCC loopout
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 213. User LoopBack & passthrough
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
279 / 554
4.1.1.5.5 Remote loopback


backpanel
connections
MCC East
MCC West
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
280 / 554

4.1.1.6 Protection management

In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, board
absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is
retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.
At the creation of the protection function, the operator define one main and one spare channel.
The switch criteria and ways of control are the followings:
software locked protection on the main channel
software forced selection of the spare channel
ILOS at WDM Rx access on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one nor HardWare Failure on the board.
The software forcing has the highest priority level. The manual switch has a lower priority level than the
alarms on the signals.
A clear function allows, via software, to reinitialize the protection board (clear all the switches commands), and a lockout of protection function gives the possibility to block the switch in the main position
(whatever the status of the signals). The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest):
lockout of protection
software forcing
automatic switching
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Total switching time < 50 ms.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
281 / 554
4.1.2 Multirate Channel Card II (MCC2)
to/from
corresponding
to/from
future matrix
copy 0
Client
input
User Rx
(optional)
transponder
to/from
future matrix
copy 1
8 x 8 MATRIX
Client
output
User Tx
(optional)
OPL
OOPV
B1
non intrusive
monitoring
Optical
Receiver
VOA
WDM Tx
WDM
input
WDM
output
WDM Rx
Alarm & Control

unit
to/from
corresponding
transponder
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 215. Block diagram of the MCC2 unit
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
282 / 554

2.5 2.66 Gb/s backpanel electrical links

4.1.2.1 Description
The MCC2 transponder unit is a bidirectional multiclock interface. The blockdiagram is shown on
Figure 215.
All the signals are 3R.
The board is configured for application with optical amplifiers.
In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select bit rate by :
selecting it in a list
entering its exact value

A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by
choosing a VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix, a B1 performance monitoring unit and an alarm and control unit are present on the board.
The B1 performance monitoring unit enables the operator to achieve PM on B1 in a non intrusive way on
SDH/SONET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning).
user loopback
This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions:
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough,...
B1 device management
Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
if opticalSNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)

In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one
(the transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable
so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
283 / 554

Alcatel recommends the customers to preset:
the APSD enable mode for all the transponders in terminating nodes
the APSD disable mode for all the transponders in regeneration.
Two types of alarms are available for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria:
LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for all bit rates between
100 Mbit/s and 2.66 Gbit/s.
ILOS: Input Loss Of signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
Way of working 1st case :
ILOS at user Rx input implies a consecutive LOC at WDM or user Tx input and the SD of the WDM
Tx.
LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from the user Rx or the WDM Rx) implies the SD of the
WDM Tx.
available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shutdown. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and
protection mechanism (if available).
During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between ITU 500 pm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
284 / 554



If the transponder is in APSD enable or disable state, in case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder
failure, jumper disconnection etc...) a mechanism is proposed that enables to propagate a kind of FDI (Forward Defect Indication) along the trail: a Loss Of Signal (LOS) will imply a shutdown which will indicate
to the next NE that the failure has occurred in a previous link. This function enables the network manager
to have a good understanding of the fault localization.
This mechanism of LOS propagation is independent from safety procedure. The next table sums up the
different transponder behavior according to safety + LOS propagation command.
Table 28. MCC2 Shut down mode
Node Type
OCC10 state
Behaviour
Alarm
LOS on User Rx
APSD enable
a)
b)
Line Terminal
Add & Drop in
OADM
or
backtoback
node
APSD disable
APSD disable
di bl
forced ON
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of User Tx
LOC on WDM Tx
SD of WDM Tx
LOS on User Rx
SD of WDM Tx
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of User Tx
LOC on User Tx
SD of User Tx
LOC on WDM Tx
SD of WDM Tx
WDM Tx always ON
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of User Tx
LOC on User Tx
SD of User Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
WDM Tx always OFF

SD of User Tx
SD of User Tx
Forbidden
APSD enable
Passthrough
P
th
h
in
i
APSD disable
OADM or backto forced ON
b k node
d
back
APSD disable
forced OFF
SD of WDM Tx
board
LOC on User Tx
APSD disable
di bl LOS on WDM Rx
forced OFF
LOC on User Tx
APSD disable
Consecutive action
LOS on WDM Rx
LOC on WDM Tx
SD of WDM Tx
WDM Tx always ON
WDM Tx always OFF
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
285 / 554
On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix configurations. The HF backpanel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5,
6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.
The board is on APSD disable state.
backpanel
connections
MCC East
MCC West
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 216. MCC2 in default configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
286 / 554

4.1.2.4 MCC2 configurations


The transponder can accept this configuration in terminals, backtoback terminals, and OADM nodes.
backpanel
connections
MCC East
MCC West
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
user Tx
consecutive action
user Rx
WDM Tx
ILOS
(LOC)**
(LOC)**
ShutDown of the WDM Tx

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if
ALS enable
ShutDown of the user Tx
activation of the protecting user Tx laser if
protection activated
LOC*
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOC*
shutdown of the user Tx laser

shutdown of the WDM Tx laser
LOC*
(LOC)**

concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
N.B.
If WDM Tx is Forced ON, shutdown of the WDM Tx does not occur.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
287 / 554
MCC West
MCC East
Rx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
user Tx
consecutive action
user Rx
WDM Tx
ILOS
(LOC)**
(LOC)**
ShutDown of the WDM Tx

and beginning of the ALS_WDM procedure if
ALS enable
ShutDown of the user Tx
LOC*
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOC*
LOC*
(LOC)**
ED
shutdown of the user Tx laser

shutdown of the WDM Tx laser

concerns the LOC alarms consecutive to the ILOS one.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
288 / 554

4.1.2.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection

4.1.2.4.4 Electrical Passthrough (regeneration configuration)

The MCC2 can accept this configuration in backtoback terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility and/or
to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the
protection.
backpanel
connections
MCC West
MCC East
optional
interfaces
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 219. Passthrough (regeneration configuration)

alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
consecutive action
user Tx
user Rx
WDM Tx
inhibited
inhibited
LOC*
no action
inhibited
inhibited
(LOC)*

ALS enable)
ShutDown of the WDM Tx on the adjacent
board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(LOC)*
CDR
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
289 / 554
The board is refered to as master because its user interfaces are those used and it is this board that manages the protection.
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
user Tx
consecutive action
user Rx
WDM Tx
ILOS
(LOC)**
(LOC)**
SD of the WDM Tx

ALS enable)
protection action
LOC*
(LOC)**
CDR

4.1.2.4.4.2 Slave board

The user interfaces are not used and this board does not manage the protection.
alarms
WDM Rx
ILOS
consecutive action
user Tx
user Rx
WDM Tx
inhibited
inhibited
LOC*
inhibited
inhibited
no action

ALS enable)
transmission of the alarm to the master board
(for protection control)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOC*
(LOC)**
CDR
ED

03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
290 / 554

4.1.2.4.4.1 Master board
4.1.2.5 Loopback


backpanel
connections
MCC West
MCC East
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 220. Local LoopBack

The two adjacent boards have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one
4.1.2.5.2 Remote loopback dropinsert
backpanel
connections
MCC loopin
Rx
MCC loopout
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tx
Rx
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
291 / 554
4.1.2.5.3 User loopback

backpanel
connections
MCC West
MCC East
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 222. User LoopBack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
292 / 554

4.1.2.5.4 User loopback & passthrough


backpanel
connections
MCC loopin
MCC loopout
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 223. User LoopBack & passthrough
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
293 / 554


backpanel
connections
MCC East
MCC West
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The two adjacent boards have an independant configuration (one can be in local loopback, the other one
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
294 / 554

4.1.2.6 Laser and VOA status

The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the MCC3.
The default configuration is APSD_Disable.
Table 34. MCC2 default Lasers and VOA states
MCC3 configuration
WDM Tx laser
VOA WDM Tx
User Tx laser
Plugged not declared
OFF
20 dB
OFF
Declared but no crossconnection
OFF
20 dB
OFF
Crossconn declared but no signal
OFF
20 dB
OFF
Crossconnection + signal
according to configuration

In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.
At the creation of the protection function, the operator defines one main and one spare channel.
software locked protection on main channel
software forced selection of spare channel
ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bitrates) on the current working channel
and no alarm on the protecting one
software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare signal)
The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals.
The priority order for the switch criteria is the following (from the highest to the lowest):
software forcing
automatic switching
When a software command (lockout or software forcing) is released (clear function), the switch remains
in its current position to avoid the useless switches.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
295 / 554
STM1, STM4,
STM16, GBE, FC,
CWDM SFP module
2x2
WDM
INPUT
WDM Rx
CDR
2x2
VOA
WDM Tx
CLIENT
OUTPUT
B&W or
CWDM
SFP
WDM
OPTICAL
MODULE
WDM
OUTPUT
B&W
TX
CLIENT
INPUT
B&W
RX
CDR
Pin
amp
TO/FROM
CORRESPONDING
TRANSPONDER
OOPV
2.5 2.66 Gbps

backpanel
electrical links
FPGA
(PM / G.709)
N.B.
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
links from Control Unit to components have been greyed for clarity)
TO/FROM
ADJACENT
BOARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 225. Block diagram of the MCC3 unit
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
296 / 554

4.1.3 Multirate Channel Card III (MCC3)

4.1.3.1 Description
The blockdiagram is shown in Figure 225.
MCC3 is built on the model of the MCC2 board. It is a MCC2 with a SFP Pluggable module in place of
RxTx USER Interface. Refer to para. 4.1.12 on page 346 for SFP descrption.
The MCC3 unit is a bidirectional multiclock transponder with one client optical interface and one coloured
WDM optical interface.
The Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by a
coloured single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multiplexed into a single fiber and sent to the G.709 network.
The WDM emitter is a WDM optical module tunable over two channels with 100 GHz channel spacing and
3200 ps/nm dispersion accomodation.
The optical receiver performs an opticaltoelectrical conversion and viceversa the optical transmitter.
The Client interface is a noOTN bidirectional optical interface providing the connection of a single wavelength of the client network with the User (B&W or CWDM) module.
The client interface is a Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) module. Small Formfactor Pluggable modules
are optical transceivers enabling the building of a transponder board with a client oriented User Interface.
The following SFP modules are supported (see also Table 8. on page 86 and Figure 60. on page 138):
B&W S1.1/L1.1/L1.2: STM1 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L1.2) 1550nm
B&W S4.1 / L4.1 / L4.2: STM4 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L4.2) 1550nm
B&W I16.1/S16.1/L16.1/L16.2: STM16 Interoffice/Short/Long reach at 1310nm and (L16.2)

1550nm
B&W S16.1 multirate: S16.1 multirate (up to 2.666Gbps) at 1310 nm
B&W 100BLX: Fast Ethernet at 1310nm
B&W GbESX / GbeLX / GbEZX: Gigabit Ethernet at 850nm / 1310 nm / 1550nm
B&W FC / 2FC: Fiber Channel (1.065GHz) / 2 FC (2.125GHz) / Fiber Channel at 850nm / 1310nm
CWDM Silver/Bronze: 8 CWDM modules with APD/PIN detector (bitrates = 125 Mbps>2.7 Gbps)
The Client optical interface is made up of LC/SPC connectors. The SFP module can be extracted/inserted
via the front panel without removing the board.
The following B&W signals at 2.488 Gbps are managed in current rel.:
ITUT G.957 STM16 (2.488 Gbps), STM4 (622.08Mbps), STM1 (155.52Mbps)
OC48 (2.488 Gbps)
GbE (1.250 Gbps)
2FC / FC (2.125Gbps / 1.065Gbps)
FE (125Mbps)
The CWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps>2.666Gbps.
In the Craft Terminal, the operator can select the bit rate by
selecting it in a list
entering its exact value
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx. The operator monitors the VOA by
choosing a VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces an electrical matrix, an alarm and control unit and a FPGA devoted to
B1based performance monitoring and G.709 optical layer management are present on the board.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
297 / 554

The FPGA / PM block enables the operator to achieve PM based on B1 in a non intrusive way on SDH/SONET signals either at user Rx side, or at WDM Rx side (selection made by software provisioning). User
signal is monitored after the 8x8 electrical matrix whereas the line signal is monitored before the matrix.
Drop / Insert with or without OpticalSNCP
Electrical passthrough (with or without SFP module as client interface)
line (remote) loopback and passthrough in
line (remote) loopback and passthrough out
user loopback
This matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI interface and the alarm and control unit.
The alarm and control unit ensures a few functions:
Clock and Data Recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough,...
B1 device management
Optical Channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
if opticalSNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control
safety procedure management (ALS_WDM, ...)

In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one
(the transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength (2 wavelengths are selectable
so that one shall be chosen before being able to perform a mismatch).
Two EEPROMs contain both the remote inventory data (construction date, code number, maker number,
Regenerator configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This configuration is provided with two MCC3 in passthrough. In this case the User interface (SFP) is not
required.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
298 / 554


Refer to para. 4.1.2.3 on page 284.
4.1.3.4 MCC3 configurations
Refer to para. 4.1.2.4 on page 286
4.1.3.4.1 Default configuration (no crossconnection)
Refer to para. 4.1.2.4.1 on page 286.
4.1.3.4.2 Drop / Insert (with and without optical channel protection)
Refer to para 4.1.2.4.2 on page 287 and para. 4.1.2.4.3 on page 288.
4.1.3.4.3 Electrical passthrough, with/without SPF client interface (regeneration config)
Refer to para 4.1.2.4.4 on page 289.
When two transponders are configured in passthrough, there is no need of User Interfaces, hence the
user interface (SFP modules) in MCC3 can be equipped or not.
In case it is not equipped, neither alarms nor measurements should be shown to the operator.
4.1.3.4.4 Loopbacks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para. 4.1.2.5 on page 291 where are described the following loopbacks:
local loopback
user loopback
user loopback and passthrough
remote loopback.
remote loopback and drop/insert
remote loopback and passthrough
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
299 / 554

In Optical SNCP, if the master MCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.
ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx for the available bitrates) on the current working channel
and no alarm on the protecting one
software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare signal)
SFP removed (missing)

The software forcing is highest priority. The manual switch is less priority than the alarms on the signals.
software forcing
automatic switching
in its current position to avoid the useless switches.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
300 / 554

4.1.4 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10)
Client
Client output
9.95328 Gbps
10.3125 Gbps
User
Rx
CDR
User
Tx
CDR
10 Gbps input
8 x 8 MATRIX
to/from Matrix 1
10 Gbps output
Back panel
to/from front panel connectors

Client input
CDR
some functionalities
can be shortcut
G.709,
FEC, PM
G.709,
FEC, PM
CDR
WDM
Tx
WDM
Rx
Photodiode
VOA
VOA
Photodiode
10.709 Gbps
11.096 Gbps
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WDM output
WDM
WDM input
Figure 226. OCC10 unit block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
301 / 554

The OCC10 unit transponder is a bidirectional multiclock interface for 10 Gbps native signals. It is hardware compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec.
This transponder can be provisioned to accept any digital signal at the nominal bit rate of
9.953 Gbps (STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN)
10.3125 (GBE LAN).

Two Variable Optical Attenuators (VOAs) are present on the board: one is inserted after the WDM Tx and
the other one is placed before the WDM Rx in order to maintain the power constant at the Rx input.
By O.S. (CT, 1353SH) the operator can set (and monitor) the WDM Tx VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix and an alarm
and control unit are present on the board.
SDH/SONET signals at user Rx side and at WDM Rx side simultaneously.
The electrical matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI bus and the Alarm and control unit; it
gives some flexibility and additives features:
line (remote) loopback passthrough (in and out)
local loopback
user loopback
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The alarm and control unit performs the following functions:
Clock and Data recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough..)
optical channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
if Optical SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control

In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the
transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength.
The channel/wavelength is written on the card support.
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) contained in an EEPROM present on the board.
The Remote Inventory of the module is available via the SPI bus.
The EEPROM containing specific data of the board is accessed via the SPI bus.
The O/E/O regeneration for OCC10 is
supported by connecting the client interfaces (general). Mandatory with a 2.5 Gbps backpanel
supported via 10 Gbps backpanel links (requires 3AL96270AA CO shelf).

On the front panel of the OCC10 are located four electrical connectors allowing passthrough configuration even with back panel not 10 Gbps compatible (for future rel.).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
302 / 554

4.1.4.1 Description
4.1.4.2 OCC10 optical characteristics


In case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder failure,...) a mechanism that enables to propagate a
kind of FDI along the trail is proposed (allowing for optical safety / fault localization / protection criteria):
LOC: Loss Of Clock. Alarm detected by the CDR modules, before Tx inputs for the 9953.28 Gbps
bit rate.
LOS: Loss Of Signal. Alarm detected by the Rx modules as a low power.
generic AIS detection.

If the transponder is in disable state, in case of upstream error (fiber break, transponder failure, jumper
disconnection etc...) a mechanism is proposed that enables to propagate a kind of FDI (Forward Defect
Indication) along the trail: a Loss Of Signal (LOS) or a Loss Of Clock (LOC) detection will imply a shut
down or an AIS generation (depending on the mode chosen by the operator) which will indicate to the next
NE that the failure has occurred in a previous link. This function enables the network manager to have a
good understanding of the fault localization.
If the protection is activated, only the shutdown mode is authorized.
This mechanism of LOS or LOC propagation is independant from safety procedure. The next table sums
up different OCC10 behaviour according to safety + LOS + LOC propagation command.
Table 35. OCC10 Shut down mode
Node Type
OCC10 state
Behaviour
Alarm
LOS on User Rx
APSD enable
a)
b)
Line Terminal
Add & Drop in
OADM
or
backtoback
node
APSD disable
APSD disable
di bl
forced ON
LOS on WDM Rx
Consecutive action
SD of WDM Tx
board
LOC on User Tx
SD of User Tx
LOC on WDM Tx
SD of WDM Tx
LOS on User Rx
SD of WDM Tx
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of User Tx
LOC on User Tx
SD of User Tx
LOC on WDM Tx
SD of WDM Tx
WDM Tx always ON
LOS on WDM Rx
SD of User Tx
LOC on User Tx
SD of User Tx
APSD disable
di bl LOS on WDM Rx
forced OFF
LOC on User Tx
WDM Tx always OFF

SD of User Tx
SD of User Tx
Forbidden
APSD enable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
APSD disable
Passthrough
P
th
h
in
i
APSD disable
OADM or backto forced ON
b k node
d
back
APSD disable
forced OFF
LOS on WDM Rx
LOC on WDM Tx
SD of WDM Tx
WDM Tx always ON
WDM Tx always OFF
Example of way of working for ADD & DROP with APSD Disable:
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
303 / 554
ILOS at user Rx input implies the SD of WDM Tx

LOC at WDM Tx input (signal coming either from user Rx or WDM Rx) implies SD of WDM Tx
available & enable). A consecutive LOC will appear at user Tx input and this interface will be shutdown. To restart, the WDM Tx will send restart pulses.
LOC at user Tx input (signal coming from WDM world) implies shutdown of the user Tx laser and
protection mechanism (if available).
During the switch on and the switch off time, the output power remains between ITU 500 pm.
N.B.
4.1.4.4 OCC10 configurations

On the following schemes, are presented the two adjacent transponders and the transponder matrix configurations. The HF backpanel links shown in the following drawings are those between the slots 4&5,
6&7, 8&9, 10&11, 14&15, 16&17, 18&19, 20&21.
Table 36. OCC10 configurations
UNI
NNI
9.95328 / 10.3125
10.709 / 11.096
Dropinsert
YES
Future rel.
Optical SNCP
YES
Future rel.
Passthrough
Not Applicable
YES
Remote loopback passthrough (IN and OUT)
Not Applicable
YES
YES
Future rel.
Not Applicable
YES
Local loopback
YES
Future rel.
User loopback
YES
Future rel.
Configuration type
Client bit rate (Gbps)
Remote loopback drop/insert

Remote loopback
In the following tables the alarms which are not shown or not applicable are alarms with potentially consequent actions but not displayed to the craft user.
Notice that _User is used for B&W link or back panel link.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The switch criteria are described in the protection para. 3.1.9 on page 193.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
304 / 554



backpanel
connections
OCC10 East
OCC10 West
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
For User to Network Interface (UNI) both ODU and OTU are terminated at the WDM interfaces.
9953.28 Gbps
ODU
OTU
B&W
O/E
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ODU
OTU
DEFEC
WDM
O/E
OTU
DEFEC
8x8
Matrix
FEC
OTU
10.709 Gbps
ODU
WDM
O/E
OTU
FEC
B&W
O/E
Figure 228. Dropinsert (UNI)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
305 / 554
OCC10 West
OCC10 East
Rx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Tx
8x8
Matrix
8x8
Matrix
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
Tx
Tx
4.1.4.4.4 Electrical passthrough
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The transponder can accept this configuration in backtoback terminals or OADM nodes for flexibility
and/or to enable a regeneration of the signal. The user interfaces are not used and this board do not manage the protection.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
306 / 554

4.1.4.4.3 Drop / Insert with optical channel protection
front panel (future rel.)

OCC10 West
OCC10 East

Rx
Tx
OR
WDM Tx
OR
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Rx
8x8
OR
WDM Tx
OR
Tx
Rx

Figure 230. Passthrough (NNI)
For the regeneration configuration, OTU is terminated at the WDM interfaces and ODU is bypassed. A
dummy OTU is sent through the matrix
ODU
OTU
Dummy OTU
OTU
Front Panel (future rel.)
Board 1
OR
OTU
OTU
8x8
Matrix
WDM
O/E
10.709 Gbps
FEC
OR
Front Panel (future rel.)
DEFEC
OTU
8x8
Matrix
OR
FEC
ODU
FEC
OTU
ODU
OTU
DEFEC
WDM
O/E
OR
OTU
10.709 Gbps
DEFEC
ODU
DEFEC
OTU
ODU
WDM
O/E
OTU
FEC
WDM
O/E
Board 2
Figure 231. Regeneration (two passthrough linked by 10G backpanel)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Dummy OTU does not correspond to a real transmission section: it is used to monitor the matrices
connections.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
307 / 554
When the board is configured in loopback the RXA and TXA LEDs, located on its front plate, are
always turned OFF.
4.1.4.4.5.1 Passthrough remote loopback
OCC10 West
OCC10 East
Rx
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
WDM Rx
OR
Tx
8x8
WDM Tx
OR
Rx

Figure 232. Remote LoopBack passthrough (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OCC10 to work in loopin or loopout mode.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
308 / 554

4.1.4.4.5.2 Dropinsert remote loopback

backpanel
connections

OCC10 West
OCC10 East
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 233. Dropinsert remote loopback (UNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM)
This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one can
be in loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in dropinsert configuration or in local loopback mode).
4.1.4.4.5.3 Remote loopback
backpanel
connections
OCC10 West
Rx
OCC10 East
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 234. Remote loopback (NNI) in ring application (backtoback or OADM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
be in loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in dropinsert configuration or in local loopback mode).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
309 / 554
backpanel
connections
OCC10 West

4.1.4.4.6.1 Local loopback
OCC10 East
Tx
Rx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Rx
Tx
Figure 235. Local LoopBack (UNI)

be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loopback
mode).
4.1.4.4.7 User loopback (UNI): foreseen for Hardware and Software.
backpanel
connections
OCC10 West
Rx
OCC10 East
Tx
WDM Tx
WDM Rx
8x8
8x8
WDM Rx
WDM Tx
Tx
Rx
Figure 236. User LoopBack (UNI)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This configuration is used for tests only. The two adjacent boards have an independent configuration (one
can be in local loopback, the other one can be unequipped, in drop/insert configuration, or in local loop
back mode).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
310 / 554


The next table gives the default state of the lasers and VOA according to the configuration of the OCC10.
The default configuration is APSD_Disable and LOS_mode_SD.
Table 37. OCC10 default Lasers and VOA states
OCC10 configuration
WDM Tx laser
VOA WDM Tx
User Tx laser
Plugged not declared
OFF
20 dB
OFF
Declared but no crossconnection
OFF
20 dB
OFF
Crossconn declared but no signal
OFF
20 dB
OFF
Crossconnection + signal

In Optical SNCP, as for MCC, if the master OCC (master for protection control) is in failure (Hardware failure, Card absent,...), the selected path is automatically the protecting one. By this way, when the board
in failure is retrieved, there is no impact on the traffic.
ILOS (on WDM Rx) or LOC (on user Tx) on the current working channel and no alarm on the protecting one
software manual selection of spare channel (forced selection only if no degradation of this spare signal).
The software lockout of protection is the highest priority.
software forcing
automatic switching
in its current position to avoid useless switches.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
An example of optical protection is given in Figure 229. on page 306.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
311 / 554
4.1.5 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card Enhanced (OCC10_E)
Client interface Client output

9.95328 Gbps (SDH, WAN)
10.3125 Gbps (LAN)
10.709 Gbps (NNI)
User
Rx
B&W XFP
CDR
10 Gbps input
CDR
8 x 8 MATRIX
to/from Matrix 1
10 Gbps output
Back panel
to/from front panel connectors
CDR
User
Tx
CDR
some functionalities
can be shortcut
G.709,
FEC, PM
G.709,
FEC, PM
CDR
WDM
Rx
(APD)
WDM
Tx
Photodiode
VOA
VOA
Photodiode
10.709 Gbps (SDH, WAN, NNI)
11.096 Gbps (LAN)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WDM output
WDM
WDM input
Figure 237. OCC10_E unit block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
312 / 554

Client input

4.1.5.1 Description
The OCC10_E unit is a bidirectional multiclock transponder for 10 Gbps native signals, with one client
optical interface and one coloured WDM optical interface. It is hardware compliant with ITUT G.709 Rec.
The USER Interface is a XFP Pluggable module. Refer to para. 4.1.13 on page 348 for XFP descrption
The Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by a
coloured single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multiplexed into a single fiber and sent to the G.709 network.
The WDM interface is OTN and the bit rate is
10.709Gbps for SDH STM64, SONET OC192, 10GbE WAN and (in future rel.) NNI client signals
11.096Gbps for 10GbE LAN client signals

in the corresponding wavelength.
The WDM emitter is a nontunable WDM optical module with 100 GHz channel spacing.
The WDM Receiver is APD type.
The Client interface is a noOTN bidirectional optical interface providing the connection of a single wavelength of the client network with the User module.
The client interface is a XFP module with APD detector. It is an optical transceivers enabling the building
of a transponder board with a client oriented User Interface.
The following XFP modules are supported (see also Table 8. on page 86 and Figure 61. on page 139):
B&W I64.1/10G BaseL and S64.2b/10GBaseE, providing SDH STM64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE
LAN, OTN
B&W 10GBaseS, providing SDH STM64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN

The Client optical interface is made up of LC/PC connectors. The XFP module can be extracted/inserted
via the front panel without removing the board.
The following B&W signals are managed:
9.953Gbps (ITUT G.957 STM64/OC192, 10GbE WAN)
10.31Gbps (10GbE LAN).

A Variable Optical Attenuators (VOA) is inserted after the WDM Tx and another one is placed before the
WDM Rx in order to maintain the power constant at the Rx input.
By O.S. (CT, 1353SH) the operator can set (and monitor) the WDM Tx VOA value.
In addition to the optical interfaces (user Rx and Tx, WDM Rx and Tx), an electrical matrix and an alarm
and control unit are present on the board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SDH/SONET signals at user Rx side and at WDM Rx side simultaneously.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
313 / 554
The alarm and control unit performs the following functions:
Clock and Data recovery (CDR) units management (bit rate selection, passthrough...)
optical channel protection control (configuration, switch decision unit)
if Optical SNCP: user Tx ON/OFF control

In OCh protection scheme, each transponder transfers its alarms information to the corresponding one (the
transponder just beside) via parallel backpanel links in order that each one is able to select the unfailed signal.
Each transponder unit is characterized by its particular Tx WDM wavelength.
The channel/wavelength is written on the card support.
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) contained in an EEPROM present on the board.
The Remote Inventory of the module is available via the SPI bus.
The EEPROM containing specific data of the board is accessed via the SPI bus.
The O/E/O regeneration for OCC10 is
supported by connecting the client interfaces (general). Mandatory with a 2.5 Gbps backpanel
supported via 10 Gbps backpanel links (for future release).

4.1.5.4 OCC10_E configurations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
314 / 554

The electrical matrix is managed by the craft terminal via the SPI bus and the Alarm and control unit.
line (remote) loopback passthrough (in and out)
local loopback
user loopback
4.1.6 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card for CWDM (OCC10_XFP_CWDM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This board is the CWDM version for 10Gbps line.

It is based on OCC10_E without VOA at transmitter side as well as at receiver. The available wavelength
fits in 1530 nm and 1550 nm CWDM channels.
Refer to the block diagram of Figure 237. on page 312.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
315 / 554
CWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CWDM
INPUT
8X8
MATRIX
B&W or CWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM Rx
CWDM1
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CWDM
OUTPUT
WDM Tx
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
B&W
RX
CDR
CWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CWDM
INPUT
WDM Tx
B&W
TX
CDR
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CWDM
OUTPUT
CLIENT
OUTPUT
USER1
CLIENT
INPUT
B&W or CWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM Rx
CWDM2
B&W
TX
CDR
B&W
RX
CDR
CLIENT
OUTPUT
USER2
CLIENT
INPUT
SDH
PERFORMANCE
MONITORING
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
Figure 238. WLA2M unit block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3 connectors are green, but the fiber connectors to use are PC, not APC.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
316 / 554

4.1.7 Wavelength adapter 2 (WLA2M)

4.1.7.1 Description
The WLA2M (wavelength adapter) is equipped with two multirate (125 Mbps > 2.67 Gbps) transponders
supporting two independent optical channels, in the 1470 nm > 1610 nm range, 20 nm spaced.
The main function of this board is to convert (for each one of the two channels) the User optical signal into
a CWDM coloured optical signal and viceversa.
User side, a CWDM SFP module can also be plugged in allowing the board to be used as a regenerator.
All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and WDM sides, and performance monitoring for SDH.
The two User transceivers and the two CWDM transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that
they can be alternated according to the different applications, in the 100Mbps>2.67Gbps bit rate range.
Refer to para. 4.1.12 on page 346 and Figure 60. on page 138 for SFP description, Table 8. for SFP list.
Each Line/CWDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
a coloured single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on the Line interface is then multiplexed into a single fiber and sent to the network.
The CWDM interfaces are multirate pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type.
The bit rate is the same of the client bit rate, in the corresponding wavelength.
Each Client interface provides the connection to the client of the network.
The optical receiver performs the opticaltoelectrical conversion and viceversa the optical transmitter.
The Client/User interfaces are SFP modules. They are optical transceivers enabling the building of a transponder board with a client oriented User Interface.
B&W and CWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:

1550nm
B&W GbESX / GbELX / GbEZX: Gigabit Ethernet at 850nm / 1310 nm / 1550nm
B&W FC / 2FC: Fiber Channel (1.065GHz) / 2 Fiber Channel (2.125GHz) at 850nm / 1310nm
CWDM: multirate (125 Mbps>2.67 Gbps) CWDM modules with APD or PIN detector
OC48 (2.488 Gbps)
GbE (1.250 Gbps), FE (125Mbps)
FC and 2FC (1.065Gbps / 2.125Gbps)

The CWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps>2.666Gbps,
but only a set of discrete bit rates is supported by the card as mentioned below.
The Client (and WDM too) optical interfaces are LC/PC connectors. The SFP module can be extracted/inserted via the front panel without removing the board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical measurements are not supported by WLA2M (use WLA3CD)

The multirate CDR, located before the transmitter both on B&W and CWDM sides, ensures the 3R regeneration of all the signals. CWDM side the CDR can lock automatically onto the proper bit rate.
The supported bit rates are: 125Mbps, 155.52Mbps, 200Mbps, 270Mbps, 622.08Mbps, 1.0625Gbps,
1.24416Gbps, 1.25Gbps, 2.125Gbps, 2.48832Gbps, 2.5Gbps, 2.67Gbps.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
317 / 554
The Alarms & Control unit provides
unit configuration operations
alarms collection and interface to ESC
remote inventory and additional data information
8X8 matrix configuration
management of CDRs and bit rate information of incoming signals
optical modules monitoring
optical channel protection check: ESNCP = reconfiguration of the matrix
management of performance monitoring information

Performance monitoring are performed on SDH signal on two ports: the User and CWDM ports of the
same channel (CH1 or CH2) simultaneously. SDH PM are calculated on B1 byte.
4.1.7.3 Boards behavior depending on APSD status
Ports on WLA2 is never in APSD enable state.
Force ON and Force OFF commands are not available.
The LOS propagation is described in the following:
When the alarm PORT2_RX_LOS occurs, PORT1 TX is shut down
When the alarm PORT1_RX_LOS occurs, PORT2TX is shut down
When the alarm PORT3_RX_LOS occurs, PORT4 TX is shut down.

4.1.7.4 Configurations
For each channel there are four kinds of independent configurations:
Add/Drop
Local loopback
Remote loopback
LocalRemote loopback.
In Add/Drop configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is dropped on to the user network, i.e.
sent to the user transmitter, as the same traffic received from the user receiver is added on to the CWDM
line via CWDM transmitter.
In Local loopback configuration the traffic received on User receiver is sent to the corresponding User
transmitter in order to be tested. In such way, users can receive traffic sent by themselves.
In Remote loopback configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is sent to the corresponding
CWDM transmitter in order to be tested.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In LocalRemote loopback configuration the traffic received from (User and CWDM) receiver is sent to
the corresponding (User and CWDM) transmitter in order to be tested.
All the possible board configurations are described in the following paragraphs.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
318 / 554

The 8X8 electrical matrix enables the following channel configuration and additive features:
Add and Drop
Local loopback, Remote loopback, LocalRemote loopback
flexible transmission performance monitoring data path connection

4.1.7.4.1 Add/Drop configuration (default configuration)

See Figure 239. This configuration is applied when both channels of the unit are used in Add/Drop mode.
The configuration without any monitoring implemented is the default one.
All transmitters can be turned ON or OFF manually (it has the highest priority). If the FORCETXCON is
not active the transmitter will obey the rules of Table 38.
Table 38. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms
CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX 2
INPUT
Figure 239. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop

4.1.7.4.2 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
See Figure 240. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side.
Alarms
CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX2 LOS

USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 240. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
319 / 554
See Figure 241. The Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on CWDM side.
Table 40. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
Alarms
CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS

CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 241. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.4 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration
See Figure 242. The LocalRemote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User and
CWDM sides simultaneously (on the same channel).
Alarms
CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 242. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
320 / 554

4.1.7.4.3 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration

4.1.7.4.5 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration

Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX1 LOS

USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 243. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.6 Channel 1 and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
Table 43. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback configuration
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX1 LOS

USER_RX1_LOS
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 244. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Local loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
321 / 554
See Figure 245. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on CWDM side.
Table 44. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX1 LOS

USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 245. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.8 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration
See Figure 246. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Local
Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 45. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX1 LOS

USER_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 246. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
322 / 554

4.1.7.4.7 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration

4.1.7.4.9 Channel 1 in Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration

Table 46. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX1 LOS

CWDM_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
OUTPUT
CWDM TX1
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 247. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.10 Channel 1 in Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
See Figure 248. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on CWDM side.
Table 47. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX1 LOS

CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER RX2 LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 248. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
323 / 554
Table 48. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX1 LOS

CWDM_RX1_LOS
CWDM RX2 LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 249. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.12 CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration
See Figure 250. The Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on CWDM side and the
LocalRemote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 49. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX1 LOS

CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 250. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
324 / 554

4.1.7.4.11 Channel 1 and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration

4.1.7.4.13 CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration

Table 50. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
Alarms
USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 251. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.7.4.14 Channel 1 in LocalRemote loopback and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration
See Figure 246. The Local loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on User side and the Local
Remote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 51. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
Alarms
USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX2 LOS

USER_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 252. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Local loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
325 / 554
See Figure 253. The Remote loopback configuration is used for testing purpose on CWDM side and the
LocalRemote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 52. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
Alarms
USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS

CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 253. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
4.1.7.4.16 CH1 and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration
See Figure 254. The LocalRemote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides
simultaneously (on the same channel).
Table 53. Alarms and action usage for CH1 and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration
Alarms
USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
INPUT
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
User RX 1
CDR3
CWDM TX1
OUTPUT
USER 1
OUTPUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INPUT
User TX 1
CDR1
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
User RX 2
CDR4
CWDM TX2
INPUT
OUTPUT
USER 2
OUTPUT
User TX 2
CDR2
CWDM RX2
INPUT
Figure 254. Matrix configuration for CH1 and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
326 / 554

4.1.7.4.15 CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration

4.1.8 Wavelength adapter 3 (WLA3CD)
CWDM or DWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM
INPUT
8X8
MATRIX
B&W or CWDM or
DWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM Rx
CWDM1
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
WDM
OUTPUT
WDM Tx
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
B&W
RX
CDR
CWDM or DWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM
INPUT
WDM Tx
B&W
TX
CDR
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
WDM
OUTPUT
CLIENT
OUTPUT
USER1
CLIENT
INPUT
B&W or CWDM or
DWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM Rx
CWDM2
B&W
TX
CDR
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
B&W
RX
CDR
CLIENT
OUTPUT
USER2
CLIENT
INPUT
SDH
PERFORMANCE
MONITORING
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 255. WLA3CD unit block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
327 / 554

The WLA3CD (wavelength adapter) is equipped with two multirate (125 Mbps > 2.67 Gbps) transponders
supporting
two independent CWDM optical channels, in the 1470 nm > 1610 nm range, 20 nm spaced or
two independent DWDM optical channels, in the 1529.55 nm > 1561.42 nm range, 100 GHz spaced.
The main function of this board is to convert (for each one of the two channels) the User optical signal into
a WDM (CWDM or DWDM, according to the SFP used) coloured optical signal and viceversa.
User side, a CWDM or DWDM SFP module can also be plugged in allowing the board to be used as a
regenerator. All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM, DWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and WDM sides, and performance monitoring for SDH.
The two User transceivers and the two WDM transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that
Each Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
The WDM interfaces can be
multirate CWDM pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type
multirate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP), APD type.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
B&W, CWDM and DWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:

1550nm
DWDM: multirate (125 Mbps>2.67 Gbps) DWDM modules with APD detector
OC48 (2.488 Gbps)

The C/DWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps>2.666Gbps,
Optical measurements are supported by WLA3CD (Laser Bias, Optical Received Power and Optical
Transmitted Power on all SFPs with DDM).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
328 / 554

4.1.8.1 Description

The multirate CDR, located before the transmitter both on B&W and WDM sides, ensures the 3R regeneration of all the signals. WDM side the CDR can lock automatically onto the proper bit rate.
Add and Drop
ESNCP (future rel.)
flexible transmission performance monitoring data path connection

optical channel protection check: ESNCP = reconfiguration of the matrix
management of performance monitoring information

Performance monitoring are performed on SDH signal on two ports: the User and CWDM ports of the
same channel (CH1 or CH2) simultaneously. SDH PM are calculated on B1 byte.
Ports on WLA3 is never in APSD enable state.
Force ON and Force OFF commands are not available.
The LOS propagation is described in the following:
When the alarm PORT1_RX_LOS occurs, PORT2TX is shut down
When the alarm PORT3_RX_LOS occurs, PORT4 TX is shut down.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The allowed configurations are the same as WLA2M, refer to para. 4.1.7.4 on page 318
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
329 / 554
TO
USER
optical
splitter
CWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CWDM
INPUT
WDM Rx
WDM1
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CWDM
OUTPUT
WDM Tx
8X8
MATRIX
B&W or CWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM Rx
WDM2
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CWDM
OUTPUT
WDM Tx
OUTPUT
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
USER1
CLIENT
B&W
RX
CDR
CWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CWDM
INPUT
CLIENT
B&W
TX
CDR
INPUT
B&W or CWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CDR
CLIENT
B&W
TX
OUTPUT
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CLIENT
B&W
RX
CDR
USER2
INPUT
optical
coupler
FROM
USER
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 256. WLA2M_OP unit block diagram

3 connectors are green, but the fiber connectors to use are PC, not APC.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
330 / 554

4.1.9 Wavelength adapter 2 with OSNCP (WLA2M_OP)

4.1.9.1 Description
The WLA2M_OP (wavelength adapter) is only used for protection purpose. It is equipped with two multirate (125 Mbps > 2.67 Gbps) transponders, one optical splitter and one optical coupler allowing to support
one protected optical channel (OSNCP), in the 1470 nm > 1610 nm range, 20 nm spaced.
The optical splitter is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to transmit the client signal on both the paths (main/protected and spare/protecting).
The optical coupler is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to select
the signal according to the failure conditions: the main path is selected if it is not affected by fault, the spare
one (if OK) is selected if the main signal is faulty.
The main functions of this board are to provide OSNCP and to convert (for each one of the two channels)
the User optical signal into a CWDM coloured optical signal and viceversa.
All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and CWDM sides.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each Line/CWDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
The CWDM interfaces are multirate pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type.
B&W and CWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:

1550nm
OC48 (2.488 Gbps)

The CWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps>2.666Gbps,
Connectors are green, but it is still LC/PC connectors that must be used. Do not plug LC/APC
connectors in WLA2 boards
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
331 / 554
Add and Drop

optical channel protection check: OSNCP = switch control (turn ON/OFF User B&W TX)
For each channel there are four kinds of independent configurations:
Add/Drop
Local loopback
Remote loopback
LocalRemote loopback.
In Add/Drop configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is dropped on to the user network, i.e.
sent to the user transmitter, as the same traffic received from the user receiver is added on to the CWDM
line via CWDM transmitter. When the Matrix is configured in Add/Drop, OSNCP is provided.
In Local loopback configuration the traffic received on User receiver is sent to the corresponding User
transmitter in order to be tested. In such way, users can receive traffic sent by themselves.
In Remote loopback configuration the traffic received from CWDM receiver is sent to the corresponding
CWDM transmitter in order to be tested.
In LocalRemote loopback configuration the traffic received from (User and CWDM) receiver is sent to
the corresponding (User and CWDM) transmitter in order to be tested.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All the possible board configurations are described in the following paragraphs.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
332 / 554


4.1.9.4.1 Add/Drop configuration (default configuration)

See Figure 257. The WLA2M_OP provides the OSNCP function (described in para. 4.1.9.5 on page
337) when the Matrix is configured as Add/Drop.
This board accepts 2 kinds of operation modes in OSNCP protection: force and auto.
In force mode, the system can enable or disable the user TX1 or user TX2 unconditionally.
In auto mode, the system can enable or disable the user TX1 and user TX2 automatically, as in Table 54.
Table 54. Alarms and action usage for OSNCP with auto mode
CWDM_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Action
Disable USER TX1, Disable USER TX2
Disable USER TX1, Enable USER TX2
Disable USER TX2, Enable USER TX1
No action
Table 55. Alarms and action usage for both Channels in Add/Drop (OSNCP configuration)
Alarms
USER_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Actions
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX2
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
CWDM TX1
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
Coupler
Output
User RX 2
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 257. Matrix configuration for both Channels in Add/Drop (OSNCP configutration)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
333 / 554
Alarms
No condition
USER_RX1_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX2 LOS

USER_RX2_LOS
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
CWDM TX1
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
Coupler
Output
User RX 2
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
Figure 258. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Local loopback
4.1.9.4.3 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Remote loopback configuration
Table 57. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback configuration
Alarms
No condition
USER_RX1_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2 LOS

CWDM_RX2_LOS
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
Coupler
Output
User RX 2
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CWDM TX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
Figure 259. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in Remote loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
334 / 554

4.1.9.4.2 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in Local loopback configuration

4.1.9.4.4 Channel 1 in Add/Drop and Channel 2 in LocalRemote loopback configuration

Alarms
No condition
USER_RX1_LOS
USER_RX2_LOS
CWDM_RX2_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
CWDM TX1
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
User RX 2
Coupler
Output
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
Figure 260. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Add/Drop and CH2 in LocalRemote loopback
4.1.9.4.5 Channel 1 in Local loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
USER RX1 LOS

USER_RX1_LOS
No condition
CWDM_RX2_LOS
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
Coupler
Output
User RX 2
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CWDM TX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
Figure 261. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Local loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
335 / 554
Table 60. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
Alarms
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
CWDM RX1 LOS

CWDM_RX1_LOS
No condition
USER_RX2_LOS
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
CWDM TX1
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
Coupler
Output
User RX 2
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
Figure 262. Matrix configuration for CH1 in Remote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop
4.1.9.4.7 CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Add/Drop configuration
See Figure 263. The LocalRemote loopback is used for testing purpose on both User and CWDM sides.
Table 61. Alarms and action usage for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
Alarms
USER_RX1_LOS
CWDM_RX1_LOS
No condition
USER_RX2_LOS
Actions
Shutdown USER TX1
Shutdown CWDM TX1
Shutdown USER TX2
Shutdown CWDM TX2
User RX 1
Input
CDR3
Splitter
User TX 1
CDR1
Coupler
Output
User RX 2
User TX 2
CWDM RX1
8X8
MATRIX
USER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CWDM TX1
CDR4
CDR2
CWDM TX2
CWDM RX2
Figure 263. Matrix configuration for CH1 in LocalRemote loopback and CH2 in Remote loopback
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
336 / 554

4.1.9.4.6 Channel 1 in Remote loopback and Channel 2 in Add/Drop configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.1.9.5 OpticalSNCP
The OSNCP is provided when the Matrix is configured in Add/Drop mode on both the channels. This is
the default configuration, described in para. 4.1.9.4.1 on page 333.
The OSNCP protection is based on the parallel transmit and best one receive strategy at optical level.
At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted to the two arms of the ring or pointtopoint link, and the
available signal is selected at the receive side, according to the failure conditions of the two signals.
The splitter and the coupler are used to route optical signals in this application, as shown in Figure 257.
on page 333.
The two involved CWDM transponders are placed in the same WLA board: one has to be configured as
main (CH1), the other being spare (CH2).
The system implements protection actions according to the alarms and status information of both CWDM
receivers.
OSNCP rules:
only one channel can be configured as loopback mode at same time
the unit must be configured in OSNCP auto switch mode before loopback operation
should any loopback been configured, the OSNCP function is not available.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
337 / 554
TO
USER
optical
splitter
8X8
MATRIX
CWDM or DWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CWDM
INPUT
WDM Rx
WDM1
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CWDM
OUTPUT
WDM Tx
B&W or CWDM or
DWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
WDM Rx
WDM2
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CWDM
OUTPUT
WDM Tx
OUTPUT
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
USER1
CLIENT
B&W
RX
CDR
CWDM or DWDM
OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CWDM
INPUT
CLIENT
B&W
TX
CDR
INPUT
B&W or CWDM or
DWDM OPTICAL
MODULE SFP
CDR
CLIENT
B&W
TX
OUTPUT
125Mbps
to 2.7Gbps
CLIENT
B&W
RX
CDR
USER2
INPUT
optical
coupler
FROM
USER
ALARM &
CONTROL UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 264. WLA3CDOP unit block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
338 / 554

4.1.10 Wavelength adapter 3 with OSNCP (WLA3CDOP)

4.1.10.1 Description
The WLA3CDOP (wavelength adapter) is only used for protection purpose. It is equipped with two multirate (125 Mbps > 2.67 Gbps) transponders, one optical splitter and one optical coupler supporting
one protected CWDM optical channel (OSNCP), in the 1470nm>1610nm range, 20nm spaced or
one protected DWDM optical channel, in the 1529.55 nm > 1561.42 nm range, 100 GHz spaced.
The optical splitter is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to transmit the client signal on both the paths (main/protected and spare/protecting).
The optical coupler is connected to the two optical channels (transponders), user side, allowing to select
the signal according to the failure conditions: the main signal is selected if it is not affected by fault, the
spare one (if OK) is selected if the main signal is faulty.
The main functions of this board are to provide OSNCP and to convert (for each one of the two channels)
the User optical signal into a WDM (CWDM or DWDM, according to the SFP used) coloured optical signal
and viceversa.
All the SFP types (B&W, CWDM, DWDM) can be plugged onto all the interfaces.
Moreover it performs 3R function for both User and WDM sides.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each Line/WDM bidirectional optical interface is the connection to the network, and is accomplished by
The WDM interfaces can be
multirate CWDM pluggable modules (SFP), PIN (bronze) or APD (silver) type
multirate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP), APD type.

B&W, CWDM and DWDM SFP modules can be used. The following SFP modules are supported:

1550nm
DWDM: multirate (125 Mbps>2.67 Gbps) DWDM modules with APD detector
OC48 (2.488 Gbps)

The C/DWDM coloured SFP module is able to accept all the bit rates in the range 125Mbps>2.666Gbps,
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
339 / 554
Optical measurements are supported by WLA3CD (Laser Bias, Optical Received Power and Optical
Transmitted Power on all SFPs with DDM).
Add and Drop

optical channel protection check: OSNCP = switch control (turn ON/OFF User B&W TX)
The allowed configurations are the same as WLA3CDOP, refer to para. 4.1.9.4 on page 332.
4.1.10.5 OpticalSNCP
The OSNCP is provided when the Matrix is configured in Add/Drop mode on both the channels. This is
the default configuration, described in para. 4.1.9.4.1 on page 333.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OSNCP protection is based on the parallel transmit and best one receive strategy at optical level.
At the transmit side, the signal is broadcasted to the two arms of the ring or pointtopoint link, and the
available signal is selected at the receive side, according to the failure conditions of the two signals.
The splitter and the coupler are used to route optical signals in this application, as shown in Figure 257.
on page 333.
The two involved CWDM transponders are placed in the same WLA board: one has to be configured as
main (CH1), the other being spare (CH2).
The system implements protection actions according to the alarms and status information of both CWDM
receivers.
OSNCP rules:
only one channel can be configured as loopback mode at same time
the unit must be configured in OSNCP auto switch mode before loopback operation
should any loopback been configured, the OSNCP function is not available.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
340 / 554

4.1.11 4xANY, 4xANY_S and 4xANY_P cards

TDM concentrators are able to multiplex in the time domain up to 4 low bitrate (client) signals into a
2.5 Gbps B&W WDM signal. The multiplexed client signals are listed below:
4 x Fast Ethernet
4 x FDDI
4 x ESCON
4 x Digital Video
4 x STM1
3 x STM4
2 x Gigabit Ethernet
2 x Fiber Channel or FICON
some mixes are also possible:
2 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
1 x (FDDI or FE or DV or ESCON or STM1) + 1 x STM4 +1 x (FC or GbEth or FICON)
2 x (FC or GbEth or FICON).

The following type of boards are provided:
the 4xANY board with an I16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.1. It allows
to cover a 2 Km distance approx
the 4xANY_S board with a S16.1 optical port for the 2.5 Gbit/s, is available from release 1.3. It allows to cover a 15 Km distance approx. This functionality enables to use a 4XANY board without the
need of a transponder to have the necessary optical budget to launch the 1310 nm signal on the fiber.
It is then possible to use a 4XANY_S board alone in a 1696MS_C (for example) thus emitting only
one 1310 nm wavelength.
the 4xANY_P board with a 2.5 Gbps pluggable optical module, aggregate side, hosting a B&W I16.1
or B&W S16.1 or CWDM (PIN or APD) or DWDM (APD) transceiver (transmitter + receiver) has
been introduced in R.2.0. The transceiver is included into a SFP module.
The CWDM wavelenght range is 1470>1610nm and one wavelength per module is accessible.
The DWDM wavelenght range is 1561.42>1529.55nm and one wavelength per SFP is accessible.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The architecture of the TDM concentrator board is based on the concept of virtual concatenation, and on
the mapping of SDH on OTN:
the data traffic is packet into VC4 structures virtually concatenated. Virtually concatenated
means that any VC4 can follow an indpendent path crossing any SDH/SONET network (included legacy ADM). Each VC4 is then concatenated again in the remote 4xANY.
the VC4s are groomed into a STM16 structure.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
341 / 554
In Figure 265. on page 343 is shown the block diagram.

The board is divided into:
one mother board
one daughter board
1 to 4 (client) drawers plugged on the mother or daughter board (2 on each one).
a 1310 nm B&W transceiver for 4xAny and 4xANY_S
a 1310 nm B&W or CWDM or DWDM pluggable transceiver for 4xANY_P only.

The board consists essentially in:
4 slots for bidirectional client optical interfaces
One 2.5 Gbps transceiver (or CWDM or DWDM SFP transceiver for 4xANY_P).
The 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P unit interfaces with
the MCC board via the B&W 2.5 Gbps transceiver (STM16 SFP)
CWDM Mux/Demux via the CWDM SFP
DWDM Mux/Demux / OADM via the DWDM SFP.

Receivers and transmitters can be locked either on the received clock or the local clock:
Default configuration : Tx locked to local clock and Rx locked to the received clock.
Loopback configuration. LoopBack and Continue managed.

From R.2.2 the B1 performance monitoring is enabled consisting in monitoring the B1 byte of the aggregate signal received (WDM Rx).
It is also provided the 4xANY 1+1 protection consisting in protecting each client individually.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4 X ANY supports concentration of Fast Ethernet and GbE Jumbo frames including 9000 bytes frames.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
342 / 554
Tx
drawer #1
CDR
Tx
Rx
Client
signal
CDR
drawer #2
Rx
Tx
Rx
SFP pluggable module

for 4xANY_P
Tx
Client
signal
Tx
STM16*
to/from
corresponding
transponder
2.5 Gb/s
drawer #3
E/O
STM16 Regenerator
Rx
Client
signal
CDR
CONCENTRATOR
Rx
Client
signal
STM16 mapper

CDR
drawer #4
Alarm & Control

unit
Card
presence
* a CWDM or DWDM SFP module can also be plugged on 4xANY_P
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 265. 4xANY, 4xANY_S, 4xANY_P block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
343 / 554
Client side, three different kinds of drawers are provided:
high frequency 1310 nm optical interfaces drawers (Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel), which
can be plugged only on the ports #3 et #4 (HF_1310_DRAWER).
STM1/4 drawers, which can be plugged on any slots. But, STM_4 Bit rate can only be set for
ports #3 and #4 (SDHSONET_1310_DRAWER).
Particular Case: For the 3 x STM4 configuration, the slot #1 is exceptionally occupied by a
STM4 bit rate.
Low frequency drawers (Fast Ethernet, FDDI, ESCON, Digital Video) with 1310 nm optical interfaces, which can be plugged in any slots (LF_1310_DRAWER).
Low frequency drawers equipped with 1310 nm detector and laser. The optical interfaces are
have better jitter figures. The rules followed for the position of these drawers are only imposed
by the low frequency nature of the drawer (LF_1310_2_DRAWER).
High frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the
position of these drawers are only imposed by the high frequency nature of the drawer
(HF_850_DRAWER).
Low frequency drawers equipped with 850 nm detector and laser. The rules followed for the
position of these drawers are only imposed by the low frequency nature of the drawer
(LF_850_DRAWER).
Furthermore, a limited number of configurations of drawers can be provided. Rules must be followed :
If High Frequency drawer in ports #3, the port #1 must be non provisioned
If High Frequency drawer in ports #4, the port #2 must be non provisioned
The following table lists the allowed configurations.

Table 62. Allowed drawers association
Drawer #1
Not provisioned
Drawer #3
High Frequency
Drawer #2
Drawer #4
Not provisioned
High Frequency
Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1
/ STM4
/ STM4
Not provisioned
High Frequency / Low Low Frequency / STM1

Frequency / STM1 /
STM4
Low Frequency / STM1

/ STM4
Low Frequency / STM1 Low Frequency / STM1 Not provisioned

/ STM4
High Frequency / Low

Frequency / STM1 /
STM4
STM4
STM4
STM4
Not provisioned
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Any couple (DRW#1 ; DRW#3) can be associated to any couple (DRW#2 ; DRW#4) except for the last
line (3 x STM4 configuration is fixed for the 4 drawers).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
344 / 554

Configuration


In the following table is described the 4xANY loss propagation
Table 63. Summary of the way of working. Drop insert
Alarm
Shown
To User
To STM16 signal
ILOS#i
LOS
All SSF_U
MSRDI and PkRDI
LOF
All SSF_U
MSRDI and PkRDI
All SSF_U
MSRDI and PkRDI
SD
PkRDI
AU_AIS
SSF_U
PkRDI
AU_LOP
SSF_U
PkRDI
PLM
SSF_U
PkRDI
SQM
SSF_U
PkRDI
LOM
SSF_U
PkRDI
LOA
SSF_U
PkRDI
UNEQ
SSF_U
PkRDI
PkAIS
SD
PkRDI
MSAIS
SSF_U
PkAIS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PkRDI
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
345 / 554
Refer to Figure 266.

The SFP modules are the optical physical accesses for:
client side of the MCC3
aggregate side of the 4xANY_P
WDM and client sides of the WLA2 and WLA3 boards.

The following (B&W, CWDM, DWDM) SFP modules are supported (also refer to Figure 60. on page 138
and Table 8. )
B&W STM1 : S1.1/L1.1/L1.2; STM1 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L1.2) 1550nm
B&W STM4 : S4.1 / L4.1 / L4.2; STM4 Short / Long reach at 1310 nm and (L4.2) 1550nm
B&W STM16 : I16.1/S16.1/L16.1/L16.2; STM16 Interoffice/Short/Long reach at 1310nm

and (L16.2) 1550nm
B&W STM16 multirate: S16.1 multirate/multiformat (up to 2.666Gbps) at 1310 nm
B&W FC / 2FC: Fiber Channel (1.065GHz) and 2 Fiber Channel (2.125GHz) at 850nm / 1310nm
CWDM : multirate (125 Mbps>2.6 Gbps) CWDM modules with APD or PIN detector
DWDM : multirate (125 Mbps>2.67 Gbps) DWDM modules with APD detector
Each module contains on transmitter side an automatic optical output power control circuit, a laser driver
and a laser diode module.
The transmitter is based on an uncooled DFB laser.
The laser safety class for the complete integrated module is CLASS 1 according to IEC 60825 2001 Edition.
It can manage command for TX disable and provides TX Fault alarm.
Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with
a single mode fiber (9/125 m) or
multi mode fiber (50/125 m or 62.5/125 m)

with standard LC optical connector.
TX Fault indicates a laser fault of some kind. The Transmitter is not disabled when TX Fault signal is active.
Tx Disable is an input that is used to shut down the transmitter optical output.
On receiver side each module contains a PIN or APD photodetector for light to electrical current conversion and a limiting amplifier.
The photo detected current is amplified by a an electrical circuit which delivers two complementary data
signals.
The module provides LOS alarm (Loss of input Power Signal alarm). This output signal indicates the received optical power is below the worstcase receiver sensitivity (as defined by the standard in use).
Depending on the SFP type, the optical access is compatible with
a single mode fiber (9/125 m) or
multi mode fiber (50/125 m or 62.5/125 m)

with standard LC optical connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Transceiver has an EEPROM inside to provide Remote Inventory, containing information about transceiver capabilities, standard interfaces, manufacturer... The serial interface uses the 2wire serial CMOS
EEPROM protocol defined for the ATMEL AT24C01A/02/04 family of components.
The digital diagnostic monitoring (DDM) is an SFP function supporting analog parameters measurements
as temperature, laser bias, laser power. It is an optional feature: the availability information is present in
the SFP remote inventory.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
346 / 554

4.1.12 Small Formfactor Pluggable (SFP) optical modules

To board
(MCC3 or 4xANY_P
or WLA2 or WLA3)
processing
B&W or WDM interface

to/from
MCC3 client or
CWDM or DWDM
mux/demuxOADM
TRANSMITTER
PIN
DATA+
LC
Laser
diode
Optical output
LASER
DRIVER
Electrical DATA
DATA
TX Fault
APC
EEPROM
TX Disable
Remote Inventory / DDM
P
RECEIVER
DATA+
Electrical DATA
DATA
LC
Main
Amplifier
PRE
PIN*
Optical input
LOS
SFP Optical Module

* PIN or APD, according to the SFP type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 266. SFP modules general block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
347 / 554
4.1.13 XFP optical modules
The SFP optical modules are the optical physical access for the client side of the OCC10_E unit.
The following B&W XFP modules are supported (also refer to Table 8. on page 86 and Figure 61. on page
139):
10GBaseS for SDH STM64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN signals, in 1st window
I64.1/10G BaseL for SDH STM64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN, OTN signals, in 2nd window
S64.2b/10GBaseE for SDH STM64, 10GbE WAN, 10GbE LAN, OTN signals, in 3rd window
The module is a 10Gbps serialtoserial transceiver, made up of one optical transmitter and one optical
receiver.
The transmitter
gets the electrical data input through the 30position pluggable edge connector
performs 3R regeneration via a CDR
converts the regenerated signal in the optical data output using a Laser.
The receiver
detects the optical data input via a Photo Detector
performs 3R regeneration via a CDR
sends the regenerated signal through the 30position pluggable edge connector.
Input and output signals have NRZ format. A block diagram is depicted in Figure 267.
The module is equipped with an I2C bus interface to access the following features implemented in the module:
Monitor signals
Alarms signals
Control signals
Remote inventory (EEPROM)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarms and commands:
LOS XFP: Loss Of Signal
FAIL XFP: XFP fault
RESET XFP: module reset
LASER OFF: the laser sourse is tourned off
PRES XFP: module physically present.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
348 / 554


B&W interface
to/from client
GND
+1.8V
+3.3V
+5.0V
To/from
10GbE board
DATA+
Electrical DATA Equalizer

DATA
Clock & Data

Recovery
Line
Driver
Laser
Driver
LC
Laser
10 Gbps
Optical output
DATA+
Electrical DATA
DATA
Line
Driver
Clock & Data

Recovery
LC
Photo
Detector
Equalizer
10 Gbps
Optical input
DATA
EEPROM
RESET XFP
PRESS XFP
FAIL XFP
EEPROM
LASER OFF
I2C
LOS XFP
CLOCK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 267. XFP modules general block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
349 / 554
4.1.14 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)

The board contains 2 x VOAs (Variable Optical Attenuators). It can be located between the demux and
the mux of an OADM / OMDX. A VOA can be placed between the two stages of an amplifier, too.
In1
In2
VOAs
Photodiodes
Alarm &
Control
Unit
Out1
Card presence
Out2
Front panel PC
Electrical interface
To: OADM/OMDX mux

a MCC
2st stage OAC
From: OADM/OMDX demux

1st stage OAC
Purpose of MVAC is to manually adjust the channel emphasis in order to optimize the transmission.
Coupled with the OSMC board it allows an automatic emphasis (automatic power adjustment).
PC Electrical Link
Figure 268. MVAC unit block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In Figure 269. on page 351, some examples of system configuration is given, where MVAC is connected:
between demux and mux of a multiplexer card (OADM/OMDX)
at the input of a MCC2 (dropped channel)
between the first and the second stage of the optical amplifier(s).
MVAC Can be used for any type of equipment connections: looped/expansion/extra/external channel.
4.1.14.2 MVAC optical characteristics
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
350 / 554
Bundle passthrough

In1
Out1
1
MVAC
2
Out2
In1
In2
Out1
1
MVAC
2
Out2
In2
Single Channel
In1
MUX
Out1
1
MVAC
2
In2
In2
In1
Out2
MUX
Post Emphasis
Out2
MVAC
Out1
VOA in MVAC
VOA in MCC2
MCC2
MCC2
In1
EXTERNAL
SIGNAL
MVAC
2
Out2
1st stage
VOA in OAC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2nd stage
In2
2nd stage
In1
Optical Amplifier
1
M
U
X
Out1
Out2
Out1
1
MVAC
2
Optical Amplifier
2
VOA in OAC
In2
1st stage
Figure 269. Example of MVAC location in the system
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
351 / 554
4.2.1 DWDM mux/demux : OMDX units

The following Mux/Demux (OMDX) boards are used
the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter and the SPV couplers : OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
the Mux/Demux with the LB/SB combiner/splitter : OMDX8100_M_L1_X
the upgrade Mux/Demux: OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 and OMDX8100_M_S2

4.2.1.1 OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
SPV Tx in
OPL
OOPV
Extra Tx in
Monitor Tx out
Optical
Receiver
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
WDM ch 33
Tx in ch 35
ch 36
ch 37
ch 38
MUX
WDM
9:1
Line Tx out
LB/SB
combiner
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
Line Rx in
DEMUX
LB/SB
ch 33 WDM
ch 35 Rx out
WDM
1:9
ch 36
ch 37
ch 38
splitter
Extra Rx out
Monitor
Rx out
SPV Rx out
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical
Receiver
IPL
IOPV
Monitoring Access: Optical power level at monitoring access is around 20 dB less the mean optical power of the line.
N.B.
Figure 270. OMDX8100_M_L1_XS: block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
352 / 554

4.2 Multiplexers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.2.1.1.1 Description
a ) MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the
Long Band) and the signal coming from the extrainput (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second
part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multiplexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
b ) DEMUX side
At the receive side, a coupler is used to monitor the input signal (power presence and monitoring connector). Then, a WDM coupler is used to extract the supervisory channel. Then, the Long Band and the Short
Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long Band signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one
that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other channels of the LB.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
353 / 554
OPL
OOPV
Extra Tx in
Optical
Receiver
Monitor Tx out
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
WDM
Tx in ch 33
ch 35
ch 36
ch 37
ch 38
WDM
9:1
MUX
Line Tx out
LB/SB
combiner
SB Tx in
SB Rx out
ch 30
ch 31
ch 32
SPV filter
Line Rx in
DEMUX
LB/SB
ch 33 WDM
ch 35 Rx out
WDM
1:9
ch 36
ch 37
ch 38
splitter
Extra Rx out
Monitor Rx out
Optical
Receiver
IPL
IOPV
Figure 271. OMDX8100_M_L1_X: block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a ) MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals (corresponding to the first part of the
Long Band) and the signal coming from the extrainput (multiplexed signal corresponding to the second
part of the Long Band) and multiplexes them into one optical signal. The following LB/SB combiner multiplexes the Long Band and the Short Band.
b ) DEMUX side
At the receive side, the Long Band and the Short Band are separated via the LB/SB splitter. The long band
signal is demultiplexed into 8 channels plus one that corresponds to the multiplexed 8 other LB channels.
The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2 on page 444.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
354 / 554

4.2.1.3 OMDX8100_M_L1_X
4.2.1.4 OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2

WDM Tx in
L2
ch 20
S2
42
S1
52
ch 21
43
53
ch 22
44
45
54
55
ch 23
ch 25
OR
47
OR
57
ch 26
48
58
ch 27
49
59
ch 28
50
60
MUX
Line Tx out
Extra Tx in
WDM Rx out
Line Rx in
DEMUX
L2
ch 20
S2
42
S1
52
ch 21
43
53
ch 22
44
45
54
55
ch 23
ch 25
OR
47
OR
57
ch 26
48
58
ch 27
49
59
ch 28
50
60
Extra Rx out
Figure 272. OMDX8100_M_L2 , OMDX8100_M_S1 , OMDX8100_M_S2 : block diagram

MUX side
The wavelength multiplexer component collects the 8 optical signals and the signal coming form the extra
input and multiplexes them into one optical signal, ready to be launched on the WDM line.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DEMUX side
The wavelength demultiplexer component receives the WDM line signal and demultiplexes it into 8 channel plus one possible extra aggregate signal.
OADM application
Connecting the Extra Rx out access to the Extra Rx in access allows to passthrough the channels that
are not dropped and added. The board works in OADM configuration.
These boards are supplied in power by the PSC.
The optical characteristics are described in para. 5.3.2.2 on page 446.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
355 / 554

This board performs both the multiplexing and demultiplexing of 8 CWDM channels/wavelengths, 20 nm
spaced, to/from a fibre.
It also provides the insertion and extraction of the 1310nm supervisory signal (SPV) or another 1310nm
signal (i.e. SDH).
The 8Channel Multiplexer/DemultipleXer unit with SPV contains
one 8:1 CWDM multiplexer
one 1:8 CWDM demultiplexer
two 1310nm filters, used to insert/extract the 1310nm Supervision wavelength.

MUX side. In transmit direction, the CMDX2 is used to multiplex the 8 wavelengths coming from transponders, into a single optical signal, to be sent to the line through the 1310nm filter, used to add the 1310nm
SPV wavelength to the aggregate/multiplexed optical signal.
DEMUX side. In receive direction, the CMDX2 firstly drops the 1310nm SPV wavelength from the optical
signal coming from the line and then demultiplexes the aggregate/multiplexed signal (8 wavelengths) into
8 WDM output signals, each one further routed to the appropriate transponder. A 95:5 coupler allows to
monitor the input signal providing power measurements and LOS detection.
WDM Tx in
CH1 IN
CH2 IN
CH3 IN
CH4 IN
CH5 IN
CH6 IN
CH7 IN
CH8 IN
1471nm
1491nm
1511nm
1531nm
1551nm
MUX
MUX OUT
1571nm
1310nm
SPV filter
Line Tx out
1591nm
1611nm
SPV Tx IN
WDM RX out
CH1 OUT
CH2 OUT
CH3 OUT
CH4 OUT
CH5 OUT
CH6 OUT
CH7 OUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CH8 OUT
1471nm
1491nm
1511nm
1531nm
1551nm
1571nm
MUX
DEMUX IN
1310nm
SPV filter
95:5
TAP
Line Rx in
1591nm
1611nm
LOS
detector
SPV Rx OUT
Figure 273. CMDX2 block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
356 / 554

4.2.2 CWDM mux/demux: CMDX2
4.2.3 DWDM OADM units
The components, MUX and DEMUX used in the OADM boards are the same than those used in the OMDX
boards. Thus, 4 OADM boards are defined:
OADM8100_M_S2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 42 to 50
OADM8100_M_S1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 52 to 60
OADM8100_M_L1_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 30 to 38
OADM8100_M_L2_S, the dropped and added channels are the channels 20 to 28

1510 nm
filter
Monitor Rx out
Optical
Receiver
IPL
IOPV
SPV Rx out
ch #1
DEMUX
Line Rx in
1510 nm
filter
ch #2
ch #3
ch #4
WDM
1>8
ch #5
ch #6
dropped channels
WDM Rx out

4.2.3.1 8 channels OADM unit
ch #7
ch #8
Extra Rx out
Extra Tx in
ch #1
added channels
WDM Tx in
ch #2
ch #3
WDM
8 > 1
ch #4
ch #5
ch #6
ch #7
ch #8
OLOS
OOPV
SPV Tx in
Line Tx out
MUX
Optical
Receiver
Monitor Tx out
Optical
Receiver
OPL
OOPV
Figure 274. OADM8: blockdiagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OADM8 unit is used on the west or east side.
The 8 channels are dropped when all the other channels (passthrough) are sent on the extraoutput port.
On the transmit side, the 8 concerned channels are added to the passthrough channels via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using a WDM coupler.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
357 / 554
Optical
Receiver
1510 nm
filter
IPL
IOPV
Monitor Rx out
SPV Rx out
Line Rx in
ch #1
ch #2
WDM
1>4
ch #3
ch #4
dropped channels
WDM Rx out
DEMUX
Extra Rx out
added channels
WDM Tx in
Extra Tx in
ch #1
WDM
4>1
ch #2
ch #3
ch #4
Line Tx out
MUX
OLOS
OOPV
Optical
Receiver
SPV Tx in
OPL
OOPV
Monitor Tx out
Optical
Receiver
Figure 275. OADM4: blockdiagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The 4 channels are
dropped and sent on a front panel connector. The aggregate of all the other channels (passthrough) is
also sent to a front panel connector to be connected to the multiplex.
On the transmit side, the 4 concerned channels are added to the passthrough channels via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit). The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS,
OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too.
The different possible sets of channels are the following: 20 to 23 25 to 28 30 to 33 35 to 38 42
to 45 47 to 50 52 to 55 and 57 to 60.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
358 / 554

The function of the OADM4_x units is to extract and insert 4 channels between the 32 available.

The function of the OADM2100_M_XX_S is to extract and insert 2 channels between the 32 available.
IPL
OOPV
SPV IN
Optical
Receiver
OLOS
OOPV
extra
input
Monitor
Optical
Receiver
MUX
ch #1
Output
ch #2
extra
output
ch #2
SPV filter
Input
ch #1
DEMUX
Monitor
Optical
Receiver
SPV OUT
IPL
IOPV
Figure 276. Block diagram of the OADM2100_M_xx_S unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The two channels are
dropped while all the other channels are sent to a frontpanel connector (extraoutput).
On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (passthrough or just multipled
in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using
a coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given to the operator for monitoring purpose too.
Available couple of channels per each OADM2 board: 30-31; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
359 / 554
4.2.3.4 1 channel OADM unit
SPV IN
OPL
OOPV
OLOS
OOPV
Monitor
Optical
Optical
Receiver
Receiver
MUX
MUX
extra
input
Output
Add Ch
extra
output
SPV filter
Monitor
Input
DEMUX
Drop Ch
SPV OUT
Optical
Receiver
IPL
IOPV
Figure 277. OADM1100: block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The SPV channel is extracted and the signal is sent on a front panel connector. The channel is dropped
while all the other channels are sent to a frontpanel connector.
On the transmit side, the concerned channel is added to the other channels (passthrough or just multipled
in an other board) via the multiplexer and thus, the SPV (coming from the SPVM unit) is inserted using
coupler. The output signal is monitored (detection of ILOS, OOPV) and an external optical access is given
to the operator for monitoring purpose too.
The available channels are 25, 30, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38 in Long Band and 47, 48, 57 in Short Band.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
360 / 554

The function of the OADM1100_M_XX_S units is to extract and insert 1 channel between the 32 available.

4.2.4 SPV_F_1310_1550
The function of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit is used to multiplex / demultiplex one 1310 nm channel (for
instance coming from a 4xANY, one 1550 nm multiplexed signal and the SPV channel.
SPV IN
OPL OLOS
OOPVOOPV
Monitor
Optical
Optical
Receiver
Receiver
COUPLER
1310
Output
1550
1310
SPV filter
Input
SPLITTER
1550
Monitor
Optical
Receiver
IPL
IOPV
SPV OUT
Figure 278. Block diagram of the SPV_F_1310_1550 unit

4.2.4.1 Description
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
At demux side, the SPV channel is extracted by a filter while at the mux side, a 95/5 coupler is used.
This board should moreover be able to accomodate whatever channel in the CBand (and not only a channel at 1550 nm).
A 95/5 coupler is used to monitor the signal (power presence and monitoring connector) in both directions.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
361 / 554
This board is able to insert/extract the OSC channel to/from one 1310 nm channel or one 1550 nm channel.
Common
In
SPV Filter
SPLITTER
Extra
Out
10dB
Optical
Receiver
Optical Input
Power Detection
SPV
Out
IPL
LOS
SPV Coupler
Extra
In
Common
Out
COUPLER
SPV
In
10dB
Optical
Receiver
Optical Output
Power Detection
LOS
OPL
For Input power and Output power alarm detection, the optical receiver is calibrated at 1550 nm.
N.B.
Figure 279. Block diagram of the SPV_F_C unit

4.2.5.1 Description
The board allows to perform both mux and demux function of two signals which are either Cband WDM
signal or Second windows signal (B&W or 1310 nm) by extra ports and Supervisory channel (1510 nm)
by SPV ports. The single channel can be extracted or inserted to the multiplexed signal.
2 different channel filterings are available:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1310 / 1510 nm
1510 / 1550 nm
This compact board can be plugged in slots 28-35 or 38-45 on a 1696MSPAN shelf and in a slots 910
or 11 in the 1696MS_C shelf and subshelf.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
362 / 554

4.2.5 SPV_F_C
This board has to take place in both the 1696MSPAN and 1696MS_C shelves. The basic configuration
may be with one wavelength among predefined WDM range or B&W user signal, however it could be set
with a multiplexed signal.
SPV_M
SPV_F unit
Transmission Line
Transponder unit
Transponder unit

4.2.5.2 Board location in the system
SPV_M
SPV_F unit
West Side
East Side
Figure 280. Position of SPV_F_C unit in a transmission line

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
363 / 554
4.3.1 Description
The Optical Amplifiers are designed to amplify the C bands wavelengths in WDM transmission system.
This functionality is necessary to extend the transmission capacity of the optical fibers network.
They can perform optical amplification through the optical line as a booster, in line, OADM repeater and
preamplifier.
The Optical Amplifiers provide up to +17 dBm output power (for 32 wavelengths) in C Band without external pump module.
A tunable attenuator (VOA) allows a good gain flatness.
This unit contains two independent stages : a preamplifier and a booster.
The board receives electrical data from the Equipment Controller and from the Craft Terminal. It receives
optical data from SPV and from the OADM/OMDX or another optical amplifier.
The aim of this boards is to allow an output Power Per Channel (P/ch) of
2 dBm for 32 channels max loading

and to allow a correct behaviour whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of the loss
at the input of the preamplifier.
There are four types of optical amplifiers
OAC1 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.1.1, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier)
OAC1_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.0, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
OAC2 (OFA 22/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for short spans transmission (metro amplifier)
OAC2_L (OFA 28/9), introduced in R.2.2, used for long spans transmission (regional amplifier).
OAC2 and OAC2_L, the new boards introduced in R.2.2, compared to OAC1 and OAC1_L are designed to
decrease power consumption.

In the 1696MS_C shelf, only OAC2 and OAC2_L can be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 64. sums up the main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
364 / 554

4.3 Optical Amplifier (OAC)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Table 64. Main differences between OAC1, OAC1_L, OAC2 and OAC2_L optical amplifiers
Feature
Values
Optical amplifier
Introduced in release
Gain block
Example of Span
performance (32
channels x
10Gbps or 2.5
Gbps)
Preamplifier
Booster
VOA tuning fail
alarm
ED
OAC1
OAC1_L
OAC2
OAC2_L
R.1.1
R.2.0
R.2.2
R.2.2
22/9
28/9
1 span x 21 dB
1 span x 27 dB
1 span x 28 dB
1 span x 29 dB
(with double
(with double
stage amplifier
stage amplifier
at IN and OUT
at IN and OUT
of the node
of the node
up to 7 spans
up to 4 spans x
x19 dB
22dB
Cooler
@ 1480 nm
22/9
1 span x 21 dB
1 span x 28 dB
(with double
stage amplifier
at IN and OUT
of the node
up to 7 spans
x19 dB
Cooler
@ 980 nm
28/9
1 span x 27 dB
1 span x 29 dB
(with double
stage amplifier
at IN and OUT
of the node
up to 4 spans x
22dB
Managed from R.2.2
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
365 / 554
Block diagram description (see Figure 281. on page 367)
two optical gain block modules, 22/9 for OAC1/OAC2 and 28/9 for OAC1_L/OAC2_L (1st
and 2nd stage; they can be a preamplifier and a booster
an optical attenuator (VOA) allowing to fix the attenuation before the first stage of the amplifier
and to compensate the variation of the span attenuation. The VOA input and output are accessible to the operator via front panel connectors.
four 99/1 couplers for the 1st and 2nd stage signal monitoring (input and output)
a DEMUX 1550/1510 (SPV filter) for the extraction of the supervisory channel (SPV OUT). It
separates data and supervisory channel
a 95/5 coupler for the insertion of the supervisory channel (SPV IN). It couples data and supervisory channel
monitoring photodiodes (optical recevers).
The electrical part consists of

two optical gain block modules for regulations, performing
output optical power regulation : a comparaison is made between the measured optical
output power OOPV and the needed optical output power OPAV which is either calculated
by the FPGA (control unit) or fixed by the user
temperature regulation: in each gain block a thermistance allows to evaluate the temperature inside the gain block. Thereafter a comparison is done between a reference voltage
and the thermistances voltage to determine the control current
alarm generation
card presence indicator
Remote Inventory
power supply interface with alarms generation. The board is supplied by 48V voltage from
batteries via backpanel, and by +3.6V voltage from the PSC card. On the board, 3 different volatges are used: +5.5V; 5.5V; +3.6V.
visual system alarming by means of 5 leds located on front panel (PW, OOS, ABN, APSD,
HW).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The card mismatch is managed via information (ECID) stored in an EEPROM.

As the maximum power is +17 dBm, the amplifiers operates in safety class 1M.
In the interconnection stage (between the 1st stage output and the 2nd stage input) can be located a DCU
and/or an OADM/OMDX and/or a MVAC board.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
366 / 554

The optical part consists of
ILOS1
IOPV1
Variable Optical
Attenuator
OLOS1
IOPV1
Optical
Receiver
Pump
laser 2
ILOS2
IOPV2
OLOS2
IOPV2
2nd stage
Optical
Receiver
99/1 coupler
99/1 coupler
95/5 coupler
VOA OUT
2nd
stage IN
Monitor
2nd stage
OUT
Figure 281. Amplifier boards blockdiagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical
Receiver
1st stage
Optical
Receiver
Monitor
SPV IN
EXTRA
PUMP IN
554
VOA IN
99/1 coupler

Pump
laser 1
Optical
EPOPV Receiver
Alarm &
Control
Unit
2
1
367 / 554
8DG 17415 AA AA
1st stage
OUT
Monitor
1550 nm
SPV filter
99/1 coupler
1st stage
IN
Monitor
SPV OUT
Restart Button
Card
presence
03
ED
1510 nm
4.3.2 Way of working
INPUT
VOA
P1
P2
1
1
DCU
OUTPUT
OADM
OUTPUT
DCU
P2
P1
VOA
INPUT
Figure 282. Optical amplifiers configuration

In order to use the amplifier with its optimum performances, the output power per channel must be constant
whatever the number of channels and whatever the variation of loss of the previous span.
In order to achieve such a requirement, two tuning mechanisms are foreseen:
Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels
Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss.

4.3.2.1 Variation of the span loss, for a given number of channels
The VOA attenuation is adjusted manually or semiautomatically according to the previous span attenuation in order to match with the EOL span losses. At the amplifier installation, the VOA is set in order to match
with the foreseen EOL span losses. Then, when the span changes, the VOA is tuned in order to always
match with that EOL span losses.
EOL span losses
P1
Current span losses

VOA
1
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
P2
Local Board
Figure 283. Span variation compensation
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
368 / 554

The way of working is described in the next figure.

For a given number of channels, when the previous span loss increases (ie. when the total input power
decreases), the total output powers of the 1st and 2nd stage have a tendency to follow the corresponding
linear curve. As a consequence, when the span loss variation becomes greater than 1 dB, the VOA attenuation must be tuned in order to keep the total losses constant.
The range of variation of the interstage attenuation is included between 1 and 15 dB.
Two VOA tuning functions are foreseen:
manual setting: the operator enters the value of the VOA (VOA_OP).
semiautomatic setting: the value of the VOA is calculated by the NE via parameters entered by the
operator. This action is not automatic: the operator must command it.
4.3.2.2 Variation of the number of channels, for a given span loss

Refer to Figure 284. on page 370.
Two pump tuning functions are foreseen:
manual setting: the output powers of the 1st and 2nd stages are fixed and set by the operator (independently from the input power)
automatic setting:
1st stage: for a given EOL previous span loss, when the number of channels changes, the 1st
stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
2st stage: for a given interstage (IT) attenuation, when the number of channels changes, the
2st stage output power is tuned without operator intervention
The output power of the 1st and 2nd stage is adjusted automatically according to the input power of the
corresponding stage:
1st stage pump: it is enslaved on the 1st stage output power, which value is given as a function of
the input power and the previous EOL span losses.
For a given EOL previous span loss and for a given IT (interstage) attenuation, when the number of
channels changes (ie. when the total input power changes), the total output power follows the corresponding linear curve. The full arrows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed
arrows correspond to a number of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than
4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
2nd stage: it is enslaved on the 2nd stage output power, which value is given as a function of the input
power of the second stage and the interstage attenuation.
For a given IT attenuation, when the number of channels changes (ie. when the total input power
changes), the total output power of the 2nd stage follows the corresponding linear curve. The full arrows correspond to a number of channels increasing. The dashed arrows correspond to a number
of channels decreasing. When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st &
2nd stage remains constant.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The nominal operating configuration of the optical amplifiers (Pout = +17dBm) is associated with a 32
channels loading. Consequently, when 32 channels are loaded, the output power per channel is about
2 dBm.
For a given EOL span losses or IT, the range of variation of the total input and output powers is 9 dB (from
32 to 4 channels).
When the number of channels is less than 4, the output power of the 1st & 2nd stage remains constant.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
369 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pout 2
ED
(dBm)
+17
+8
23
20
17 14 11 8
first stage tuning pump
12
9
SPAN = 19dB
SPAN = 16dB
SPAN = 13dB
SPAN = 25dB
SPAN = 28dB
5
2
2 4
IT = 3dB
6
3
0
3
second stage tuning pump
SPAN = 22dB
+3
IT = 6dB
IT = 9dB
+12
SPAN = 31dB
(dBm)
IT = 12dB
IT = 15dB
Pout 1
6
9
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
Pin 2 (dBm)
Figure 284. Amplifier tuning for number of channels changes (previous span loss constant)
03
370 / 554

Pin 1 (dBm)
4.3.3 Optical characteristics

See para. 5.3.7 on page 455.

4.3.4 Optical safety
IEC 608252, Ed.03: Safety of Laser ptroducts Part 2: Safety of optical fibre communication system: in restricted areas no APSD scheme is required below +21.3 dBm output power (see para. 3.6, 4.5.1, table D.1).
Amplified or not amplified equipment is always well below this limit.
Alcatel recommend the APSD disable mode (default mode).
The next table describes the way of working of the optical amplifiers. The boards may be in
APSD disable state
APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
APSD enable state (not available).

The following tables sum up the way of working for each APSD state.
a)
APSD disable state
Table 65. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable
alarms
1st stage Input
ILOS1
ILOS2
b)
consecutive action
2nd stage Input
ShutDown of the 1st stage
ShutDown of the 2nd stage
APSD disable forced ON or OFF state
Table 66. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD disable forced ON/OFF
alarms
1st stage Input
ILOS1
ILOS2
c)
consecutive action
2nd stage Input
1st stage forced ON / OFF. No action.
2nd stage forced ON / OFF. No action.
APSD enable state (not available)

In current Release OAC APSD is always disabled.
N.B.
Table 67. Summary of the way of working in case of ILOS - APSD enable
alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1st stage Input

ILOS1
ILOS2
ED
consecutive action
2nd stage Input
Shutdown of the 1st stage and 2nd stage of the same

board.
Shutdown of the 2nd stage.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
371 / 554
4.4.1 ESC board

The ESC (Equipment and Shelf Controller) board is the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment Controller (EC) functions and the Shelf Controller (SC) functions for the 1696 MSPAN and
1696MS_C equipment from the release 1.3.
The EC functions has in charge of the processing activities concerning the Virtual Equipment Control Element (VECE) function:
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

Message Communication Function (MCF)
The SC function of ESC has in charge of the processing activities concerning the Physical Equipment
Control Element (PECE) function:
Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)

Basic Process Control Function (BPCF)
It provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and management and configuration provisioning.
In an Expansion Shelf, the ESC board needs only to provide a SC functionality. It is the same board, and
its identification is made through shelf id and slot id numbers.
The ESC consists in a double processor board. It is mainly composed of :
A ESC mother board,
A daughter board achieving the EC function,
A daughter board achieving the SC function,
A non volatile mass storage device PCMCIA 2.1 compatible.

Each of these functions (EC and SC) are realized using a PQSCC daughter board. They are plugged on
the ESC mother board. The PQSCC module is developed in order to provide a common HW (and SW)
platform for different applications requiring a Shelf Controller (SC) function. The processors used are
members of Motorola MPC860 family.
Various kinds of serial communication channels and parallel I/O ports for alarm & status signals are provided by the ESC card.
Thanks to the ESC board, it is no more necessary to plug a LAN_Q card in each shelf since the ESC is
now able to manage the SPI bus. One only needs to plug a LAN_Q card in the master shelf if one needs
the LAN supervision functionality.
The flash backup capability permits the management system to copy files back and forth using an ftp
service, between the flash card on the ESC in slot 1 and the ESC in slot 24 of the master shelf.
4.4.1.1 EQUICO to ESC Upgrade procedure information
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
When the system software is upgraded from version 1.1, both EQUICO boards (SC+EC) should be replaced by one ESC board in the master shelf, and one ESC board in expansion shelves in slot 1. The upgrade procedure is perform with the Craft terminal Equipment or OS (1353SH) and for this:
Refer to 3AL 86602 ABAAPGZZA document.

The procedure of NE software management is detailled on the Operator Handbook.
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
372 / 554

4.4 Controller

4.4.2
Supervision units (SPVM2, SPVM_H)
The SPVM cards are used for the management of the 1696 supervision and service channels.
The set of service channels managed by the supervision unit is a subset of the section overhead of STM1
frame, as defined in ITU Recommendation G70X (March 1994); the unit will be able to multiplex/demultiplex the optical service channels in 2048 kb/s or 4864 kb/s proprietary supervision frames.
In case of a 4864 kb/s supervision data channels, the SPVM will multiplex/demultiplex them in two 2048
kb/s frames, only one of these contains the supervision information, the other is an extra traffic frames.
Furthermore, others four bidirectional 2048 kb/s user auxiliary data channels are provided for extra traffic
needs. A matrix is used to interconnect these channels.
The supervision units types availabale are: SPVM2 and SPVM_H.
The supervision unit (SPVM) is composed of
one optical part (SPV channel receiver and transmitter)
two main electrical blocks:
a matrix to route the 2 Mbit/s inputs
an FPGA dedicated to the supervision frames management.

From Rel. 1.3, is available the SPVM + OW (SPVM2) board, able to drop the 2 Mb/s extra channels and
the audio channel.
In Rel. 2.0, has been introduced the SPVM_H board; it provides all the features of the SPVM2 board but
manages only one Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC).
In the following is briefly described the block scheme (see Figure 285. on page 374)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The unit is composed of a main board, implementing the larger part of the functionalities, and two daughter
boards (TXSPVM) devoted to optical transmitter. The board can be split in three main parts:
2/4 Mbps MUX/DEMUX (gate array). It multiplexes/demultiplexes a 4864 kb/s stream into two 2048
kb/s channels. It extracts and inserts from/to these streams three auxiliary service channels.
Supervision Manager (FPGA); it can be divided in the cited major functions:
Matrix function between the four users channels at 2048 kb/s, the streams of the supervison
channels processed by the OSC MUXs and two internal streams reserved to the mux/demux
of the service channels contained in the supervision channels. In case of a 2048kb/s supervision frame it can bypass the OSC MUXs
Supervision frames and service channel management extract/insert the slots containing F1, E1,
E2, from the supervision frames. The F1, E1, E2 service channels and those coming from the
OSC MUXs, which is supervision information coming from both sides (EST and WEST), are re
routed to the ESC board
OSC MUX configuration: this block function gives the access to the configuration and alarm pins
of the two OSC MUXs via internal registers
SPI interface which assumes the software interface. Through this interface, the register of the
Supervision Manager is accessible in read and write sequences. It permits the application software to configure the SPVM.
TXSPVM is a daughter board containing the optical unit (transmitter), having in charge of transmitting the SPVM frame on an optical fiber support in both sides (east and west), if required. This function
is realized with two LASERS at 1510 nm wavelenght. The LASERS are supported by two identical
daugter boards (TXSPVM), managed by SPVM.
The Remote Inventory of the board is available via the SPI bus.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
373 / 554
FRONT
PANEL
4Mbps
TO UIC1
TO ESC
TDM2 (2M)
TXSPVM
OPTICAL
INTERFACE
2Mbps
OSC
2/4Mb
/E
MUX/
OSC+UDC DEMUX 2Mbps
UDC
AGGREGATE
OSC
SIGNAL (32 CH)
ADD/DROP
1550 NM
BACK PANEL
TO UIC2
UDC (2 x 2 Mbps)
FRONT PANEL
TELEPHONE
HANDSET (J1)
AGGREGATE
(32 CH + OSC)
FROM/TO LINE
TXSPVM
OPTICAL
INTERFACE
2Mbps
OSC
SUPERVISION MANAGER
4Mbps
2/4Mb
MUX/
2Mbps DEMUX OSC+UDC
UDC
E/
FRONT
PANEL
SPI INTERFACE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 285. SPVM2 block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
374 / 554

OAC
1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1D3; D4D12) + UDC
OAC
EOW (E2 at 64K)

Voice Channel
1510 nm 4Mb: OSC (D1D3; D4D12) + UDC
1550 NM
AGGREGATE
OSC
(32 CH + OSC)
ADD/DROP
FROM/TO LINE
TDM1 (2M)
AGGREGATE
SIGNAL (32 CH)
4.4.2.1 Description of the supported functionalities

The following functionalities are supported:

1)
2)
3)
4)
Management of one or two bidirectional supervision streams at 2 048 Kbit/s, one for Line terminal applications and one for each side of the link in backtoback or OADM applications.
Management of Data Communication Channels DCCm and DCCr; four data streams are made
available to the Equipment Controller (EC) via a backpanel bus, and are used for network management.
Management of K1/K2 data stream at 128 Kbit/s; this data stream (terminated in the unit) is
made available to the equipment controller.
Management of E2 audio channel: The default configuration enables to drop the audio channel.
It is possible to call a specific NE or to make a conference call. The phone number of the NE
is set with the two front panel coding wheels. dial #00 for a conference call and #XX (with XX
strictly greater than 10 for a specific call).
The Line Terminal or backtoback terminals and OADM configurations are done by software.
4.4.2.1.1 Functional Description of the configurations
As described on two following figures the data of OSC channel at 1510 nm are sent to the matrix into a
2 Mbit/s signal to the supervision frame management functional block. This block generates one/or two
TDM signals according to the NE configuration.
(daughter board)
Tx1 optical
transmitter
MCC
OSC
1510 nm
WDM Rx
Matrix
OMDX,
OADM
or OAC
board
Rx1 optical
receiver
Supervision frame
management
TDM1
SPVM
ESC board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 286. SPVM board in a Line Terminal configuration
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
375 / 554
West
East
(daughter board)
(daughter board)
OMDX,
OADM
or OAC
board
Tx1 optical
transmitter
MCC
MCC
OSC 2
1510 nm
OSC 1
1510 nm
WDM Rx
Matrix
Rx2 optical
receiver
Rx1 optical
receiver
OMDX,
OADM
or OAC
board
Supervision frame
management
SPVM
TDM2
TDM1
ESC board
Figure 287. SPVM board in an OADM or BackToBack configuration
When the network comprises NEs connected in a ring, at least one NE must be configured with
the SPVM board in Local Clock configuration (to avoid clock loop). SPVM board for the others
NE can be configured in Remote Clock configuration.
N.B.
User channels
The 2Mbps and 64Kbps channels exchanged with UIC, are dropinsert connected by default.
4.4.2.3 Management of two SPVM boards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
From the Release 1.3 and in a configuration where a CPE is linked to a 1696MS in a ring, the 1696MS
is able to manage the first SPVM board (East and West of the Ring), plus one SPVM managing the OSC
to/from CPE(s).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
376 / 554

Tx2 optical
transmitter
The Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC) is used along with the MVAC board as a key element of
the automatic equalization process into the 1696MS system, providing the ITUT entire Cband monitoring function in terms of channel power and wavelength (no OSNR).
up to 8
monitored
points)
MP1
1x8
fiber
optic
switch
Optical
Channel
Monitoring
Alarm&
Control
Unit
PC Electrical Link
OSMC
card presence
MP8
Front panel PC
electrical interfaces

4.4.3 Optical Spectrum Monitoring Card (OSMC)
Figure 288. OMSC block diagram

The purpose of this board is to measure the power per channel at several points of a node.
This board receives its optical input signals from any point of the tranmission path and it measures the
power of each channel.
Up to 8 locations (4 per direction) are possible on monitoring or direct ports (see Figure 289. on page 377)
before and after first and second stage of an amplifier
before a demultiplexer
after a multiplexer.
Rx
Tx
2
Rx
Tx
OSMC
Tx
Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1
Tx
Rx
Figure 289. OSMC connection (measured points)
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
377 / 554
Functional Description
The 8 x input ports are connected to a 1 x 8 electro mechanical latching fiber optic switch: when the system
wants to select a specific port, it sends an order thru the SPI bus that in turns make the Control Unit to
properly bias the switch command pins by making it switching to the selected position. As soon as the new
position is raised the switch will rest in that position until a new stimuli occurs.
The output WDM signal is then forwarded to the OCM module through a 90/10 TAP coupler, the 10%
branch being devoted to a broadband photodetection, performed by a PIN photodiode followed by a logaritmic amplification in order to provide system calibration.
The OCM goal is to perform a spectral analisys of the Cband, from 192 THz (ch#20) to 196 THz (ch#60),
every 100 GHz, as regards channel power and wavelength.
The Alarms and Control unit provides a digital interface between peripheral components (OCM, Optical
switch..) the NE needs to get access to and the SPIDER local interface it is connected to. Main functions are
channel power calibration and board calibration
OCM interfacing, data postprocessing and alarms generation
optical switch control and monitoring
photo detection and board temperature digital processing
OOS led control

The SPI interface terminates the SPI bus used for control and monitoring between OSMC (slave) and ESC.
The two EEPROMs provides Remote Inventory data and board specific parameters (ECID).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The power supply module performs incoming 48V rails filtering, overvoltage and current protections,
board feeding generating the needed voltages (+3.3V, +5V..), alarms monitoring.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
378 / 554

The front panel PC electrical interface is used to send the data directly to a PC.
For the absolute channels power measurement, an offset (called calibration factor) must be available in
order to consider the loss of the monitoring splitter. Each power is given before the monitoring splitter.

4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (ILINK_M)

This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C shelf and allows to manage up to three shelves (one master
shelf and two slave shelves) by using only one ESC board (costsaving solution).
The ILINK_M board is located in the master compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with the I
LINK_S board (slave board) located in each slave shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack up
to three subracks. Hence
the ESC board has to be plugged in slot 1 of the master shelf
the ILINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf
the ILINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf.

The ILINK_M is mainly dedicated to connect the SPI bus (and the card presence signals) from the ESC
to the slave shelves, where no ESC unit is provided.
The connection between ILINK_M and each ILINK_S is done by using dedicated cables.
After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible.
When the connection between ILINK_M and other ILINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised
on every board of the expansion shelves.
BACK
PANEL
M1
48Vdc
VBatt
Power
supply
FRONT
PANEL
ILink_M
+5V
+3.3V
+2.5V
HWF
+3.6V
card pres
sLAVE SHELF 1
CONNECTOR
RS485
Transceiver
M2
Power
Supplies
M7
SPI
Interface
(Spider)
SLOT ID
SPI
Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 1
BOARD
DATA
(ECID)
REMOTE
INVENTORY
EEPROM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Card
Presence
EEPROM
M8
M9
Card Presence Bus
FPGA
RS485
Transceivers
sLAVE SHELF 2
CONNECTOR
SPI
Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 2
M5
Card Presence
Card Presence
sLAVE SHELF 3
CONNECTOR
(NOT USED)
SPI
Card Presence
Card Presence
Bus SLAVE 3
Figure 290. ILink_M block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
379 / 554
This board is dedicated to the 1696MS_C slave shelf giving the possibility to add up to two 1696MS_C
slave shelves to the master shelf.
Using the ILink_S unit allows to save the cost of the reuse of an ESC unit giving the possibility to link the
SPI bus and the Card Presence signal of each slave shelf to the master shelf, thus connecting these signals to the ESC boards, only provided in Master shelf.
The ILINK_S board has to be plugged in each slave compact shelf; it has to be used in conjunction with
the ILINK_M board (master board) located in master shelf, to which it has to be linked to be able to stack
up to three subracks (1 master shelf and two slave shelves). Hence
the ILINK_S board has to be plugged in slot 1 of each slave shelf.
the ILINK_M board has to be plugged in slot 6 of the master shelf

The connection between ILINK_M and each ILINK_S is done by using dedicated cables.
After having provisioned it, swapping cables is not possible.
When the connection between ILINK_M and other ILINK_S is removed, a Card Absent alarm is raised
on every board of the expansion shelves.
The ILink_S unit includes
SPIDER, Remote Inventory and Data EEPROM (ECID)
1 connector for the master shelf.

BACK
PANEL
M1
48Vdc
VBatt
Power
supply
FRONT
PANEL
ILink_S
+5V
+3.3V
+2.5V
HWF
+3.6V
card pres
RS485
Transceiver
M2
Power
Supplies
SLOT ID
SPI
Interface
(Spider)
REMOTE
INVENTORY
EEPROM
BOARD
DATA
(ECID)
sLAVE SHELF
CONNECTOR
SPI
EEPROM
M10
Card Presence
Card Presence Bus
M5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Card
Presence
Card Presence Bus
FPGA
RS485
Transceivers
Figure 291. ILink_S block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
380 / 554

4.4.5 1696MS_C Slave Intershelf Link (ILINK_S)
Two main functions are supported by the various small units: provide the power supply to the other units
and provide the electrical interfaces to the operators.
L
P A
S
N
C C
optical protection units
H R
K A
I
optical protection units
Power supply B
User Interface
User Interface
QB
ESC
OMDX + EXP + SPV
OMDX
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
Matrix Slot
Matrix Slot
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
MCC
LAN
access
The various functions are divided into small boards plugged in the bottom of the shelf (cf. Figure 292. ).
Each of these boards supports a SPI Bus interface and some card presence wires.
Power supply A

4.5 General user interfaces
U U P
I I S
C C C
Rack alarms
House Keeping
FANC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 292. Electrical access, slot description
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
381 / 554
4.5.1 LAN board

IELAN INPUT
TP RJ45
ETHERNET
IELAN OUT

INTERFACE
ADAPTER
COAX
TRANSC
hex rotary switches

EQTYPE
SHELFID
N.B.
If a wire is plugged on J45, BNC is unavailable.
Figure 293. Block diagram of control LAN board

4.5.1.1 Lan board purposes
The purposes of the LAN board are the following:
to provide the physical layer for the QB interface between the Equipment shelf (ESC board) and an
external supervisor (e.g. 1353SH),.
to provide the 4 bits Equipment type Codification, necessary to give to the application stored in the
Equuipment Controller.
to provide the 8 bits Shelf IDentification number (i.e.: MAC address), necessary to build up the IP
address of the shelf where the LAN board is installed.
4.5.1.2 Lan board description

The LAN board has to be plugged in the slot 26 for the Maser shelf (LAN_Q) or slot #8 of 1696MS_C shelf.
It is linked to the ESC board by backpanel link.
A second LAN (LAN_I) in the slot 27 is used to link to the Slave shelf with a LAN board on the slot 27.
The link to an external supervision equipment is ensured by 2 BNC connectors or by one RJ 45 connector.
The Equipment Type Codification is ensured by the hexadecimal rotary switch CW3.
The Shelf IDentification is ensured by the two hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2.
The LAN_I functionality is not foreseen in a 1696MS_C shelf.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
382 / 554
4.5.1.3 Lan board Hardware setting

Equipment Type Codification

The hexadecimal rotary switch CW3 is in charge of setting up the equipment type. The CW3 factory
setting is the value 5, for the 1696MSPAN. It must not be changed.
Shelf Identification number
The hexadecimal rotary switches CW1 and CW2 are in charge of setting up the shelf Identification
number. The CW1 factory setting is the value B and the CW2 factory setting is the value F. These
default values are the identification number of the master shelf.
For the different shelves, the switches setting values are:
Shelf
Slot
Function
Switch settings
CW1
CW2
CW3
Master
26
ELAN
Master
27
ILAN
Expansion 1
26
ELAN
Expansion 1
27
ILAN
Expansion 2
26
ELAN
Expansion 2
27
ILAN
Expansion 3
26
ELAN
Expansion 3
27
ILAN
CW 1
CW 2
CW 3
Front Panel
Back Panel
Rotary Wheels
6 pins host for jumper
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 294. LAN board settings

It is not necessary to configure expansion shelves in this order, but it is necessary to give the corresponding
expansion number to the craft Terminal.
For example if only one drop shelf is present, its LAN baord can be configured (3, F, 5) but then to be defined as Expansion 2.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
383 / 554
For operation with the ESC, 1696 MS R1.3 and later, the jumper setting equipment for all LAN cards is
the same regardless of which slot they are installed in. Only the following jumper settings are permitted:
No jumper
Jumper between pins AD
During NE upgrade from R1.1, the jumper settings of all installed LAN cards should be checked
and modified as necessary to comply with the above.
N.B.
For a Compact NE (1696MS_C), the switches setting values are mandatory (B, F, 5).
4.5.2 HouseKeeping board (HK)

8 housekeeping accesses are provided in both direction (8 inputs and 8 outputs).
The HK board is plugged in the slot 36 of the master shelf.
Connector: subD 25 pins (see section 2.4.2.1, page 128).
4.5.3 Rack Alarm Interface (RAI)

The RAI board monitors the rack alarms. Each shelf (master and expansion shelf) is equipped with this
card in the slot 37in 1696MSPAN and in slot 9 or 10 in master shelf of 1696MS_C.
1696 MSPAN alarms are analysed either by the Equipment Shelf Controller or directly by the Rack Alarm
Interface board. In function of the importance of these alarms, the ESC generates signals to turn on LEDs
on PDU or TRU card and so to alert the user.
2 ways of working are available:
for the Interfacing with the PDU

The RAI cards in the same rack are linked to each other as shown on Figure 295. And the RAI
card in the master shelf is linked with the PDU.
for the Interfacing with the TRU

The same way of working can be proposed, but also a direct link between each shelf and the
TRU (cf. Figure 295. ).
The RAI card inputs are alarms coming from the FAN card, from the PSC, from the shelf just below (if any)
and from the Equipment Controller (for the RAI card in the master shelf). Taking the various inputs into
account the rack lamps are lit on or off.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
384 / 554

Jumper configuration
Rack Alarms

It is used to connect the rack lamps. These lamps differ from the ETSI rack to the ANSI one.
Table 68. PDU Front Panel LED Markings
Marking
LED Color
DESCRIPTION
CRI
red
Critical: critical alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
MAJ
red
Major: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
MIN
yellow
Major: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
RACK
red
Rack Alarm: alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack or in
the PDU
Table 69. TRU Front Panel LED Markings

Marking
LED Color
DESCRIPTION
URG
red
Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
NURG
yellow
Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
ATTD
red
Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm
SIG PRSC
green
signal presence (power on)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Connectors: (see section 2.4.2.2, page 128).
SUBD 9 pins female
RJ11 6pins female.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
385 / 554
OPTINEX RACK

NEBS 2000 RACK

Top rack unit
Air deflector
Air deflector
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Slot 37
Figure 295. Electrical links between RAI cards (slot 37) and TRU & PDU
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
386 / 554
4.5.4 User Interfaces Card (UIC)
Some user information are carried by the SPV channel: they are extracted from the SPV frame by the
SPVM board and access via dedicated electrical connectors on the User Interfaces cards.
Those small boards have to be plugged under the corresponding SPVM board and in the slot beside.
AUXB2
AUXB1
AUXA2
SPVM
AUXA1

4.5.4.1 Description
SPI
SPI
NRZ
G703
UIC
NRZ
G703
AUX1, AUX2
2Mbps USER ACCESS
NRZ
G703
NRZ
G703
AUX1, AUX2
UIC
2Mbps USER ACCESS
Figure 296. 2 Mbit/s backpanel links between UIC Cards and the SPVM unit
The E2 analogic voice channel is available through a jack in the front panel of the SPVM board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Auxiliary Channels Interfaces:
up to two 2 Mb/s bidirectional links (user 2 Mb/s) G 703
one analogic link.

N.B.
In default configuration the E2 channel is configured in drop/insert configuration.

In a CPE configuation, auxiliary channels are in a hardware configuration (fixed).
N.B.
The UIC possibility is provided for 1696MS and not for 1696MS_C Equipment.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
387 / 554
4.6.1
Single and Multi Mode Optical Protection Cards
4.6.1.1 Description
See Figure 297. on page 389. The purpose of this protection unit is to perform passive OCh protection
(linear configuration), OSNC Protection (ring configuration).
There are five types of Optical Protection Card (OPC), listed in the following:
Single Mode OPC with jumpers (SM OPC)
Multi Mode OPC with jumpers (MM OPC)
Single Mode OPC with connectors (SM OPC FCP)
Multi Mode OPC with connectors (MM OPC FCP)
Multi Mode OPC with connectors 850 nm (MM OPC 850)

Only OPC cards with connectors can be used with all interface cards (MCC, OCC10, 4xANY).
The main difference between the Single Mode OPC and the Multi Mode OPC (with connectors and with
jumpers) boards is the 50/50 Rx optical splitter:
the SM OPCs have a single mode splitter
the MM OPCs have a multi mode splitter and a higher optical loss.
The OPC board can be connected to
two transponders (protected channel / protecting channel)
two drawers of two different 4xANY (_S, _P) boards.

It can be placed in slots 28 to 35 and in slots 38 to 45, just below the two transponders/4xANY.
As an example,
if the two transponders are plugged in slots 4 and 5, to perform the channel protection the OPC is
plugged in slot 28 or 29
if the two 4xANY_P are plugged in slots 4,5 and 6,7 to perform the channel protection the up to four
OPCs (MM OPC 850) are plugged in slots 28, 29, 30, 31.
The signal coming from the client is connected on RX input and crosses the board through a 3 dB splitter.
By means of the RX 1&2 OUT OPC cables/connectors, it is then sent to the two transponders (RX user
inputs), placed in the slots just above in the double shelf.
The signal coming from the WDM world is transmitted by the two adjacent transponders (user Tx outputs)
to the inputs of the other splitter of the OCh protection unit (TX1IN and TX2IN). The selected signal is sent
to the client via the Tx OUT port.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
On each board are located
two broadband (1310 nm and 1550 nm) 3 dB splitters/couplers for SM/MM OPC and SM/MM OPC FCP
two 850 nm 3 dB splitters/couplers for MM OPC 850

Depending on the configuration, are available:
a single mode splitter on RX line of the SM OPC
a multi mode splitter on RX line of the MM OPC
a single mode coupler on TX line of both the SM and MM OPCs.

LOS detection and power measurement are provided on the following input signals
Rx IN, coming from the client
Tx 1 IN and Tx 2 IN, coming from the main and spare transponders / 4xANY_P
by means of three 95/5 couplers (one per monitored signal) which extract the 5% of the received optical
signals and send each of them to a photodiode (optical receiver) performing LOS detection and measurements. The LOS alarm is sent to the Alarm Interface and then to:
the two transponders / 4xANY_P via backpanel connections
the ESC board via the SPI bus.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
388 / 554

4.6 Switching Protection (OPC)
The selection of the signal is made by the transponders.
to transponders/4xANY_P drawers
MMF or SMF*
RX IN
3dB optical
splitter
95/5
RX OUT
Channel1
50/50
MMF or SMF*
LOS
Optical
Receiver**
TX IN
Channel1
3dB optical
coupler
95/5
50/50
SMF
TX IN
95/5
Channel2
Optical
Receiver**
LOS1
Optical
Receiver**
LOS2
SMF
TX
OUT
to client
RX OUT
Channel2
Backplane connector
towards transponders
from client
Two external voltages are supplied by the PSC units. Onboard fuse protection and hardware failure control are available.
from transponders/4xANY_P drawers

The Remote Inventory data are available via the SPI bus.
Alarm
Interface**
Card
presence
N.B. * on Multi Mode OPC boards, the RX line is MMF type

on Single Mode OPC boards, the RX line is SMF type.
The TX line is always SMF.
N.B. ** The optical receivers and the alarm interface are not available on SM OPC without connectors board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 297. OPC block diagram

ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
389 / 554

OMSP is a small board containing an optical splitter and an optical switch, able to select an incoming signal
among two. It performs optical multiplex section protection.
On the transmission side, with the optical splitter, the signal from MUX output is broadcasted on the main/
working fiber and the spare/protecting fiber.
On the receiver side, the optical switch will select to receive the optical signal coming from the main/working fiber and the spare/protecting fiber under the control of board logic. The optical signal coming out from
the optical switch is sent to DEMUX module of OMDX board.
Both the incoming signals powers are measured thanks to a 95/5 coupler and a photodiode enabling
to raise a LOS alarm if the actually selected signal power falls
to know if the spare signal (the incoming signal not selected) is present.
If a LOS appears on the main signal and the spare signal is present, the board switches to the spare signal.
The board commits the order given by the SC: if the SC forces the board to switch, the switch is effective.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The OMSP board can be used on a line that is amplified or not:
LOS threshold:
the default value for LOS alarm thresholds for both input lines is 38 dBm
the LOS alarm threshold is configurable on the board, and is configurable by the operator, but
both lines have the same LOS alarm threshold
Switch Status:
the OMSP protection can have two status : Automatic or Forced
the Forced status can be on the Main line or on the Spare one
the board commits the order given by the Shelf Controller : if SC forces the board to switch, the
switch is effective. It means that the CPLD on board does not verify that the path on which it is
asked to switch is correct (no LOS). It means that Manual switch is not foreseen on this board,
but only Force switch
Measures:
the OMSP board enables measure of power level of both lines (in dBm).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
390 / 554

4.6.2 Optical Multiplex Section Protection: OMSP unit

In pointtopoint application, the OMS protection scheme is divided into the following two sorts:
MUX /
AMPLI
splitter
switch
DEMUX
/ AMPLI
DEMUX
/ AMPLI
switch
splitter
MUX /
AMPLI
MUX /
AMLI
splitter
switch
splitter
switch
DEMUX
/ AMPLI
switch
splitter
MUX /
AMPLI
OADM
DEMUX
/ AMPLI
switch
splitter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 298. OMSP Application with and without OADM
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
391 / 554
Optical
splitter
CH2 out
95:5
to
Demux
/ Ampli
Optical
switch
Optical
switch
state
95:5
CH1 in
CH2 in
Optical
switch
driver
CPLD
LOS2
Optical input
power detection,
measurements,
LOS judgment
Value2
ADC
Value1
SPI
bus
Optical input
power detection,
measurements,
LOS1 LOS judgment
+3.6V
+5.5V
Spider
Figure 299. OMSP unit block diagram

4.6.2.1 OMSP optical characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
392 / 554

CH1 out
from
Mux /
Ampli

4.7 Power Supply Card (PSC/PSC3)

Two power supply units are used: working and protecting.
They are located at each side of the shelf, in the slots 25 and 48.
For the block diagram, refer to Figure 300. on page 393.
The Power Supply Cards are monitored via the SPI bus.
PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is 36 / 72 V.
Front panel Connector: subD 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 128).
LEDs signification
Table 70. PSC and PSC3 LEDs signification
HardWare Failure:
GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
RED when one of the On Board Power Supply (OBPS) is in failure (OR on the power supply alarms)
4.8 Power Supply Card (PSC2)

This board is the same as PSC and PSC3 but needs to supply less power, because it has been designed
for 1696MS_C, hosting only 13 slots.
PSC2 are used in main and slave compact shelves.
Two power supply units are used: working and protecting. They are located at each side of the shelf, in
the slots 7 and 12, and they are monitored via the SPI bus.
These boards are with the 0V isolation.
PSCs provide some +3.6 V and 5.5 V for service use to all units and a 48 V power supply when needed.
The current limit is 6A.
The input voltage range of the Power Supply Cards is 36 / 72 V.
Front panel Connector: subD 3 poles (see section 2.4.3, page 128).
The LEDs signification is shown in Table 70.
PSC2
Batt_A
* protection
* prefilter
* fuse
GND
+Batt_A
3.6V
dual DC/DC
5.5V converter
* OR Batt
* EMI/EMC
filter
+Batt
Batt
* soft start
* EMI/EMC
filter
* threshold
TO GENERIC BOARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO GENERIC BOARD
Figure 300. PSC2 block diagram
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
393 / 554
The PMU is strictly dedicated to the 1696MS_C.

It is an external shelf able to feed the compact shelf providing the 48 Vdc to the power supply cards.
Hence the 1696MS_C can be fed
by the classical 48Vdc provided by the telecom rack
by the 48Vdc provided by the PMU, able to deliver this powering from any alternative voltage source.
The PMU is an external shelf of the same size that the 1696MS_C, which can be installed in 19, 21 and
23 racks. This additional shelf is 1U high (1U = 44.45mm).
The PMU works in a worldwide environment, which applies to the following requirements:
US requirements : NEBS compliant (115V/ 60Hz),
Japan requirements (100V/ 50/60Hz),
Europe requirements (230V/ 50Hz).
13
12
11
10
PSC(2)
48Vdc (power supply)
F A N _C
PSC boards are connected to the rectifiers of the PMU which provide the power.
PMU Control unit is connected to the FAN_C board and the tw0 PSC/PSC2 to provide alarms to the Network Element since this unit in not managed by the software.
PSC(2)
PMU alarms
in1
in2
RECTIFIER 1
CONTROL
UNIT
RECTIFIER 2
PMU
from any alternative voltage source (100Vac, 115Vac, 230Vac)
48Vdc
from backup batteries (optional)
Figure 301. PMU cabling scheme

Description
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to Figure 302. on page 395. The PMU architecture is made up of:
2 VAC inputs
2 VDC outputs without fuses
1 battery connection
one cintrol unit
2 rectifiers modules
On DC voltage outputs, no fuses are required because the 1696MS_C has on his PSC unit fuses on inputs.
The outputs are connected together, so they can protect each all the DC outputs.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
394 / 554

4.9 Power Management Unit (PMU)

Two rectifiers modules are present in one PMU. Each modules is able to supply with power up to 4 stacked
1696MS_C.
One module enables to supply the 4 stacked shelves. If one module fails, the other one can still supply
the 4 shelves.
The Control Unit must be able to provide the following functions
deliver 2 outputs 48VDC
transmit alarms to the host (FAN_C board)
manage the battery
manage Status Leds.
DC output 1
M1
AC input 1
M5
M2
DC output 2
AC input 2
M6
+ Batt
M3
Discarge
Protect
Batt
To Batt
AC in1 presence
AC in2 presence
Batt presence
Control
M4
Unit
Alarms
Figure 302. PMU block diagram
4.9.1 Batteries for PMU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Batteries are optional units used with the PMU in order to supply the 48V to the 1696MS_C in case of
power outage of the alternative power source (100V/115V/220V supply).
Battery units are linked to the Control unit of the PMU by cascading the units.
The first battery gives a temperature measurement of the unit to the PMU so as to generate an alarm when
out of the range.
It is possible to add up to three optional batteries. This depends of the current consumption of the shelves
(150W per battery).
Performance.
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 15 hours with 1 PMU and 1 shelf.
The battery must be charged in a maximum of 60 hours with 1 PMU and 4 shelves.
The Battery duration for 150W must be of 3 hours.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
395 / 554
Mechanical dimension of each battery: W = 446.02 mm; L = 284 mm; H = 133.35 mm.
Batteries can be inserted in a 19, 21 (ETSI) and 23 (ANSI) rack or put on table.
PMU
in1
12 PSC(2)
11
10
9
8
7 PSC(2)
RECTIFIER 1
in2
RECTIFIER 2

13
6
5
4
3
2
1
48Vdc
F A N _C
In Rack Version, the batteries are located below the PMU.
CONTROL
UNIT
48Vdc
Battery with
captor of
temperature
Optional
Figure 303. Minimum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, rack version
F A N _C
13
F A N _C
13
13
in1
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 PSC(2)
11
10
9
8
7 PSC(2)
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 PSC(2)
11
10
9
8
7 PSC(2)
6
5
4
3
2
1
12 PSC(2)
11
10
9
8
7 PSC(2)
RECTIFIER 1
in2
RECTIFIER 2
CONTROL
UNIT
Optional Battery
48Vdc
F A N _C
In table version, batteries are located and stacked besides the PMU and 1696MS_C shelves; only this
configuration is supported since a battery is not likely to hold the full stack of batteries, PMU and shelves.
Optional Battery
48Vdc
48Vdc
48Vdc
Battery with
captor of
temperature
Optional
PMU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 304. Maximum configuration of the batteries in 1696MS_C Rel. 2.2, table version
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
396 / 554
4.10.1 FANC unit for 1696MS shelf

As the power consumption of the transponder is high enough (about 2025 W / unit), fans are necessary
to dissipate the heat.
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
OAC (OPTIONAL)
OAC (OPTIONAL)
TRSNAPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
The fans are located at the bottom of the shelf. The use of fans requires to put an air filter just below. This
is shown on Figure 305.
ESC
OMDX + EXP + SPV
OMDX
TRSNAPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER
TRANSPONDER

4.10 FANS unit
FANS
Air filter
Figure 305. Fan shelf description and Rack partitioning

One FAN module is placed at the bottom of the shelf, in the slot 49.
The FANS are monitored via SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the House Keeping/Remote Alarms
module to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system.
Max Power dissipation per shelf: 400 W.
New FANC unit for 1696MS shelf
In Rel. 2.2A has been introduced a new FAN board with improved efficienty, because of the high consumption of the new boards.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Main characteristics:
air flow increase
FAN speed controlled as a function of the air temperature:
if temperature is lower than 35C, the FAN speed is normal
if temperature is higher than 35C, the FAN speed increases quickly
FAN1, FAN2, FAN3 speeds are independednt
the three front panel LEDs indicate the FAN speed state.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
397 / 554
FAN2
FAN3
Speed detector
Speed detector
Speed detector

FAN1
LED
controller
DATA
SPI
bus
+48V
+3.6V
RI
Spider
Power
Supply
ECID
HWF
Figure 306. Block diagram of the new FAN unit
4.10.2 FAN_C unit for 1696MS_C shelf

On the 1696MS_C shelf, FAN unit is located on the left side of the compact shelf. The use of fans requires
to put an air filter just below.
Air filter
FAN_C
OOADM1ch+OSCE
OOADM1ch+OSCW
SPV managenement
TRNSPONDER
TRNSPONDER
ESC
PSC(2)
Hk
RAI
OPC
Lan_Q
PSC(2)
Figure 307. FAN_C description and Rack partitioning

FAN_C unit takes place in the left slot of 1696MS_C shelf and is equipped with two fans with speedometer
sensor to dissipate the heat coming from Transponder and 4xANY boards essentially. FAN_C board is
mandatory provided.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FAN_C board enables the link to the Power Management Unit (PMU) which is an external frame containing
the rectifier AC/DC to enable the plugging in the main supply).
The logical alarms generated by the PMU (PMU presence, Minor and Major) are sent to the FAN_C boards
SPIDER where they are red by the shelf Controller (ESC).
This alarm is used by the software to inhibit or not both others. If the alarm is not raised, (PMU absent),
the MAJOR and MINOR alarms are inhibited.
MINOR (resp. MAJOR) alarm means that one (resp. two) rectifier is defective or out of the functioning
range.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
398 / 554

5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 1696MSPAN System characteristics
5.1.1 Main system characteristics
General
Optical bit rate, client side
the bit rates indicated with (*) are 3R, the others are 2R (MCC1 only)
MCC2, MCC3, WLA2, WLA3
any bit rate between 100Mbps and 2.66Gbps (*)
MCC1
100 Mbps
125 Mbps
132.815 Mbps
155.520 Mbps
200.00 Mbps
265.620 Mbps
270 Mbps
275.176 Mbps
400.352 Mbps
466.560 Mbps
531.250 Mbps
622.080 Mbps
933.120 Mbps
1062.5 Mbps
1244.160 Mbps
1250 Mbps
1866.240 Mbps
2125.00 Mbps
2488.320 Mbps
2500 Mbps
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0CC10
9953.28 Mbps
10.3125 Gbps
:
:
4xANY
125 Mbps
155.520 Mbps
200.00 Mbps
270 Mbps
622.080 Mbps
1062.5 Mbps
1250 Mbps
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
FDDI
Fast Ethernet, FDDI
FC (12-M6LEI)
STM1/OC3 (*)
ESCON
FC (25-M6LLI)
Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV
DS4
J5
OC9
FC (50-M5SLI)
STM4/OC12 (*)
OC18
Fiber Channel / FICON (*)
OC24
Gigabit Ethernet (*)
OC36
2FC (*)
STM16/OC48 (*)
Infiniband
STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN (*)
10 GBE LAN (*)
Fast Ethernet, FDDI (*)
STM1/OC3 (*)
ESCON (*)
Digital Video (DTV) / HDTV (*)
STM4/OC12 (*)
Fiber Channel / FICON (*)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical bit rate, WDM side
MCC1, MCC2, MCC3,

MCC_RGN, WLA2, WLA3
the same of all the clients bit rates, in the correspondent wavelength ()
4xANY
2488.320 Mbps
STM16 / OC48
OCC10
10.709 Gbps
11.096 Gbps
:
:
STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN + FEC

10 GBE LAN + FEC
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
399 / 554
Type of optical fiber
According to ITUT G.652, G.653, G.654, G.655
Application types
Terminal Multiplexer (LT), backtoback terminals (HUB), OADM in

protected and unprotected linear links and rings, In Line Amplifier,
CPE
Interfaces types
Electrical interfaces: 2Mbps G.703, 64Kbps (user channels)

Optical interfaces: all the client and WDM interfaces above listed
Applied standards
ITUT Recommendation G.681
Functional characteristics of interoffice and longhaul line systems

using optical amplifiers, including optical multiplexing
Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
Optical interfaces for intraofficesystems
Network Node Interface for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
Optical interfaces for equipments and systems relating to the synchronous digital hierarchy
Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy for

use on optical fibre cables
ETS 300 232 A1
Transmission and multiplexing; Optical interfaces for equipments

and systems relating to the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
GR 253 CORE
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic Criteria, issue 2C
IEEE G.802.3
Gigabit Ethernet specification
ANSI x 3.184 1993 standards
FE and FDDI specification
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ANSI x 3.320 standard (100SMLLI) FC and FICON specification

IBM SA039403
ESCON specification
ITUT BT.6564, BT13631, BT1367
Digital Video specification
SMPTE 292M1998
Television Bit Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television

Systems
IEEE 802.3
Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)

access method and physical layer specifications
GR 63 CORE
Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements:

Physical Protection, issue 1
Optical Safety procedures and requirements for optical transport

systems
IEC 825
Safety of laser products
EN 60950
Safety of information technology equipment, including electrical

business equipment
GR 1089 CORE
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunication equipment
pr ETS 300 3861

pr ETS 300 38622
Equipment Engineering ; Public telecommunication network equipment. Electromagnetic compatibility requirements:

Part 1 : Product family overview, compliance criteria and test levels
Part 22 : Product specific compliance criteria and operating conditions Transmission equipment, Version : 0.7, 1996.02.29
The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the synchronous digital hierarchy to be published
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
400 / 554

Central frequencies and wavelength see Table 72. on page 404

SMPTE RP1841996
Specification of Jitter in BitSerial Digital Systems
T11/98 055
Fiber Channel Methodologies for Jitter Specification
EN 55022
Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of information technology equipment
ETS 300 01911

ETS 300 01912
ETS 300 01913
Equipment Engineering: Environmental conditions and environmental tests for telecommunications equipment. Classification of
environmental conditions (storage/transportation/stationary use)
AddDrop and CrossConnect features

Connectivity
Tributary to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment

Mux/Demux to Mux/Demux wavelength assigment
Tributary to tributary wavelength assigment
Loopbacks
Protections
Network protections
Optical SNCP
Equipment optical protections
1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1
1+1
MCC1 / MCC2 / MCC3

MCC + 4xANY (only MCC is protected)
4xANY (each client/drawer can be protected)
(MCC2 / MCC3) + OAC
OCC10
OCC10 + OAC
the two channels of the WLA2M_OP (not the board)
the two channels of the WLA3CDOP (not the board)
Powering protections
1+1
Power Supply Card
Management interfaces
Functions provided
Management interfaces supported:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Q3 interf with PC (ECT/RECT), 1353SH and 1354RM NMS

(on terminal)
Station alarms
Equipment Alarm status (indicated by the front cover LEDs)
Visual indications for card fail.
Q3/TL1 to connect a Local or Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
Ethernet (on LAN_Q board) to connect the OS 1353SH and
other ALCATEL NEs with ETHERNET Interface
QECC to connect other Q3 NEs
Local interface:
Craft Interface (PC)
RS232 SUBD 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps
Remote interface:
Craft Interface (PC)
RS232 SUBD 9pin, PC compatible at 9600 bps.

It handles up to 32 NEs via DCC (D1D3 and/or
D4D12)
Remote interface:
Transmission Management
Network (TMN) interface
ITUT G.773 10 base2 and 10 baseT
Protocol Stack/Information Model messages
ED
Q3/QECC or TL1
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
401 / 554
Configuration and provisioning
Equipment, Units; AddDrop; Crossconnection, Synchronization,

Protection, Alarms status, Maintenance memory for all the equipment events
Software download
It is made locally as well as remotely on non volatile memories without traffic interruption
Performance monitoring (on B1 byte)
According to ITUT G.784, G.826, , G.821, M.2101.1
Remote Inventory
At rack, subrack and board level
Unit and equipment acknowledgement Through Remote Inventory: Company id, Unit type, Unit part number, Software part number, CLEI code, Manufacturing Plant, Date
Identifier, Date of construction... For details, refer to the operators
handbook
Security
Password, operator profile, back up for programs and data
Unit substitution characteristics

For transponders (MCC, OCC10), opti- without traffic interruption in case of Optical SNCP
cal amplifiers and Mux/Demux
For 4xANY
without traffic interruption if all 4xANY drawers/clients are protected
Housekeeping (HK)
Number of housekeeping accesses
8 inputs and 8 outputs
Connector
SUBD 25 pins
Output HK signalsCPO (Remote By electronic relay contacts to be connected to the external negative
voltage
alarms used for remote control)
Max. guaranteed current with 50 mA

closed condition
Max. allowed voltage with open 72 V

condition
Voltage drop vs ground with 2 V 0 V

closed condition
Input housekeeping signals (CPI)
Max. guaranteed current with 3 mA

closed condition
Max. allowed voltage with open 72 V

condition
Voltage drop vs ground with 2 V 0 V

closed condition
Rack Alarms (RAI)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Connector
SUBD 9 pins
Max. guaranteed current with closed 100 mA

condition
Voltage difference between Common out and OUT < 2,5 Volts
Resistance of the closed relay = 300 Mohm max
Max. allowed voltage with open condition 72 V
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
402 / 554

Operation processes (management interfaces functions)
Automatic shutdown

According to IEC 825 and ITUT Rec. G.958 regarding ALS
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) characteristics

Digital signal
Nominal bit rate
4 864 kbit/s (default configuration) => 2Mb for LAPD + 2 Mb for User
Coding
asynchr. scrambled (2151) + synchronous scrambled (271) NRZ
SPV Optical Path

Attenuation range
9 49 dB
Maximum dispersion
4000 ps/nm
Maximum reflectance
27 dB
Minimum ORL of cable plant at S,

including any connector
24 dB
SPV Receiver specification

Sensitivity @ BER = 109
50 dBm 47 dBm
Overload @ BER = 109
6 dBm
Maximum receiver reflectance
28 dBm
SPV Transmitter specification

Type of source
DFB
Wavelength
151010 nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio 33 dB

Optical Output power
1 dBm +4 dBm
Minimum Extinction Ratio
8.2 dB
Clock characteristics
Transponders support 3R regeneration. External clock is not required
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 71. CWDM nominal frequencies allocation plan in CBand
ED
Channel Number
Wavelength deviation (nm)
1471
1470
6.5
1491
1490
6.5
1511
1510
6.5
1531
1530
6.5
1551
1550
6.5
1571
1570
6.5
1591
1590
6.5
1611
1610
6.5
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
403 / 554
Central frequency
(GHz) (CT name)
192,000
Band
20

wavelength deviation : 0,12 nm (EOL)
1561,42
192,100
21
1560,61
192,200
22
1559,79
192,300
23
1558,98
192,500
25
1557,36
192,600
26
1556,55
192,700
27
1555,75
192,800
28
1554,94
193,000
30
1553,33
193,100
31
1552,52
193,200
32
1551,72
193,300
33
1550,92
193,500
35
1549,32
193,600
36
1548,51
193,700
37
1547,72
193,800
38
1546,92
194,200
42
1543,73
194,300
43
1542,94
194,400
44
1542,14
194,500
45
1541,35
194,700
47
1539,77
194,800
48
1538,98
194,900
49
1538,19
195,000
50
1537,40
195,200
52
1535,82
195,300
53
1535,04
195,400
54
1534,25
195,500
55
1533,47
195,700
57
1531,90
195,800
58
1531,12
195,900
59
1530,33
196,000
60
1529,55
Channel Number
L2
BLUE
BAND
L1
S2
RED
BAND
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S1
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
404 / 554

Table 72. DWDM frequencies allocation plan in CBand

5.2 Safety requirements and mechanism

5.2.1 Electrical safety
Safety status of the connections with TNV (Telecommunication Network Voltage) for Remote alarms,
Housekeeping (CPO,CPI), Rack lamps (RM) and tributary connecother equipment
tions if K20 protected.
SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) for all the other.
5.2.2 Electrical Safety compliance with standardized Norms

Compliancy to Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms :
IEC 609501 ed. 2001
EN 609501 ed. 2001
NEBS Level 3 Bellcore GR63 and GR1089
5.2.2.1 Electrical Safety Labelling

The labels reproduced in para.2.2.3.1 on page 29 are affixed during factory settings.
5.2.2.2 Electrical Safety instructions
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous voltages, are reported in para. 2.2 on pages 27
thru 34 and more specifically in para.2.2.3.2 on page 29.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
405 / 554
5.2.3 Optical safety
Compliancy to Optical Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies standardized Norms:
EN 608251 ed.1994 + A11 ed.1996+A2 ed.2001
IEC 608251 ed.1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999)
EN 608252 ed.2000
IEC 608252 ed.2000
5.2.3.2 Hazard Level classification and standards

The HAZARD LEVEL of different ports of the system is widely treated in UNIT DESCRIPTION of this
Technical Handbook (see paragraphs Automatic shutdown and automatic shutdown for each unit).
HAZARD LEVEL classification:
HAZARD LEVEL 1M, according to IEC 608251 (1998) + Am. 2 (2001), IEC 608252 (2000) and
ITUT Rec. G.664 standards or
HAZARD LEVEL 3A, according to IEC 608251 (1998), IEC 608252 (2000)
can be assigned to all ports of the system with the exception of the 4xANY boards, classified as
HAZARD LEVEL 1 laser products.
G.664 standard defines two kinds of optical safety mechanisms :
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD) : Procedure to automatically shutdown the output power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
In order to be clearer, in the following paragraphs,
safety procedure for transponders is called ALS
safety procedure for amplifiers is called APSD.

5.2.3.3 Equipment classification
The 1696MSPAN equipment is classified as hazard level 1M (optical power in the [10 21.3] dBm range).
1696MS_C equipment is also classified as hazard level 1M.
The classification refers to the IEC 608251 and IEC 608252 Standards. The OSC alone is
classified as hazard level 1.
N.B.
5.2.3.4 Location type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The equipment shall be installed in restricted location (industrial and commercial premises) or controlled
locations (optical cable ducts and switching centers).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
406 / 554

5.2.3.1 Optical Safety compliance with European Norms
5.2.3.5 Optical Safety Labelling

The labeling of the optical sources is compliant with the requirements of the IEC 60825 Standard.
The labels reported below are put during factory settings. The labels are affixed on all front covers that
protect optical connectors located on the front side plate of all the units involved in optical transmission:
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1 the following explanatory label
The following label indicates the presence of a LASER beam. If the laser is a Hazard Level 1 or 1M product,
this label is not compulsory.
Example of EXPLANATORY label.

The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 1M according to IEC 608251 (2001), IEC 608252
(2000) and ITUT Rec. G.664 standards and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The optical interfaces which have HAZARD LEVEL 3A according to IEC 608251 (1998), IEC 608252
(2000) and operate at 3rd window, carry the following explanatory label
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
407 / 554
5.2.3.6 Engineering design features
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an opposite connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure is implemented depending on
the location where the fibre break occurred.
ALS procedures are explained in 5.2.3.9, where shutdown and reactivation times are also reported.
5.2.3.7 Optical Safety instructions
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance and safe use including clear warning concerning
precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported on:
section 2.2.4 on page 30 thru 31, as far as this handbook is concerned
the appropriate parts of the other handbooks envisaged for this equipment (see section 5.2.3.8).
5.2.3.8 Automatic power shutdown with amplifiers

The APSD procedure for the 1696MS amplifiers is not implemented in current release: according to the
IEC 60825 standard, APSD is not mandatory.
5.2.3.9 Automatic Laser Shutdown at WDM side (ALS_WDM) with transponders
The ALS procedure is compliant with ITUT G.664 recommendation.
In the 1696MSPAN the ALS procedure is proposed by the transponder cards (MCC and OCC10). The
WDM receiver shuts down the WDM transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects an Input Loss
Of Signal (ILOS, i.e.: optical input power MCC1, MCC2 and OCC10 is too low) or a loss of clock (LOC)
for MCC2 and OCC10.
The shutdown of all the transponders on the affected link is carried within less than 3 s, as required by the
ITUT Rec. G.664.
It is up to the user to enable or disable the ALS. The default configuration is ALSdisable.
The possible ALS mode are:
ALS disable with laser ON
ALS disable with laser OFF
ALS disable (default configuration)
ALS enable.
During the ALS procedure, the OSC is still working.
This configuration is done at equipment point of view and can be sent transponder by transponder or for
a set of transponders.
The ALS is implemented in WDM terminal and OADM sites in order to have a safety mechanism independent from the host systems. During ALS, the optional OSC is still working.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of fiber break, a mechanism is proposed in order to shutdown the transponders in the previous
site, before the fiber break.
In case of regenerators (backtoback terminals) and OADM, the way of working is the same. The ALS
procedure is done in the section when the fiber failure occurred. The WDM receiver shutdowns the WDM
transmitter in the opposite direction when it detects a Loss Of Signal (LOS) (MCC1, MCC2, OCC10) or
a Loss Of Clock (LOC) (MCC2, OCC10).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
408 / 554

In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
5.2.3.9.1 ALS in nonamplified networks

In pointtopoint configuration, ALS is performed in four steps (see Figure 308. ):

(1) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B
and LOC detection at WDM Tx access B (if in passthrough configuration).
(2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the terminal B MCC/OCC10 boards of the
opposite transmission direction.
(3) Shutting Down all the Tx WDM access of the terminal B (step (2)), causes an ILOS detection at Rx WDM
access and a LOC detection at WDM Tx access of the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal A (if in pass
through configuration).
(4) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the terminal
A.
T
R
A
TX
WDM
SD
(4)
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
RX
WDM
T
R
ILOS
LOC A
(1) N
(3)
D LOC
ILOS
E
RX
R WDM
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
N
(2)
D
SD
E
TX
WDM R
terminal B
(16 or 32 ch.)
terminal A
(16 or 32 ch.)
SD stands for ShutDown
ILOS stands for Input Loss Of Signal
LOC stands for Los Of Clock
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 308. ALS mechanism on WDM line in pointtopoint configuration
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
409 / 554
(1) ILOS detection at RX WDM access of an MCC/OCC10 board of the terminal B

and LOC detection at WDM Tx access.
(2) ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of all the MCC/OCC10 boards of the same transmission direction and ShutDown (SD) command sent to the Tx WDM access of the opposite transmission
direction.
(3) ILOS detection at Rx WDM access of all MCC/OCC10 boards of the 16 ch. terminal
or LOC detection at Tx B&W.
(4) Shutting Down on a Tx WDM access and Tx B&W access of the 16 ch. terminal.
RX
B&W
TX
WDM
(4) SD
(4) SD (3) ILOS

TX
RX
B&W
WDM
passtrough channels
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
16 channels terminal
RX
WDM
TX
WDM
(1) ILOS
LOC
(2) SD
TX
WDM
(2)SD
RX
WDM
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
passtrough channels (terminal B))
Figure 309. ALS in OADM configuration, channel in passthrough or in add/drop

The ALS mode for passthrough MCCs/OCC10s must be disabled to insure reliable automatic
restart. Note also that ILOS is propagated through the passthrough MCCs/OCC10s even if the
ALS mode is disable.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ALS and LOS propagation are 2 inpedendant procedures.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
410 / 554

For a circuit with regeneration/passthrough, ALS is performed in eight steps as described in the following
(see Figure 309. ):

The ALS procedure in a ring with OSNCP, is the same of the previous case (circuit with regeneration/
passthrough) and the SD on the end node generates a (5) protection switch (see Figure 310. ).
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
RX
B&W
RX
B&W
RX
WDM
TX
B&W
(4) SD (3) ILOS

TX
RX
B&W
WDM
protection
request
(1) ILOS
RX
WDM
LOC
TX SD
WDM
M
U
X
TX
B&W
D
M
U
X
RX
WDM
ILOS
RX
WDM
SD
TX
B&W
ILOS
SD
(2) SD
TX
WDM
D
M
U
X
RX
B&W
RX
WDM
RX
B&W
D
M
U
X
TX
WDM

TX
WDM
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
TX
WDM
(4) SD
(5)
D
M
U
X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
WDM
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
protection
request
(5)
Figure 310. ALS procedure in a ring with Optical SNCP, in case of fiber failure in the ring
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
411 / 554
See Figure 311. , Figure 312. and Figure 313.

ALS for transponders is supported in amplified networks. On the contrary, APSD is not supported for amplifiers.
However, in the particular case of pointtopoint amplified transmission without OADM repeater, ALS procedure is enough to provide optical safety thanks to LOS propagation.
Amplifiers must be in APSD disable state.
TX
WDM
ILOS1
ILOS2
M
U
X
SD
D
M
U
X
LOC
ILOS
RX
WDM
SD1
SD2
SD2
SD1
ILOS2
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
1
ILOS1
RX
WDM
LOC
ILOS
SD
TX
WDM
Figure 311. ALS procedure in a pointtopoint amplified transmission without OADM repeater
TX
WDM
ILOS1
M
U
X
SD
D
M
U
X
LOC
ILOS
RX
WDM
ILOS2
SD1
SD2
SD1
ILOS2
ILOS1
SD2
ILOS2
SD1
SD2
ILOS1
SD2
SD1
ILOS2
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
1
ILOS1
RX
WDM
LOC
ILOS
SD
TX
WDM
Figure 312. ALS mechanism with cascaded preamplifier and booster

TX
WDM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SD
LOC
ILOS
RX
WDM
ILOS2
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
ILOS1
SD2
SD1
SD2
ILOS1
SD1
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
2
ILOS2
RX
WDM
LOC
ILOS
SD
TX
WDM
Figure 313. ALS mechanism with single preamplifier and booster
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
412 / 554

5.2.3.9.2 ALS in amplified networks

5.2.3.9.3 ALS restart concept

After an ALS occurs, one restart mode is available: Automatic restart. The time values and the restart way
of working in the various restart schemes are described in Figure 314. The restart way of working is defined at equipment point of view.
As the ALS is done at MCC/OCC10 unit level, each transponder board will restart independently.
When OAC are used, the restart procedure is done by the amplifier board.
During the switch on and the switch off time, the channel wavelength remains between ITU 500 pm.
Start
Section in
operation
ALS_WDM enable
Yes
Receive signal
from far end?
No
No
Loss of received signal

for more than 500 ms ?
Yes
Automatic Power Shut Down
Automatic restart
Delay time
18020 s
Tx on for (200.5) s
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 314. Restart algorithm

The figures of the ALS timing are compliant with the ITUT Rec.G.664. The standard recommends a pulse
length of 2s except in the case of amplified network where the pulse length can be greater ( 6.3 of the
standard).
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
413 / 554
5.3.1 Tributaries optical characteristics

5.3.1.1 Multirate Channel Card (MCC1, MCC2, MCC3, MCC_RGN) characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, User side (MCC_RGN doesnt have B&W interfaces)
Common optical interfaces specification, user side
Bit rate, client side
with MCC2 and MCC3 using, all the bit rates are 3R
with MCC1 using, (*) indicates the 3R bit rates
100 Mbps
:
FDDI
125 Mbps
:
Fast Ethernet, FDDI
132.815 Mbps
:
FC (12-M6LEI)
155.520 Mbps
:
STM1/OC3 (*)
200 Mbps
:
ESCON
265.620 Mbps
:
FC (25-M6LLI)
270 Mbps
:
Digital Video
466.560 Mbps
:
OC9
531.250 Mbps
:
FC (50-M5SLI)
622.080 Mbps
:
STM4/OC12 (*)
933.120 Mbps
:
OC18
1062.5 Mbps
:
FICON (*), Fiber Channel (*)
1244.160 Mbps
:
OC24
1250 Mbps
:
1866.120 Mbps
:
OC36
2125.00 Mbps
:
2FC (*)
2488.320 Mbps
:
STM16/OC48 (*)
2500 Mbps
:
INFINIBAND
2666 Mbps
:
NNI (MCC3 only)
Wavelength range
1260 > 1360 nm

1470 > 1610 nm for CWDM
User interface type
S16.1
Connector type
MU horizontal for MCC1, MCC2

LC (on SFP module) for MCC3
User Rx : optical interfaces specification

Fiber type
Sensitivity @ BER =
MCC1
including path penaltly 19 dBm / 0.125 > 1.125Gbps rate

17 dBm / 1.125 > 2.5 Gbps rate
0 dBm
0 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
1 dB
1 dB
27 dB
27 dB
User Tx : optical interfaces specification
MCC1
Fiber type
MCC2
see para.
5.3.1.9
5 3 1 9 on
page 426
MCC3
Singlemode (SMF)
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
1 nm
Minimum side mode suppression ratio
30 dB
30 dB
5 dBm > 0 dBm 5 dBm> 0 dBm
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
Shutdown time
< 5 ms
< 5 ms
Reactivation time
< 30 ms
< 30 ms
ED
MCC3
Multimode (MMF) 62.5 / 125 um

1010
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MCC2
see para.
5.3.1.9 on
page 426
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
414 / 554

5.3 Boards interfaces characteristics
Optical interfaces specification, WDM Side

Common optical interfaces specification, WDM side

Interface type
L16.2
Wavelength specification
ITUT G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing
Wavelength tunability
tunable over 2 wavelengths
Transmitter wavelength range
1528 > 1565 nm
Fiber type
Singlemode (SMF)
Connector type
MU horizontal
Center frequency
19x.y THz; for details refer to Table 72. on page 404

and para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
446, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 447
Bit rate, WDM side
transparent (output bit rate equals input bit rate)
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification
MCC1
MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN
Sensitivity @ BER = 1010 (OSNR = 19 dB), includ- 27 dBm / 0.125 > 1.125 Gbps rate
ing path penalty
26 dBm / 1.125 > 2.5 Gbps rate
8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty (over 1800 ps/nm)
2 dB
8 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty (up to 3200 ps/nm)

2 dB
27 dB
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification
MCC1
MCC2/MCC3/MCC_RGN
Dispersion accommodation
1800 ps/nm
3200 ps/nm
Maximum 20 dB width with modulation
0.1 nm
0.1 nm
30 dB
30 dB
typ : 6.5 dBm

min : 5 dBm
max : 8 dBm
Optical power at board output w/ minimum VOA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
27 dB
typ : 5.7 dBm

min : 4 dBm
max : 7.5 dBm
8.2 dB
8.2 dB
Maximum EOL Center Frequency Deviation
12.3 GHz
12.3 GHz
the values are given for EOL characteristics
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
415 / 554
5.3.1.2 WaveLength Adapter 2 (WLA2M) characteristics
Common optical interfaces specification

Fiber type
(for details refer to para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426)
9/125 m SMF
50/125 m MMF
62.5/125 m MMF
Connector type
LC/PC (on SFP modules)
Optical interfaces specification, User side

all the bit rates are 3R

125 Mbps
:
155.520 Mbps
:
200 Mbps
:
270 Mbps
:
622.080 Mbps
:
1062.5 Mbps
:
1244.160 Mbps
:
1250 Mbps
:
2125.00 Mbps
:
2488.320 Mbps
:
2500 Mbps
:
2666 Mbps
:
Fast Ethernet, FDDI

STM1/OC3
ESCON
Digital Video
STM4/OC12
FICON, Fiber Channel
OC24
Gigabit Ethernet
2FC
STM16/OC48
INFINIBAND
NNI
Wavelength range
1st window for FC and GbESX

3rd window for L1.2, L4.2, L16.2, GbEZX
2nd window for all the others B&W SFP
3rd window for CWDM (1470 > 1610 nm)
User interface type

S1.1, L1.1, L1.2

S4.1, L4.1, L4.2
I16.1, S16.1, L16.1, L16.2
S16.1 multirate multiformat
GbESX, GbELX, GbEZX
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
Other User interface characteristics
see para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical interfaces specification, WDM side

Bit rate, WDM side
transparent (CWDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
Wavelength range
3rd window (1470 > 1611nm)
WDM interface type

CWDM interface for long haul (APD detector): CWA1xx

CWDM interface for short haul (PIN detector): CWP1xx
Other WDM interface characteristics
refer to CWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
416 / 554

5.3.1.3 Wavelength adapter 3 (WLA3CD) characteristics


Fiber type
9/125 m SMF
50/125 m MMF
62.5/125 m MMF
Connector type


125 Mbps
:
155.520 Mbps
:
200 Mbps
:
270 Mbps
:
622.080 Mbps
:
1062.5 Mbps
:
1244.160 Mbps
:
1250 Mbps
:
2125.00 Mbps
:
2488.320 Mbps
:
2500 Mbps
:
2666 Mbps
:
Fast Ethernet, FDDI

STM1/OC3
ESCON
Digital Video
STM4/OC12
OC24
Gigabit Ethernet
2FC
STM16/OC48
INFINIBAND
NNI
Wavelength range

3rd window for DWDM (1529.55 > 1561.42 nm)
User interface type

S1.1, L1.1, L1.2

S4.1, L4.1, L4.2
I16.1, S16.1, L16.1, L16.2
GbESX, GbELX, GbEZX
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
DWDM (APD)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bit rate, WDM side
transparent (WDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
Wavelength range
3rd window (1470 > 1611nm)
WDM interface type


DWDM interface for long haul (APD detector): DWAxxx
Other WDM interface (C/DWDM) characteristics
refer to CWDM and DWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on

page 426
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
417 / 554
5.3.1.4 Wavelength adapter 2 with OSNCP (WLA2M_OP) characteristics

Fiber type
9/125 m SMF
50/125 m MMF
62.5/125 m MMF
Connector type


125 Mbps
:
155.520 Mbps
:
200 Mbps
:
270 Mbps
:
622.080 Mbps
:
1062.5 Mbps
:
1244.160 Mbps
:
1250 Mbps
:
2125.00 Mbps
:
2488.320 Mbps
:
2500 Mbps
:
2666 Mbps
:
Fast Ethernet, FDDI

STM1/OC3
ESCON
Digital Video
STM4/OC12
OC24
Gigabit Ethernet
2FC
STM16/OC48
INFINIBAND
NNI
Wavelength range

User interface type

S1.1, L1.1, L1.2

S4.1, L4.1, L4.2
I16.1, S16.1, L16.1, L16.2
GbESX, GbELX, GbEZX
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
Coupler/Splitter insertion loss
4 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bit rate, WDM side
transparent (CWDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
Wavelength range
3rd window (1470 > 1611nm)
WDM interface type


Other WDM interface characteristics
refer to CWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on page 426
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
418 / 554

5.3.1.5 Wavelength adapter 3 with OSNCP (WLA3CDOP) characteristics


Fiber type
9/125 m SMF
50/125 m MMF
62.5/125 m MMF
Connector type


125 Mbps
:
155.520 Mbps
:
200 Mbps
:
270 Mbps
:
622.080 Mbps
:
1062.5 Mbps
:
1244.160 Mbps
:
1250 Mbps
:
2125.00 Mbps
:
2488.320 Mbps
:
2500 Mbps
:
2666 Mbps
:
Fast Ethernet, FDDI

STM1/OC3
ESCON
Digital Video
STM4/OC12
OC24
Gigabit Ethernet
2FC
STM16/OC48
INFINIBAND
NNI
Wavelength range

3rd window for DWDM (1529.55 > 1561.42 nm)
User interface type

S1.1, L1.1, L1.2

S4.1, L4.1, L4.2
I16.1, S16.1, L16.1, L16.2
GbESX, GbELX, GbEZX
FC, 2FC
CWDM (PIN and APD)
DWDM (APD)
Coupler/Splitter insertion loss
4 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Bit rate, WDM side
transparent (WDM bit rate equal to User bit rate)
Wavelength range
3rd window (1470 > 1611nm)
WDM interface type


DWDM interface for long haul (APD detector): DWAxxx
Other WDM interface (C/DWDM) characteristics
refer to CWDM and DWDM SFPs, in para. 5.3.1.9 on

page 426
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
419 / 554
5.3.1.6 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10) characteristics

9953.28 Mbps : STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN

10.709 Gbps :(STM64/OC192/10GBEWAN)+FEC
10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN
User interface type
VSR20002R1 standard (similar to I64.1)
Fiber type
Singlemode (SMF)
Connector type
MU horizontal

Wavelength range
1260 > 1360 nm
Sensitivity @ BER = 1012 including path penalty 14 dBm

1 dBm
1 dB
27 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Wavelength range
1290 > 1330 nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
30 dB
min : 6 dBm
max : 1 dBm
Transmission length
20 Km
6 dB
Shutdown time
< 5 ms
Reactivation time
< 30 ms
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
420 / 554



WDM interface type
L64.2
ITUT G.692, 100 GHz channel spacing.

The board is tunable over 1 wavelength
1528 > 1565 nm
Center frequency
Bit rate, WDM side
10709 Mbps
11.096 Gbps (10 GBE LAN + FEC)
Fiber type
Singlemode (SMF)
Connector type
MU horizontal
WDM Rx : optical interfaces specification (board input)

Type of Receiver
PIN
Sensitivity @ BER = 1012 after FEC correction in- 13 dBm

cluding PP and OSNR = 19 dB
5 dBm
VOA dynamic range
20 dB
Maximum optical path penalty (over 500 up to 2 dB

1600 ps/nm)
27 dB
WDM Tx : optical interfaces specification (board output)

In order to provide a wide range chromatic dispersion tolerance, two operating points corresponding to high
chromatic dispersion and to low chromatic dispersion.
NDC configuration
NDC0
Max EOL center frequency deviation

Dispersion (NDC not configurable in R.2.0)
OSNR = 19 dB
OSNR = 21 dB
100 pm
200 > 1200 ps/nm
0 > +1600 ps/nm
500 > +800 ps/nm
Maximum 20 dB width
0.5 nm
30 dB
Optical Output power (VOA at min)

VOA dynamic range (configurable)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NDC1
2 >+3 dBm
20 dB, step 1
8.2 dB
All the figures are EOL
N.B.
ED
4 >+1 dBm
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
421 / 554
5.3.1.7 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card Enhanced (OCC10_E) characteristics

Fiber type
9/125 m SMF
50/125 m MMF
62.5/125 m MMF
Connector type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


9.95328 Gbps :
STM64/OC192, 10GbE WAN
10.3125 Gbps :
10 GbE LAN
10.709 Gbps :
NNI (future rel.)
Wavelength range
1st window for 10GBaseS

2nd window for XI641
3rd window for XS642B
User interface type

10GBASES
I64.1 / 10GBASEL
S64.2b / 10GBASEE
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
422 / 554



WDM interface type
L64.2; DWDM interface for long haul (APD detector)

Wavelength range
3rd window (1528 > 1565 nm)
Center frequency
Bit rate
10.709 Gbps
Fiber type
9/125 m SMF
Connector type
MU horizontal

Type of Receiver
APD
Sensitivity including path penalty and for

BER = 1012) and overload:
with optical noise
without optical noise
19 dBm to 9 dBm
23 dBm to 5 dBm
VOA dynamic range
20 dB
Max. receiver reflectance
27 dB

NDC configuration
NDC0
NDC1
Max. EOL center frequency deviation

Dispersion
No OSNR margin
2 dB OSNR margin
100 pm
0 > +1300ps/nm
0 > +1600ps/nm
Max. 20 dB width
0.5 nm

Pout (VOA at min.)
500 > +800ps/nm
3 dB
4.0 > +7.0 dBm
2.5 > +7.0 dBm
20 dB step 1
Minimum Extintion Ratio
8.2 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(*) Contact Alcatel for design with negative chromatic dispersion
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
423 / 554
5.3.1.8 10 Gbps Optical Channel Card (OCC10_NA) characteristics

9953.28 Mbps : STM64/OC192/10 GBE WAN

10.709 Gbps :(STM64/OC192/10GBEWAN)+FEC
10.3125 Gbps : 10 GBE LAN
User interface type
VSR20002R1 standard (similar to I64.1)
Fiber type
Singlemode (SMF)
Connector type
MU horizontal

Wavelength range
1531 nm, 1551 nm
Sensitivity @ BER = 1012 including path penalty 14 dBm

1 dBm
1 dB
27 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Wavelength range
1531 nm, 1551 nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
30 dB
min : 6 dBm
max : 1 dBm
Transmission length
20 Km
6 dB
Shutdown time
< 5 ms
Reactivation time
< 30 ms
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
424 / 554



WDM interface type
L64.2

1528 > 1565 nm
Center frequency
Bit rate, WDM side
10709 Mbps
Fiber type
Singlemode (SMF)
Connector type
MU horizontal

Type of Receiver
APD
Sensitivity including path penalty and for

BER = 1012) and overload:
23 dBm to 5 dBm
VOA dynamic range
20 dB
27 dB
(no optical noise)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Max EOL center frequency deviation
100 pm
Dispersion
0 to >1600ps/nm
Maximum 20 dB width
0.5 nm
30 dB
Optical Output power (VOA at min)
+1.5 > +7.0 dBm
20 dB, step 1
8.2 dB
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
425 / 554
STM1 SFP (S1.1, FE,

FDDI, 100BaseLX)
STM1 SFP S1.1

W/DDM
Addressed wavelength (nm)
1261 > 1360
1261 > 1360
Min. launched power (dBm)
15
15
Max launched power (dBm)
SFP module type
Allowed bitrates
Min. extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
Max. 20dB bandwidth (nm)
NA
NA
Max. RMS width (nm)
7.7
7.7
NA
NA
100 > +100
100 > +100
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E10
28
28
Minimum overload (dBm)
Max optic. path penalty (dB)
Max receiver reflect. (dB)
14
14
Optical connector (Tx/Rx)
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
S1.1 / S1.1
S1.1DDM / S1.1
STM1 SFP L1.1
STM1 SFP L1.2
1270 > 1360
1480 > 1580
2.048 Mbps > 155.52 Mbps
155.52 Mbps
10
10
Max. RMS width (nm)
NA
Minimum SMSR (dB)
30 if DFB laser
30
Max chromatic disp. (ps/nm)
250 > +250
1900
34
34
10
10
14
25
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
L1.1 / L1.1
L1.2 / L1.2
Spectral width
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Fiber type
Acronym / Interface type
SFP module type
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
100 Mbps > 155.52 Mbps
Fiber type
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
426 / 554

5.3.1.9 SPF modules optical characteristics
STM4 SFP S4.1
STM4 SFP S4.1

W/DDM
1274 > 1355
1274 > 1356
15
15
622.080 Mbps
622.080 Mbps
8.2
8.2
NA
NA
Max. RMS width (nm)
2.5
2.5
NA
NA
100 > +100
100 > +100
28
28
14
14
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
S4.1 / S4.1
S4.1DDM / S4.1
STM4 SFP L4.1
STM4 SFP L4.2
1280 > 1335
1480 > 1580
+2
+2
622.080 Mbps
622.080 Mbps
10
10
NA
NA
30
30
250 > +250
1900
28
28
14
27
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
L4.1 / L4.1
L4.2 / L4.2

SFP module type
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Fiber type
SFP module type
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width

Max. RMS width (nm)
Minimum SMSR (dB)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fiber type
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
427 / 554
STM16 SFP I16.1
STM16 SFP I16.1 W/DDM
1270 > 1360
1270 > 1360
10
10
Allowed bitrates
2.48832 Gbps
8.2
8.2
NA
NA
NA
NA
12 > +12
12 > +12
18
18
27
27
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
I16.1 / I16.1
I16.1DDM / I16.1
Spectral width

Max. RMS width (nm)
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Fiber type
SFP module type
STM16 SFP (S16.1,

STM16 SFP S16.1 W/DDM
2FC stop gap)
1270 > 1360
1270 > 1360
Allowed bitrates
2.125 Gbps; 2.48832 Gbps

8.2
8.2
NA
NA
30
30
100 > +100
100 > +100
18
18
27
27
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
S16.1 / S16.1
S16.1DDM / S16.1
Spectral width

Max. RMS width (nm)
Minimum SMSR (dB)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SFP module type
Fiber type
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
428 / 554

SFP module type
STM16 SFP L16.2
1280 > 1335
1500 > 1580
+3
+3
2488.320 Mbps
2488.320 Mbps
8.2
8.2
NA
NA
30
30
250 > +250
+1600
27
28
27
27
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
L16.1 / L16.1
L16.2 / L16.2
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width

Max. RMS width (nm)
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Fiber type
SFP module type
STM16 SFP S16.1

multirate multiformat W/DDM
1290 > 1330
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width

Max. RMS width (nm)
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ BER=1E10,
for all bit rates and patterns
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
STM16 SFP L16.1
100 Mbps > 2.7 Gbps

for bit rates > 2.125Gbps = 8.2
for bit rates < 2.125Gbps = 9
1
NA
30
100 > +100
18
27
LC
Fiber type
ED
SMF
S16AnyDDM / S161 multirate multiformat
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
429 / 554
SFP module type
FE/FDDI SFP 100 Base LX

1260 > 1360
15
Allowed bitrates
125 Mbps

Spectral width
NA
Max. RMS width (nm)
7.7
Minimum SMSR (dB)
NA
NA
26
NA
14
LC
Fiber type
SMF
SFP module type
100B LX / 100BASEL
1.25GbE SFP
1.25GbE SFP
GbE1000SX GbE1000SX W/DDM
1.25GbE SFP
GbE1000ZX
820 > 860
820 > 860
1540 > 1570
9.5
9.5
+5
1.25 Gbps
1.25 Gbps
1.25 Gbps
NA
NA
Max. RMS width (nm)
0.85
0.85
NA
NA
NA
30
1200
17
17
24
12
12
12
LC
LC
LC
MMF
MMF
SMF
1GbESX /
1000BASES
1GbESXDDM /
1000BASES
1GbEZX /
1000BASEZ
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Fiber type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
430 / 554
1.25GbE SFP
GbE1000LX/LH
1.25GbE SFP GbE 1000LX/

LH W/DDM
1270 > 1355
1270 > 1355
11
11
1.25 Gbps
1.25 Gbps
NA
NA
NA
NA
19
19
12
12
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
1GbELX / 1000BASEL
1GbELXDDM / 1000BASEL

SFP module type
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width

Max. RMS width (nm)
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Fiber type
1.25GbE SFP
GbE1000SX BASIC
1.25GbE SFP GbE

1000LX/LH BASIC
820 > 860
1270 > 1355
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
1.25 Gbps
1.25 Gbps
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
Max. RMS width (nm)
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
Minimum SMSR (dB)
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
SFP module type
Allowed bitrates
Spectral width
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fiber type
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
431 / 554
SFP 1FC, 2FC 1310 nm

W/DDM
830 >860
1265 > 1370
10
9.5
Allowed bitrates
1.0625 Gbps; 2.125 Gbps
NA
NA
Max. RMS width (nm)
0.85
see 1
NA
NA
1.0625 Gbps = 17
2.125 Gbps = 15
20
12
12
LC
LC
MMF
SMF
FC/2FCmm / FC/2FCmm
FC/2FCsm / FC/2FCsm
Spectral
width
Minimum SMSR (dB)

Minimum sensitivity (dBm) with fiber,
@ BER=1E12
Fiber type

SFP 1FC, 2FC 850 nm

W/DDM
SFP module type
1. See figure 18 and figure 19 of the Physical interfaces FCPI2 Rev. 30, 2002 (FC/2FC standard)
SFP module type

APD CWDM (Silver)
1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610
Allowed bitrates
100 Mbps > 2.7 Gbps

8.2
8.2
Minimum SMSR (dB)
30
30
1600 @ 1610nm
1100 @ 1470nm
1000 @ 1610nm
700 @ 1470nm
Minimum sensitivity (dBm),

@ BER=1E12
28
18
27
27
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PIN CWDM (Bronze)
Fiber type
ED
CWA147 > CWA161 / APD CWDM CWP147 > CWP161 / PIN CWDM
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
432 / 554

SFP module type
APD CWDM (Silver) BASIC
1470, 1490, 1510, 1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
Allowed bitrates
100 Mbps > 2.7 Gbps
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
Minimum SMSR (dB)
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
Minimum sensitivity (dBm),

@ BER=1E12
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
contact Alcatel
contact Alcatel

Fiber type
SFP module type
APD DWDM
1527,99 to 1563,86 nm
Maximum wavelength deviation EOL (pm)

Allowed bitrates
100
100 Mbps > 2.66 Gbps
8.2
0.5
Minimum SMSR (dB)
30
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
PIN CWDM (Bronze) BASIC
1800 / 2400 (Note 1)
28
Minimum sensitivity (dBm), @ 1310nm
20
2 / 3 depending on dispersion (Note 1)
27
LC
Fiber type
SMF
DWA200 > DWA600 / APD DWDM
Note 1 : 2 dB path penalty corresponds to a dispersion of 1800 ps/nm/km, 3 dB to 2400 ps/nm/km.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
433 / 554
5.3.1.10 XFP modules optical characteristics
I64.1/10GbE Base L
S642b/10GbE Base E
1290 > 1330
1530 > 1565
+2
Allowed bitrates
62
8.2
Spectral width: max. 20dB bandwidth (nm)
0.25
Minimum SMSR (dB)
30
30
60
800
11
14
0.5
14
27
LC
LC
SMF
SMF
XFP module type
XI641 / I64.1/10GBASEL XS642 / S64.2b/10GBASEE
10GbE Base S
840 > 860
7.3
Allowed bitrates
9.95328Gbps; 10.3125 Gbps

3
Spectral width: max. 20dB bandwidth (nm)
See IEEE 802.3ae Triple

Tradeoff Curves (TTC)
Minimum sensitivity with fibre (dBm), @

BER=1E12
11
9.9
12
LC
Fiber type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9.95328Gbps; 10.3125 Gbps; 10.709 Gbps
Fiber type
ED

XFP module type
MMF
X10GBASES / 10GBASES
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
434 / 554
5.3.1.11 4 x ANY, 4 x ANY_S, 4xANY_P TDM Concentrators characteristics

Drawers Rx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type
Multimode 62.5 / 125 m (MMF)
Optical connector type
LC
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)

Data rate
125 Mbps (100ppm) : Fast Ethernet, FDDI

200 Mbps (100ppm) : ESCON
270 Mbps (100ppm) : Digital Video
Operating wavelength
1270 > 1380 nm
-28 dBm
-8 dBm
NA
12.5 dB
Drawer Rx : STM1, STM4 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)

Data rate
155.520 Mbps (20ppm) : STM1

622.080 Mbps (20ppm) : STM4
1270 > 1380 nm
-28 dBm
-8 dBm
NA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification (Rx)
ED
Data rate
1025 Gbps (100ppm) : Gigabit Ethernet

1062.5 Gbps (100ppm) : FICON, Fiber Channel
1270 > 1355 nm
-20 dBm
-3 dBm
NA
12 dB
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
435 / 554
Drawers Tx : 1310 nm optical interfaces specification

Fiber type
Singlemode 9 / 125 m (SMF)
Laser type
Class 1 Laser Safety
LC

Drawer Tx : common 1310 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification

Data rate

Central wavelength
1270 > 1356 nm
Maximum RMS width
2.5 nm
NA dB
min : 15 dBm
max : 8 dBm
8.2 dB
Shutdown time
< 5 ms
Reactivation time
< 30 ms
Drawer Tx : STM1, STM4 1310 nm cartridge specification

Data rate
155.520 Mbps (20ppm) : STM1

622.080 Mbps (20ppm) : STM4
Central wavelength
1270 > 1356 nm
Maximum RMS width
2.5 nm
NA dB
min : 15 dBm
max : 8 dBm
8.2 dB
Shutdown time
< 5 ms
Reactivation time
< 30 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 1310 nm cartridge specification

Data rate

Central wavelength
1270 > 1355 nm
Maximum RMS width
4 nm
NA dB
min : 12 dBm
max : 3 dBm
9 dB
Shutdown time
< 5 ms
Reactivation time
< 30 ms
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
436 / 554
Drawers Rx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification

Drawer Rx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification

Fiber type
LC
Drawer Rx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Data rate

770 860 nm
-17 dBm
0 dBm
NA
12 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drawer Rx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Data rate

830 > 860 nm
-17 dBm
0 dBm
NA
12 dB
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
437 / 554
Drawers Tx : 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Fiber type
Laser type
Class 1 Laser Safety
LC

Drawer Tx : common 850 nm optical interfaces specification
Drawer Tx : Low Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Data rate

Central wavelength
830 > 860 nm
Maximum RMS width
30 nm
NA
min : 9.5 dBm

max : 1.5 dBm
9 dB
Shutdown time
< 0.5 ms
Reactivation time
< 300 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Drawer Tx : High Frequency 850 nm cartridge specification

Data rate

Central wavelength
830 > 860 nm
Maximum RMS width
30 nm
NA
min : 9.5 dBm

max : 1.5 dBm
9 dB
Shutdown time
< 0.5 ms
Reactivation time
< 300 ms
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
438 / 554
4XANY Digital Video electrical drawer interfaces specification

Common electrical interfaces specification

Connector type
BNC
Bit rate
270 Mbps
Drawer Rx : electrical cartridge specification

Terminating impedance (RL > 15 dB)
75 OHMs
Maximum path
40 dB
Interference rejection
d.c.
below 1KHz
1 KHz to 5 MHz
above 5 MHz
: 2.5V
: 2.5V
: 0.1V
: 0.04V
Drawer Tx : electrical cartridge specification

Output impedance (RL > 15 dB)
75 OHMs
Signal amplitude (peaktopeak)
800 mV 10%
d.c. offset
0.5 V
Rise and fall times (between 20% and 80%)
0.75 > 1.25 ns
The Digital Video cartridge is a Low Frequency drawer dedicated to the Digital Video signal. It is used as
the other Low Frequency drawers.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This drawer is equipped with a BNC socket in place of the SFF optics in the other (optical) version.
This is the only difference with the other optical low frequency drawers.
All the 4xANY features provided by the other drivers are supported.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
439 / 554
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY)
User interface type
I16.1
Operating wavelength range
1266 > 1360 nm
Data rate
2488.320 Mbps 4.6 ppm
LC
Fiber type
Input power
18 > 3 dBm
18 dBm
3 dBm
27 dB

Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification
Agregate side Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification

User interface type
I16.1
1266 > 1360 nm
Data rate
2488.320 Mbps 4.6 ppm
LC
Fiber type
Maximum RMS width
4 nm
NA dB
10 > 3 dBm
8.2 dB
Shutdown time
<5 ms
Reactivation time
<30 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
440 / 554
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, agregate side (4 x ANY_S)

Agregate Rx : 2.5 Gbps optical interface specification

User interface type
S16.1
1270 > 1360 nm
Data rate
2488.320 Mbps 4.6 ppm
LC
Fiber type
Input power
18 > 0 dBm
18 dBm
0 dBm
1 dB
27 dB
Agregate Tx : 2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification

User interface type
S16.1
1270 > 1360 nm
Data rate
2488.320 Mbps 4.6 ppm
LC
Fiber type
Maximum RMS width
1 nm
NA dB
5 > 0 dBm
8.2 dB
Shutdown time
<5 ms
Reactivation time
<30 ms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
441 / 554
2.5 Gbps optical interfaces specification, aggregate side (4 x ANY_P)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following interfaces (SFP modules) are used with 4xANY_P, aggregate side
STM16 SFP (Intraoffice and Short haul interface)
PIN (Bronze) and APD (Silver) CWDM SFP
APD DWDM SFP
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
442 / 554
5.3.1.12 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC) optical characteristics

MVAC optical interfaces specification

Fiber type
Single mode (SMF)
MU horizontal
Wavelength range
1528 > 1610 nm
Insertion losses (IL)
3 dB
Attenuation dynamic range including IL

(on each VOA input)
3 > 20 dB ; step = 0.5 dB
Attenuation accuracy
0.5 dB
Response time
< 5 ms
Output measurement
50 > +17 dBm
Optical ports levels

Optical input power (on both In1 & In2 inputs)
32 > +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Optical output power (on both Out1 & Out2 outputs) 52 > +17 dBm
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
443 / 554
5.3.2.1 L1 band Mux/Demux with expansion + supervision (OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) and with expansion (OMDX8100_M_L1_X)
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS optical characteristics

MUX side specification
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Input power:
single channels
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
extrainput
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
expansion input
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
supervision input
1 > +1 dBm
Insertion loss (max.)
single channels
5.35 dB
4.95 dB
extrainput
3.1 dB
2.7 dB
expansion
1.7 dB
1.3 dB
supervision
15 dB
Isolation (adjacent channels) min
15 dB
15 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output
Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
table continue
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
444 / 554

5.3.2 DWDM Multiplexer units (OMDX) optical characteristics

DEMUX side specification
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
Input power
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
single channels
5.55 dB
4.95 dB
extraoutput
3.3 dB
2.7 dB
expansion
1.9 dB
1.3 dB
supervision
2.5 dB
2.5 dB
Output power
single channels
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
extraoutput
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
expansion output
32 > +17 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
supervision output
53 > 14 dBm
22 dB
22 dB
Isolation (non adjacent channels), min
30 dB
35 dB
General characteristics
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
OMDX8100_M_L1_X
L1 band channels
L1 band channels central wavelenght
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38

1553.33 nm (ch 30); 1552.52 nm (ch 31);
1551.72 nm (ch 32); 1550.92 nm (ch 33);
1549.32 nm (ch 35); 1548.51 nm (ch 36);
1547.72 nm (ch 37);1546.92 nm (ch 38)
channel bandwidth at 0.5 dB
0.11 nm
0.25 nm
channel bandwidth at 3 dB
0.15 nm
0.3 nm
endtoend IL (max)
9.7 dB
8.7 dB
Isolation (LB vs SB) min
15 dB
15 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
445 / 554
5.3.2.2 L2 and S1 band Mux/Demux

OMDX8100_M_L2 and OMDX8100_M_S1 optical characteristics

Input power:
single channels
32 > +17 dBm
extrainput
32 > +17 dBm
single channels
3.75 dB
extrainput
1.5 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
single channels
3.75 dB
extraoutput
1.5 dB
Output power
single channels
32 > +17 dBm
extraoutput
32 > +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
L2 band channels and central wavelenght
1561.42 nm (ch 20); 1560.61 nm (ch 21);

1559.79 nm (ch 22); 1558.98 nm (ch 23);
1557.36 nm (ch 25); 1556.55 nm (ch 26);
1555.75 nm (ch 27);1554.94 nm (ch 28)
S1 band channels and central wavelenght
1535.82 nm (ch 52); 1535.04 nm (ch 53);

1534.25 nm (ch 54); 1533.47 nm (ch 55);
1531.90 nm (ch 57); 1531.12 nm (ch 58);
1530.33 nm (ch 59);1529.55 nm (ch 60)
0.11 nm
0.15 nm
endtoend IL (global) (max)
6.3 dB
rejection of dropped channels extraport (min)
12 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
446 / 554
5.3.2.3 S2 band Mux/Demux

OMDX8100_M_S2 optical characteristics

Input power:
single channels
32 > +17 dBm
extrainput
32 > +17 dBm
single channels
3.75 dB
extrainput
1.5 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
single channels
3.75 dB
extraoutput
1.5 dB
Output power
single channels
32 > +17 dBm
extraoutput
32 > +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S2 band channels
42; 43; 44; 45; 47; 48; 49; 50
S2 band channels central wavelenght
1543.73 nm (ch 42); 1542.94 nm (ch 43);

1542.14 nm (ch 44); 1541.35 nm (ch 45);
1539.77 nm (ch 47); 1538.98 nm (ch 48);
1538.19 nm (ch 49);1537.40 nm (ch 50)
0.11 nm
0.15 nm
endtoend IL (w/OMDX8100_M_L1_XS) (max)
6.3 dB
rejection of dropped channels extraport (min)
12 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
447 / 554
5.3.3 CWDM Multiplexer units (CMDX) optical characteristics

CMDX2 optical characteristics

Input power:
single channels
tbd dBm
OSC (SPV) channel
tbd dBm
single channels
3.5 dB
OSC (SPV) channel
1 dB
Channel passband at 0.5 dB (includes channel 14 dB

centre wavelength in 6 > +8 range)
Input power
tbd dBm
single channels
4 dB
OSC (SPV) channel
1.5 dB
Channel passband at 0.5 dB (includes channel 14 dB

centre wavelength in 6 > +8 range)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Connector type
MU horizontal
Fiber
9/125 m SMF
30 dB
Isolation (non adjacent channels) min
40 dB
endtoend IL (max)
5.7 dB
PDL
0.25 dB
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
448 / 554
5.3.4 DWDM Multiplexer units (OADM) optical characteristics

5.3.4.1 8 channels OADM with supervision
OADM8100_M_L1(L2/S1/S2)_S optical characteristics

Input power (SPV + 1530 1560 nm)
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
Typically 18 dB below the associated optical power

level measurement
Output power
single channels
extraoutput
supervision output
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
53 > 14 dBm
Insertion loss
single channels
extraoutput
4.75 dB
2.5 dB

Output power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output
Input power:
single channels
extrainput
supervision input
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
1 > +1 dBm
Insertion loss
single channels
extrainput
4.55 dB
2.3 dB
Isolation
inband (dropped vs added channels)
>24 dB
8 dropped channels isolation
adjacent channels
non adjacent channels
>22 dB
>35 dB
Supervision
Rx side IL
2.3 dB
Tx side IL
2 dB
SPV rejection (Rx side)
>28 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
L1, L2, S1, S2 band channels and central wave- see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444, para. 5.3.2.2 on page
lenght
446, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 447
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
449 / 554

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
Output power
single channels
extraoutput
supervision output
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
53 > 14 dBm
Insertion loss
single channels
extraoutput
4.45 dB
2 dB

Output power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output
Input power:
single channels
extrainput
supervision input
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
1 > +1 dBm
Insertion loss
single channels
extrainput
4.25 dB
1.8 dB
Isolation
inband (dropped vs added channels)
>24 dB
4 dropped channels isolation
adjacent channels
>22 dB
non adjacent channels
>35 dB
Supervision
Rx side IL
2.3 dB
Tx side IL
2 dB
SPV rejection (Rx side)
>28 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Channels range per board
20>23; 25>28; 30>33; 35>38; 42>45;

47>50; 52>55; 57>60
Central wavelenght per channel
see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444, para. 5.3.2.2 on page

446, para. 5.3.2.3 on page 447
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
450 / 554

OADM4100_M_chxxyy_S optical characteristics

OADM2100_M_chxxyy_S optical characteristics

Input power:
single channels
extrainput
supervision input
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
1 > +1 dBm
Insertion loss (max.):
single channels
extrainput
2.7 dB
2.2 dB
Rejection of added channels
13.5 dB
Isolation (adjacent channels)
22 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
single channels
extraoutput
3.9 dB
2.4 dB
Output power
single channels
extraoutput
supervision output
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
53 > 14 dBm
Rejection of dropped channels
13.5 dB
44 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3031; 3233; 3536; 3738; 4748
see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444 and 5.3.2.3 on page 447
Channel passband at 0.5 dB
0.25 nm
Channel passband at 3 dB
0.3 nm
Endtoend IL (max)
6.1 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
451 / 554
5.3.4.4 1 channel OADM with supervision

OADM1100_M_xx_S optical characteristics

Input power:
single channel
extrainput
supervision input
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
1 > +1 dBm
single channels
extrainput
2.2 dB
1.7 dB
Rejection of added channels
13.5 dB
22 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output
49 > 0 dBm; typically 18 dB below the associated optical power level measurement

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
single channels
extraoutput
3.4 dB
1.9 dB
Output power
single channels
extraoutput
supervision output
32 > +17 dBm

32 > +17 dBm
53 > 14 dBm
Rejection of dropped channels
13.5 dB
44 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
30; 31; 32; 33; 35; 36; 37; 38; 47; 48
see para. 5.3.2.1 on page 444 and 5.3.2.3 on page 447
Channel passband at 0.5 dB
0.25 nm
Channel passband at 3 dB
0.3 nm
Endtoend IL (max)
5.6 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
452 / 554
5.3.5 Mux/Demux 13101550 + supervision unit optical characteristics

SPV_F_1310_1550 optical characteristics

Input power:
SPV channel
1 > +1 dBm
1310 nm input
20 > 0 dBm
1550 nm input
32 > +17 dBm
SPV channel
14.6 dB
1310 nm channel
2 dB
1550 nm channel
2 dB
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min
30 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
SPV channel
1310 nm channel
1550 nm channel
2.1 dB
2.2 dB
2.2 dB
Output power
SPV channel
1310 nm input
1550 nm input
53 > 14 dBm
20 > 0 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
Isolation (1310 nm vs 1550 nm) min
30 dB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Channel passband at 1550 nm
1528 >1560 nm
1250 >1350 nm
Endtoend IL (max) at 1310 nm
4.2 dB
Endtoend IL (max) at 1550 nm
4.2 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
453 / 554
5.3.6 SPV_F_C unit optical characteristics

Input power:
SPV channel
1 > +1 dBm
extra input
32 > +17 dBm
SPV channel
14.2 dB
extra input
1.2 dB
Output power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Output

Input power
32 > +17 dBm
Monitoring Input
SPV channel
1.7 dB
extrainput
1.4 dB
Output power
SPV channel
50 > 14 dBm
extraoutput
32 > +17 dBm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1528 >1560 nm
1250 >1350 nm
Endtoend IL (max)
2.6 dB
PMD
0.15 ps
PDL
0.25 dB
connector type
MU horizontal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
454 / 554

SPV_F_C optical characteristics
5.3.7 Optical Amplifier Card (OAC) optical characteristics

Optical Amplifier Card optical interfaces specification

Parameter
Wavelength range
Symbol
Min
1529.1
Typ
Max
Unit
1561.8
nm
(32 channels) OAC1 and OAC2 optical characteristics

1st stage output power (EOL)
OOPV1
2nd stage output power
OOPV2
12
dBm
17
dBm
1st stage spectral gain excursion (1)
4.5
dB
2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1)
G1
2.2
dB
Noise figure (2)
NF
6.8
dB
(1): With an input signal power of 5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(2): With an input signal power of 11 to 5 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(32 channels) OAC1_L and OAC2_L optical characteristics
1st stage output power (EOL)
OOPV1
2nd stage output power
OOPV2
12
dBm
17
dBm
1st stage spectral gain excursion (1)
dB
2nd stage spectral gain excursion (1)
G1
2.2
dB
Noise figure (2)
NF
dB
(1): With an input signal power of 11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
(2): With an input signal power of 17 to 11 dBm and an output power of +17 dBm.
Optical ports specification
Fiber type
single mode (SMF)
MU/PC ; MU/APC for extra pump
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
I/O
Function
OAC1, OAC2 level
OAC1_L, OAC2_L level
VOA attenuation range
1 15 dB
1 > 15 dB
VOA input
24.5 +6.5 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
VOA output
26 +5 dBm
47 > +17 dBm
1st stage input
26 +5 dBm
47 > +17 dBm
1st stage output
3 +12 dBm
3 > +12 dBm
2nd stage input
18 +9 dBm
32 > +17 dBm
2nd stage output
+2 +17 dBm
+2 > +17 dBm
SPV extraction
SPV insertion
1st stage input monitor
Typically 20dB below the associated level measurement
1st stage output monitor
2nd stage input monitor
2nd stage output monitor
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
455 / 554
5.3.8 SPVM + OW and SPVM_H optical characteristics
SPV Receiver specification

50 dBm to 47 dBm
6 dbm
28 dbm
The 1510 nm receiver has a specified sensibility of 50 dBm. If the incident power is lower than
that value, the OSC BER is higher, but the supervision LAPD protocol corrects the errors so
that the supervision is correctly transmitted down to a power value of 53 dBm
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SPV Transmitter specification

Type of source
DFB
Wavelength
151010 nm
Maximum 20 dB width
1 nm
33 dB
min : 1 dBm
max : +1 dBm
8.2 dB
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
456 / 554

SPVM2 and SPVM_H optical characteristics
5.3.9 OSMC optical characteristics

OSMC optical characteristics

OSMC specification
Fiber type
Single mode (SMF)
MU horizontal
Selectable input ports (switch)
Wavelength range
1529.55 to 1561.42 nm
OCM channel power dynamic range
51 to 3 dBm
Total input power
52 to +17 dBm
OCM power channel power accuracy
1 dB
OCM power repeatability
0.25 dB
OCM absolute wavelength accuracy
100 pm
OCM acquisition time
1s
OSMC optical ports
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Port_p input ; p = [1 8]
ED
52 to +17 dBm
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
457 / 554
5.3.10 Optical Protection Cards (OPC) optical characteristics
TX side
Connector type
MU
MU
MU
MU
Fiber type
SMF
SMF
SMF
SMF
4.4 dB
4.4 dB
4.4 dB
4.4 dB
Optical level at TXIN Ch. 1&2
15 >+8 dBm
15 >+8 dBm
15 >+8 dBm
15 >+8dBm
RX side
SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with

jumpers
jumpers
connectors
connectors
Max. insertion loss
Connector type
MU
MU
MU
MU
Fiber type
SMF
MMF
MMF
SMF
4.4 dB
6 dB
6 dB
4.4 dB
Optical level at RXIN
24 > 0 dBm
24 > 0 dBm
24 > 0 dBm
24 > 0 dBm
TX side
MM OPC 850
with connect.
Max. insertion loss
Connector type
MU
Fiber type
MMF
Max. insertion loss
5 dB
Optical level at TXIN Ch. 1&2
15 > +8dBm
RX side
MM OPC 850
with connect.
Connector type
MU
Fiber type
MMF
Max. insertion loss
5 dB
Optical level at RXIN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SM OPC with MM OPC with MM OPC with SM OPC with

jumpers
jumpers
connectors
connectors
ED
28 > 0 dBm
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
458 / 554

SM/MM OPC BOARDS WIT/WITHOUT CONNECTORS SPECIFICATION
5.3.11 OMSP optical characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

OSMC optical characteristics

Fiber type
Single mode (SMF)
MU horizontal
Tx side specification
Input power max.
+17 dBm
Insertion loss max.
3.8 dB
Rx side specification
Input power max.
+17 dBm
Insertion loss max.
1 dB
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
459 / 554
5.4 Alarm characteristics
Each port card or access card of the equipment is provided with a bicolor (green/red) or threecolor (green/
yellow/red) HardWare Failure LED on the front coverplate.
This LED indicates:
when red, internal failure
when green, in service unit
when yellow, board in firmware download state (only for MCC, OCC10, WLA3, 4xANY, SPVM).
Centralized Equipment Alarms:

All the alarms detected on the units are collected by the ESC unit which will deliver centralized optical
indications (by means of LEDs on its front coverplate). Specifically:
Red LED URG: detection of an URGENT (MAJOR OR CRITICAL) alarm
Red LED NRG: detection of a NOT URGENT (MINOR) alarm
Yellow LED ABN: detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition. Type: active loopbacks,
forcing the unit into service, laser forced ON or OFF, try to restore after ALS
Yellow LED IND: detection of an INDICATIVE (WARNING) alarm
Yellow LED ATD: alarm condition ATTENDED
Refer to para. 2.5, page 129, where the front view of each unit and the LED locations are illustrated.
On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the relation between this two terminology is explained in Table 73. on page 460.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 73. Relation between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity terminology used for the ESC leds and ETSI market rack (TRU).
ED
Alarm severity terminology on C.T. and O.S.
Alarm severity terminology used for ESC leds

and for TRU in the rack
CRITICAL or MAJOR
URG, T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR
NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING
INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used)
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
460 / 554

Units Alarms:

Rack Alarms:
Some equipment alarms are carried to a connector and used to lightup alarm racklamps. Rack alarms
are physically available on the RAI board connectors.
Rack lamps are different in ETSI and ANSI worlds. The RAI card is made to interface with both standards.
The available alarms are the following:
PDU Front Panel LED Markings (ANSI):
CRI: critical alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
MAJ: major alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
MIN: minor alarm from one of the shelves in the rack
RACK: alarm storing from one of the shelves in the rack
TRU Front Panel LED Markings (ETSI):

URG: Urgent: major alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
NURG: Non urgent: minor alarm input from one of the shelves in the rack
ATTD: Attended: aknowledged URG or NURG alarm
SIG PRES: signal presence (power on)
HouseKeeping Alarms/Commands:
A set of housekeeping contacts are available, located on the 25 poles connector of the housekeeping
board.
Alarm Attending:
The detected units alarm condition can be stored through the ACO (Alarms Cut Off) pushbutton on the
ESC unit (Attended).
This operation will turn OFF the general red LED URG and will light up the ATD yellow LED on the
ESC unit (Attended); the attended command is also sent to the rack lamps (if present) through the RAI
board.
Troubleshooting:
This equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) for service, activation and
troubleshooting purpose.
Troubleshooting procedure for the equipment and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are described in the Operators Handbook.
Connection with the PC is achieved through the 9 poles connector (F interface) on the ESC board.
The unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network
in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Characteristics of the cited rack alarms and Housekeeping contacts interface (EM type) are inserted in
Chapter 5.1 on page 399.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
461 / 554
This section lists all the alarms that can be physically detected by each rack, subrack or any kind of board.
We give some maintenance indications for each problem with a test order to follow if necessary . The alarm
seen on the CT view are shown between brackets in the probable cause column.
5.4.1.1 Generic alarms for all the boards
The following table shows the equipment alarms common to all the boards (and subboards like SFP or
XFP modules) implemented in the 1696MS. We do not detail them for each card and we will only give their
specific events.
Table 74. Generic alarms common to all boards
HWsyst
Alarm type
name
Probable cause Default Severity (SA/

NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
HWF
Hardware
failure
repleacableUnitProblem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Access failure to boards due to 1. Plug and replug the

board
SPI bus failure
2. Replace the board
SPIDER failure
C_ABS
Hardware
failure
replaceableUnitMissing (RUM)
Maj / Min
The corresponding board is

missing: the board is provisioned but not equipped.
C_TYPE
Hardware
failure
repleacableUnitTyA wrong element has been

peMismatch (RUTM) equipped or provisioned (the
Maj / Min
expected CID is wrong)
Check the board

plugged in the slot and
the one provisioned.
ABNOR
Maintenance
Indication
unconfiguredEquipmentPresent (UEP)
Warn / Warn
Provision the new

board.
Plug the missing

board.
An element has been

equipped: the element board
is present but not declared.
N.B.
While the generic alarms are raised no firmware download nor configuration of the board can
be done.
N.B.
Generic alarms are detected by the SC and raised on the corresponding board.
5.4.1.2 ESCEC board

All the generic alarms except C_ABS (RUM), C_TYPE (RUTM) and ABNOR (UEP).
Table 75. ESCEC board specific alarms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
HWF
Hardware
failure
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
OBPS or EEPROM or 1 Deplug and replug

disk or flash memory
the board
or FPGA or LAN failure 2 replace the board
LAN_ALARM
(Note 1)
Hardware
failure
lanFailure (LF)
Min / Min
Loss of Q link. SH is
declared but not connected
Check LAN card Check

link between 1696 NE
and manager (OS)
Note 1 : Supported only if ESC provisioned in slot #1
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
462 / 554

5.4.1 Equipment domain alarms
5.4.1.3 ESCSC board

All the generic alarms except C_ABS (RUM), C_TYPE (RUTM) and ABNOR (UEP).
Table 76. ESCSC board specific alarms.
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
HWsyst
Alarm type
name
Meaning and remarks
C_FAIL
(Note 1)
Hardware
failure
serialCommunicationProblem (SCP)
Maj / Maj
Communication
problem between
EC and SC.
S_TYPE
(Note 2)
SW failure
A wrong software
versionMismatch (VM)
version was apMaj / Min
plied to the card.
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug the
board
2 Check LAN card
3 Check both PSC presence
1 Deplug and replug
the board
2Do the software download
Note 1 : this alarm is raised by EC but is relevant from the SC when provisioned in an expansion shelf or
a master shelf.
Note 2 : this alarm is raised by EC but is relevant from the SC when provisioned in an expansion shelf.
5.4.1.4 ESCFC board (ESC in slot #24)
All the generic alarms except HWF (RUP).
5.4.1.5 PSC / PSC2 / PSC3
All the generic alarms except C_TYPE (RUTM).
Table 77. PSC board specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Alarm type
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug

OBPS generation failthe board
ure
2 replace the card
5.4.1.6 HouseKeeping board

All the generic alarms.
Table 78. HK board specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Hardware
failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HWF
ED
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug the board
2 replace the board
OBPS failure
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
463 / 554
5.4.1.7 RAI board
Table 79. RAI board specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Alarm type
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug
the board
2 replace the board
OBPS failure
5.4.1.8 LAN_Q / LAN_IS Access board

Table 80. LAN board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug
the board
2 replace the board
OBPS failure
5.4.1.9 Intershelf link Master (ILINK_M) board

All the generic card alarms.
Table 81. ILINKM board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
External power supply failure
1 Deplug and replug

the board
2 replace the board
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
5.4.1.10 Intershelf link Slave (ILINK_S) board

All the generic card alarms except C_TYPE (RUTM).
Table 82. ILINKS board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Hardware
failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
HWF
ED
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
1 Deplug and replug

the board
2 replace the board
OBPS failure
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
464 / 554

5.4.1.11 User Interface board


Table 83. UIC board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug
the board
2 replace the board
OBPS failure
5.4.1.12 FAN board

Table 84. FAN board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
OBPS failure or FAN

component failure
1 Deplug and replug

the board
2 replace the board
5.4.1.13 FAN_C board

Table 85. FAN_C board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
HWF
Hardware
failure
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
OBPS failure or FAN

component failure
MINOR_
ALARM
(Note 1)
Hardware
degradation
(tbc)
batteryFailure
(BF)
Min / Min
Minor alarm on PMU.

Replace the defective recOne rectifier has failed in
tifier module.
the PMU
Hardware
failure
powerProblem
(PP)
Maj / Min
Major alarm on PMU.

Both rectifiers have
failed or the fan rectifiers
have failed or the 220V
power supply is down
MAJOR_
ALARM
(Note 1)

board
2 replace the board
1 Check 220V power

supply
2 Check fans of rectifiers
3 Replace both defective
rectifiers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note 1 : These alarms are related to the PMU that is not managed. The rectifiers module allow to provide
the 48V from alternative voltage source.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
465 / 554
5.4.1.14 OPC board
Table 86. OPC board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug

External power supply
the board
failure
2 replace the board
5.4.1.15 OMSP board

Table 87. OMSP board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
1 Deplug and replug

the board
failure
2 replace the board
5.4.1.16 OAC1, L_OAC1, OAC2 and L_OAC2 boards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 315. OAC block diagram.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
466 / 554


Table 88. OAC board specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
HWF
Hardware
failure
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
CVR
Hardware
failure
Optical safety cover is

opticalConnector
removed (automatic
CoverOpen (OCCO)
shutdown of the OAC
Maj / Min
)
PUD1
PUD2
Hardware
degradation
One of the pump latransmitterDegraded

sers may be nearing
(TD)
its end of life: efficienMin / Min
cy lower than 70%
Signal failure
inputPowerLoss
(IPL)
Maj / Min
ILOS2
OBPS
Maintenance
Rel

2 replace the board
1.1
1.1
Plan to change the

board.
1.1
Optical input power of

the 1st stage has fallen belowthe acceptable signal level.
1. Check the input

connections.
2. Clean up the connectors.
1.1
Signal failure
inputPowerLoss
(IPL)
Maj / Min

the 2nd stage has fallen belowthe acceptable signal level.
1. Check the input

connections.
2. Clean up the connectors
1.1
OLOS1
Hardware
failure
outputPowerLoss
(OPL) output 1st
stage
Maj / Min
Optical output power

of the 1st stage is below the acceptable
signal level
1. Deplug and plug

1.1
the board.
OLOS2
Hardware
failure
outputPowerLoss
(OPL) output 2nd
stage
Maj / Min

1. Deplug and plug
of the 2nd stage is be1.1
the board.
low the acceptable
signal level
ILOS1
OOR1
OOR2
OOR_
VOA
VOA_
TUNING_
FAILS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm type
configurationOr
Signal degra- CustomizationError
dation
(COCE)
Warn / Warn
Input or Output power

out of range (span or
IT has been modfied).
1st stage or 2nd stage
or VOA doesnt work
properly. The tuning
cannot be performed
Check span, IT value

entered by operator.
Check other alarms
2.0
within board (ILOS,
PUD, OLOS).
Check OAC in previous NE
Maintenance
indication
configurationOr
CustomizationError
(COCE)
Warn / Warn
Input or Output power

out of range (span or
IT has been modfied).
1st stage or 2nd stage
or VOA doesnt work
properly. The tuning
cannot be performed
Check span, IT value

entered by operator.
Check other alarms
2.0
within board (ILOS,
PUD, OLOS).
Check OAC in previous NE.
Maintenance
indication
configurationOr
CustomizationError
(COCE)
Warn / Warn
The tuning cannot be

performed because
the functionalities of
the board are not accessible
Check alarms within

board (HWF,
C_ABS,
C_NOT_ACC)
2.2
Other alarms: All the generic card alarms.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
467 / 554
5.4.1.17 SPVM board
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
Rel
replaceableUnitProblem (RUP)
Maj / Min
OBPS

2 replace the board
1.0
The optical output

power of the board is
1 Deplug and rebelow the acceptable
plug the board
loss threshold.
2 replace the board
Tx laser or Tx monitoring diode down
1.0
SUP_T
X1_elec
SUP_T
X2_elec
Hardware
failure
OutputPower
Loss (OPL)
Maj / Min
SUP_T
X1_opt
SUP_T
X2_opt
Hardware
degradation
The optical output

transmitterDegraded
power of the board is 1. Plan to change
(TD)
the board
below the minimum
Min / Min
threshold (3dBm)
2.0

5.4.1.18 SPV_F_C board
Table 90. SPV_F_C specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
OLOS
ILOS
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance

board
failure
2 replace the board
Signal failure
outputPower
Loss (OPL)
Maj / Min

of the Mux output is
belowthe acceptable
signal level
Check optical path between this card and

1310nm OR 1550nm channel
Check 1310nm OR
1510nm channel
Check monitoring diode
Signal failure
inputPowerLoss
(IPL)
Maj / Min

the Demux input is
below the acceptable
signal level
Check SPV_F_C in previous NE or monitoring

diode
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Other alarms : All the generic board alarms.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
468 / 554

Table 89. SPVM specific alarms
5.4.1.19 SPV_F_1310_1550 board

Table 91. SPV_F_1310_1550 board specific alarms
HWsyst
Alarm type
name
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
Maj / Min

failure

board
2 replace the board
Check optical path between this card and 1310nm
and 1550nm channel
Check 1310nm and
1510nm channel
Check monitoring diode
Check SPV_F_1310_ 1550
in previous NE or monitoring
diode
OLOS
Signal failure
outputPower
Loss (OPL)
Maj / Min
Optical output power of

the Mux output is belowthe acceptable signal
level
ILOS
Signal failure
inputPowerLoss
(IPL)
Maj / Min
Optical input power of the

Demux input is below the
acceptable signal level

5.4.1.20 MCC boards
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on :
MCC1_SDH, MCC1_ASY, MCC1_SYN
MCC2_SDH, MCC2_SYN
MCC3_SDH_SONET, MCC3_SYN. In this case, some more alarms can be raised on SFP module.
Table 92. MCC specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF

NSA)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
OBPS failure
Maintenance
2 replace the
board
Rel
1.0
B&W receiver alarms

There is no equipment alarm on the B&W receiver but only Transmission ones.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
WDM emitter alarms

One of the following
component is in
transmitterFailure (TF) failure:
Replace the board
WDM Tx
Min / Min
VOA
8x8 matrix
LOS_
WDM_
Tx
(only
MCC3)
Hardware
failure
DEG_
OUT_
WDM
transmitterDegraded
Hardware
(TD)
degradation
Min / Min
WDM laser may be

nearing its end of
life
Plan to change the

board
1.0
TOR_WDM
transmitterDegraded
Hardware
(TD)
degradation
Min / Min
The WDM laser

temperature is out
of range
Plan to change the

board
1.0
ED
2.2
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
469 / 554
Status indication
configurationOrCustomizationError (COCE)
Warn / Warn
The VOA is out of

range
Check VOA value.

Check if span has
been modified
2.2
WDM receiver alarms

There is no equipment alarm on the WDM receiver but only Transmission ones.
B&W emitter alarms
DEG_OUT_
user (except
MCC3)
transmitterDegraded
Hardware
(TD)
degradation
Min / Min
Degraded B&W laser
Plan to change the

board
1.0
The 8x8 matrix is

down
Replace the board
2.2
transmitterDegraded
DEG_ SFP
Hardware
(TD)
(only MCC3) degradation
Min / Min
User optical transmitter degradation

of SFP
Plan to replace the

SFP module
2.2
PROTECT_
FAIL
(SW alarm)
switch problem with Plan to change the

OSNCP
board
1.0
LOC_U
Hardware
ser_Tx
failure
(only MCC3)
Hardware
failure
Maj / Min
Maj / Min

5.4.1.21 SFP modules
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on all SFP modules:
Table 93. SFP specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Unit not
known
RUU
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnitUnknown (RUU)
Warn / Warn
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
Rel
SFP plugged not

ALCATEL
Plan to replace the

SFP module
2.2a
Receiver alarms
Emitter alarms
DEG_SFP
Hardware
degradation
transmitterDegraded (TD)
Min / Min
User optical
transmitter degradation of SFP
Plan to replace the

SFP module
2.2a
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
470 / 554

OORVOA
(except
MCC1)

5.4.1.22 WLA2 boards

The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on:
WLA2M
WLA2M_OP.
Table 94. WLA2 specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
HWF
Alarm type
Hardware
failure

NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maj / Min
OBPS failure
Maintenance
Rel
1 Deplug and replug 2.2a

the board
2 replace the board
Port #U (U=1..4) receiver alarms

Alarms are raised by SFP module
Port #U (U=1..4) emitter alarms
2.2a

WLA3CD
WLA3CDOP.
Table 95. WLA3CD specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks

OBPS failure
Maintenance
Rel
1 Deplug and re2.2a

plug the board
2 replace the board
Port #U (U=1..4) receiver alarms

Port #U (U=1..4) emitter alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
471 / 554
5.4.1.24 OCC10 boards
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
HWF
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks

OBPS failure
Maintenance
Rel
1 Deplug and replug

2.0
the board
2 replace the board
B&W receiver alarms

WDM emitter alarms
DEG_OUT_
WDM_Tx
Hardware
degradation
TransmitterDegraded (TD)
Min / Min
WDMlasermay be
Plan to replace the
nearing its end of life board
2.0
TOR_
WDM_Tx
Hardware
degradation
Min / Min
TheWDMlaser temperature is out of

range
2.0
Maj / Min
One of the following

component is in failure:
WDM Tx
VOA
8x8 matrix
FEC chip
LOS_
WDM_Tx
VOA_OOR_
WDM_Tx
Hardware
failure
Status indication
transmitterFailure
(TF)
Maj / Min
configuration
OrCustomizationError (COCE)
Warn / Warn
Plan to replace the

board
2.0
Replace the board
2.2
Input power out of

range (span has
Check VOA value.
been modified). VOA
Check if span has
doesnt work properbeen modified
ly. The tuning cannot
be performed (TBC)
2.2
WDM receiver alarms

There is no equipment alarm on the WDM receiver but only Transmission ones.
B&W emitter alarms
DEG_OUT_
user_Tx
Hardware
degradation
Min / Min
Degraded B&W laser
Plan to replace the

board
2.0
PROTECT_
FAIL
(SW alarm)
Hardware
failure
Maj / Min
switch problem with

OSNCP
Plan to replace the

board
2.0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
472 / 554

Table 96. OCC10, OCC10_LAN and OCC10_E specific alarms

5.4.1.25 4xANY board.

The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on:
4xANY
4xANY_S
4xANY_P.
Table 97. 4xANY main board specific alarms
HWsyst
name
HWF
Alarm type
Hardware
failure
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
replaceableUnit
Problem (RUP)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
OBPS failure
1 Deplug and replug

the board
2 replace the board
5.4.1.26 4xANY drawers.

Table 98. 4xANY drawer specific alarms
HWsyst name
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity (SA/NSA)
Link_Failure_DRWU
(U= 1,2,3 or 4)
Hardware
failure
replaceableUnit- No link between

Problem (RUP) mother board and
Maj / Min
drawer U
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
Rel
1 Deplug and replug

1.3
the drawer
2 replace the drawer
SFP alarms
Alarms are raised on SFP module
PROTECT_
FAIL_DRW_U
(U= 1,2,3 or 4)
(SW alarm)
Hardware
failure
replaceableUnitswitch problem
Problem (RUP)
with OSNCP
Maj / Min
1 Deplug and replug

2.2
the board
2 replace the board
Other alarms : All the generic alarms except HWF.

5.4.1.27 Multiplexer / Demultiplexer board
a)
OMDX8100_M_##

b)
OMDX8100_M_xx_XS and OADMn100
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OMDX8100_M_L1_XS_NOSPV, OMDX8100_M_L1_XS_SPV1, OMDX8100_M_L1_XS_SPV2,

OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards
OADM4100 boards
OADM2100 boards
OADM1100 boards.
These alarms are
OMDX8100_M_S2.
ED
not
raised
with
OMDX8100_M_L2,
OMDX8100_M_S1
and
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
473 / 554
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
HWF
Hardware
failure
Maj / Min
External power supply failure
1 Deplug and replug

the board
2 replace the board
OLOS
Signal failure
outputPower
Loss (OPL)
Maj / Min
Optical output power of

the Mux output is below
the acceptable signal level
Check optical path before transponders or

monitoring diode
inputPowerLoss
(IPL)
Maj / Min
Optical input power of the

Demux input is below the
Check previous cascaded Demux or monitoring diode
HWsyst
name
ILOS(for
Signal failcascadedure
Demux only)
Maintenance

c)
CMDX2
Table 100. CMDX2 specific alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
HWF
Hardware
failure
Maj / Min

failure

2 replace the board
ILOS
Signal failure
InputPower Loss
(IPL)
Maj / Min
Optical input power of the Check CWDMnetDeMux input is below the work or monitoring
diode

5.4.1.28 Optical Spectrum Measurement Card (OSMC)
Table 101. OSMC specific alarms
HWsyst
name
HWF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Cal_portP_O
OR
(1 P 8)
ED
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Hardware
failure
Maj / Min
OBPS failure
Signal degradation
configurationOrCalibration Factor of
CustomizationErport P is out of the
ror (COCE)
range [0;40] dB
Warn / Warn
Maintenance
board
2 replace the board
1. Check OSMC is correctly
connected to monitored
board via monitoring ports or
passing thru attenuator
2. Check optical power atmonitored port of the monitored board is correct
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
474 / 554

Table 99. OMDX/OADM specific alarms.

Auto_Equ_
Stop
Auto_Cal_
Stop
Maintenance indication
Maintenance indication
configurationOrCustomizationEr- Automatic equalization

stopped
ror (COCE)
Warn / Warn
1. Check that the OSMC,

MVAC or monitored boards
(OAC, OAC_L, Mux/Demux)
do not raise the following
alarms : HWF, C_Type, ABNOR, C_ABS,C_NOT_ACC.
2. Check there is no
ILOS_PortP_Total on OSMC
configurationOrCustomizationEr- Automatic calibration

stopped
ror (COCE)
Warn / Warn
1. Check that OSMC and

monitored board (OAC,
OADM, OMDX) do not raise
the generic alarms.
2. Check if there is no ILOS
or OLOS on OSMC monitored board
ILOS_PortP_
total (note 1)
Signal fail
failILOS_PortP_ ure
chx (note 1)
Loss of total input power at port P (1 P 8)

N/A
Loss of channel x (1
x 32) at port P (1
P 8)
1. Check path between each

monitored port and OSMC
inputs.
2. Clean connectors
Note 1 : these events can be raised when the operator is asking for spectrumacquisition or preequalization.
They are only measurement and are not in the AS.
5.4.1.29 Multiple Variable Attenuator Card (MVAC)
Table 102. MVAC specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
Alarm type

NSA)
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
Rel
2.0
Maj / Min
OBPS failure

2 replace the board
OOR_VOA_ MaintePortP
nance
(1 P 2) indication
configurationOrCustomizationError (COCE)
Warn / Warn
The VOA is out of

range
1. Check path before

2.2
MVAC port P
2. Clean connectors
OLOS_PortP Signal fail(1 P 2) ure
outputPower
Loss (OPL)
Maj / Min
Loss of output
power at port
P (1 P 2)
1. Check path before

MVAC port P
2. Clean connectors 2.0
3. Check attenuator
is working properly
Hardware
failure
HWF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
475 / 554
This section lists all the alarms that can be generated in the Optical Transmission domain to control the
transport quality of the system. The alarm seen on the CRAFT view are shown between brackets in the
probable cause column.
5.4.2.1 URU
URU alarmis raised on OGPI, OTS,OSPI and GMAU Trail termination when a RUP, RUTM or RUM probable cause is detected on the supported board.
5.4.2.2 SSF
SSF alarm is a software correlation of previously raised alarms.
SSF is not suitable for maintenance. See primarily raised alarms.
5.4.2.3 SPVM board
For each row, the column Trail Termination / Adaptation is split so as to show the objects for both following
cases:
SPVM board in slot#23 for 1696MS and slot#4 for 1696MS_C. This configuration corresponds to the
supervision of the OTS
SPVM board in different from slot#23 for 1696MS and different from slot#4 for 1696MS_C. Those
cells are greyed. This configuration corresponds to the supervision of a CPE.
In this table, the letter U stands for the port to take into account.
Table 103. SPVM board transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
LOF_U
U=1,2
Alarm
type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
Signal
failure
lossOfSuperviso- OTS_TT
ryChannelry Channel
Frame (LOSCF) OGPI_TT
or
Maj / Min
OSPI_TT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SUP_RXU Signal
U=1,2
failure
RS_LAPD
_ FAIL_U
U=1,2
(Note 1)
Signal
failure
(tbc)
MS_LAPD
_ FAIL_U
U=1,2
(Note 1)
Signal
failure
(tbc)
lossOfSuperviso
lossOfSupervisoryChannel
(LOSC)
Maj / Min
communicationSubsystemFailure (CSF)
Min / Min
communication
communicationSubsystemFailure (CSF)
Min / Min
Trail termination /
Adaptation
OTS_TT
OGPI_TT
or
OSPI_TT
OTS_TT
not used
OMS_TT
OGPI_TT
or
OSPI_TT
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
The signal frame cannot be recovered from

the output of the receiver. This alarm is
not raised when a
LOSC is detected.
Check input fiber.

Check SPVM rereceiver or remote
Optical input power lev
lev- SPVM emitter.
el of the SPV channel
has fallen below the acceptable signal level
The LAPD communication has failed.
RS DCC (D1D3) in
failure in port#U
Check input fiber.

Check SPV receiver
(check URU on OTS)
OTS).
Check fiber break or
failure in previous NE
The LAPD commu

communication has failed. MS
DCC (D4D12) in failure in port#U
Check input fiber.

Check SPV receiver
(check URU on OMS)
Check fiber break or
failure in previous NE
Note 1 : these alarms are raised by the EC.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
476 / 554

5.4.2 Optical transmission domain alarms
5.4.2.4 UIC board

none
5.4.2.5 OMSP board
Table 104. OMSP boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
ILOS2
ILOS3
Alarm type
Signal failure
Probable
cause Default
Severity (SA/
NSA)
Loss of Signal
(LOS)
Maj / Min
Trail termination / Adaptation
Meaning and
remarks
Maintenance
Signal loss on input port #2

Signal loss on input port #3
5.4.2.6 OAC boards

The following alarm concerns OAC1, L_OAC1, OAC2 and L_OAC2 boards.
Table 105. OAC boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
ILOS1
Alarm
type
Signal
failure
Probable cause
Trail termination
Default Severi/ Adaptation
ty (SA/NSA)
lossOfMultiplexSection
(LOMS)
OTS/OMS_A_Sk
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
Optical input power

level of the first stage
of the amplifier has
fallen below the acceptable signal level
Check fiber
break or failure in previous NEs
5.4.2.7 OMDX boards

The following alarm concerns only OMDX8100_M_L1_XS and OMDX8100_M_L1_X boards. No transmission alarms are associated to OMDX8100_M_L2, OMDX8100_M_S1 and OMDX8100_M_S2 boards.
Table 106. OMDX boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
Alarm type
Signal failure
ILOS
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
(LOMS)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Maj / Min
ED
Meaning and remarks
Optical input
power level of
the first stage of
OTS/OMS_A_Sk the demux input
has fallen below
the acceptable
signal level
Maintenance
Check fiber
break or failure
in previous NEs
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
477 / 554
The following alarms concern the following boards :
MCC1_SDH, MCC1_SYN, MCC1_ASY,
MCC2_SDH, MCC2_SYN,
MCC3_SDH_SONET and MCC3_SYN. In this case, some more alarms are raised by SFP module.
except LBER alarm not managed in MCC1.
Table 107. MCC boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
Probable cause
Alarm type Default Severity (SA/NSA)
ILOS_user for
MCC3 it is a
OR with
LOC_User_Rx
Signal failure
LBER_user (1)
Signal deg- lowBER (LBER)

radation
Maj / Min
LOF_SDH_use
r (2)
Signal failure
ILOS_WDM
and for MCC3: Signal failure
plus
LOC WDM Rx
LOC_WDM_Rx
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
Maj / Min
lossOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
lossOfWavelength (LOW)
Maj / Min
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
(>R1.1 only)
Maj / Min
LBER_WDM
(1)
Signal deg- lowBER (LBER)

radation
Maj / Min
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOF_SDH_WD Signal failM (2)

ure
ED
lossOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
Meaning and
remarks
Maintenance
OGPI_TT
User optical
signal input
power has fallen below the
acceptable signal level, or
loss of clock of
user incoming
signal (only for
MCC3)..
Check the optical path between user and

1696MS Check
receiver
RS_TT
Transmission
degradation
OGPI/
RS_A_Sk
The signal
frame cannot
be recovered
from the output
of the B&W receiver
OMS/
OCH_A_Sk
OGPI_TT
(MCC remote)
RS_TT
The WDM incoming signal

power is below
the acceptable
signal level, or
loss of clock of
WDM incoming
signal (only for
MCC3)..
Check the optical path between SDH and

1696MS.
Check transmitted signal in
client NE
Check the cabling between
MCC and OAC.
Check the
WDM line.
Might not be
raised with the
use of amplifier
Check the optical path between CPE and
1696MS.
Check receive
Transmission
degradation
The signal
frame cannot
be recovered
OCH/RS_A_Sk
from the output
of the WDM receiver
Check WDM
path for the
channel
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
478 / 554

5.4.2.8 MCC boards

OMS/
OCH_A_So
LOC_WDM (1)
(Not for MCC3)
Signal failure
transmitFailure
(TTF)
Maj / Min
OGPI/
OCH_A_So
(MCC remote)
SSF_User_Rx
SSF_WDM_Rx
Signal failure
Signal failure
The signal
frame onWDM
Tx cannot be
recovered. In
passthrough
configuration,
for am Check
adjacent MCC
for the channel,
or user receiver or user path
er,
path.
OGPI/
OCH_A_So
(MCC remote)
figuration, amplified networks, this can
means a loss of
signal
Check adjacent
MCC for the
channel, or
user receiver,
or user path.
CheckWDMline
or previous
NEs
serverSignal
Failure (SSF)
Maj / Min
OGPI/
RS_A_So
(MCC_SDH)
OGPI/
GDT_A_So
(other MCC)
Alarm synthesis of previous

raised alarms
see primary
alarms
serverSignal
Failure (SSF)
Maj / Min
OGPI/
OCH_A_So
(MCC_SDH)
OCH/
GDT_A_So
(other MCC)
Alarm synthesis of previous

raised alarms
see primary
alarms
(1) not managed in MCC1_ASY.

(2) this alarm is raised only if Trail Monitor has been created.
5.4.2.9 SFP modules
The following table shows the alarms which can be raised on all SFP modules :
Table 108. SFP specific alarms.
HWsyst
name
ILOS
Alarm type
Signal failure
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Maj / Min
ED
Meaning and remarks
OGPI_TT
Check the optical

Input optical powpath between
er has fallen beuser and
low the accept1696MS.
able signal level
Check receiver
Maintenance
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
479 / 554
WLA2M board
WLA2M_OP.
Table 109. WLA2 boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
LOF_SDH_
PORT_U
(U=1..4)
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
signal failure
losOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks
Maintenance
OGPI/RS_A_Sk
The signal frame

cannot be recovered from the
output of the
WDM receiver
Check path for

the channel
Meaning and
remarks
Maintenance

WLA3CDboard
WLA3CDOP board.
Table 110. WLA3CD boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LOF_SDH_
PORT_U
(U=1..4)
ED
Alarm type
Probable cause
signal failure
losOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
OGPI/GDC
The signal
frame cannot be
recovered from
the output of the
WDM receiver
Check path for

the channel
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
480 / 554

5.4.2.12 OCC10 board

Table 111. OCC10 boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
Trail termination /
Adaptation
Meaning and
remarks
Maintenance
Check the optical path between user and

1696MS Check
receiver
Rel
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
Maj / Min
OGPI_TT
User optical signal input power

has fallen below
the acceptable
loss of signal
level
Signal
LBER_User
degrada_Rx
tion
lowBER (LBER)
Maj / Min
RS_TT
Transmission
degradation
2.0
Signal
degradation
lowBER (LBER)
Maj / Min
RS_TT
Transmission
degradation
2.0
OGPI/
RS_A_Sk
The signal
frame cannot be
recovered
fromthe output
of the B&W receiver
LOF_SDH_
POR T_U
(U=1..4)
LBER_WD
M_Rx
LOF_SDH_
User _Rx
LOS_WDM
_Rx
LTCER_W
DM_Rx
HTCER_W
DM_Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm
type
probable
Cause
Default Severity (SA/
NSA)
ED
Signal
failure
Signal
failure
Signal
failure
lossOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
lossOfWavelength
(LOW)
Maj / Min
OMS/
OCH_A_Sk
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
Maj / Min
OGPI_TT
(OCC10 remote)
Signal
degradation
lowThresholdCorrectedErrorCorrectedError
Rate
(LTCER)
Min / Min
Signal
degradation
highThresholdCorrecsholdCorrecshold
CorrectedErrorRate
(HTCER)
Maj / Min
OMS/
OCH_A_Sk
OGPI/
OCH_A_Sk
(OCC10 remote)
OMS/
OCH_A_Sk
OGPI/
OCH_A_Sk
(OCC10 remote)
TheWDM incoming signal

input power is
below the acceptable signal
level
Check the optical path between SDH and

1696MS.
Check transmitted signal in
client NE
2.0
2.0
Check the cabling between

MCC and OAC.
Check the WDM
2.0
line. Might not
be raised with
the use of amplifier
Check the optical path between CPE
and 1696MS.
Check receiver.
2.2
Error rate has

fallen below
Low threshold
limit
2.2
Error rate has

reached High
threshold limit
2.2
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
481 / 554
The signal
frame cannot be
Check WDM
recovered
path for the
fromthe output
channel
of the WDM receiver
2.2
The SDH signal

Check WDM
frame cannot be
path for the
recovered from
channel
the FEC chip
2.0
The signal multitiframe

frame cannot
be recovered
from the output
of the WDM receiver
Check WDM
path for the
channel.
2.2
LOF_OTN_
WDM_Rx
Signal
failure
lossOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
LOF_SDH_
WDM_Rx
Signal
failure
lossOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
LOM_OTN
_WDM_Rx
Signal
failure
lossOfMulti
lossOfMultiFrame
(LOMF)
Maj / Min
SSF_User_
Rx
Signal
Failure
serverSignal
Failure (SSF)
Maj / Min
OGPI/
RS_A_Sk
Alarm synthesis
of previous
raised alarms
see HW alarms
2.0
SSF_WDM
_Rx
Signal
Failure
serverSignal
Failure (SSF)
Maj / Min
OGPI/
OCH_A_Sk
Alarm synthesis
of previous
raised alarms
see HW alarms
2.0
PTM
Payload PayloadType
Type
Mismatch
Mismatch Warn / Warn
OGPI/
OCH_A_Sk
(OCC10 remote)
OCH/
RS_A_Sk
OMS/
OCH_A_Sk
OGPI/
OCH_A_Sk
(OCC10 remote)
2.2a
5.4.2.13 OADM boards

The following alarm concerns OADM1, OADM2, OADM4 and OADM8 boards.
Table 112. OADM boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
Signal failure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ILOS
ED
Alarm type
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
(LOMS)
Maj / Min
OTS/
OMS_A_Sk
Meaning and remarks

Optical input power level of the first
stage of the demux
input has fallen below the acceptable
signal level
Maintenance
Check fiber
break or failure in previous NEs
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
482 / 554

OMS/
OCH_A_Sk

5.4.2.14 4xANY boards

4xANY
4xANY_S
4xANY_P. In this case, some more alarms are raised by SFP module.
Table 113. 4xANY boards transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
probable
Cause
Meaning and
remarks
Maintenance
Rel
OSPI_TT
optical signal input power from

NE has fallen
below the acceptable signal
level
Check the optical path between NE and

4xANY(_S).
Check receiver
1.1
Check the optical path between 4xANY

and MCC
1.1
LOS
(not in
Signal
the
failure
4xANY_P
case)
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
Maj / Min
LOF
Signal
failure
lossOfFrame
(LOF)
Maj / Min
OSPI/RS_A_Sk
The signal frame

cannot be recovered from the
output of the
STM16 receiver
LBER
Signal
degradation
lowBER
(LBER)
Maj / Min
RS_TT
Transmission
degradation
RS_TT
MSRDI has
been generated
by remote corresponding 4xANY
due to network
failure on physical or RS or MS
layers, or to the
loss of transponder link
MSRDI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarm
type
ED
farEndReceivMainteer Failure
nance
(FERF)
indication
Warn / Warn
1.1
Check transponder link, or

SONET SDH/
WDM network
1.3
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
483 / 554
5.4.2.15 All 4xANY drawers
Table 114. SDH_DRAWER, HF_DRAWER and LF_DRAWER drawers transmission alarms
HWsyst
name
ILOS_U
(U= 1,2,3 or
4)
SSF_U
(U= 1,2,3 or
4)
PkAIS_U
(U= 1,2,3 or
4)
PkRDI_U
(U= 1,2,3 or
4)
probable
Cause
Default Severity (SA/
NSA)
Trail terminaMeaning and

tion /
remarks
Adaptation
lossOfSignal
(LOS)
Maj / Min
GMAU_TT
Optical signal
input power
has fallen below the acceptable signal level
Check the optical path before 4xANY

1.1
user.
Check receiver
Signal failure
serverSignalFailure
(SSF)
Maj / Min
GMAU_TT
OR wired of
SDH alarms :
LOS, LOF,
MSAIS, AU
AIS, AULOP,
PLM, SQM,
LOM, LOA
2.2
Signal failure
aIS (AIS)
Maj / Min
GMAU/
GDC_A_So
Loss of a client
in remote
4xANY
Check optical
path before
client of remote 4xANY
PkRDI has
been generated in remote 4xANY
due to the
detection of a
Pk_AIS
Find the origin

of Pk_AIS
2.2
and refer to
Pk_AIS maintenance
Alarm type
Signal failure
Maintenance
indication
farEndReceiverFailure
GMAU_TT
(FERF)
Warn / Warn
Maintenance
Rel
2.2
5.4.2.16 Optical Spectrum Measurement Card (OSMC)

None.
5.4.2.17 Optical Protection Card (OPC)
Table 115. OPC transmission alarms.
HWsyst
name
SSFi
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SSFe
ED
Alarm type
Signal failure
Probable cause
Default Severity
(SA/NSA)
serverSignal
Failure (SSF)
Maj / Min
Meaning and remarks

Alarmsynthesis of
previous raised
alarms
Maintenance
See primary
alarms
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
484 / 554

The following alarms concern the HF_DRAWER, LF_DRAWER and SDH_DRAWER drawers.
5.5 Power supply characteristics

Input Voltage range (from station batteries)

DC/DC Power supply units output voltages
Input current
Power supply interface
5.5.1 Power consumption
This product is designed for low power consumption. Developing new components with very high integration density and low voltage supply leads to a significant reduction of power consumption.
If necessary several configurations can be taken into account; depending on the number and type of cards
of the deployed configuration, the power consumption may vary in a wide range.
Estimated max 1696MS power consumption
Estimated max 1696MS_C power consumption
Max power consumption per rack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
40,5 V 48 V 57,0 V
50,0 V 60 V 72,0 V
+ 3.6 V 3%
5.5 V 3%
+ 5.5 V 3%
+ 2.5 V 3%
Compact shelf = 4 A max
1696MS shelf = 15 A max
according to ETS 3001322
ED
450W a fully equipped shelf with 16 transponders

150W 4 channels line terminal (1 shelf)
1650W
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
485 / 554
5.5.2 Maximum power consumption of the boards and units

Maximum power consumption [W]
0.5
3
9.3
16.8
13.9
22.6
26
19
20
32
3 (each)
23.5
18.5
0.5
12
11
2
9.7
0,5
7.5
2.4
0.4 + Psec (*)
0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4x2)
0.4 + Psec (*) + (Ibatx0.4)
2.5
2
2.6
20
9.6

Unit
OMDX8100_M_xx, OADM1/2/4/8
CMDX2
ESC
MCC1/ MCC2
MCC3
OCC10
WLA2M, WLA2M_OP
WLA3CD, WLA3CDOP
4xANY(_S/_P) without drawers
4xANY(_S/__P) with 4 drawers
Drawer
OAC1 and OAC1_L
OAC2 and OAC2_L
SPV_F_C_1310_1550, SPV_F_C
SPVM, SPVM2
SPVM_H
MVAC
OSMC
OPC
OMSP
LAN
PSC
PSC2
PSC3
HK
RAI
UIC
FAN
FAN_C
(*) For each PSC board, Psec = 1/2(Pshelf 5V + Pshelf 3.3V)(10.85).

Pshelf 5V is the power consumption of the 5V feed.
Pshelf 3.3V is the power consumption of the 3.3V.
Abnormal service range
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 1696MSPAN equipment operating at 48 V does not suffer any damage when subjected to the following voltage range : 0 V to 40,5 V and 57 V to 60 V.
When the equipment operates at 60 V the voltage range becomes: 0 V to 50 V and 72 V to 75 V.
Protection to the station power supply is provided by 16A circuit breakers at the top of the rack.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
486 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5.6 Mechanical characteristics

Rack mechanical compatibility
ETSI ETS/E3, NEBS2000, Optinex compatible
1696MS subrack size
534 W x 270 D x 443 H mm
1696MS_C subrack size
446 W x 270 D (with cover) x 132 H mm
Boards size
285 mm high, 2slot wide (8 TE) (4xANY)

285 mm high, 1slot wide (4 TE)
88 mm high, 1slot wide (4 TE)
1696MS Subrack weight
8.5 Kg for an empty Central Office shelf and

36.0 Kg for a fully populated Central Office shelf
with transponders, optical amplifiers, mux/demux
and common cards
1696MS_C Subrack weight
5.5 Kg for an empty Compact shelf and

12.5 Kg for a fully populated Compact shelf with
transponders, mux/demux and common cards
Cooling
Fans located at the bottom of the shelf
Rack cabling
Vertical between rack and subrack front access
Electrical Connectors
IEC 603/DIN 41612

IEC 807 (SubD)
IEC 1691 (coax. 1.0/2.3)
BNC 50
BNC 75
RJ45
RJ11
Backtoback installation
Yes
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
487 / 554
5.6.1 Maximum weight of the boards and units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Weight [Kg]
1.1
1.1
1.1
0.9
0.85
0.9
1.0
0.93
1.2
1.2
1.25
1.65
0.1 (each)
1.14
0.9
0.21
0.79
0.9
1.1
0.18
0.3
0.13
0.28
0.13
0.12
0.12
2.2 (Fan module +filter)
0.330

Unit
OMDX8100_M_xx
CMDX2
OADM4, OADM8
OADM1, OADM2
ESC
MCC/ MCC2
MCC3
OCC10
WLA2M, WLA2M_OP
WLA3CD, WLA3CDOP
4xANY(_S/_P) without drawers
4x ANY(_S/_P) with 4 drawers
Drawer
OAC
SPV_F_C_1310_1550
SPV_F_C
SPVM, SPVM2
MVAC
OSMC
OPC
OMSP
LAN
PSC, PSC2, PSC3
HK
RAI
UIC
FAN
FAN_C
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
488 / 554
5.7 Environmental characteristics

Main environmental aspects of Alcatel products are:
energy consumption during manufacturing and use,
materials harmfulness and recyclability,
emissions to air, water or soil related to the manufacturing and the use of the product,
electromagnetic (EM) emissions,
value recovery at the product end of life.
The 1696MSPAN is designed to be compliant to both ETSI and ANSI standards.

The technical data of this chapter are referred to ITUT Recommendations, ETSI Standards or Telcordia
(former Bellcore) standard.
5.7.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ETSI compliancy
The CE markings printed on the product denote compliancy with the following Directives:
89/336/EEC of May 3rd, 1989 (EMC directives), amended:
by the 92/31/EEC Directive issued on April 28th, 1992
by the 93/68/EEC Directive issued on July 22nd, 1993
Compliancy to the above Directives is declared, when the equipment is installed as for the manifacturer
handbooks, according to the following European Norms:
EN 300 386 V1.3.2 (200305), environment Telecommunication Center
WARNING
This is a class A product EN55022. In domestic, residential and light industry environments, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Compliancy Class of Compact shelf on table configuration: B
5.7.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) norms: ANSI compliancy
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements for the system are specified in the GR 1089 (see note).
The recommendation related to immunity and the radiated emission are located section 31 & 32.
GR 1089 CORE
Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety Generic Criteria for Network Telecommunication equipment
issue 2, December 1997
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
5.7.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) condition

For the EMC condition see also paragraph 3.1 on page 35.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
489 / 554
The marking
printed on the subrack (refer to Figure 1. on page 39 and Table 7. on page 38) denotes
compliancy with the Directive 2002/96/EC On Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
The general principle is the producer responsibility in the management of the products he puts on the market when discarded by the owner. The producer responsibility now covers the end of life of the products
sold.
The European directive is effective in a country once transposed. The starting date for the producer responsibility for the European text is 13th August 2005.
All Alcatel products fall under in Category 3 of Annex 1A of the WEEE directive (Directive 2002/96/ EC)
i.e. IT and Telecommunication equipment under item other products transmitting sound, images or other
information by telecommunications.
Alcatel products fall under WEEE directive name: Other product or equipment of transmitting sound, images or other information by telecommunications in Annex 1B.
This mark will not cause any responsibility as all responsibilities will be defined by contract.
5.7.5 Acoustical noise
The acoustical noise level of the product complies with:
ETS 300 753 Environmental Class 3.1 for attended telecommunication equipment rooms (maximum sound level 7.2 bels)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The measurements have been performed according to the standards: ISO 3745 and ISO 7779
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
490 / 554

5.7.4 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
5.7.6 Environmental constraints
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5.7.6.1 ETSI compliancy

The technical data of this chapter are, where it is possible, referred to ITUT Recommendations or ETSI
Standards.
The system is designed for indoor operation with controlled air temperature. The complete environmental
conditions, including climatic, atmospheric and mechanical conditions are specified in the ETS 300 019.
The following environmental hazard levels of this standard is applied.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
491 / 554
5.7.6.1.1 Storage
ETS 300 01912 : 1992, hazard level 1.2

hazard level 1.2 : weatherproofed, not temperature controlled storage location.
This hazard level applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown in Figure 316. on page 494.
This hazard level applies to storage locations :
where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to condensed water, dripping water and to icing. They may
also be subjected to limited winddriven precipitation including snow;
where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area, and/or with heavy traffic;
in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The conditions of this hazard level may occur in :
unattended buildings ;
some entrances of buildings ;
some garages and shacks.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
492 / 554

The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. Storage:
Table 116. Main climatic conditions

Environmental parameter
Unit
Value
Low air temperature
25
High air temperature
55
Low relative humidity
10
High relative humidity
100
Low absolute humidity
g/m3
0,5
High absolute humidity
g/m3
29
Rain intensity
mm/min
no
Rate of change of temperature
C/min
0,5
Low air pressure
kPa
70
High air pressure
kPa
106
W/m2
1120
m/s
30
Condition of condensation
yes
Condition of precipitation
yes, winddriven
precipitation
Condition of icing and frosting
yes
Solar radiation
Movement of the surrounding air
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Climatogram
ED
2 (ETS 300
01911)
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
493 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
ED
20
10
10
50
40
30
20
30
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
8DG 17415 AA AA
554

ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
60
20
0.5
40
100
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Figure 316. Climatogram for hazard level 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
03
494 / 554
5.7.6.1.2 Transportation

The equipment meets the following requirements Vs. transportation :

ETS 300 01911 : 1992, hazard level 2.2 (Careful transportation).
This hazard level applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature and handling.
hazard level 2.2 covers the condition of hazard level 2.1. In addition hazard level 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries and trailers in areas with welldeveloped road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train specially designed, shockreducing buffers. Manual
loading and unloading of to 20 Kg is included.
Unit
Value
Low air temperature
25
High air temperature, air in unventilated enclosures
70
High air temperature, air in ventilated enclosures or outdoor air
40
Relative humidity
95
Absolute humidity
g/m3
60
Low air pressure
kPa
70
m/s
20
Rain intensity
mm/min
Solar radiation
W/m2
1120
Heat radiation
W/m2
600
yes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
495 / 554
5.7.6.1.3 Climatic for operating conditions
The functionality of the Equipment, Vs. Temperature, is in compliance with :

ETS 300 01913 :1992 , hazard level 3.2.
hazard level 3.2:
Partly temperaturecontrolled locations.
This hazard level applies to locations :
where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open windows. They may be subjected to condensed water and to water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitation;
where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to negligible vibrations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The conditions of this hazard level may be found in:
entrances and staircases of buildings;
garages;
cellars;
certain workshops;
buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
unattended equipment stations;
certain telecommunication buildings;
ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings...
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
496 / 554

The Equipment meets the requirements of ETSI Stand. without use of fans.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
AIR TEMPERATURE 0C

30
ED
20
10
0
5
10
20
1
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3
60
50
45
40
20
30
40
100
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Figure 317. Climatogram for hazard level 3.2: partly temperature controlled locations
03
497 / 554
Unit
Value
Low air temperature
High air temperature
45
Low relative humidity
High relative humidity
95
Low absolute humidity
g/m3
High absolute humidity
g/m3
29
C/min
0,5
Low air pressure
kPa
70
High air pressure
kPa
106
Solar radiation
W/m2
700
Heat radiation
W/m2
600
m/s
yes
Condition of winddriven rain, snow,...
no
Condition of icing
yes
Rate of change of temperature
Climatogram

2 (ETS 300
01913)
5.7.6.2 ANSI compliancy

The environmental constraints requirements for the system are also compliant with the GR 63 (see note).
GR 63 CORE
Network Equipment Building System (NEBS) Requirements : Physical Protection
issue 1, October 1995
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
498 / 554
6 HARDWARE SETTINGS

This chapter contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/subunit hardware setting options.
Each paragraph is dedicated to a single unit/subunit or to a group of unit/subunit with the same hardware
settings.
Each paragraph contains:
one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the setting
options to make
the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
In case of hardware setting modification in the same unit, all the different options are presented in the same
paragraph.
Details about identification Part Number and Change Status are defined in next paragraph.
N.B.
SZ1
IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF THE COMPONENT
When necessary to make TC Hardware Settings fitted on the rear side of the board, remove
the protective cover plate present on the same rear side and replace it at the end of the operation.
N.B.
The setting options described in this chapter must be used according to the document presented in
Figure 318. on page 503 , which shows the ON (CLOSED) position of microswitches.
Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should never
be modified.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Hardware Settings can be executed after having checked all the subunits belonging to a unit and
by using the presetting indication presented in this chapter.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
499 / 554
6.1 Part Number and Change Status identification
a Part Number: ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xxyy) (NOTE)

The last two ANV-P/N letters (yy, in the following stated as suffix) stand for a feasible alternative, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally compatible.
For example : the units having P/Ns 3AL34065AAAA and 3AL34065AABA are functionally compatible and, as regards the hardware settings, the hardware settings paragraph (described hereafter) is applicable for both.
a design & production series (change status): ICS,

The following table shows an example of evolution of ANV P/N + ICS
Table 119. Example of ANV Part Number + ICS evolution
ANV CODE
P/N
ICS
3AL 34422 AA AA
01
3AL 34422 AA AB
01
3AL 34422 AA AC
01
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
N.B.
In this example you can see that the production series is identified by the suffix + ICS in the
ANV code.
Some of the possible positions of the labels indicating the units P/Ns and CSICS are illustrated
in para. 3.4 on page 38.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same Part Number) but with different
ICS, each hardware settings paragraph describes with possible different parts the different setting options,
according to all the possible P/N + ICSs. For this purpose, when more than one setting versions are
present, a table at the beginning of the paragraph indicates the part to be used according to the corresponding suffix + ICS, taking into account that:
a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting options;
a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a handbook change;
the SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
from specified SUFFIX or ICS (included)
to next SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
500 / 554

Each unit or subunit is distinguished by:
EXAMPLE
The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!

N.B.
Taking into account the same unit of Table 119. on page 500:
Supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
Part in the paragraph
ANV P/N
FROM SUFFIX
FROM ICS
AA
01
AC
01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

ANV CODE
P/N
ICS
3AL 34422 AAAA
01
3AL 34422 AAAB
01
you will use the Part 1 of the paragraph for 3AL 34422 AAAA
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:

ANV CODE
P/N
ICS
3AL 34422 AAAC
01
3AL 34422 AAAD
01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
you will use Part 2 of the paragraph for 3AL 34422 AAAA
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
501 / 554
6.2 General safety rules and warnings

EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
3.1.3 ON PAGE 36
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
A TNV2 (battery) voltage could be present on R/M interface connector (cable
side); do not touch the pins when unplugged.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye
damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para. 2.2.4.2 on page 31.
GENERAL RULES
ESD connector protections, etc)
In order to reduce the risk of damaging the electrostatic sensitive devices, it is mandatory to use
the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack
when touching the equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws)
into the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
502 / 554

WARNING
6.3 Microswitches ON position

The following figure shows all the available switch types front view and relevant meaning.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 318. Microswitch front view and meaning
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
503 / 554
These units contain hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are reported in the following figures and in Table 120.
The subunit (METRO OAMDX CONTROL BOARD) P/N is 3AL 86638 AA.
This unit belongs to (see Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list)
all the OMDX8100 board types
all the OADM8100 / 4100 / 2100 / 1100 board types
the SPV_F_1310_1550 board types.

For details about the use of this hardware setting refer to the Maintenance Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FRONT VIEW
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
504 / 554

6.4 OMDX, OADM and SPV_F hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY
REAR SIDE VIEW
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
505 / 554


Table 120. OMDX, OADM and SPV_F presetting table
I DIP switches I2 e I3 sono usati per predisporre il numero di CID (identificazione di unit)
in funzione del tipo di board
I2 and I3 DIP switches are used to set CID (card identification) number in function of the board type
(OMDX_8100_M_xx, OADM_8100_M_x_S or OMDX_4100_M_chxx_yy_S)
The HW setting are:
When the METRO OAMDX CONTROL board
(3AL 86638 AAAA) is part of an:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OMDX_8100_M_xx
OADM_8100_M_x_S
Off
OADM_4100_M_chxxyy_S
ED
I2
I3
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
506 / 554

6.5 ESC hardware settings

This unit contains hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are reported in Figure 319. and in para. 6.5.1
The subunit (EQUIPMENT AND SHELF CONTROLLER) P/N is 3AL 86662 AA.
FRONT VIEW
Figure 319. ESC hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6.5.1 ESC Presetting table
Refer to correct SW Release of the operators handbook
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
507 / 554
These units contain hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are reported in the following figures and in Table 121.
The subunit (PBACONTROL SPVM) P/N is 3AL 86612 AA.
SPVM2 board
SPVM_H board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FRONT SIDE VIEW
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
508 / 554

6.6 SPVM2 and SPVM_H hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

REAR SIDE VIEW
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
509 / 554
Table 121. SPVM2 and SPVM_H presetting table

Il DIP switch I1 usato per settare il modo operativo dellunit : NORMAL o TEST
E usata solo la prima posizione.
I1 DIP switch is used to set the operating mode of the board: NORMAL or TEST.
Only the first position is used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Off: NORMAL mode

On: TEST mode
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
510 / 554

6.7 LANC (LAN access card) hardware settings

This unit contain hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are reported in Figure 320. and in Table 122.
The subunit (PBACONTROL LANC LAN ACCESS CARD) P/N is 3AL 86617 AA.
LAN_Q board
LAN_I board.
FRONT SIDE VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 320. LAN_Q and LAN_I hardware settings
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
511 / 554
Table 122. Presetting table
*=

FACTORY PRESETTINGS
hardware setting
Shelf Type
CM2
CM1
Master shelf
First drop shelf
Second drop shelf
Third drop shelf
Fourth drop shelf
Fifth drop shelf
and so on...
Per luso di CM1, CM2, CM3 vedi anche il Manuale Tecnico & Operatore
For CM1, CM2, CM3 see also Technical & Operators Hanbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Lunit LANC installata nel Drop Shelf nello slot 27 dellapparato OCP deve
avere connesso i punti 2 e 3 del TC15
A LANC board installed in a drop shelf, at the slot 27, of OCP equipment must
have the points 2 and 3 of TC15 connected.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
512 / 554

6.8 MCC3 hardware settings

This unit contains hardware settings: the switch position on the board and the relevant meaning are reported in Figure 321. and in Table 123.
The subunit (PBAMCC3 CONTROL BOARD) P/N is 3AL 95152 AA.
Refer to Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list of all the MCC3 boards P/N.
Figure 321. MCC3 hardware settings

Table 123. MCC3 presetting table
Operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Switch position (I1)
ED
1 = OFF
2 = OFF
3 = OFF
4 = ON
MCC3
1 = OFF
2 = OFF
3 = OFF
4 = OFF
MCC2
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
513 / 554
The subunit (PBAOCC10 CONTROL) P/N is 3AL 86785 AA.
Refer to Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list of all the OCC10 boards P/N.
1
STM64 /
10GbE WAN
2
3
10 GbE LAN
Figure 322. OCC10 hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Table 124. OCC10 presetting table
ED
M10 state
Operation
34 linked by means of a jumper
10 GbE LAN
23 linked by means of a jumper
STM64 / 10 GbE WAN
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
514 / 554

6.9 OCC10 hardware settings

6.10 OCC10_E hardware settings

The subunit (PBAOCC10 XFP CONTROL) P/N is 3AL 95229 AA.
Refer to Table 8. on page 86 for the detailed list of all the OCC10_E boards P/N.
Figure 323. OCC10_E hardware settings

Table 125. OCC10_E presetting table
Operation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Switch position (I1)
ED
1 = ON
2 = OFF
3 = OFF
4 = OFF
10 GbE LAN
1 = OFF
2 = OFF
3 = OFF
4 = OFF
STM64 / 10 GbE WAN
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
515 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
516 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MAINTENANCE
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
517 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
518 / 554

7 MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
3.1.3 ON PAGE 36
7.1 Maintenance introduction

7.1.1 General safety rules
SAFETY RULES
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc.
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.2.2.4.2 on page 31.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7.1.2 General rules
ED
ESD connector protections, etc)
In order to reduce the risk of damage the electrostatic sensitive devices, is mandatory to use
the elasticized band (around the wrist) and the coiled cord joined connect with the ground rack
during the touching of the equipment
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
519 / 554
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
ROUTINE (PREVENTIVE)
Routine (preventive) maintenance consists in carrying out a number of periodic operations to

minimize the risk of a failure on a link.
These operations can be scheduled or initiated by the equipment supervision system.
CORRECTIVE
Corrective maintenance consists in carrying out a minimum number of operations to repair a

fault as rapidly as possible.
These operations are initiated by the equipment supervision system and limited to replacement
of boards.
Definition of the technical level of the maintenance agent:
It is mandatory for the technicians in charge of the equipment maintenance to be familiar with the
measurement techniques used on equipment fitted with optical connectors.
7.1.4 Instruments And Accessories
There is a local terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the operators handbook.
Where TMN is implemented, an Operation System displays alarms and manages all the connected Equipments of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The need of special tools and accessories to perform possible routine and corrective maintenance procedures is described inside the procedures themselves.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
520 / 554

7.1.3 Maintenance aspects: definitions

7.2 Preventive maintenance

The ALCATEL1696MSPAN or 1696MSC equipment requires no systematic preventive maintenance.
Only a routine maintenance is performed on the fans Equipment.
7.2.1 Routine Maintenance every six months
It is suggested to carry out the following operations every six months:
nodust filter cleaning (ETSI rack) / substitution (ANSI rack)
7.2.1.1 Nodust filter cleaning / substitution

NODUST FILTER CLEANING / SUBSTITUTION
WARNING: BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING THE NODUST FILTER, CHECK
THAT THE PROTECTIVE ADHESIVE FILM HAS BEEN REMOVED.
SAFETY RULES
48 V dc.
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by rotating fans.
Every six months is has to be performed the following operations
ETSI rack: cleaning the nodust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
ANSI rack: substitute the nodust filter, either on FAN and FAN_C units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note: the period of one year is only indicative; according to the environmental conditions could be necessary to reduce this period.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
521 / 554
unscrew the two screws (1) ensuring the FAN_C to the compact shelf
insert the extractor in (2) and pull out to extract the FAN_C from the shelf
unscrew the screw (3) ensuring the nodust filter to the FAN_C and extract the nodust filter
(4).
To reinsert the FAN_C into the shelf
insert the nodust filter (4) to the FAN_C
screw the screw (3) to ensure the nodust filter into the FAN_C
properly insert the FAN_C into the shelf
screw the two screws (1) to ensure the FAN_C to the compact shelf
EXT
PMU
FAN
FILTER
FAN_C (for 1696MS_C)
nodust filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 324. FAN_C: nodast filter extraction
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
522 / 554

See Figure 324. on page 522. Only on FAN_C nodust filter, it is necessary to pull out the FAN_C unit
following the procedure below described:
7.2.2 Routine Maintenance every year

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:

power cables check
7.2.2.1 Power cables check
SAFETY RULES
48 V dc.
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding
(the rack is connected to the station ground).
7.2.3 Routine Maintenance every five years
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
It is suggested the replacement of each FANS unit (FAN and FAN_C) after five years of working.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
523 / 554
Since the Troubleshooting procedure is carried out with the use of the Craft Terminal , please refer ,for
details, to the Maintenance Section of the Operators Handbook.
FIXING THE UNITS (AND MODULES) INTO THE SUBRACK

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units (and modules, if any and if fixed by screws) into
the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following paragraph can be used as an help during corrective actions.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
524 / 554

7.3 Corrective maintenance (troubleshooting)

7.3.1 Fault location: alarm & status indication

This chapter guides you to localize the defaults occurring on the NE. Starting from an alarm indication,
it helps you to find the cause of the default and decide what has to be done to correct it.
Fault location can be performed by following simple rules. First, transmission domain alarms have to be
checked to locate the degraded NE. Then, when the faulty NE is identified, equipment domain alarms are
checked to locate degraded board or the faulty optical connection.
To give the operator the possibility to localize the faults, a few alarms are available:
in a terminal:
on each transponder MCC (no OChoverhead):
Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side)
Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side)
Laser degradation (WDM or user side)
LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS)
LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)

ILOS
RX
B&W
LOC
LDG
TX
WDM
M
U
X
LB
SPV
OLOS
SB
TX
B&W
RX
WDM
LDG
LOC ILOS
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
LB
SB
D
M
U
X
SPV
ILOS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 325. position of the alarms in a terminal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
525 / 554
in an OADM:
on each transponder MCC (no OChoverhead):
Loss of power at Rx side (WDM or user side)
Loss Of Clock at Tx side (given by the CDR, WDM or user side)
Laser degradation (WDM or user side)
LBER at user Rx (based on B1 calculation only for SDH/SONET signals)
LOS detection at equipment output (OLOS)
LOS detection at equipment input (ILOS)

passthrough channels
ILOS LOC LDG
SPV & ILOS

D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OLOS
SPV
RX
WDM
TX
WDM
LDG
TX
B&W
RX
B&W
ILOS LOC LDG

RX
B&W
TX
B&W
LOC ILOS LDG
TX
WDM
RX
WDM
LOC ILOS
SPV
OLOS
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
SPV & ILOS
passthrough channels
Figure 326. position of the alarms in an OADM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Alarms on transponders are described in the corresponding chapter (4.1).

Alarms on terminals input/output and on OADM output are described with OMDX and OADM units.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
526 / 554

7.4 Set of spare parts

7.4.1 Suggested Spare Parts
The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin
unit (see unit list in paragraph 2.2.3 on page 85).
7.4.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;
the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them
, gas);
if during transport the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make
sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
(e.g.
When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the
replaced one. For the presettings procedures see section HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION.
7.4.3 Particular rules on spare parts management

Whenever some units with flash-memories are common to different kinds of equipment or to different versions of the same type of equipment, it is possible to maintain one spare part only: this allows spare part
stock saving, even though software downloading will be necessary when the software loaded into the unit
(program part or data part) is different from that necessary in the equipment where the spare unit must
be used.
At the end of the commissioning phase or after an equipment data change, it is suggested to save the
equipment data, e.g. on floppy disk, and store this floppy disk in the spare part stock pointing out the equipment it refers to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7.5 Repair Form

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Figure 327. on
page 528.
The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
527 / 554
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
CUSTOMER NAME
ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
STATION/RACK
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER

Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
SUBRACK
SLOT
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
REASON FOR REPAIR
PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION /
TURN ON
CLEAR FAULT
DROP IN PERFORMANCE
OPERATION
INTERMITTENT FAULT
UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING
EXTERNAL
MAINTENANCE
AIR COND.
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE
NAME OF SENDER
FAULT STILL PRESENT

AFTER REPAIR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND
FAULTS DETECTED
UPGRADE
SOLDERING /
WIRING
A
STANDARD REPAIRING
I
NOT REPAIRABLE
(REJECTED)
BD
FL
MECHANICAL
M
PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
V1
P
DIRT
V1
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT
ADJUSTMENT
COMPONENT
C
CORROSION
V2
OTHER
SX
V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
Figure 327. Repair form
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
528 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DISMANTLING & RECYCLING
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
529 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
530 / 554

8 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING

8.1 WEEE general information
According to the European directive (2002/96/EC) Waste Electric and Electronic Equipment, from August
13th 2005 the producer of the equipment being sold, unless otherwise specified in the contract with the
Customer, is resposible for collecting and treating Electrical and Electronic Equipment.
Equipment put on the market after August 13th 2005 have a label (refer to paragraph 3.4 on page 38) affixed on the product. The presence of the black label indicates the product has been put on the market
after after August 13th 2005.
In next paragraphs is given a description example of how to disassemble an equipment; the same principle
can be applied to all the subracks and units composing the equipment.
The unit chosen for disassembly is one of the most complex.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Paragraph 8.2 describes the equipment disassembly; in detail:
paragraph 8.2.1 on page 532 lists the tools necessary for disassembly
paragraph 8.2.2 on page 533 describes the subrack disassembly
paragraph 8.2.3 on page 540 describes the unit disassembly
paragraph 8.2.4 on page 550 describes the procedure to apply in order to manage Hazardous
materials and components (example battery)
Paragraph 8.3 on page 552 reports the ECO declaration info.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
531 / 554
This equipment is designed for easy disassembly, by using screws and rivets for mechanical assembly
of subracks and modules. The variety of screw types is minimized.
Tools necessary for subrack and units disassembly are reported in paragraph 8.2.1.
The disassembly process depends on the respective recycling methods and can be derived from the delivered assembly instructions of the product.
These guidelinesare not mandatory.
They are given in order to optimize the disassembling process and material recovery as whole.
8.2.1 Tools necessary for disassembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following tools are necessary for unit disassembly:
# T9 TORX screw driver
# T20 TORX screw driver
Crosshead screwdriver
Wrench #
Scissors
Protection gloves
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
532 / 554

8.2 How to disassembly equipment
8.2.2 Subrack disassembly

In Figure 328. on page 533 is shown an example of subrack.

The same rules can be applied to the specific equipment to be dismantled.
In order to disassemble the subrack first remove the boards eventually present, included termination bus.
SUBRACK FRONT VIEW
SUBRACK REAR VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 328. Subrack front and rear view
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
533 / 554
Remove the two screws (A) in order to disassemble the handle as reported in Figure 329. on page
534.
Repeat the same procedure on the other handle.
Separate the two plastic blocks of the handle as reported in Figure 329. on page 534.
plastic block
plastic block
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 329. Handle removing and disassembly
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
534 / 554

Procedure:
Unscrew all the screws present on rear cover as reported in Figure 330. (dashed lines) on page 535.
Remove the rear cover in order to access the subrack Back Panel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 330. Rear cover removing
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
535 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unscrew all the screws fastening the Back Panel to the mechanical structure of the subrack as indicated in Figure 331. on page 536 (dashed line).
Remove the Back Panel from the subrack mechanical structure.

Figure 331. Back Panel removing
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
536 / 554

Remove the upper and lower guides from the subrack access area by unscrewing the relevant
screws as indicated in Figure 332. on page 537.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
BASIC AREA
ACCESS AREA
Upper and Lower guides
Figure 332. Upper and lower guides plane removing
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
537 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Remove the side wall by unscrewing the relevant screw as indicated in Figure 333. on page 538.
Remove the two contact springs from the side wall as indicated in Figure 334. on page 539 (refer to
paragraph 8.2.4 on page 550 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
Figure 333. Side wall removing
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
538 / 554


Remove the two guides of the basic area and the two optical fiber ducts by pulling them out as indicated in Figure 334. on page 539.
Unscrew all the screws present on the other side wall in order to complete the subrack disassembly.
Optical fiber duct
Optical fiber duct
guides
guides
contact spring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
contact spring
Figure 334. Optical fiber duct, guides and contact spring removing
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
539 / 554
Procedure:
Remove twe two screws (A) from the side coverplate as indicated in Figure 335. on page 540.
Figure 335. Side coverplate removal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Remove the screws (B) that fix the two levers and subsequently pull out them from the front plate
as indicated in Figure 336. on page 541.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
540 / 554

8.2.3 Unit disassembly

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 336. Levers removal
Unscrew and extract the two optical connectors (C) as indicated Figure 337. on page 542.
Remove the screw (D) fixing the connectors support as indicated in Figure 337. on page 542.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
541 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
Rotate the connectors support (E) and pull it sidely to be removed as indicated Figure 337. on page
542.
C
E
Figure 337. Optical connectors support removal
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
542 / 554

Remove the two screws (F) from the side coverplate as indicated in Figure 338. on page 543.
Extract from the top the contact spring (G) as indicated in Figure 338. on page 543 (refer to paragraph 8.2.4 on page 550 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
Extract the fibers from the cavity (H) as indicated in Figure 338. on page 543.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 338. Side coverplate and contact spring removal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
543 / 554
Disconnect the two flat cables (M) as indicated in Figure 339. on page 544.
Unscrew (L) connectors with the aid of a wrench as indicated Figure 339. on page 544.
Remove the fibers (N) from supports pulling them out Figure 339. on page 544.
Remove the two screws (O) on the other side of the board that fixes the dissipator to the Printed Circuit Board (PCB) as indicated in Figure 340. on page 545.
The dissipator can now be removed (refer to Figure 341. on page 546).
N
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N
Figure 339. Internal connectors removal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
544 / 554


Figure 340. Dissipator removal
Remove the screws (P) from dissipator as indicated in Figure 341. on page 546.
Now the two modules on the other side of the dissipator are free to be removed (refer to Figure 343.
on page 547);
Pay attention during modules removal because of white conductive paste (refer to paragraph
8.2.4 on page 550 for info about hazardous parts dismantling).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Remove the plastic part (X) in Figure 342. on page 546 by unscrewing the screw present on the rear
side of the dissipator.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
545 / 554
P
P

P
P
Figure 341. Modules removal from dissipator
Remove the screws (Q) and (R) that fix the daugther board and pull it out from the mother board (refer
to Figure 342. on page 546).
MOTHER BOARD
DAUGHTER BOARD
Q
Q
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 342. Daughter boad removal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
546 / 554
Cutaway golded connector (S) from daughter board (refer to Figure 343. on page 547)

Figure 343. Gold connector removal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Remove all internal cables as indicated in Figure 344. on page 548. To remove cables it is enough
to pull them out from their support.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
547 / 554

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Figure 344. Internal cables removal
Remove screws (T) that fix the metal support to the mother board as indicated in Figure 345. on page
549.
Remove the metal support.
Cutaway the golded connector (U) from mother board.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
548 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Metal support
Figure 345. Connector metal support removal
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
549 / 554
8.2.4 Hazardous materials and components
Note: The system cabling is designed for reduced halogen content. All the traffic cabling is fully PVC free.
Table 126. List of hazardous materials and components present in the equipment
Materials/substances
Presence
in the
equipment
Batteries External
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
NO
Batteries Internal
(Mercury/NiCad/Lithium/Other)
NO
Mercury
NO
Cadmium
NO
Where
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Capacitors with PCBs

Capacitors with substances of concern +
height > 25 mm, diameter > 25 mm or proportionately similar volume
NO
Gas discharge lamps
NO
Mercury containing Backlighting lamps
NO
Plastic containing brominated flame retardants other than in Printed Circuit Assemblies
NO
Liquid Crystal Displays with a surface

greater than 100 cm2
NO
Asbestos
NO
Refractory ceramic fibres
NO
Thermal conductive paste
YES
Radioactive substances
NO
Beryllium Oxide
NO
ED
In all units where dissipators are present a

withe thermal conductive paste is used in
between mechanical parts.
In Figure 342. on page 546 an example is
shown.
Note: protective plastic gloves must be
used in order to avoid contact between
hands and thermal conductive paste.
Pay attention to avoid contact of thermal
conductive paste with eyes.
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
550 / 554

Table 126. on page 550 lists the presence or not of hazardous substance/components.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Materials/substances
Presence
in the
equipment
Where
Other forms of Beryllium
YES
Refer to Figure 334. on page 539 and

Figure 338. on page 543 point G.
Note: Copperberyllium contact spring
must be separated from other material and
must be fused in a specific regulated environment.
Pressure volume
NO
Liquids Volume
NO
Gasses Volume
NO
Hidden mechanical springs or other

equivalent parts
NO
Ozone depleting substances, according to

those categories that are already banned
in the Montreal protocol
NO
Chloroparaffins with chain length 1013 C

atoms, chlorination greater than 50% contained in mechanical plastic parts heavier
than 25g,
NO
Lead contained in mechanical parts heavier than 25g,
NO
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) or polychlorinated terphenyls (PCT),
NO
Polybrominated biphenyls and their

ethers (CAS no. 32534819, CAS no.
32536520, CAS no 1163195, CAS
no. 13654096) contained in mechanical
parts heavier than 25g, in concentrations
exceeding the natural background levels.
NO
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
551 / 554
8.3 Eco declaration
Weight and Dimensional Characteristics

Refer to paragraph 5.6 on page 487.
EXTENSION OF SYSTEM LIFETIME

The product is designed to ensure an outstanding quality of service through very high reliability figures.
The architecture facilitates all kinds of future evolutions:
Onsite configuration changes as e.g.:
Extension of the add/drop capacity without service interruption
Selfadjustment of optical amplifiers in case of change in the traffic volume
Implementation of new features and functionalities by remote Software download
Extendibility can be achieved by increasing the add/drop capacity without traffic impact and/or by increasing the bit rate per optical channel
Upgradibility is ensured by a versatile multiplexing architecture that allows to upgrade the system
inservice from 1 channel to the 32 channels, i.e. the full system capacity.
The terms and conditions of warranty, service availability and spare parts availability are individually
agreed between Alcatel and the Customer and are part of the relevant contractual commitments.
POWER CONSUMPTION
Refer to paragraph 5.5.1 on page 485.
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSION

Regarding compliance with radio frequency emission requirements refer to paragraph 5.7.1 on page 489
and 5.7.2 on page 489.
ACOUSTICAL NOISE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to paragraph 5.7.5 on page 490
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
552 / 554

1696 Metro Span is a Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM) system.
MATERIALS

Refer to Table 126. on page 550 for details.

DISASSEMBLY
Refer to paragraph 8.2 on page 532.
BATTERIES
The product requires no backup batteries.
PACKAGING
The packaging of this Alcatel equiment complies with the directive 94/62/EEC concerning packaging and
packaging waste. Depending on the means of transportatio,n the racks are packed in a cardboard or
wooden box, which can easily be recycled after use. Environmentally harmful materials are not used for
packaging. The packaging materials are marked according to ISO 11 469. If required by the Customer and
agreed by both parties, Alcatel can take care of the proper disposal of all packaging materials.
For details refer to Installation Handbook.
TAKE BACK INFORMATION
On request of customers, Alcatel can take care of the take back of depreciated equipment and of the ecological safe and appropriate disposal under conditions to be agreed.
For that purpose Alcatel cooperates with qualified companies.
DOCUMENTATION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In order to reduce paper consumption for Customer Documentation, Alcatel delivers the Generic Customer Documentation on a CDROM. The CDROM contains interactive HW Descriptions, SW Descriptions,
Functional Descriptions, Maintenance Manuals and User Guides. This allows the operator to put the documentation on a server accessible by all relevant people in the organization without any additional paper
copies.
Additionally more specific documentations as e.g. information about products and solutions, services and
support, training events etc. will be provided by means of Alcatel website accessible by all customers. This
will allow distribution of uptodate information very quickly and without wasting natural resources.
The Customer documentation is made under use of paper (80 g/m2) which is elemental chlorinefree
bleached.
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
553 / 554
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

END OF DOCUMENT
ED
03
8DG 17415 AA AA
554
554 / 554

1696ms22a TH Eng Ed03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1696ms22a TH Eng Ed03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Handbook

8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03

8DG 17415 AAAA Ed.03

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1696MSPAN REL.2.2A TECHNICAL HDBK

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 SAFETY NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 OTHER NORMS AND LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5 GENERAL ON ALCATEL CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2.5.3 Optical amplifiers front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

4.4.4 1696MS_C Master Intershelf Link (ILINK_M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

6.1 Part Number and Change Status identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

8 DISMANTLING & RECYCLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 46. 1696 MS_C Mechanical structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 100. MUX and DMUX functions of a 12 channels Line Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 148. 8channel OADM w/ protection block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Figure 299. OMSP unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Table 6. IEC 950 Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Table 102. MVAC specific alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1 HANDBOOK STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION CHECK

1.2 Handbook applicability

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3AL 86601 AAAA

3AL 87001 AAAA

See NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS in para.5.4.1

ANV Part No.